research journal of social and life science volume-14-1

Research Journal of Social andLife Sciences

Half Yearly, Bilingual (English Edition)A National Registered Reviewed/ Refereed

Research JournalIndexed & Listed at: Ulrich's Periodicals Directory ©, ProQuest,

U.S.A. Title Id : 715205

Volume- XIV-I English Edition Year- 07 June-2013

Journal of Centre for Research StudiesRewa (M.P.) India

Registered under M.P. Society Registration Act, 1973, Reg.No. 1802Year, 1997

www.researchjournal.in

Centre fo

r Res

earch

Stud

ies

, Bichhiya, Rewa-486001 (M.P.) India Reg.No.1802

Chief EditorProf. Braj Gopal

Honoured wi th Prestigious Bhartendu Harishchand Award

Honorary EditorDr. S. Akhilesh

Honored with Prest igious Pt. G.B. Pant Award Govt. of India 1997, 1998,

2000, 2004 & 2008 and Bhartendu Harishchand Award in 2006

Dr. Sandhya ShuklaProfessor and Head

Depar tment of Poli tical Science

Govt. T. R. S. College, Rewa (M.P.)

EditorDr. Gayatri Shukla

Joint DirectorCentre for Research Studies

RNI NO. MP BIL 01034/12/1/2005-TC ISSN 0973-3914

© Centre for Research StudiesSingle Copy Rs. 500

Membership fee-Term For Individual For Institutional

Five years Rs. 1200 Rs. 2000Life Member (15 years) Rs. 3000 Rs. 5000

Opinions expressed in this journal do not reflect the policies orviews of this organisation, but of the individual contributors.

The authors are solely responsible for the details and statements in theirResearch papers.The Judicial Jurisdiction will be Rewa (M.P.)

GAYATRI PUBLICATIONS41/42, Raghuwans Sadan, Shantikunj

Bichhiya, Rewa 486 001 (M.P.) Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437E-mail [email protected],[email protected],

[email protected]

Subject Experts/ Advisory Board01. Dr. O.P. Parmeswaran, Chandigarh 02. Dr. Rajesh Mishra, Lucknow03. Dr. A. P. Onkarappa, Karnataka 04. Dr. Gautam Gyanendra, Bhopal05. Dr. Archana Ambhore, Akola 06. Dr. Arvind Joshi, Varanasi07. Dr. R. C. Gupta, Bina 08. Dr. Amita, Saudi Arabiya09. Dr. A.P. Mishra, Rewa 10. Dr. A.K. Shrivastava, Rewa11. Dr. N.P. Pathak, Rewa 12. Dr. L. S. Gajpal, Raipur13. Dr. V. L. Bhangdia, Amravati 14. Dr. G.K. Sharma, Ujjain15. Dr. N.P. Tripathi, Rewa 16. Dr. R. S. Topandasani, Junagadh17. Dr. B.P. Badola, Dharamshala 18. Dr. Minaxi Patel, Rajkot19. Dr. Bal Gopal Singh, Banshatli 20. Dr. Suneeta Dwivedi, Gwalior21. Dr. Prahlad Mishra, Jabalpur 22. Dr. N. Sundaram, Vellore23. Dr. B.C.M. Patnaik, Odisha 24. Dr. Umesh Shukla, Agra25. Dr. Narendrasingh, Ahmedabad 26. Dr. Geeta Nair, Mumbai

Mode of payment-• The DD be drawn in favor of GAYATRI PUBLICATIONS, REWA payable at

SBI Rewa City Branch (IFS Code : SBIN 0004667).• The amount may be deposited in the account number 30016445112 of GAYATRI

PUBLICATIONS, SBI Rewa City Branch (IFS Code : SBIN 0004667). In thiscase please add Rs. 25 as bank charge. Please inform on Mobile (9425186437)after depositing money.

• If any member wants each vol. by reg. post please deposit extra Rs. 100 for oneyear, Rs. 500 for five years and Rs. 1500 for 15 years.

India is one of the developing nations of the modern world. It hasbecome an independent country, a republic, more than a half centuryago. During this period the country has been engaged in efforts to attaindevelopment and growth in various areas such as building infrastructure,production of food grains, science and technology and spread of education.The life expectancy has increased and many diseases have been controlled.However, there are many areas in which Indian society is experiencing avariety of problems. Some of these problems have their roots in our colonialpast while others are related to demographic changes, socio-politicalconditions and cultural processes. The Indian society consists of peoplefrom different religious, linguistic and ethnic backgrounds. Since longthere has been cultural give and take between the people from India andother countries. Since 1947 when India gained Political Independencethe country has been engaged in the gigantic task of nation building.Efforts have been made to put nation on the path of socio-economicdevelopment. The transformation of nation as a self sufficient and cohesivepolitical entity has proved to be a difficult challenge. The colonial past,socio-economic disparities in the society and raised aspirations haveculminated in a complex situation.

Social evils in Indian society have become a serious concern in thepresent day world. It is gradually affecting the roots of our culture and isblocking its rapid growth on the global chart. Unemployment, illiteracy,corruption, urbanization, gender discrimination, domestic violence,poverty, population explosion, and lust for money are all social evilsprevailing in the country. Moreover, decline of values and decline ofcommunity has further shaken the society. There are many factors andcauses that have contributed in the creating as well as inflating theseevils. In the recent years many pathological social conditions have arisedue to which the social problems in India have become even worse. Someof the common causes of social evils are differentiation of interest, growthof civilization, challenges in social behavior and social systems, lack ofrequired changes in religious beliefs, malfunctioning of economic system,defective execution of political systems, and an ever-increasing lust formoney. Further to that, the biggest cause contributing to the increasingsocial evils in Indian society is a developed insight or an improved vision.

EDITORIAL

Prof. Braj GopalChief Editor

This caters to development of human in all fields of life. People today arebecoming modernized leaving behind the facts and essence of society,culture, and religion. This approach towards life is becoming practicaland scientific. Every phase of life is now judged by a developed insight tohave a scientific and rational solution to all issues of life. India is a secularrepublic and the constitution guarantees equal rights to all its citizenswithout any discrimination. The Indian constitution provides many legalsafeguards to the minority community and special provisions are madefor their social and economic growth. Despite these, minorities in Indiaface all types of inequity in the public sphere. Even the violence andhuman right violations of the minority community in India is a commonphenomenon. In this context, the note of UN Special Report on Freedomand Religious Belief Ms. Asma Jahangir, is pertinent when she praisedIndia's secularism, human right activism, and strong legal protection forreligious minorities at the national level but also made the point that dueto the federal structure of Indian state the implementation of law variesfrom states to states. She said, "Organized groups claiming roots inreligious ideologies have unleashed an all-pervasive fear of mob violencein many parts of the country". Asma Jahangir, was making specialreference to the violence in Orissa, where Hindu fundamentalists attackedChristian and tribal communities. The violence in Khandamal region ofOrissa continued for a long period, despite massive protest by activistsand secular organizations. Some of the grave issues related to the minoritycommunity are highlighted in the report. Considering the hugegeographic size and vast population it is not possible to keep track ofevery issue. Still the figures and facts mentioned in the report are evidenceenough to understand the present situation of the minority communityin India. Things have changed from last decades, but a long road is aheadleaders behaviour needs attention.

Date:

01. Female Foeticide : A Major Social Problem and Cause of 09Decline of Sex Ratio in IndiaAkhilesh Shukla

02. Feminism: A Comparative Perspective 20Bandana Gaur

03. Women Empowerment: A Myth or a Reality 27Arvind Khanna, Parveen Kaur Khanna

04. Adolescents Problems: A Comparative Perspective 31Priyanka Tiwari

05. Psychoticism, Reinforcement and Vigilance 36Jago Choudhary

06. Sexual Harassment of Women at the Work Place in India- 40An Analytical StudyManisha Saini, Pinki Sagar

07. Empowerment of Women in Indian Society 45Akhilesh Shukla

08. Women Empowerment: The Educational and Social Reform 53Agenda of The All India Women's Conference (1927-1947)Amneet Gill

09. Women Empowerment and Panchayati Raj Institutions in 58Haryana: A Sociological StudySunita, Desraj Sabharwal

10. Problems of Dowry among Muslim Families with Special 69Reference to Rewa CityAkhilesh Shukla, Tajammul Hussain Mir

11. Impact of RTI in Administrative Culture in India 74(With special reference to Punjab state)Rama

12. Environmental Degradation Causes, Consequences and 78Preventive MeasuresB. P. Singh, Gulzar Qadir Ganaie

13. Solid Waste Management Plan Ujjain 82Amita Singhal, Dinesh Singhal

Contents

14. Eco-Tourism Status of Bandhavgarh National Park- 85A Case StudyNeerja Khare, Shikha Dwivedi

15. Adjustment Patterns of Scheduled Caste and Scheduled 91Tribe College StudentsJago Choudhary

16. The Price Rise and Senior Citizens' Perception: A Study of 95Aurangabad CityI. M. Farooqui

17. Ethics: Globalization and International Marketing Problems 100V. L. Bhangdia

18. Role of Information Technology in Taxation 112Vinod Triapathi

19. Dynamics of Passion: A Study of Shakespeare’s Othello 116P.K.Jain

20. Ritualistic Drama: A Progressive Indian Tradition 120Apara Tiwari

21. Life in Death in The Novels of Kurt Vonnegut 123Suman Chawla

22. V. S. Naipaul India: The Homeland 135P. K. Sharma

23. Role of Ideology in Translation Practice 139Alka Rani Agrawal

24. Literacy in India 143Archana Singhal

25. Regional Imbalances and Disparities in India: Natural 148Endowments or Man MadeMeenakshi Chahal

26. Teachers' Awareness and Attitude towards Information and 155Communication TechnologiesMohsin Uddin

27. A Study of Correlation among Emotional Behaviour, 160Communication Skill and Adjustment of Students on theBase of Different School AreasRakesh Katara, Dhruva Kumar Mittal

28. Linking Higher Education with Regional Needs: The Dialogue of 167Universities with SocietyRitu Bakshi

29. The Comprehensive Study on the Placement Scenario of the 179Management Education Institute: A Case study in GuwahatiCity of AssamSafiqur Rahman, Binita Devi,Tarana Rafique, Rani Talukdar

30. Role of Education in Preventing Skin Cancer 186Megha Das, Ratnesh Das, Kamlesh Das

31. Status of Public Libraries in Karnal District 193Sandhya Rani

32. Encouragement of Physical Education and Physical Fitness in 198Modern SocietyHasan Mehdi, Lilly Pushpam Isaac

33. The Development of Physical Fitness Through Yoga Training 203Parixitsinh D . Mandora

34. Historical Study of Development of the Game of Volleyball 208in IndoreVijay Francis Peter

35. Psychological Well-being A Study of P.T.C. and 211B. Ed. College StudentsJignesh P. Panchal

36. Antibacterial activities of Calotropis procera Linn 215Abhilasha ShrivastavaSuchita Singh, Sanchita Singh

37. Concept of Sustainable Development for Conservation 219of EnvironmentMadhu Sthapak

38. Transferrin Polymophism in Channa Punctatus 225Umesh Shukla

39. Pond Fish Culture in Rural areas of Bhopal District 227Chourey Pratibha, Durga Meena,Geeta Saxcena, Alok Verma

40. Assessment of the Indian species of Digenetic Trematodes 230of Plagiorchiidae Family in Vindhyan Region of

Madhya PradeshPushpa Singh, Pushpendra Singh

41. Mathematical Modelling: Applications 233Rupa Salhotra

42. Science and Society 235S.K. Srivsatava, Reena Singh

43. Impact of Age in Adoption of Diversified Farming Technology in 240the Development of Rural CommunityJitendra Singh “Bhadauria”

44. Effectiveness of Nutrition Education and Osteoporosis 247Risk factors in Premenopausal WomenDaisy Abraham, Nanda Gurwara

45. Status and Scope of Some Medicinal Plants in Madhya Pradesh 253Vishnu Kant Tiwari, Arpita Awasthi

46. Phytogeography Observations of Dehradun District 257Chhaya Singh, Satish Garkoti, H. C. Pande

It is estimated that more than 10 million female foetuses have beenillegally aborted in India. Researchers for the Lancet journal based in Canadaand India stated that 500,000 girls were being lost annually through sex-selectiveabortions. Pre-natal sex-determination was banned in India in 1994, underthe Pre-conception and Prenatal Diagnostic Techniques (Prohibition ofSex Selection) Act. The act aims to prevent sex-selective abortion, which,according to the Indian Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, has its roots inIndia’s long history of strong patriarchal influence in all spheres of life. It ismost prominent in Gujarat and the North Indian states, which according to

Female Foeticide : A Major Social Problem andCause of Decline of Sex Ratio in India

* Akhilesh Shukla

===========================* Department of Sociology, Govt. T. R. S. College, Rewa (M.P.)

==========================================================Abstract-Female foeticide is the act of aborting a foetus because it isfemale. This is a major social problem in India and has culturalconnections with the dowry system that is ingrained in Indian culture,despite the fact that it has been prohibited by law since 1961. In India astrong preference for sons over daughters exists, unlike in Westerncultures. People realise smaller family sizes with relatively greater numberof sons through the use of medical technologies. Pregnancies are plannedby resorting to 'differential contraception' - contraception is used basedon the number of surviving sons irrespective of family size. Followingconception, foetal sex is determined by prenatal diagnostic techniquesafter which female foetuses are aborted. Foetal sex determination andsex-selective abortion by medical professionals has grown into a 1,000crore industry (US$244 million). Social discrimination against womenand a preference for sons have been promoted. Since 1991, 80% ofdistricts in India have recorded an increasingly masculine sex ratio withthe state of Punjab having the most masculine sex ratio. According to thedecennial Indian census, the sex ratio in the 0-6 age group in India wentfrom 104.0 males per 100 females in 1981, to 105.8 in 1991, to 107.8 in2001, to 109.4 in 2011. The ratio is significantly higher in certain statessuch as Punjab and Haryana (126.1 and 122.0, as of 2001).Key Words- Female foeticide, foetus ,Differential contraception.==========================================================

Research Journal of Social and Life SciencesISSN 0973-3914, Vol.-XIV- I, Year-07, June-2013

Research Journal of Social and Li fe Sciences, ISSN 0973-3914, Vol .-XIV- I, Year-07, June-201310

census data have an alarmingly low ratio of female children. Certain castesregularly practiced female infanticide and later female foeticide. The casteswith a much lower proportion of female children to male children includedlewa patidars and the rajputs in Gujarat; jats, rajputs, khutris and royal brahminsin undivided Punjab, rajputs and gujars in the Uttar Pradesh. This processbegan in the early 1990s when ultrasound techniques gained widespread usein India. There was a tendency for families to continuously produce childrenuntil a male child was born. This was primarily due to the large sexist culturethat exists in India against women. This is reflected by literacy rates amongwomen as well as economic participation, which are both particularly low instates where female foeticide is prominent and an unequal population ratioexists alongside. The government initially supported the practice tocontrolpopulation growth. The Preconception and Prenatal Diagnostic Techniques(PCPNDT) Act was passed in 1994, making sex-selective abortion illegal. Itwas then modified in 2003 holding medical professionals legally responsible.However, the PCPNDT Act has been poorly enforced by authorities.Social Effects- Female foeticide has led to an increase in human trafficking.In 2011, 15,000 Indian women were bought and sold as brides in areaswhere foeticide has led to a lack of women. Government response to the problemhas been known to not have stopped female foeticide from occurring. Althoughseveral acts have been passed to combat the situation, many of them are notenforced strongly enough. This and the existence of several loopholes in thesystem means the practice of sex-selective abortion continues. An example ofone of these loopholes would be on the pretext of checking for genetic disordersin the fetus, who can stop a doctor from examining the sex of the unborn childand informing the parents in secret. In 2001, the Supreme Court in India gaveorders to five multi-national companies — Philips, Symonds, Toshiba, Larsenand Toubro and Wipro — to give them the names and addresses of all theclinics and persons in India to whom they have sold ultrasound machines in thelast five years to enable the state government to find out if these machineswere registered. Unfortunately, not much happened after this directive, althoughthe companies were reported to have supplied all the information that wasrequired. The Statesman, a leading newspaper reported on February 3, 2002that not a single illegal ultrasound machine has been impounded in Delhi. Banningpre-conception sex-determination tests calls for new legislation. But the factis that even the present PNDT Act is full of loopholes and cannot be effectivelyimplemented. Law certainly empowers the government to act but thefundamental question is whether the government or Supreme Court can aloneusher in social transformation in Indian society.India’s prime ministeracknowledges gendercide as a national shame, however, the police andjudiciaries do not implement the law because they believe in the same thing.Authorities often let the unlawful parents and doctors off with light punishment.

Research Journal of Social and Li fe Sciences, ISSN 0973-3914, Vol .-XIV- I, Year-07, June-2013 11

Often, when the mothers disobey the husband’s family decision to abort thefemale foetus and report it to the authorities, the suits are ignored or given alight sentence: The mother is targeted for bearing girls and disobeying thefamily’s decision to abort the child. She may even lose her job, be expose toconstant death threats, and be left with unresolved cases. In addition, otherswho give birth to girls are prone to violence. Even if she is able to give birth tothe baby girls, the family is likely to not report the births and even murderthem.[12] Increasing awareness of the problem has led to multiple campaignsby celebrities and journalists to combat sex-selective abortions.AamirKhan devoted the first episode “Daughters Are Precious” of hisshow Satyamev Jayate to raise awareness of this widespread practice, focusingprimarily on Western Rajastan, which is known to be one of the areas wherethis practice is common. Its sex ratio dropped to 883 girls per 1,000 boys in2011 from 901 girls to 1000 boys in 2001. Rapid response was shown by localgovernment in Rajastan after the airing of this show, showing the affect ofmedia and nationwide awareness on the issue. A vow was made by officials toset up fast-track courts to punish those who practice sex-based abortion. Theycancelled the licences of six sonography centres and issued notices to over 20others. The first season of Satyamev Jayate was premiered from 6 May 2012on various channels within Star Network along withDoordarshan’s DDNational.[1] It marked the television debut of Indian Bollywood actor andfilmmaker Aamir Khan. His works are remarkable and are given below in thetable.While Hindi is the primary language of the show, it is also dubbed andsimulcast in several other Indian languages such as Bengali, Malayalam,Marathi, Tamil and Telugu.

Episode Title Social Evils Song Original Air date

TVR

1 Daughters are precious

Female foeticide in India "O Ri Chiraiya" 6 May 2012 3.02

2 Break the Silence

Child sexual abuse "Haule Haule" 13 May 2012 2.63

3 Marriage or Marketplace

Dowry system in India "Rupaiya" 20 May 2012 2.95

4 Every Life is Precious

Medical malpractice "Naav" 27 May 2012 3.20

5 Intolerance to Love

Love marriages and Honor killings in India

"Ghar Yaad Aata Hai Mujhe"

3 June 2012 2.86

6 Persons with disabilities

Physical Disabilities "Chanda Pe Dance"

10 June 2012 2.48

7 Danger at home Domestic Violence "Sakhi" 17 June 2012 2.55 8 Poison on our

Plate?

Pesticide poisoning and Organic farming

"Maati Bole" 24 June 2012 1.94

9 Think before you Drink

Alcohol abuse "Ae Zindagi" 1 July 2012 2.40

10 Dignity for All Casteism and Untouchability "Kabir Vani" 8 July 2012 2.10 11 Sunset Years,

Sunshine Life

Old age "Bahut Yaad Aate Ho"

15 July 2012 2.10

12 Every Drop Counts

Water crisis and Rainwater harvesting

"Jal na Jaaye Jal" 22 July 2012 2.20

13 Idea of India We The People "Nikal Pado" 29 July 2012 TBA This has been done on the smaller scale. Cultural intervention has been


addressed through theatre. Plays such as ‘Pacha Mannu’, which is aboutfemale infanticide/foeticide, has been produced by a women’s theatre group inTamil Nadu. This play was showing mostly in communities that practice femaleinfanticide/foeticide and has led to a redefinition of a methodology ofconsciousness raising, opening up varied ways of understanding and subvertingcultural expressions. In a recent landmark judgement the Bombay High Courtupheld an amendment to the PCPNDT Act banning sex-selection treatment.The Court pronounced that “pre natal sex determination would be as good asfemale foeticide. Pre-conception sex determination violated a woman’s rightto live and was against the Constitution.” The Beti Bachao, or Savegirls campaign, has been underway in many Indian communities since the early2000s. The campaign uses the media to raise awareness of the gender disparitiescreating, and resulting from, sex-selective abortion. Beti Bachao activities includerallies, posters, short videos and television commercials, some of which aresponsored by state and local governments and other organisations. Manycelebrities in India have publicly supported the Beti Bachao campaign. Savegirls, save the girl child, is a campaign in India to end the gender-selectiveabortion of female fetuses, which has skewed the population towards asignificant under-representation of girls in some Indian states. The “BetiBachao” campaign is supported by human rights groups, non-governmentalorganizations, and state and local government in India. Alka Gupta reporter ofUNICEF has published in her report that Eligible Jat boys from Haryanatravel 3,000 km across the country to find themselves a bride. With increasinglyfewer girls in Haryana, they are seeking brides from as far away as Kerala asthe only way to change their single status. The girls have not vanished overnight.Decades of sex determination tests and female foeticide that has acquiredgenocide proportions are finally catching up with states in India. This is onlythe tip of the demographic and social problems confronting India in the comingyears. Skewed sex ratios have moved beyond the states of Punjab, Haryana,Delhi, Gujarat and Himachal Pradesh. With news of increasing number offemale foetuses being aborted from Orissa to Bangalore there is ample evidenceto suggest that the next census will reveal a further fall in child sex ratiosthroughout the country.

The decline in child sex ratio in India is evident by comparing the censusfigures. In 1991, the figure was 947 girls to 1000 boys. Ten years later it hadfallen to 927 girls for 1000 boys.Since 1991, 80% of districts in India haverecorded a declining sex ratio with the state of Punjab being the worst. Stateslike Maharashtra, Gujarat, Punjab, Himachal Pradesh and Haryana haverecorded a more than 50 point decline in the child sex ratio in this period.Despite these horrific numbers, foetal sex determination and sex selectiveabortion by unethical medical professionals has today grown into a Rs. 1,000crore industry (US$ 244 million). Social discrimination against women, already


entrenched in Indian society, has been spurred on by technological developmentsthat today allow mobile sex selection clinics to drive into almost any village orneighbourhood unchecked.The PCPNDT Act 1994 (Preconception and PrenatalDiagnostic Techniques Act) was modified in 2003 to target the medicalprofession - the ‘supply side’ of the practice of sex selection. However nonimplementation of the Act has been the biggest failing of the campaign againstsex selection According to the latest data available till May 2006, as many as22 out of 35 states in India had not reported a single case of violation of the actsince it came into force. Delhi reported the largest number of violations – 76out of which 69 were cases of non registration of birth! Punjab had 67 casesand Gujarat 57 cases. But the battle rages on. In a recent landmark judgmentthe Mumbai High Court upheld an amendment to the PCPNDT Act banningsex selection treatment. The Court pronounced that pre natal sex determinationwould be as good as female foeticide. Pre-conception sex determination violateda woman’s right to live and was against the Constitution, it said.While the boysfrom Haryana may have found a temporary solution to the problem of missingbrides, experts warn that the demographic crisis will lead to increasing sexualviolence and abuse against women and female children, trafficking, increasingnumber of child marriages, increasing maternal deaths due to abortions andearly marriages and increase in practices like polyandry.There have been onlytwo convictions — a fine of 300 rupees ($7) and another fine of 4,000 rupees($98) — from over 400 cases lodged under the Pre-conception and Pre-natalDiagnostic Techniques Act. Bringing about changes in the demand for sexdetermination is a long process and has to be tackled through women’s educationand empowerment including the right to property and land rights. States in theNorth East and in Kerala where women have these rights show a comparativelybetter sex ratio.The battle against sex selection has proved to be long drawnout. But some signs are visible that demonstrate that the fight can be won.Lakhanpal, a small village in Punjab has turned the tide of male births for thefirst time. In a state that has the lowest sex ratio in the country, the villageboasts of 1,400 girls for every 1000 boys. Arvind Kumar, the collector ofHyderabad district has illustrated the power of the Act. Hyderabad had thelowest child sex ratio (0-6 years) in Andhra Pradesh. After taking over in 2004he tracked down all 389 diagnostic clinics in the city and took action. 361ultrasound scan centres were issued notices for non compliance with the PNDTAct. Licenses of 91 centres were cancelled. 83 machines were seized and 71released after an undertaking and fine. Three suppliers were prosecuted forsupplying machines to clinics with no registration licenses.

The Women’s UN Report Program & Network (WUNRN) is a non-governmental organization to implement the conclusions and recommendationsof a United Nations Study on Freedom of Religion of Belief and the Status ofWomen From the Viewpoint of Religion and Traditions (E/CN.4/2002/73/


Add.2). This study is a major, universal, comprehensive U.N. approach tointolerance and discrimination against women based on religion and traditions.To strengthen the nexus between women’s rights and freedom of religion orbelief, it is important to build on the Juridical and Factual Aspects of this studyby research, plans of action and practical projects. WUNRN, together withThe Tandem Project, is committed to this objective through support for thedignity and fundamental rights of women everywhere, and by the promotion oftolerance and the end of discrimination against women based on religion andtraditions. The WUNRN reports of 23 May 2011 says that India’s 2011 censusshows a serious decline in the number of girls under the age of seven - activistsfear eight million female foetuses may have been aborted in the past decade.The BBC’s Geeta Pandey in Delhi explores what has led to this crisis. Kulwanthas three daughters aged 24, 23 and 20 and a son who is 16. In the yearsbetween the birth of her third daughter and her son, Kulwant became pregnantthree times. My mother-in-law said if I had a daughter, my husband wouldleave me. Thankfully, I had a son.” Each time, she says, she was forced toabort the foetus by her family after ultrasound tests confirmed that they weregirls.”My mother-in-law taunted me for giving birth to girls. She said her sonwould divorce me if I didn’t bear a son.” Kulwant still has vivid memories ofthe first abortion. “The baby was nearly five months old. She was beautiful. Imiss her, and the others we killed,” she says, breaking down, wiping away hertears.Until her son was born, Kulwant’s daily life consisted of beatings andabuse from her husband, mother-in-law and brother-in-law. Once, she says,they even attempted to set her on fire.”They were angry. They didn’t wantgirls in the family. They wanted boys so they could get fat dowries,” shesays. India outlawed dowries in 1961, but the practice remains rampant andthe value of dowries is constantly growing, affecting rich and poor alike.Kulwant’s husband died three years after the birth of their son. “It was thecurse of the daughters we killed. That’s why he died so young,” she says.

How girls are valued varies widely across India. Over the years, moststates in the south and north-east have been kind to their girls, and sex ratiosare above the national average.In the matrilineal societies of Kerala andKarnataka in the south and Meghalaya in the north-east, women have enjoyedhigh status and commanded respect. But the latest census figures show thegood news even in these areas could be turning bad. A minor decline in thenumber of girls has begun in the three states which, campaigners worry, mightbe indicative of a trend.What is seen as most distressing is the steep decline inthe number of girls under seven in the southern state of Andhra Pradesh andin Sikkim, Nagaland, Manipur and Tripura in the north-east. Even though thesestates have registered numbers much higher than the national average, thedecline is too substantial to ignore.But all is not lost. Some states, suchas Punjab, Haryana and Himachal Pradesh - which saw the gap between


numbers of boys and girls widen in 2001 - have shown an improvement. Thatis cause for some cheer, campaigners say. Her neighbour Rekha is mother ofa chubby three-year-old girl.Last September, when she became pregnant again,her mother-in-law forced her to undergo an abortion after an ultrasound showedthat she was pregnant with twin girls.”I said there’s no difference betweengirls and boys. But here they think differently. There’s no happiness when agirl is born. They say the son will carry forward our lineage, but the daughterwill get married and go off to another family.” Kulwant and Rekha live inSagarpur, a lower middle-class area in south-west Delhi.Here, narrow mindslive in homes separated by narrow lanes. The women’s story is common andrepeated in millions of homes across India, and it has been getting worse. In1961, for every 1,000 boys under the age of seven, there were 976 girls. Today,the figure has dropped to a dismal 914 girls. Although the number of womenoverall is improving (due to factors such as life expectancy), India’s ratio ofyoung girls to boys is one of the worst in the world after China. Many factorscome into play to explain this: infanticide, abuse and neglect of girl children.But campaigners say the decline is largely due to the increased availability ofantenatal sex screening, and they talk of a genocide.

The government has been forced to admit that its strategy has failed toput an end to female foeticide.

In 1994, the Pre-Natal Determination Test (PNDT) Act outlawed sex-selective abortion. In 2004, it was amended to include gender selection even atthe pre-conception stage.Abortion is generally legal up to 12 weeks’ gestation.Sex can be determined by a scan from about 14 weeks.”What is needed is astrict implementation of the law,” says Varsha Joshi, director of censusoperations for Delhi. “I find there’s absolutely no will on the part of thegovernment to stop this.”Today, there are 40,000 registered ultrasound clinicsin the country, and many more exist without any record. Ms Joshi, a formerdistrict commissioner of south-west Delhi, says there are dozens of ultrasound


clinics in the area. It has the worst child sex ratio in the capital - 836 girls underseven for every 1,000 boys.Delhi’s overall ratio is not much better at 866 girlsunder seven for every 1,000 boys.”It’s really sad. We are the capital of thecountry and we have such a poor ratio,” Ms Joshi says.The south-west districtshares its boundary with Punjab and Haryana, the two Indian states with theworst sex ratios.Since the last census, Punjab and Haryana have shown aslight improvement. But Delhi has registered a decline.”Something’s reallywrong here and something has to be done to put things right,” Ms Joshi says.Almost all the ultrasound clinics in the area have the mandatory board outside,proclaiming that they do not carry out illegal sex-determination tests.But thewomen in Sagarpur say most people here know where to go when they needan ultrasound or an abortion.They say anyone who wants to get a foetalultrasound done, gets it done. In the five-star clinics of south Delhi it costs10,000-plus rupees ($222; £135), In the remote peripheral areas of Delhi’sborder, it costs a few hundred rupees.Similarly, the costs vary for those wantingan illegal abortion.Delhi is not alone in its anti-girl bias. Sex ratios have declinedin 17 states in the past decade, with the biggest falls registered inJammu andKashmir.Ms Joshi says most offenders are members of the growing middle-class and affluent Indians - they are aware that the technology exists and havethe means to pay to find out the sex of their baby and abort if they choose.”Wehave to take effective steps to control the promotion of sex determination bythe medical community. And file cases against doctors who do it,” Mr Georgesays.”Otherwise by 2021, we are frightened to think what it will be like.”

Female foeticede is now more widespread in the country than ever before.


The practice was restricted to few states a few years ago has now spread allover the country. Girls and women not only face inequity and inequality, theyare even denied the right to born if their families do not wish so. In fact manyfamilies do not wish their women folk to deliver baby daughters. The DecliningSex Ratio: one of the sensitive indicators of boy preference is the sex ratio.The record shows that the sex ratio or the number of females for each thousandmales has gone down consistently over the past decades. In this study I tookthe interview of 100 people of Rewa city and found that the following factorsare resoponsible for female foeticide-Female foeticede is now more widespreadin the country than ever before. The practice was restricted to few states afew years ago has now spread all over the country. Girls and women not onlyface inequity and inequality, they are even denied the right to born if theirfamilies do not wish so. In fact many families do not wish their women folk todeliver baby daughters. The Declining Sex Ratio: one of the sensitive indicatorsof boy preference is the sex ratio. The record shows that the sex ratio or thenumber of females for each thousand males has gone down consistently overthe past decades. In this study I took the interview of 100 people of Rewa cityand found that the following factors are resoponsible for female foeticide-1. Social Security- Consequent upon the advances in medical science, thetermination of unwanted children especially female foetuses through abortionhas become common in families to satisfy their preference for sons.2. Evil of Dowry- Some people think, a girl means accumulation of sufficientresources for the dowry the parents have to give away, when the girl getsmarried. Therefore, the parents think that the girl is a financial burden forthem, where as the boy is an asset who fetches a fabulous dowry for theparents.3. Financial Dependence of Females on Husband or In laws- In Indiasocio-economic background has been the villain behind the tragic femalefoeticide. Certain communities want to get rid of female child compelled bythe circumstances of dehumanizing poverty, unemployment, superstition andilliteracy.4. Cultural Factors- the concept of ‘Vanshodharak’ a male child to performlast rites in Hindus and carry forward Measures to Reduce Female Foeticide.

However the national law against prenatal diagnostic technique(regulation and misuse) Act of 1994 is a positive step which enabled the NationalHuman Rights Commission to direct the Medical Council of India to take actionagainst doctors found abusing prenatal diagnostic techniques. There is a needfor sustained campaigning and active monitoring of the act. State Governmentsshould realize the importance and priority of the law and not merely treat itwith their usual complacency. Structures for implementation of the 1994 lawneed to be created at the District level. Volunteers have to be actively mobilizedto monitor registration and functioning of sex determination clinics at different


districts. Cases have to be filed against the violators and social consciousnesshas to be raised against the crime. Members of the society and the religiousleaders have a positive role in creating a morally reformed society.

However the national law against prenatal diagnostic technique(regulation and misuse) Act of 1994 is a positive step which enabled the NationalHuman Rights Commission to direct the Medical Council of India to take actionagainst doctors found abusing prenatal diagnostic techniques. There is a needfor sustained campaigning and active monitoring of the act. State Governmentsshould realize the importance and priority of the law and not merely treat itwith their usual complacency. Structures for implementation of the 1994 lawneed to be created at the District level. Volunteers have to be actively mobilizedto monitor registration and functioning of sex determination clinics at differentdistricts. Cases have to be filed against the violators and social consciousnesshas to be raised against the crime. Members of the society and the religiousleaders have a positive role in creating a morally reformed society.

The long— term task is to foster a culture of goodness and humandignity which inoculates individuals and institutions against the infection of thisdespicable human practice. The role of the Akal Takht in Punjab is worthmentioning. The apex religious organization of the Sikhs has issued directivesto the community not to indulge in the inhuman and immoral practice of femalefoeticide and to take stern action against those who would violate this directioni.e. offenders would be ex-communicated. Almost all communities haveorganizations similar to the Akal Takht, if they made a concerted effort toeducate their flock, and if need be boycott those guilty of this crime. a radicalsocial change could come about.======================References-1. Sabu M. George and Ranbir S., “Female Foeticide in Rural Haryana,” Dahiya

Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 33, No. 32 (Aug. 8-14, 1998), pp. 2191-2198http://www.jstor.org/stable/4407077

2. “UNICEF India”. UNICEF.3. Arnold, Fred, Kishor, Sunita, & Roy, T. K. (2002). “Sex-Selective Abortions in

India”. Population and Development Review 28 (4): 759–785. doi:10.1111/j.1728-4457.2002.00759.x. JSTOR 3092788.

4. http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/south_asia/4592890.stm5. The Pre-conception and Prenatal Diagnostic Techniques (Prohibition of Sex

Selection) Act, 1994: Answers to Frequently Asked Questions. A Handbookfor the Public]

6. Female Foeticide and Infanticide L. S. Vishwanath Economic and PoliticalWeekly, Vol. 36, No. 35 (Sep. 1-7, 2001), pp. 3411-3412 published by Economicand Political Weeklyhttp://www.jstor.org/stable/4411063

7. “orissa gov. India”. Dr. Krushma chandra.8. “In Satyamev Jayate Aamir Khan deals with female foeticide - and how”. India

Today. Retrieved 26 June 2012.


9. Dr. S. Akhilesh, Female Foeticide in India “, Women Empowerment, Centre forResearch Studies, Rewa 2010 Page 118-127

10. Dube L (1983) Misadventures in amniocentesis. Economic and Political Weekly40 (2): 279-80.

11. Kollor T M (1990) Female infanticide: A Psychological analysis. Grass RootsAction, Special issue on Girl child April 3, and pp 3.

12. Kumari R (1995) Rural female adolescence: Indian scenario. Social Change 25(2): 177-88.

13. Mane P N (1991) Socialization of Hindu women in their childhood: An analysisof Literature. The Journal of Family Welfare 52 (1): 81-96.

14. Puri N (1998) The girl child in India. The Journal of Family Welfare 44 (3): 1-8.

izks- cztxksiky 'kqDy41@42] j?kqoa'k lnu] fcfN;k] jhok (e-iz-)& 486001

Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437 E-mail - [email protected] [email protected]

[email protected]

lsUVj QkWj fjlpZ LVMht] jhok }kjk fjlpZ tjuy vkWQ vkV~Zl eSustesUV ,.M lks'ky lkbalsl

ds fo'ks"kkad ds :i esa fuEufyf[kr nks lanHkZ iqLrdksa dk izdk'ku uoEcj] 2013 esa fd;k tk jgk gSA

mDr lanHkZ iqLrdksa esa izdk'ku gsrq vki viuk rF; ijd ,oa rdZ ;qDr 'kks/k i= Hkstdj bl vdknfed dk;Z esa lg;ksx dj ldrs gSaA fgUnh Hkk"kk esa 'kks/k i= ,e-,l- oMZ esa QkUV df̀rnso 010] djsDVj lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k_

vaxzsth Hkk"kk esa VkbEl U;w jkseu QkUV lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k esa HkstsaA

(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)

(ISBN 978-81-87364-60-3)Contemporary Indian Society and Culture

ISSN 0975-4083

Feminism: A Comparative Perspective

* Bandana Gaur

===========================* Associate Professor, Faculty of Social Sciences, Department of Sociology,

Dayalbagh Educational Institute, Dayalbagh, Agra (U.P.)

==========================================================Abstract-As far as India is concerned, despite the progress made by Indianfeminist movement, women living in modern India still face many issuesof discrimination. India's Patriarchal and culture has made the processof gaining land-ownership rights and access to education challenging.In the past two decades, there has also emerged a disturbing trend ofsex-selective abortion. To Indian feminist's these are seen as injusticesworth struggling against.==========================================================


Introduction- Nearly half of the human resource of a country is its womenand a potent resource for nation development and progress. The UNO declare1975-85 as the Women’s decade emphasizing the utilization of this preciousresource and to ensure that the benefits of development are equitably distributedbetween the sexes. At the end of the century, while women may not haveattained the dreamed utopia of equality in all spheres of national life, thesensitivities of society regarding this issue has been shapened (Mittra, 2001:230).Today, the global community has accepted the need to empower women andgive them their due status in economic, social and political development so thatthey can thrive harmoniously and live with equality and justice. It is now widelyaccepted that women have been victim of anti-female prejudice and sexdiscrimination and her condition is deteriorated. These all things contributed tothe rise of women’s Liberation Movement (Feminism). Feminism has nowemerged as a great phenomenon, process, ideology, movement, etc which aimsat providing equal rights for women. There are various ideologies behind it,has a history as well which is dealt here.Objectives-1. To know the concept of feminism.2. To identify the waves of feminism.3. To study the various types of feminism.4. To know how women empowered in various spheres of social, political,educational and political life.


Methodology- The present paper is based on secondary data like book, journal,net, internet etc. The diversity within feminism is now well established. Theplural of feminism reflects both the contemporary diversity of motivation,method, and experience among feminist academics, and feminism’s politicalcommitment to diversity – its validation of a multiplicity of approaches, positions,and strategies (Kemp & squires, 1997:3). Feminism is not easy to define becauseit includes a variety of political perspective and ideas (Andersen, 1983:7).“Feminism” is a term that has acquired a number of different meanings, manyof which indicate key turning points in the history of feminist though (Cud &Andersen, 2005:7).Hole and Levine think that feminism by definition challenges the status quo. Itquestions the political, social and cultural institutions, way of thinking and thevery articulation of those thoughts (Hole & Levine, 1975:225). According toMichele Barrett, feminism seeks to change not simply men or women or bothas they exist at present, but seeks to change the relation between them Barrettadds that although the basics for this will be provided by an autonomous women’sLiberation movement, the strategy must involve political engagement with menrather than a policy of absolute separatism (Bhagwat, 2004:29). Feminism is acollection of movement aimed at defining, establishing and defining equal political,economic and social rights for women. In addition, feminism seeks to establishequal opportunities for women in education and employment. A feminist is a“person which belief and behavior are based on feminism.” Feminist though issometimes characterized as occurring in waves. Feminism as a whole, comein three waves each dealing with different aspects of the same issue.“Feminism” is a self-conscious ideology and systematic ideology beginningappeared first in France in the 1880s, Great Britain in 1890s, and the UnitedStates in 1910. Oxford English Dictionary lists 189 for “Feminism”, and 1895for “feminism”. It was the London Daily News, that coined the term andimporting it from France an omatically branded it as dangerous. “What ourParis Correspondent describes as a “feminist” group in the chamber of Deputies.Waves of FeminismThe first feminist wave: Votes for women- The First wave is often datedto the publication of Mary Wollstone craft’s A Vindication of the Rights women(1792). Under the influence of nineteenth century liberal political philosophy,first wave feminism concerned itself largely with gaining equal political rightand economic opportunities for women. Since at this time, the possession ofrationality was taken to be the appropriate basis for the attribution of rights,liberal feminists argued for women’s equality on the grounds that women havethe same capacity to reason as men. Liberal feminist political action broughtabout many important changes in the situation of women. Not only did it resultin women’s suffrage in the 1920s, liberal feminists also won property rights forwomen, more reproductive freedoms, and greater access to education and the


professional realm (Cuss & Andresen, 2005:7).The Second Feminist Wave: “The Personal Is Political”- The termsecond-wave feminism refers monthly to the radical feminism of the women’sliberation movement of the late 1960s and early 1970s (krolokke & Sorensen,2006:7). Some scholars think that the second wave of feminism can mosteasily be dated to 1949 with the publication of simone da beauvoir’s The Secondsex. This movement is sometimes characterized by its efforts to move beyondthe first wave and its focus on the political and legal source of women’sinequality. Second wave Feminists maintain that, although important, politicaland legal equality is not enough to end women’s oppression. On their view,sexist oppression is not simple rooted in legal and political arrangements aswell as unquestioned norms, habits, everyday interaction, and personalrelationships. Moreover, second wave feminists criticized first wave feminismfor not going for enough in its economic reforms. They argued that feminismmust demand full economic equality for women, rather than only simpleeconomic survival. Third, Second wave feminists challenged the public privatedichotomy by scrutinizing areas of human social life that were previously seenas political-such as the institution of marriage, motherhood, heterosexualrelationships, women’s sexuality and so forth. Thus, rather than trying to reformexisting political structures, second wave feminists aim to radically & transformalmost every aspect of personal and political life.The Third Feminist Wave: Transversal Politics- Third wave Feminismbegan in the late 1980s by feminists who wanted to make women’s diversityor diversity in general more central to feminist theory and politics for examplewomen of color maintained that their experiences, interests and concerns werenot fully represented by second wave feminism. Part of the reason is that,historically, second wave feminism was largely represented by middle-classwhite women who tended to focus on the commonalities among women andtheir experiences of oppression without taking social circumstances intoaccount. In response to this trend, Feminists of color argued that women fromdifferent social groups-social, economic, sexual and so forth-experiencedifferent types of oppression. They also questioned whether it makes sense totalk about “women” as a single unified phenomenon. Other third wave feministshave also questioned the category “women”. They challenge its very basis-namely. The division of people into sexes and genders and argue that feminismshould no longer be viewed as a cohesive political and theoretical movementwith common libratory aims for all women. Rather they maintain that we needa feminism that accepts diversity and allows for a multiplicity of feminist goals.“Feminism constitutes the political expression of the concerns and interest ofwomen from different region, classes, nationalities and ethnic backgrounds.There is and must be a diversity of feminisms responsive to the different needsand concerns of different women and defined by them for themselves.” -


Participant at the Nairobi Conference (1985). There are so many types andways of expressing feminism. They may be liberal feminist, radical feminist,Marxian (socialist) feminist, psychoanalytic feminist, Existentialist feminism,cultural feminist Eco Feminist, Postmodern feminist, black feminist etc. Out ofthese, liberal, radical and socialist feminist are important. These are describedas follows:Liberal Feminist Theory- Liberal feminist theory is a traditional theory, whichhas evolved from liberation/ liberalism and seeks to copy the liberal principlesof justice, liberty and equality to women, without questioning male power. MaryWoustonecraft’s book ‘A Vindication of the Rights of Wom’, John Stuart Mill’s‘The subjection of women’, Harriet Taylor’s ‘Enfranchisement of women’and Betty Friedan’s ‘The Feminine Mystique and the second stage’ belong tothis school. These feminists are visionary architects of liberal feminism whocombine feminist ideals with humanist tenets, i.e. gender justice based onhumanism. It sees sexism as dysfunctional because it deprives society of one–half of its creative workforce (Tondon, 2008: 41-44).In short – Liberal Feminism:• Socialization is the origin of gender differences• The goal-gender equality.

Wolstonecraft believe that proper education, proper training in criticalthinking, is the most important single item on the feminine agenda. There aresome basic problems with liberal feminist theory the first is that a strictly liberalanalysis left the private sphere untouched. Secondly liberal left the questionwhether there really are significant ‘onthological’ differences between womenand men unanswered.Radical Feminist Theory- Radical feminist theory is chiefly concerned withthe issues arising out of ‘pornography, prostitution, sexual harassment, rapeand women beating’. In order to be liberated from sexual abuse & oppression,radical feminists prescribe a strategy to ‘Create an exclusively female sexualitythrough celibacy, auto- eroticism, or lesbianism.’ They are againstheterosexuality and traditional roles of women as faithful house wives andchild-bearing machines Shulamith Firestone, a radical feminist who has writtenthe Dielectric of sex, argues that women can be liberated by a biologicalrevolution. Kate Millet insists that the roots of women’s oppression are deeplyburied in gender system of patriarchy. In her book sexual politics, she says thatwomen will be liberated only when gender discrimination is eliminated as its isconstructed and fostered by patriarchy. This ideology is weak as it separateswomen from the mainstream rather than integrating them into it. Radicalfeminism seeks the oppression of women’s as fundamental and the most basicform of oppression. All other forms of oppression stem from male dominance.The purpose of this oppression is to obtain psychological ego satisfaction, andstrength and self-esteem. The radical Feminists conclude that women’s


liberation requires a biological revolution. They believe that only throughtechnology, women can be librated from the fundamental in equalities of thebearing and rearing of children.In short: Radical Feminism:• Male power and privilege are viewed as the bases of social relations.• The goal: the abolition of male supremacy.• Focus on: establishing women- centered beliefs and system.Marxist (Social) School of Feminism- This type of feminism improvesintellectual understanding of relations between class and sex. Friedrich Engel’s.The origin of the Family, Private property, and the state and Eli Zaretsky’sSocialist revolution point out that woman are often looked at and treated asproperty of man. As such a women’s position is reduced to that of a commoditymean to be used and disposed. It advocates the economic independence ofwomen.Marxist feminism is most appropriately called, ‘socialist feminism’ to point upthat is no longer presents as undiluted Marxism but a Marxism modified byradical feminism (Tondon, 2008:47). Socialist feminists believe that liberationof women will come from an equal role in production. But it ignores the factthat the sexual division of labour in the home not only discriminates againstwomen on the job and in political life, but it also perpetuates one-sideddevelopment of human personality.In Short; Marxist Feminism:• Class accounts for women’s status and function in society.• Monogamous marriage is about private property.• The family is a microcosm of society’s large class relation.• Class and gender interest

There are various other feminist. These are discussed in brief in thefollowing lines:

Multiracial Feminism-• Focus on the intersections of race, class and gender.• How does the experience of domination shape the life experiences of

people of color?• Importance of human agency – i.e. human beings as and creative.Postmodern Feminism-• Women as “other”- notes advantage of otherness.• “Feminist standpoint Theory” suggests that the location the knower

shapes what is known: not all perspective is equally valid or complete.• Also called ‘French Feminism’.Cultural Feminism-• There are fundamental differences between and women, and women’s

differences should be celebrated.• There is an attempt to recover lost or marginalized women’s works and


traditions and create a culture that narrates and supports women’sexperiences.

Lesbian Feminism-• Lesbian-Feminist politics is a political critique of the institution and ideology

of heterosexuality as cornerstone of male supremacy.Eco-Feminism-• Eco-feminist theory rests on the basic principle “that patriarchal ways

are harmful to women, children and other living things.”• Creates new ways of thinking about the relationship between humans

and nature, inducing animal, replacing the dualistic objectifying mode,characteristics of western science.

Black Feminism-• This proceeds from the assumption that Black women experience a

unique form of oppression in discursive and non-discursive practicesalike because they are victims at once of sexism, racism and by extensionclassicism.

• They seek particularized methodologies to that might reveal the ways inwhich that oppression is represented in literary texts.

• They call into question a variety of standards of valuation that mainstreamfeminist and andocentric Afro-American Theory might naturalize.

Feminism In Indian Scenario- Feminism in India is a set of movementsaimed at defining, establishing, and defending equal political, economic andsocial rights and equal opportunities for Indian women. It is the pursuit ofwomen’s right within the society of India. Like their feminist counterparts allover the world. Feminists in India Seek gender equality: the right to work froequal wages, the right to equal political rights. Indian feminists also have foughtagainst culture-specific issues within Indian’s patriarchal society, such asinheritance laws and the practice of widow immolation known as sati(Wikipedia). Unlike western feminist movement, Indian’s movement was firstinitiated by men, and later joined by women. The efforts of these men includedabolishing sati, child marriage, disfiguring of widows, and promoted widowremarriage, women’s education and equal rights of women to own propertyand many more basic rights in matters such as abortion. Some important Indianfeminist include lalitambika Altharhanan, Barnita Bagchi, Jasodhara Bagchi,Rita Benarji , Saroj Nalini Dutta, Padma Gole, Brinda Karat, Vina Mazumdar,Kamini Ray, tarabai Shinde (Wrote Stripurush Tulna) and many more.Conclusion- Feminism is a collection of movement and ideology aimed atdefining, establishing, and defending equal rights-political, social and economicfor women. Feminism seeks to establish equal opportunities for women ineducation and employment. There are various ethnically specific or multi-culturalforms of feminism. Feminist movements have resulted in the emergence ofPro-feminism and anti feminism reactions. As far as India is concerned, despite


the progress made by Indian feminist movement, women living in modern Indiastill face many issues of discrimination. India’s Patriarchal and culture hasmade the process of gaining land-ownership rights and access to educationchallenging. In the past two decades, there has also emerged a disturbingtrend of sex-selective abortion. To Indian feminist’s these are seen as injusticesworth struggling against.======================References-1. Mittra, Ranjana (2001). The Faminine Organization : will it help career women

overcome Gender Bias?. In Abha Avasthi & A.K. Srivastava (Ed.), Modernity,Feminism and women Empowerment. Jaipur Rawat publications.

2. Kemp, Sandra & Squires, Judith. (1997). Feminisms. New York : Oxford UniversityPress.

3. Cudd. Ann. E. & Andreasen, Robin o (2005). Feminist Theory: A PhilosophicalAnthology. Australia : Blackwell Publishing.

4. Anderson, Margaret L. (2000). Thinking About women ; SociologicalPerspectives of sex and gender. USB : Allyn & Bascon.

5. Hole, Judith & Levine, Ellen. (1975). Rebirth of feminism, New York : TimesBook Co.

6. Bhagwat, Vidyut. (2000). Feminist Socail Thought : Jaipur : Rawat Publication.7. Krolokke, chalotte & sorensen, Ann Scott. (2006). Gender Communication

Theories and Analyses : from silence to Performance. New Delhi : SagePublication, Inc.

8. Waves of feminism. (n.d.) Retrived on 12-11-2012. Retrived fromWWW.d.uno.edu/~jwilson2/soc%20of%20women.ppt

9. Feminist Perspectives on the family. (n.d.). Retrived on 12-11-2012. retrivedfrom WWW.educationforum.co.uk/sociology_2/feminism%5b1%D.ppt

10. Feminism in India (n.d.) Wikipedia, the free Encyclopedia. Retrived on 09-11-2012. Retrived from www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/feninism_in_india.

11. Tondon, Nehru. (2008). Feminism : A paradigm Shift. New Delhi: Atlanticpublishers and Distributors (P) Ltd.

Women Empowerment: A Myth or a Reali ty

* Arvind Khanna** Parveen Kaur Khanna

==========================================================Abstract-From the middle ages to the recent times, women have beencolonized by various forms of patriarchal domination; her sphere of lifehas been bound by the protective and prohibitive walls raised by themoralists. With the passage of time, women’s lives are radicallytransformed by developmental change due to modernization of socialvalues. Women emancipation and women empowerment – have becomethe catchwords today but are these not just the illusions? Are the womenof today really emancipated? Are they really empowered?==========================================================


===========================* Associate Professor, PG Department of English, Govt. Mohindra College,

Patiala.** Associate Professor, Department of Management and Humanities, SLIET,

(Deemed to be university), Sangrur.

I was that woman at whom the Vedas, the Avestathe Bible and the Quran were flung;their God was the bogeymanwho kindly sent male prophetsTo keep me humble in my place

Debjani Chatterjee: I was that womanSince times immemorial, ever since the legend of Eve and Pandora,

woman has been accused of earning the wrath of God, has been continuouslyassociated with folly and moral weakness and hence been subjugated in thesociety. As Simone de Beauvoir remarks:

She (Woman) is defined and differentiated with referenceto man and not he with reference to her; She is the incidental,the inessential as opposed to the essential. He is the Subject, heis the Absolute, she is the other.

She further adds:One is not born but rather becomes a woman … it is civilizationas a whole that produces this creature … describes as feminine.One’s sex, as we are aware, is determined by anatomy, but the prevailing

concept of ‘gender’ is largely a cultural construct, that was generated by


omnipresent Patriarchal biases of our civilization. From the middle ages to therecent times, women have been colonized by various forms of patriarchaldomination, her sphere of life has been bound by the protective and prohibitivewalls raised by the moralists. The purdah system which emerged from thefeminine code of modesty – has become akin to feet binding in China andchastity bell in Europe – to keep women not only spiritually but also physicallyimmobile. Sati Pratha, child marriages, maltreatment of girls, enforcedwidowhood, temple prostitutes - Devdasis – and harem/ polygamy or polyandryare the different forms of subjugation and marginalization of women so muchso that the term ‘graha laxmi’ cunningly juxtaposes women’s deification andher confinement in domesticity. In fact, in India, taboos laid down by Manuwere tightened during the centuries that followed and consequently ‘feminine’in Indian culture has come to be identified as passive, timid, emotional andconventional.

Time changes and it has changed. Gradually the murmur – the protest,the roar inside the weaker sex, the other – has been gradually becoming louderand louder and has been heard through her participation in the developmentprocess. Since, the ‘gender based critique’ from the west, women everywherehave been resisting, fighting to assert their identities, subverting oppressiveagendas to retain their anatomy and independence. Beginning with a focus onthe rights of peasant women, on the rights of the working class where womendid two third of work but received just ten percent of wages and own just onepercent of property, on the right to vote and against violence against women,they have moved further and the arena has been widened to include literacy,eco feminism, political participation and reservation in the Parliament. As BettyFriedan remarks, “We can no longer ignore that voice within woman that saysI want something more than my husband and my children and my home.” Alltheir lived experiences, understanding of their physical and mental abilities –everything that they know and experience about themselves is filtered throughtheir situatedness and women all over the world have felt called upon to expresstheir identity, to protest against the otherness.

In Indian context, from the most legendary feminine archetypes of themale-authored texts, - the epic women Sita and Draupadi, Damyanti – thesuffering woman, Shakuntala – the idyllic heroine, Savitri – the Pativrata –Indian women have traversed a long time and proved to the world that thehand that rocks the cradle can rule the world. Through an ideology prevailingsuch writings which have been considered great literature and which untilrecently have been written almost by men for men, they find a representationin women’s writings where carefully avoiding the straight jacketed mould ofimages of Indian woman construct by imperialist and naturalist Patriarchy wefind a protest against the patriarchal impositions and suppressions. Instead ofbeing submissive, docile and subjugated ‘objects’, we find assertive and


aggressive ‘subjects’ exploring different aspects of female sexuality. In a societywhere class and caste issues receive a greater critical appreciation, the powerpolitics of dividing the subaltern category are now being questioned. In themodern society, women have figured as the professional career women oftenjuggling work with domestic responsibilities of home and family. The conceptof the faithful, patient, long suffering wife is slowly dying and the women oftoday apparently have moved ahead. The setting up of various women researchcentres, women corporations, the pioneering of feminist journals, the variousforums against oppression of women, research on women histories and theirwritings, and the recognition of the women writers at the international levelseem like an act of self-improvement. The ‘female principle’ in the variousmythical forms seems to be demystified so much so that in order to create aparallel identity the Post- feminist woman in today’s globalized world is cateringnot only free and organizational professions but also ascriptive ones. Thesedays, women are participating in the work force in large number, but also forthe first time entering what was hitherto considered an almost exclusivelymale preserve. Women’s lives are radically transformed by developmentalchange due to modernization of social values.

Women emancipation and women empowerment – have become thecatchwords today but are these not just the illusions? Are the women of todayreally emancipated? Are they really empowered? A look into the reality seemsto say otherwise. The explosion in forced trafficking and sexual slavery, theincreasing number of rape victims, domestic violence, and female foeticideseem to tell a different story. Media texts these days project women as eithermercenary, scheming shrews – the home breakers or as a ‘commodity’, the‘object’ in the commercials. The image of woman as Claire Johnston remarks;operates in these texts as a ‘sign’ – which draws it’s meaning not from thereality of women’s lives but from the desires and fantasies of men. Doublestandards are there – as the Patriarchs of today on the one hand talk about‘free woman’ but at the same time tend to restrict her in the ‘ideal’ image of‘free woman.’ On the one hand they support a break through the ‘glass ceiling’and on the other go for the retention of classic tropes of femininity.

Further, as a protest against the male hegemony some women areindulging in ‘girl power’ and deviant activities. In their effort to destabilize thehierarchical thinking, these women try to explore different aspects of femalesexuality and hence advocate a redefinition of gender roles. Lesbianism,pornography and extra – marital relationships are some of the diversifications.

The way to progress lies not in making ‘gender trouble’ but as JudithButler has famously called it, in destabilizing the terms ‘masculine’ and ‘feminine’, and on the contrary in making more room for the female alongside the malegenesis. The need of the hour is not the hypocrisy, not just a myopic blinkeredgaze but a vision in totality. Development is needed not only in the social set up


but also in the mind set ups of the male custodians of ‘power’ and for a smoothjourney into the skies, the haze has to be cleared. The need of the hour is notto promote the change through ‘gender hostility’ but the social rearrangementthat ‘cuts across gender boundaries.’======================References-1. Beauvoir, Simone de. The Second Sex. translated and ed. by H.M.Parshley.2. 1953 ; rpt. London: Pan Books, 1988.3. Braidoti , Rosi. Nomadic Subjects. New York: Columbia University Press, 1994.4. Butler, Judith. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity.

London: Routledge, 1990.5. Friedan, Betty. The Feminine Mystique. New York: Norton, 1963.

ISSN 0975-4083

A Registered Reviewed Research JournalSix monthly Bi-lingual Journal (English/Hindi Editions)

Please address all Communications -Prof. Braj Gopal Shukla

Chief Editor Research Journal Social and Life Sciences

41/42, Raghuwans Sadan, Shantikunj, Bichhiya, Rewa 486 001 (M.P.) Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437

E-mail - [email protected] [email protected]

[email protected]

The Aims & Objectives-

Guidelines & Member Ship Fee

To provide a plateform for the publication of original unpublished Research Papers, Summary of Research Project, Thesis and Book review relating to all subjects of Social & Life Sciences and to promote interdisciplinary research work. Book Review can be published on receipt of two copies of concerned book.

-Authors/ Researchers can contact in the Registered Office given below-

Indexed & Listed at: Ulrich’s International Periodicals Directory ©, ProQuest, U.S.A. Title Id : 715204

Volume-IX, Coming in September, 2013


Adolescents Problems: A Comparative Perspective

* Priyanka Tiwari==========================================================Abstract- The objective of the present study is to examine the problemsfaced by adolescents in the area of school & social life. Adolescence isa process of transition from childhood to adulthood. Adolescence hasbeen regarded as a trouble some age-a time in life-span when the personis hard to live or work with.After a long period of relatively stablebehaviour the child suddenly becomes unbalanced, unpredictable &unstable as he emerges into adolescent. In this process many challengescreep in & make it an age of problem demanding lots of adjustments onseveral fronts. The aim of this research is to know the influence of genderon school & social problem faced by youth. To negate the effect ofextraneous variables, sample was restricted to students in the age groupof 15 to 17. Sample was selected on the basis of Incidental-Cum-PurposiveSampling Method. Data was collected from 100 adolescents by using"Youth Problem Inventory" (YPI) of Verma M. The data was analyzed onthe basis of scoring key of YPI. Two hypotheses were formulated: (i)Adolescent girl will have more school problem than boys. (ii) Adolescentboys will show more social problem than girls. As far as school problemis concerned most of the students had fear of teacher as well as of schoolactivities. Male respondents showed their dissatisfaction on rejection &indifference shown by their teachers. In social context most of therespondents feel that their economic condition determines their socialstatus. The article will focus on the other findings of the study in detail &will try to propose some suggestive measures in this regard.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant Professor, Amity Institute of Psychology and Allied Sciences, Noida

Introduction- Adolescence is the spring of life. Hurlock (1955) has defined itas: “Adolescence is both a way of life & span of time in the physical &psychological development of an individual. It represents a period of growth &change in nearly all aspects of child’s physical, mental, social, & emotionallife. It is time of new experience, new responsibilities & new relationshipswith adult as well as with peers.” The beginning of adolescence has beenregarded as troublesome age – a time in life span where the person is hard tolive or work with. After a long period of relatively stable behaviour the childsuddenly becomes unbalanced, unpredictable & unstable as he emerges into


adolescent. During adolescence, there is movement away from the dependencyof childhood towards the autonomy of adulthood. Adolescence is full ofchallenges for any child. The change is fast, everywhere & hard to keep upwith. The body changes in response to increasing; levels of hormones: thethinking process, changes as the child is able to think more broadly & in anabstract way. The social life changes as new people & peers come into scope.Yet the child needs to deal with every single one of these changes, all at thesame time. Adolescents yearn to develop a unique and independent identity,separate from their parents. They love their parents, but they don’t simplywant to follow their foot step, and sometimes even challenge their parents.Theclimate of home directly influences adolescent’s behaviour pattern &adjustments to life slowly. If the home climate is favourable the adolescent willreact to all types of problems & frustration in a calm & philosophical manner& also in tolerant, happy & cooperative way.Purpose-The purpose of present research is to know the influence of sex onschool and social problem faced by adolescent studying in different schools.Hypothesis-To obtain the purpose of the research following hypothesis hasbeen formulated:-1. Adolescent girl will have more school problem than boys.2. Adolescent boys will show more social problem than girls.Method- Sample-A sample of 100 +2 students in the age ranging from 15 to17 yrs. was selected on the basis of Incidental-Cum-Purposive SamplingMethod.Tool- “Youth Problem Inventory” (YPI) of Verma M.was used for thecollection of data.Discussion & Interpretation- Result was analysed by using the manual ofYPI. The discussion is based upon table I, II, III, IV respectively. Hypothesisone is discussed on the basis of table I & II, hypothesis 2 is discussed on thebasis of table III & IV.

Table No. 1Maximum Score Obtained & there %

Area Max. Possible

Score by an individual

Max. Score obtained by Boys

Max. Score obtained by Girls

% of Score (Boys)

% of Score (Girls)

Diff. of %

B (School)

40 526 550 26.30 27.50 1.20

From the above table it can be said that adolescent girls had more social

problem than boys. The maximum score achieved by any of the respondent inschool area is 40. Boys scored 526 (26.30%) and girls scored 550 (27.50%).There is a difference of 1.20% between the two sexes. So the first hypothesis- Adolescent girls will have more school problem than boys is proved.

Table No. II


No. Of Girls & Boys having problem in Sub-area & Score ObtainedArea Sl.

No. Sub-Area

No. of boys having

problem in each Sub-

Area

Scores obtained by boys in each

Sub-Area

No. of girls having

problem in each Sub-Area

Scores obtained by girls in each

Sub-Area

1 BF 23 35 26 30 2 BFT 39 109 41 120 3 BR 21 43 26 43

B 4 BI 20 36 20 47 5 BH 18 31 22 41 6 BIS 35 77 26 48 7 BS 44 139 44 163 8 BHA 30 57 29 56 The above table revels the number of sample (girls & boys) having

problem in different subgroup of school area (B). A comparative analysis willprove how adolescent girl have more school problem than adolescent boys. 23boys had fear of college activities (BF) with obtained score of 35, whereas 26girls scored 30 in this area. Number of girls having problem in this area is morethan that of boys. Though, the intensity of this problem is higher among theboys. Girls had more fear of teacher (BFT) than boys as 39 boys scored 109in this area compared to 41 girls scoring 120 in this area. Both girls & boyswere some what equal in the area of rejection & indifference shown by teacher(BR). 26 girls & 21 boys obtained a score of 43 respectively.

The problem of incompetence of teacher (BI) was same in both the sexbut the intensity was more among girls. 20 girls obtained a score of 47 whereas20 boys obtained a score of 36 in this sub-area.In the area of behaviour ofteacher (BH) 22 girls showed problem in this area with a score of 41 oncontrary 18 boys scored 31 in same area. In the area of isolation (BIS)boysreported to have more problem than girls 35 boys scored 77 while only 26 girlshas problem in this area with obtained score of 48. The intensity of subjectdifficulties (BS) was much higher among girls than boys. 44 boys & girlsscored 139 & 163 respectively in this area.

In the last sub-area other handicaps at school / college (BHA) both 29girls & 30 boys scored 56 & 57 respectively. Thus, table no II also supportshypothesis 1. On the basis of table I & II, it can be say that adolescent girlshas more school problem than boys. Though the difference is just of 1.20%yet there are few sub-areas where adolescent girls lack behind the boys, likein sub area- fear of teacher, incompetence of teacher, behaviour of teacher &difficulty in college / school subjects. In all these sub areas the obtained scoreof girls were higher than of boys except in sub area BIS which is for Isolation.So our hypothesis – “Adolescent girls will have more school problems thanboys”, is supported by the study.

Table No. III


Maximum Score Obtained & there %

Area Max. Possible

Score by an individual

Max. Score obtained

Boys

Max. Score obtained

Girls

% of Score (Boys)

% of Score (Girls)

Diff. of %

C (Social) 10 153 91 30.60 18.20 12.40

From the above table it can be said that boys had more social problem

than girls. The maximum score achieved by one respondent in social area is10. Boys scored 153 (30.60%) and Girls sample scored 91 (18.20%). There isa difference of 12.40% between the two sexes. So, second hypothesis –Adolescent boys will show more social problems than girls is proved.

Table No. IVNo. Of Girls & Boys having problem in Sub-area & Score Obtained

Area Sl. No.

Sub-Area

No. of boys having

problem in each Sub-Area

Scores obtained by

boys in each Sub-

Area

No. of girls having

problem in each Sub-

Area

Scores obtained by girls in each

Sub-Area

C Social

1 CS 41 86 27 53

2 CI 39 68 27 36

The above table revels the number of sample (boys & girls) havingproblem in different subgroup of social area (C). A comparative analysis willprove how adolescent boys have more social problem than adolescent girls insocial area.

41 boys had problem in sub-area CS (Social Inferiority) and total scoreobtained by them was 86 on the contrary 27 girls had problem in this area withtotal score of 53. Thus this indicates that boys had more inferiority relatedproblem than girls.

In the area of Social Isolation 39 boys reported to have problem in thisarea with a score of 68 as compare to 27 girls with obtained score of 36. Scoreindicate that boys found themselves to be more socially isolated than girls.All findings indicate that adolescent girls had less social problem compare toboys. So they are more adjustable to social environment than boys. Thus, tableno. IV also supports hypothesis no.2.Conclusion & Suggestion- On the basis of above finding it can be said thatadolescent girls had more school related problem than boys. Boys are found tobe well adjusted to school environment compare to girls. Adolescent boyswere found to be high on problems related to social environment. So we cansay that girls are more adjustable to social environment than boys. Oneinteresting finding of the present study is that adolescent boys found themselves


to be isolated in school as well as in social life. Approximately 70 % of boysfaced problem of isolation in school & around 78% boys found to be sociallyisolated. As adolescence is a period of significant change & reorganisation infamily & other relationship, one should handle these teens very carefully. Theresearcher has given few suggestions which can be beneficial to the teens aswell as to other who are related to them.======================References-1. Baron A. Robery - Psychology 5th Edition 20072. Bengalee, M.D - Common Psychological problem in School children.3. Hurlock E. - Development Psychology, A Life Span Approach. Tata McGraw

Hill Publication Co. Ltd., New Delhi 19814. Rogers D. - The Psychology of Adolescence. Appleton Century Crafts, New

York 1962.5. Varma, V.P. - A Psychological study of Home, Job, Friendship & Personal

Problems in late Adolescence. Unpublished PhD Thesis, University of London,1968

6. Verma, M. - Youth Problem Inventory7. www. Education.nic.in8. www.indiaparenting.co.in





[email protected]








Psychoticism, Reinforcement and Vigi lance

* Jago Choudhary==========================================================Abstract- The present experiment was designed to study vigilance as afunction of psychoticism and reinforcement. Initially, Eysenck PersonalityQuestionnaire was administered to 400 university girl students, to selectthe final sample of 20 subjects-high and low on Psychoticism. The subjectswere selected to work under two conditions of reinforcement-positiveand negative. Results indicated that subjects low on Psychoticism weresupervisor in vigilance. There were no difference reinforcement conditions.The two factors interaction of Psychoticism and reinforcement alsoemerged significant.==========================================================

===========================* Head, Department of Psychology Jagdam College, Chapra

Personality has been recognised as a very important determiner of humanbehaviour both in the laboratory as well as in actual life. Eysenck (1960) definespersonality as a more or less stable and enduring organisation of a person’scharacter and temperament, intellect and physique which determine his uniqueadjustment to the environment. Eysenck posits three major dimensions ofpersonality: Extraversion/Introversion (E/I), Neuroticism/Stability (N) andPsychoticism. Earlier Eysenck developed questionnaires to measures E/I andN dimensions. In 1975, Eysenck and Eysenck developed the Eysenckpersonality questionnaires (E.P, Q.) whose main advantage was the introductionof new variable, P for Psychoticism. Psychoticism refers to an underlyingpersonality trait present in varying degress in all persons; if present in markeddegree it may predispose a person to the development of Psychoticismabnormalities. A high P score may be described as being solitary, not caring forpeople; he is often troublesome, not fitting in anywhere. He may be cruel andinhumane, lacking in feeling and empathy and altogether insensitive. He ishostile to others, even his own kith and kin, and aggressive even to loved ones.He has a liking for odd and unusual things and a disregard for danger; he likesto make a fool of other people and to upset them. Socialization is a conceptwhich is relatively alien to both adults and children who score high onPsychoticism. Empathy, feelings to guilt, sensitivity to other people and notionswhich are strange and unpredictable to them. The experimental and social


correlates of Psychoticism reveal that high P scores are poorer in vigilanceand attention, have abnormal perceptual judgements, are impulsive, aggressive,and hostile, are drugs addicts, alcoholisms and have more tough minded socialattitudes (Eysenck and Eysenck, 1975). This description implies that behaviourof high P score is unpredictable as they are impulsive and not amendable toprincipal of socialization. Their responses to stimuli would probably be differentand peculiar. Eysenck also maintains that the type of reinforcement which ismost effective depends on the personality type of the individual. Many studieshave been done in the personality dimensions of Extraversion/Introversion andNeuroticism. Extraverts outperform introverts in positive reinforcement.Neurotics are sensitive to both reward and punishment. As far as thePsychoticism dimension is concerned, very little work has been done in thisarea.Vigilance research has assumed greater importance and emphasis thesedays, considering its practical implications in performance of many tasks.Vigilance has been defined variously: as performance on monitoring tasks, asattention over extended periods of time and as a state of the organism-areadiness to respond to infrequent, low intensity signals occurring atunpredictable temporal intervals. Vigilance is required for successfulperformance in a variety of situations and jobs like air defence system,inspection of products in industry, and proof reading, all of which are examplesof vigilance tasks. Vigilance has also been used as an experimental paradigmof attention and bears a close similarity to the requirements of the classroom.Both require that children sustain attention over a long period of time, sit quietly,watch for critical signals and ignore irrelevant events (Brackup and Knopf,1978). Keeping in view the importance of the phenomenon of vigilance, thepresent experiment was designed to study the effect of Psychoticism andreinforcement on vigilance.Sample: Initially, the Eysenck personality questionnaire (Eysenck and Eysenck,1975) was administered to 400 university girls. Mean was calculated for thesample and on the basis of mean ± ½ SD, subjects high and low on Psychoticismwere selected. They were controlled on E and N, only female subjects wereused for this study.Material: Eysenck personality questionnaire (Eysenck and Eysenck, 1975)was used for studying. Vigilance was measured through a visual vigilance taskinvolving signal detection. In this cognitive task, series of numbers 1 to 9 werewritten randomly on this paper. The signal was number 7.Design: The present experiment was designed to study vigilance as a functionof Psychoticism and reinforcement. High and low subjects on Psychoticismwere selected to work under two conditions of Reinforcement: positive andnegative. Thus a 2 x 2 factorial design was employed. Number of subjects ineach conditions were 5 and the total number of subjects were 20. The levelsof reinforcement were manipulated through differential verbal instructions.


Procedure: The subjects were first administered EPQ after establishing arapport with them. Then the visual vigilance task was administered for 5minutes. There were of 1 minute each. Hundred percent reinforcement wasused.

Table-1ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE FOR VIGILANCE TASK IN THE

PSYCHOTICISM GROUP

Sources of sum of Df Mean sum F-ratio Level of varience squares of squares significancePsychoticism 15568.20 1 15568.20 4.011 n.s.Reinforcement 1.800 1 1.800 0.00 n.s.P x Re 38544.20 1 38544.20 9.93 .01Error 62092.00 16 3880.75Total 116206.20 16 6116.115 Table-2CONTINGENCEY TABLE SHOWING INTERACTION BETWEEN PSYCOTICISM AND REINFIRCEMENT Positive Reinforcement Negative ReinforcementP+ 200.2 288.6 244.4p- 343.8 256.6 300.20 272.0 272.6

Subjects in the positive reinforcement category were reinforced by theExperimenter who said good, or well done after trial. Subjects in the negativereinforcement category were told Bad, hopeless or No good.Results & Discution- Table 1 shows ANOVA for the Psychoticism group.It shows that F ratio for Psychoticism emerged insignificant, with meansfavouring subjects low on Psychoticism. F-ratio for reinforcement also emergedinsignificant. However, F ratio for the 2 factor interaction emerged highlysignificant (F= 9.93, p < .01). Contingency table shows that highest meanscores were obtained by Ss low on Psychoticism in the positive reinforcementcondition, followed by high P scores in the negative reinforcement condition.Contingency table also shows that low P scores performed better n the positivereinforcement condition whereas high P scorers performed better in the negativereinforcement condition. One may explain this by the fact that through generallypositive reinforcement facilities vigilance in the Psychoticism group, the trendis reserved because of their unusual response patterns. Further research is,however required before one can give a plausible explanation for thisphenomena.======================References-1. Brackp, E.S., & Knopf, I.J. the effects of extraneous speech On visual vigilance


performance of child. Child development, 1978,49, 505-508.2. Eysenck, H.J. Experiments in personality, vol. I and II. London: Routledge

and Kegan Paul, 1960.3. Eysenck, H.J. & Eysenck, S.B.G. Manual of the Eysenck. Personality

questionnaires. San Diego : Educational And Industrial Testing services, 1975.4. Eysenck, H.J. & Eysenck, S.B.G. Psychoticism as a Dimension of personality.

London : Hodder and soughton Educational, 1976.



[email protected]





(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)


ISSN 0975-4083


Sexual Harassment of Women at the Work Place inIndia- An Analytical Study

* Manisha Saini** Pinki Sagar

==========================================================Abstract- Although sexual harassment of Women is very sensitive issue,and off late has had a lot of Prominence most workplace often fails toacknowledge sexual harassment as a concern. Overall more than 80percent of the respondents reported the need for a separate law for dealingwith sexual harassment work place it added.==========================================================

===========================* Lecturer, Meerut (UP)** Research Scholar, Meerut (UP)

Introduction-The status of women in India has been subject to many greatchanges over the past few millennia, from equal status with men in ancienttimes through the low points of the medieval period of the equal right by manyreformers, the history of women in India has been eventful. In modern India,women have adorned high offices in India including the President, PrimeMinister, Speaker of the Lok Sabha and leader of the Opposition as of 2011,the speaker of the Lok Sabha and leader of the Opposition in Lok Sabha(Lower house of Parliament) both our women. However, women in Indiacontinue to face discrimination and other social challenges and are often victimsof abuse and vialent crimes and according to global poll conducted by“THOMSON REUTERS”. India is the “Fourth Most dangerous country” inthe world for women and the worst country for women among the G-20countries. Women are routinely subjected to a variety of crimes. All of themsexual harassment at work place is gravest which destroys the victim mentallyas well as physically and her family also suffers. Sexual harassment includesboth physical violence and subtle forms of non physical violence, includingeconomics and professional injuries. It is a demonstration of power and controland above all it exemplifies a form of gender discrimination or gender inequality.Objectives & Scope- The present study attempts to focus the attention onthe women’s search for self identity and their struggle for survival with dignityand development. A general understanding of the problem of sexual harassmentof women at work place, the India approach to the problem and the initiativestaken by the National Human Right Commission (NHRC). Sexual harassment


at the work place is on a rise in India due to social forces encouraging powerbased relationship between man and women. Women who are victims of sexualharassment at the work place have in extreme cases even quit their jobs.However, more women ignore sexual harassment hoping that it would be aone-time incident or avoid the harasser or avoid going to places where theharasser could be this affects her work performance. She may also shieldherself by seeking protection of a senior or a powerful person with in or outside her work place. Which is some cases many also prove to bedisadvantageous to the victim there are very few women who make a formalprotest in the organization against the harasser. Women do not report cases ofsexual harassment for fear of loosing employment or due to threats from theharasser. In many cases they might feel embarrassed, helpless and powerless.The victim might also feel that she would have misunderstood the situation ormight blame herself for the situation. Also women might not complaint as theydo not trust the system or feel that reporting will not change the system anyway.Crimes Against Women- Police records show high incidence of crimesagainst women in India. The National crime records Bureau reported in 1998the growth rate of crimes against women would be higher than the populationgrowth rate by 2010.Acid Throwing- The Thomas Reuters foundation survey says India is thefourth most dangerous place in the world for women to live in as womenbelonging to any class, caste or creed and religion can be victims of this cruelfrom of violence and disfigurement a premeditated crime intended to kill ormain her permanently and act as a lesson to put her in her place in India.Dowry- In 1961, the governments of India passed the dowry prohibition actmaking the dowry demands in wedding arrangements illegal However, manycares of dowry related domestic violence, suicides and murdered have beenreported. In the 1980’s, numerous such cases were reported. In 1985, theDowry prohibition (maintenance) of lists of presents to the bride and bridegroom rules were framed. A 1997 report claimed that at least 5,000 womendie each year because of dowry deaths, and at least a dozen dies each day in‘kitchen fires’ thought to be international.Child Marriage- Child marriage has been traditionally prevalent in India andcontinues to this day historically, young girls would live with their parents untilthey reached puberty. In the part the child widow were condemned to a life ofgreat agong shaving heads, living in isolation and shunned by the society.Domestic Violence- The incidents of domestic violence are higher amongthe lower socio-economic classes (SECs) the protection of women domesticviolence act 2005 came into force on 26 October 2006.Trafficking- The immoral traffic (prevention) act was passed in 1956, Howevermany cases of trafficking of young girls and women have been reported. Therewomen are either forced into prostitution, domestic work or child labour.


Female Infanticides and Sex Selective Abortions- India has a highlymasculine sex ratio the chief reason being that many women die before reachingadulthood tribal societies in other caste groups. This is in spite of the fact thattribal communities have far lower levels of income, literacy and health facilities.Cause- So, there are so many safeguards available to a woman in India butmost of women’s are not aware about their rights due to so many reasons likeilliteracy, poverty, dependency of males etc. resulted the exploitation of manywomen in every field of life. Many social institutions provides there for theimprovement the condition of women by aware them about their rights alongwith this Govt. also.Constitutional and Legal Safeguards for Women- Sexual harassment ofany women at the work place is a gross violation of the fundamental rightsguaranteed under part-III of the constitution. It is a clear violation of the rightunder articles 14, 15, 21 of the constitution. Such violence therefore attractsthe remedy under article 32. Apart from the above article 42 also provides forjust and human condition of work and maternity relief. India is also a party ofvarious International conventions and human rights instruments aimed atsecuring the right women. Along with this I.P.C. 1860 which contains laws forpunishment for sexual harassment of women at work place. Section 294, 354,375 and section 509 are the relevant for safety of women in (Vishakha V stateof Rajasthan 1997 VII AD Sc 53) supreme court decided that sexualharassment of women at work place is human rights violation. Also in humanrights Act 1993 sec2 (d) it is mandatory for every organization, GovernmentPrivate, Industrial or educational to have a sexual harassment complaintcommittee pursuant to the Vishakha Judgment. The Central Civil Service(Conduct) Rules 1964 were aim amended in 1998 to incorporate Rule 3©which prohibits sexual harassment of working women. This rule invariableapplies to all women whether working in a Govt. set up or coming in contractwith Govt. offices. In order to consider and clarity the issues of sexualharassment of women at work place the National Human Rights Commissionconvened meetings with various department of the Govt. of India like thedepartment of Personnel and Training (DOPT), educational department,institutions, like the department of secondary and higher education. Ministryof Human Resources Development, UGC, CBSE, Directorate of education,National Capital Territory (NCT) of Delhi etc. besides meetings with the legalfraternity.Some other Safeguards for women- The state is empowered to make specialprovision for women under article 15(3) consequently the state has introducedreservations for women in Public Employment, in admissions to EducationalInstitution and the legislatures atlest at the local self-Government level certainother organic laws as-• Industrial Dispute Act 1947;


• Factories Act 1948;• Plantation Labour Act 1951;• Mines Act 1952;• Maternity benefit Act 1961;• Biri and sigar workers (conditions of employment) Act 1966;• Equal remuneration Act 1976;• Indecent representation of women (Prohibitation) Act 1987;• Delhi Prohibitation Eve-Toasting Act 1988;• Dowry Prohibitation Act 1961;• The medical termination Act 1976;• Commission of sati (Prevention) Act 1956;• The indecent representation of women Act 1986;• Domestic violence protection Act 2005;• Indian Penal Code also contains a number of provision to safeguard the

interest of women;So, there are so many safeguard available to a woman in India but most

of women’s are not aware about there rights due to so many reason like illiteracy,poverty, dependency of males etc. resulted the exploitation of women in everyfield of life. Many social institutions provides their services for the improvementthe condition of women, by aware them about their rights along with this Govt.also.Some other steps to be taken by the Government- Further the SupremeCourt in Apparel export promotion council V K Chopra (1991(1) SCC 759)stated that:-• Sexual harassment can take place even if there is no physical contact.• Witness or documentary evidence is not always necessary to prove a

sexual abuse charge.- If the evidence provided by the victim inspires confidence the court

would be obliged to rely on it. Ordinarily no sympathy would be shownin favour of the superior officer.

Amendment to the Government Rules- No Government servant shallindulge in any act of sexual harassment of any women at her work place.

Every Government servant who is incharge of a work place shall takeappropriate steps to prevent sexual harassment to any women at such workplace.

Following a suggestion from the senior advocates of the Supreme Courta letter was written by the former chairperson to the than Chief Justice ofIndia covering that the Vishakha guideline be implemented in letter and sprit atall levels of the judiciary as well.Conclusion- “Although sexual harassment of Women is very sensitive issue,and off late has had a lot of Prominence most workplace often fails toacknowledge sexual harassment as a concern. Overall more than 80 percent


of the respondents reported the need for a separate law for dealing with sexualharassment work place it added”.======================References-Books-1. P.M. Bakshi, The Constitutional Law Of India2. M.P. Jain, Indian Constitutional Law3. J.N. Pandey, Constitutional Law Of India4. V.N. Shukla, Constitution Of India5. Ratan Lal, India Penal Code6. Manta Rao, Law Relating To Women And Child7. Dr. S.K. Kapoor, International Law And Human RightsJournals-1. AIR2. ILI3. ILR4. ILQNewspapers-1. Amar Ujala2. The Hindu3. Hindustan Times4. Times Of India5. Dainik JagranArticles-1. Gallop. Jane, Feminist Accused of sexual harassment Duke University 1997

ISBN-978-0-82223-1918

Empowerment of Women in Indian Society

* Akhilesh Shukla

===========================* Department of Sociology, Govt. T. R. S. College, Rewa (M.P.)

==========================================================Abstract-A review of government's various programmes for womenempowerment such as Swashakti, Swayamsidha, Streeshakti, BalikaSamrudhi Yojana and another two thousand projects reveal that littlehas been done or achieved through these programmes. The discrepancyin the ideology and practice of the empowerment policy of women inIndia constitutes its continued social, economic and social backwardness.Women make up 49% of our country's population hence there can be noprogress unless their needs and interests are fully met. Empowermentwould not hold any meaning unless they are made strong, alert and awareof their equal status in the society. Policies should be framed to bringthem into the mainstream of society. It is important to educate the women.The need of the hour is to improve female literacy as education holds thekey to development.Key Words- Empowerment, Social and Cultural evils, Women Policy,Holistic Approach==========================================================


The meaning for women empowerment is to give rights & power towomen to come up in life to challenge aginst it.Empowering Women aims toinspire women with the courage to break free from social and cultural evils ofthe society. When and where women are given power they can perform theirrole effectively, every where. The women empowerment in India is a pre-independence concept. Empowerment refers to increasing the spiritual, political,social or economic strength of individuals and communities. It often involvesthe empowered developing confidence in their own capacities.Empowerment is probably the totality of the following or similar capabilities:* Having decision-making power of their own* Having access to information and resources for taking proper decision* Having a range of options from which you can make choices (not just

yes/no, either/or.)* Ability to exercise assertiveness in collective decision making* Having positive thinking on the ability to make change


* Ability to learn skills for improving one's personal or group power.* Ability to change others' perceptions by democratic means.* Involving in the growth process and changes that is never ending and

self-initiated* Increasing one's positive self-image and overcoming stigma

The principle of gender equality is enshrined in the Indian Constitution inits Preamble, Fundamental Rights, Fundamental Duties and Directive Principles.The Constitution not only grants equality to women, but also empowers theState to adopt measures of positive discrimination in favour of women.

Within the framework of a democratic polity, our laws, developmentpolicies, Plans and programmes have aimed at women's advancement indifferent spheres. From the Fifth Five Year Plan (1974-78) onwards has beena marked shift in the approach to women's issues from welfare to development.In recent years, the empowerment of women has been recognized as thecentral issue in determining the status of women. The National Commissionfor Women was set up by an Act of Parliament in 1990 to safeguard the rightsand legal entitlements of women. The 73rd and 74th Amendments (1993) tothe Constitution of India have provided for reservation of seats in the localbodies of Panchayats and Municipalities for women, laying a strong foundationfor their participation in decision making at the local levels.Goal and Objectives- The goal of Empowerment of Women Policy is tobring about the advancement, development and empowerment of women. ThePolicy will be widely disseminated so as to encourage active participation ofall stakeholders for achieving its goals. Specifically, the objectives of this Policyinclude* Creating an environment through positive economic and social policies

for full development of women to enable them to realize their full potential* The de-jure and de-facto enjoyment of all human rights and fundamental

freedom by women on equal basis with men in all spheres - political,economic, social, cultural and civil

* Equal access to participation and decision making of women in social,political and economic life of the nation and

* Equal access to women to health care, quality education at all levels,career and vocational guidance, employment, equal remuneration,occupational health and safety, social security and public office etc.

Social Empowerment of Women-Education- Govt of India have announced in their policy that Equal access toeducation for women and girls will be ensured. Special measures will be takento eliminate discrimination, universalize education, eradicate illiteracy, create agender-sensitive educational system, increase enrolment and retention ratesof girls and improve the quality of education to facilitate life-long learning aswell as development of occupation/vocation/technical skills by women.


Reducing the gender gap in secondary and higher education would be a focusarea. Sectoral time targets in existing policies will be achieved, with a specialfocus on girls and women, particularly those belonging to weaker sectionsincluding the Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes/Other Backward Classes/Minorities. Gender sensitive curricula would be developed at all levels ofeducational system in order to address sex stereotyping as one of the causesof gender discrimination.Health- A holistic approach to women's health which includes both nutritionand health services will be adopted and special attention will be given to theneeds of women and the girl at all stages of the life cycle. The reduction ofinfant mortality and maternal mortality, which are sensitive indicators of humandevelopment, is a priority concern. This policy reiterates the nationaldemographic goals for Infant Mortality Rate (IMR), Maternal Mortality Rate(MMR) set out in the National Population Policy 2000. Women should haveaccess to comprehensive, affordable and quality health care. Measures willbe adopted that take into account the reproductive rights of women to enablethem to exercise informed choices, their vulnerability to sexual and healthproblems together with endemic, infectious and communicable diseases suchas malaria, TB, and water borne diseases as well as hypertension and cardio-pulmonary diseases. The social, developmental and health consequences ofHIV/AIDS and other sexually transmitted diseases will be tackled from agender perspective. To effectively meet problems of infant and maternalmortality, and early marriage the availability of good and accurate data atmicro level on deaths, birth and marriages is required.

The Constitution of India grants equality to women in various fields oflife. While doing research in the field of rural leadership in Rewa district ofMadhya Pradesh we found that yet a large number of women are either illequipped or not in a position to propel themselves out of their traditionallyunsatisfactory socio-economic conditions. They are poor, uneducated andinsufficiently trained. They are often absorbed in the struggle to sustain thefamily physically and emotionally and as a rule are discouraged from takinginterest in affairs outside home. Oppression and atrocities on women are stillrampant in Princely India areas of Rewa State. Patriarchy continues to beembedded in the social system in many parts of India, denying a majority ofwomen the choice to decide on how they live. The over-riding importance ofcommunity in a patriarchal sense ensures that women rarely have anindependent say in community issues. Female infanticide continues to becommon. Statistics show that there is still a very high preference for a malechild in states like UP, MP, Rajasthan, Bihar, Punjab etc. The male to femaleratio is very high in these states. Domestic violence is also widespread and isalso associated with dowry. Leaving a meager number of urban and sub-urban women, Indian women are still crying for social justice.


Empowerment would become more relevant if women are educated,better informed and can take rational decisions. It is also necessary to sensitizethe other sex towards women. It is important to usher in changes in societalattitudes and perceptions with regard to the role of women in different spheresof life. Adjustments have to be made in traditional gender specific performanceof tasks. A woman needs to be physically healthy so that she is able to takechallenges of equality. But it is sadly lacking in a majority of women especiallyin the rural areas. They have unequal access to basic health resources andlack adequate counseling. The result is an increasing risk of unwanted andearly pregnancies, HIV infection and other sexually transmitted diseases. Thegreatest challenge is to recognize the obstacles that stand in the way of theirright to good health. To be useful to the family, community and the society,women must be provided with health care facilities.

Most of the women work in agricultural sector either as workers, inhousehold farms or as wageworkers in Rewa district 40.4% agricultures laboursare female. Yet it is precisely livelihood in agriculture that has tended to becomemore volatile and insecure in recent years and women cultivators have thereforebeen negatively affected. The government's policies for alleviating povertyhave failed to produce any desirable results, as women do not receiveappropriate wages for their labour in rural areas. There is also significantamount of unpaid or non-marketed labor within the household. The increase ingender disparity in wages in the urban areas is also quite marked as it resultsfrom the employment of women in different and lower paying activities. Theyare exploited at various levels. They should be provided with proper wagesand work at par with men so that their status can be elevated in society.

In recent years there have been explicit moves to increase women'spolitical participation. The Women's reservation policy bill is however a verysad story as it is repeatedly being scuttled in parliament. In the Panchayati Rajsystem, however, women have been given representation as a sign of politicalempowerment. There are many elected women representatives at the villagecouncil level. However their power is restricted, as it the men who wield allthe authority. Their decisions are often over-ruled by the government machinery.It is crucial to train and give real power to these women leaders so that theycan catalyst change in their villages regarding women. All this shows that theprocess of gender equality and women's empowerment still has a long way togo and may even have become more difficult in the recent years.

The main reason for the contradiction is that, targeted schemes tend tohave only limited impact when the basic thrust of development is not reachingan average woman, making her life more fragile and vulnerable. To make apositive change basic infrastructure should be provided in every village andcity. To begin with, providing safe drinking water supply and better sanitationnot only directly improved the lives and health of women but also reduces their


workload in terms of provisioning and ensuring such facilities. An access toaffordable cooking fuel reduces the need to travel long distances in search offuel wood. Improved transport connecting villages with each other and withtowns can also directly improve living conditions as well as unpaid labour timespent in transporting household items. It can also lead to access to a widerrange of goods and services plus a better access to health facilities. Expenditureon food subsidy and better provisions for public distribution services directlyaffects the lives of women and girl children in terms of adequate nutrition. Thepatterns of resource mobilization by government also have significant effectson women that are usually not recognized. When taxes are regressive and falldisproportionately on items of mass consumption, once again these tend toaffect women more. This is not only because the consumption of such itemsmay be curtailed but also because the provisioning of such items is frequentlyconsidered to be the responsibility of the women of the household. Also creditpolicies reduce the flow of credit to small-scale enterprises thus reducing theemployment opportunities for women. There is a need to have women-friendlyeconomic policies that can enhance their social and economic position andmake them self-reliant.

There is no doubt about the fact that development of women has alwaysbeen the central focus of planning since Independence. Empowerment is amajor step in this direction but it has to be seen in a relational context. A clearvision is needed to remove the obstacles to the path of women's emancipationboth from the government and women themselves. Efforts should be directedtowards all round development of each and every section of Indian women bygiving them their due share.

We have to accept the fact that things are not going to change overnightbut because of this we cannot stop taking action either. At this juncture themost important step is to initiate ground level actions however small it mightseem. The ground level actions should be focused towards changing the socialattitude and practices prevalent in the society which are highly biased againstwomen. This can be initiated by working with the women at the root level andfocusing on increasing women's access and control over resources andincreasing their control over decision making. Further working on the aspectof enhanced mobility and social interaction of women in the society wouldpositively influence all round development and empowerment of women inIndia. One of the major aspects of women empowerment in India is to changethe attitude of society towards women. The problem in India is that the societynever worked on the premise of gender equality from a long-long time. Atrocitiesand discrimination against women is a way of daily life in Indian society. Thereis an attitude which still prevails in India where women are considered to beonly worthwhile of household activities and managing the children. The veilsystem, child marriage and dowry are testimonies to this truth. Women have


never been part of the mainstream society in India and they are still consideredas a great liability. If we just look at the sex ratio it will show the plight ofwomen in India. It is the lowest at around 933. Female literacy is just 54.16 %as per 2001 Census. In Indian parliament and assemblies women have neverrepresented more than 10%. Most of the women workers in India are outsidethe organized sector. Administrators, managers, professionals combined togetherand technical workers on the other hand are the lowest at 2.3% and 20 %respectively. Now these figures gives the real truth of the actual mentality ofthe society which has restricted women, marginalized women and discriminatedagainst women quite openly. Can we achieve women empowerment in Indiawith these alarming and dismal figures?

There are quite a large number of issues which need to be addressed tostreamline the existing women empowerment programmes in India as well asinitiating actual work at the ground level. Women make up to 48% of country'spopulation but their living conditions are very tough and torturous. To initiatemeasurable actions at ground level, education of women should be given toppriority and female literacy programmes need to be enforced across the country.Further to improve the socioeconomic conditions women need to be trainedand better equipped for taking informed decisions. The real change will beonly visible when social attitudes and norms change. Here inclusiveprogrammes involving the men are the need of the hour. This will be helpfulfor working out adjustments and sharing of gender based specific performanceor tasks which are currently overburdening the women to no end. Unless weimprove the ground level living standards of women in India we might not beable to influence their empowerment in any other possible way. Various issuesthat need to be addressed for improving overall conditions of the women inIndia include making access to affordable coking fuel for rural women, providingsafe drinking water, sanitation, increasing decision making capacity amongwomen, providing equal wages as that of men, ending their exploitation,improving the political participation of women, eradicating poverty amongwomen, increasing the security of women who are engaged in agriculture asdaily wage workers, providing affordable healthcare and nutrition and managingthe risk of unwanted pregnancies, HIV infections and sexually transmitteddiseases.

When we talk about women empowerment in India the most importantaspect that comes into the mind is the attitude of the society towards women.in fact the society has yet not accepted the feeling of the preamble of theconstitution ie we (Both men & women) the people of India. Women are stillconsidered as burden and liabilities. They are also considered as properties.These kinds of attitudes give birth to the evil of violence against women. Womenempowerment in India is not possible unless violence against women iseradicated from the society. National Commission of women was created in


1992 and Convention of elimination of all forms of discrimination against womenwas ratified in 1993. Apart from the laws and policy formulations the violenceagainst women can be only tackled through attitudinal change that need totake place in the family, in the society and the female members of the societyas well. Only this attitudinal change and proactive action against violence byevery single individual will help in galvanising the slumbering structures of thegovernment and society towards further concrete steps and action. Unlesssociety accepts gender equality as a fundamental principle of human existenceall efforts will only partially bear results. Gender sensitisation and gender trainingis primary need of the hour. The struggle of gender equality should be carriedat every level and it should overcome the barriers of caste, class, race andreligion. To reemphasize once again, women's empowerment cannot take placeunless women come together and decide to self-empower themselves. Selfempowerment should be all round in nature. Once this happens then we canthink about galvanizing the system towards the direction of better health facilities,nutrition and educational facilities for women at a very large scale. Selfempowerment can begin by addressing day to day issues faced by individualwomen and tackling them with a mindset of improving the overall living conditionsof women at every level and strata of the society. A movement has to be buildwhich awakens the individual self in each and every woman for creative andgenerative action. In this regard progressive and resourceful women in thesociety need to come forward to help their less privileged sisters in as manyways as possible. This shall help us sow the seed for real women empowermentin India. This site envisions the rise of womanhood in true sense that is the riseof the "essence" of womanhood in the physical, mental, intellectual and thespiritual planes. It calls for the beginning of a campaign for the true rise ofwomen in all spheres of life for the restoration of the balance in nature.Somewhere we have to make a beginning and it's always better if we makethe initiation at our own self. We can strengthen this mass movement for the"rise of womanhood" by bringing about the necessary changes in our own lifeas felt by our inner self. Further we can transmit the new thinking to otherswho care to listen. A small step today will definitely lead to a giant leap tomorrow.======================References-1. Kalyani Menon-Sen, A. K. Shiva Kumar (2001). "Women in India: How Free?

How Equal?". United Nations.2. Pruthi, Raj Kumar; Rameshwari Devi and Romila Pruthi (2001). Status and

Position of Women: In Ancient, Medieval and Modern India. Vedam books.3. Greenhalgh, S. (1991), 'Women in the informal enterprise: Empowerment or

Exploitation'? World Bank, Washington D.C.4. Ahlawat, Neerja (2005), 'Domestic Violence against women: Emerging concerns

in Rural Haryana'. Social Action. Vol. 55.5. www.azadindia.org/social-issues/female_foeticide.html


6. Dr. S. Akhilesh, Women Empowerment - A Reality or Myth", WomenEmpowerment, Centre for Research Studies, Rewa 2010 Page 11-18

7. Dr. S. Akhilesh, Empowerment of women ", Women Empowerment, Centre forResearch Studies, Rewa 2010 Page 115-117

8. Report of the Sub-Group on Strategies for Empowerment of Women,Development of Children and Issues for Adolescents Govt. of India, Part III.

9. National Policy for the Empowerment of Women, 2001 Govt. of India.

ISSN 0975-4083






[email protected]








Women Empowerment: The Educational andSocial Reform Agenda of The All India Women's

Conference (1927-1947)

* Amneet Gill==========================================================Abstract- In the Indian context, women have been treated as a soft powerand the society hardly reacts to their needs. There is a compelling needto understand the concept of women empowerment. The question on thegap in the power between men and women is not an easy one.==========================================================

===========================* Research Scholar, Department of History, Punjab University, Chandigarh

An analysis of the contextual position of women reflects that thepresent era needs to react sharply to empower women through aneffective strategy which is the key to comprehensive social and economicdevelopment.The scattered, piecemeal or curative approaches to theadvancement of women view women as passive subjects of protection oras recipients of marginal welfare and social services, unrelated to thepolicies and strategies for development or structural changes in societiesthat result from economic changes.1 These approaches should now bereplaced by an integrated and participatory approach which relates therole of women in development, their aspirations and needs to the criticalareas, issues and choices in the development strategy for economicgrowth, a more humane use of material and human resources and forequity in power relations at the national and international levels. In theIndian context, women have been treated as a soft power and the societyhardly reacts to their needs. There is a compelling need to understand theconcept of women empowerment. The question on the gap in the powerbetween men and women is not an easy one. Facaulty relates power toindividuals as follows: The individual is an effect of power, and at thesame time, repressively to the extent to which it is that effect, it isthe element of its articulation. The individual with power hasconstituted is at the same time its vehicle.(Ibidi.98)

The empowerment approach which is predominant nowadays goesback to the International Workshop on Feminist Ideology and Structuresin the First Half of the Decade for Women, organised by the Asian andPacific Centre for Women and development in Bangkok on 1979. Going


deeply into the understanding of the Empowerment process, six stagesare described as follows:1. Awareness Building2. Skill and Capacity Assessment3. Capacity Building and Skill Development4. Participation and Greater Control in Decision Making5. Action for Change6. Evaluation

The empowerment of women and promotion of gender equality is oneof the eight internationally accepted goals designed by United Nations. Genderequality is integral to a rights based approach to development.2 The dynamicconcept that deals with women empowerment is concerned with developingthe capacity of individuals to participate effectively in making and implementingdecisions that directly or indirectly affect them. The condition of Indianwomen is not homogenous. There are various instruments at work asthe Indian society is multilayered and women due to social and culturalconditions have not been able to organize themselves on a large scale.In such a scenario, the role of women’s organizations in genderempowerment assumes importance. The first dynamic effort towards theempowerment of Indian women was the foundation of the All India Women’sConference in the year 1926 to discuss the agenda of women’s education asliteracy among women was appallingly low.It was founded by MargaretCousins, an Irish revolutionary along with eminient women of India, suchas Sarojini Naidu, Begum Saheba of Bhopal, Kamaladevi Chattopadhyay,Sarla Ray, Rajkumari Amrit Kaur, Muthulakshmi Reddy and others. Theorganization established in the colonial period today has nearly 500branches all over the country with a membership of over 100000. Theorganizations established previously for the welfare of women wereheaded by men who were pioneers in the field of women reforms andtried to promote education though in a restrictive sense.3 Some thinkersview the efforts of male reformers to reform the plight of women asmerely symbolic as their aim was to find suitable wives well groomedin western ways to facilitate the socialising of native elites with theBritishers. The All India Women’s Conference was the pioneer organizationwhose rank and file comprised women. The organization made aconcerted effort to push forward educational reforms among Indianwomen and in the process facilitated social reforms as well. As is wellknown, the twentieth century promoted the cause of gender justice byinternalising struggles for equality by women and other oppressed people.4Education reform being the major concern of the organization, it madea systematic analysis of the prevailing system. Primary education seemsto be the main concern as is evident from the first conference in 1927


wherein it realised the significance of educating girls in schools andremoving them from the forbidding restrictions imposed in their households.In the year 1929, the All India Women’s Fund was established whichwas instrumental for setting girls schools, hostels, orphanages. In theyear 1932, Home Science College was set up which became famous asLady Irwin College, a pioneering institution which had a swellingmembership of 25000 by the year 1940. Education was not seen asmerely an urban phenomenon. 5 The organization made an effort as earlyas 1939 to stress for distinct education for rural girls with vocationaltraining and instruction in vernacular languages. It took the agenda withBritish government which seemed to take no interest and insteademphasised the need to address crucial social issues affecting thecondition of women by the organization without delving into the politicalones. The agenda of a meticulously designed curriculum for girls whichhad been taken up by the meetings of the conference in the years 1935,1940, and again in 1945 brings to the fore the seriousness exhibited bythe members of the organization as each of them individually made anenquiry into the conditions in their respective constituent assemblies tofinally arrive at a consensus at the annual session convened by theorganization. Though it stressed the need for a uniform medium oflanguage, the lingual diversity and the importance of mother tongue as amedium of instruction was acknowledged by the members of theorganization. 6

The most significant step towards advancement of women’s educationseems to be the endeavour towards industrial and commercial trainingfor young girls which was facilitated by the organization by setting upspecial training centres and working women hostels for youngentrepreneurs in various parts of Karnataka.7 Thus there seems noaspect of women’s education not deliberated by the organization. Itsfocus in educational reform remained primary education as is evidentfrom the 1947 session of the conference wherein a primary teacherstraining institute was set up in Bombay under its auspicies and renownededucators were called from US to educate primary teachers.The mostsignificant aspect of the organization’s growth seemed to be the earlyrealization of its members that women cannot be imparted educationwithout tackling the inhibiting social conditions affecting them. RajkumariAmrit Kaur, one of the prominient members of the organization identifiedthree major social impediments of women namely — Child Marriage,Polygamy and Pardah.8 A social reform committee was set up as earlyas the third session of the conference which pressed for raising the ageof mariage for girls. Thus the members of the organization rejoiced atthe passing of the Child Marriage Restraint Act of 1929 and in its


subsequent conferences resisted all conservative pressures to amend thesame. As early as 1930, it stressed for reform in the Law of Inheritanceand Women labor laws which inspired the British government to passIndustrial laws protecting women and children against exploitation. Theyear 1932 assumes special significance as though the body claimed to beapolitical, it nevertheless took a keen interest in the deliberations towardsthe framing of a new constitution for India. In the same year, it placedbefore the Franchise Subcommittee of the Round Table Conferencematters pertaining to the equality for women wherein, it sought equalityirrespective of sex, no disability with regard to public employment, adultsuffrage and the right to fight elections. However, it is commendablethat it never sought reservation of seats for women as such. Itsmembers told the Constituent Assembly’s committee on minorities thatthe primary duty of the committee was to suggest ways and means toeradicate the evils of searatism, rather than expedients or palliativeswhich might in the long run contribute to its perpetuation.9 But itsvigorous campaign for women enfranchisement was defeated on theGovernor General’s insistence of keeping wifehood as a condition offranchisement. The rigorous campaign for voting rights ultimately culminatedin the enfranchisement of women soon after independence. In the year1937, the Council of the League of Nations appointed the organizationto be a correspondent member of its Advisory Committee on the socialquestion. In the same year, the organization submitted a memorandum onPolitical, Legal, Social and Educational status of women in India to theLeague of Nations and Government of India. The Fifteenth Session ofthe Conference was successful in persuading the Government of Indiato appoint a committee to examine the injustice done to women underthe Hindu Laws. The subsequent conferences engaged the seriousattention of the Rau Committee appointed to review the Hindu Laws.These discussions formed the backbone to the passing of the HinduCode Bill after independence.10

Persuing a wider reform agenda, the Conference started taking aspecial interest in the village upliftment work much before India’sindependence in 1941. A special committee was appointed to prepare amodel Village Scheme undertaken in all its branches. The schemecovered Health, Economics, Social reform, Education and Land problems.The stand of the Conference against untouchability and communalviolence were addressed as early as 1936 itself.11 Instruction in themethod of birth control to tackle the population problem was sought tobe addressed with the help of prominient workers of US. Relief workswere undertaken in connections with floods, famines and cyclones inBihar in the year 1942. Thus its reform agenda was quite comprehensive


and advocated non violence in the turbulent period of the totalitarianwar. In the above said period, the organization is said to have a threedimentional significance. Firstly, it epitomised the transfer of leadership ofwomen’s movement from men to women. Secondly, it seems theorganization looked to west for role models given the fact that it wasestablished by an Irish lady. Thirdly, it provided women with theopportunities to come out into the world outside their homes and to formpublic opinion related to the significant issues affecting women and thenation at large. It is interesting to note that the organization at the timeof it’s initiation focussed only on the issues of education and how itcould be made available to women in the light of inhibiting social andcultural conditions of the times. Over a period of time, it startedaddressing a plethora of issues and became the leading voice inespousing the cause of Indian women. Thus the All India Women’sConference played a crucial role in the empowerment of Indian womenand was instrumental in organizing public opinion on all significant issuesconcerning women.======================References-1. Singh, Sukanya, 'Prospectus for Women Empowerment, Dynamics for

Enablement', Commonwealth Publishers, 20012. Shahay,Sushma,'Women & Empowerment Approaches &Strategies', Discovery

Publishing House, New Delhi,19983. Aparna Basu, "Role of Women in the Freedom Movement" in B.R. Nanda,

ed. Indian Women From Purdah to Modernity, Delhi, Vikas, 1976, p.714. Indu Agnihotri and Vina Majumdar, "Changing Terms of Political Discourse"

in Mala Khullar(ed.) Writing the Women's Movement A Reader, Zubaan,New Delhi, 2005, p.78

5. All India Women's Conference, Annual Report, 1940, AIWC Publication,NewDelhi,p.17

6. All India Women's Conference, Annual Report, 1942, AIWC Publication,New Delhi,p.36

7. All India Women's Conference, Annual Report, 1945, AIWC Publication,New Delhi,p.28

8. Amrit Kaur, Challenges to Women, New Literature Publishing House,Allahabad, 1946, p.91

9. Rajkumari Amrit Kaur, Selected Speeches and Writings, Archer Publications,New Delhi, 2006, p.95

10. All India Women's Conference papers File No. 209 "The Hindu SuccessionBill and Socialist Pattern of Society", Teen Murti Library, New Delhi, p.5

11. All India Women's Conference, Annual Report, 1936, AIWC Publication,New Delhi, p.34


Women Empowerment and Panchayati RajInsti tutions in Haryana: A Sociological Study

*Sunita**Desraj Sabharwal

==========================================================Abstract- The present study shows that majority of women respondentsdo not have the affiliation with other political organizations and most ofwomen representatives supported by their community people and spouse.It is also observed that majority of respondents never participated in anytype of political activity. It was found that majority of elected womenrepresentative who belongs to higher caste are taking decisionindependently in panchayat. On the other hand women member belongingto Scheduled caste and backward classes are working on the advice ofother people. The new Panchayati Raj Act created space for womenleadership and has provided weapon to the powerless section of thesociety. Most of uneducated women are taking decision regardingpanchayat matter on the advice of their husbands or other relatives.They are not in a position to exercise the power which is given to them.However some of the women representatives do find some space to putforward their views and agenda. Caste and class structure of the societydoes not allow the poorest section to assert their Constitutional rightsthrough panchayats.==========================================================

===========================* Research Scholar, Department of Sociology, M.D. University, Rohtak.** Professor, Department of Sociology, M.D. University, Rohtak (Haryana)

Introduction- The democratic values such as freedom, equality and socialjustice are emphatically stressed in the developing nations of the world. Thesocial and political movements emphasized the need for incorporation of suchdemocratic values in the decision-making process of these countries. Thegrowth models and development strategies of these countries are influencedby such consideration of the affairs of the state. Thus, the term empowermenti.e., giving power to certain underprivileged sections of society, came to beused. Liberalization and privatization of the economy and its integration withthe global economy are being advocated on the ground of increasing production.Thus, the concept of empowerment has become essential and acceptableaddition to the process of development and it has started to influence the


democratic discourse, which ultimately decide the growth models anddevelopment strategies of a state (Mohanti, 1995). The world summit for socialdevelopment (1975) observed that empowering people, particularly women, tostrengthen their capacities, is the main objective of development and its principalrecourse. Empowerment requires full participation of the people in theformulation, implementation and evaluation of decisions determining thefunctions and the well being of our societies. It is a process, which strengthensthe competence of people in general and of the oppressed sections of societyin particular. The strengthening of capacities is the main objective of developmentprocess and it can be achieved through empowerment of the poor anddowntrodden masses to enable them to help themselves and to manage theirown affairs in the society. The underprivileged groups like the poor peasants,women, dalits, tribal and unorganized workers have been engaged in the strugglefor power and these groups can be empowered by ensuring their participationin the development process of the country. It is an established fact thatempowerment is used for ensuring social transformation and economicdevelopment of a society. It also includes political participation and acquiringthe capabilities to influence the political decisions effectively. Participation asempowerment is related to redistribution of powers in the society. It is seen asan active process of involvement of the beneficiaries in assuming theresponsibility of and contribution to their own needs and welfare as community.By participation, we mean sharing or taking part or involvement in thedevelopment process or role in decision making. It can be interpreted asempowering the poorer sections of society to take independent, collective andvoluntary action in order to alleviate their poverty and improving their socialstatus. There are several programmes for socio-economic development ofalienated sections of the society. Therefore, it becomes essential to ensuretheir involvement in the development and decisions making process. Thebetterment of these sections can be expected only by their acquiring competenceand creating adequate capacities to enable them to participate actively in socio-economic and political affairs of the state.Empowerment of Women- Women constitute about 50 per cent of thepopulation in India and 70 per cent population of women resides in the ruralareas. Most of the rural women are engaged in the domestic and householdactivities. Even after 65 years independence, they have not been able toparticipate effectively in various occupations. The role differentials created bythe culture in a specific society can be changed through educational development,change in social values and political will of the state. Some scholars evaluatedthe status and position of women in the society, especially in terms of politicalparticipation. Chafe (1972) finds that the discrimination against women is deeplyrooted in the structure of society. Jahan (1987) points out that women generallyparticipate in large number in voting, but their participation is very low in the


political activities. Kaushik (1989) states that the right to vote is the startingpoint in the struggle for women’s political equality and their participation byway of voting has been growing but not steadily over the years.

Mohanti (1995) reveals that it is necessary to create proper socio-economic and political condition to enable women to participate effectively inthe Panchayati Raj institutions without endangering the positive values of theprevailing family system. Mahipal (1998) experience of a training camp forelected women representatives in Saharanpur district of Uttar Pradesh indicatesthat the role of women in Panchayati Raj institutions is performed by theirmale family members and they face a number of problems in performing theroles inside and outside the household. Pai (1998) conducted the study of threevillages from Meerut district of Uttar Pradesh warns that unless reservationsare accompanied by female literacy, independent voting rights and change instatus of family and society, women will continue to act as mere namesakerepresentatives of the male members of their families. Buch (2001) hasexpressed satisfaction over the fact that there has been a qualitativeimprovement in the share of women in the Panchayati Raj Institutions as aresult of the 73rd Amendment. She has also expressed the hope that it shallhave far-reaching consequences in the long-run. Singh (1994) states that sofar there has been substantial change in the status of women as a result of 1/3rd reservation conferred on them through the 73rd Amendment. The studysuggests that in order to encourage a more active participation of womenleaders in PRIs, they should be a provision for legal action against male relativesrepresenting the female in council meetings. Chand (1997) states that womenwere able to get 1/3rd representation in PRIs but there has been no real changein the pattern of women leadership, as the old social, cultural, economic andpolitical structures have remained unchanged. According to him, the role ofwomen member in Panchayati Raj is controlled by the male members of theirfamilies, particularly by their husbands. He attributes the state of affairs to thelack of education and political and social awareness among women, on theone hand, and to the traditional feudal and male dominated social context ofrural Haryana, on the other.

Shanta (1999) has carried out a comparative study of women leadershipin PRIs of three states, viz. Haryana, kerala and Tamil Nadu. She says thatlike other states, almost more than half of the women representatives in thePRIs of Haryana belong to the middle and upper age groups. But unlike otherstates, most of the women leaders in Haryana are from joint families insteadof nuclear families. Further, while some women members in Tamil Nadu andKerala are unmarried, no such instance is found in Haryana. The number ofilliterates is also larger in Haryana than in other states and the proportion ofmembers with higher education is significant in comparison to other states.The women members of Haryana also lag behind in reading habits, previous


experience, participation in social organization and political activities, and otherresponsibilities.The Panchayati Raj evolved primarily to ensure people’s participation in thegovernance of the country and emphasized the need of women’s involvementin it. Women’s participation in Panchayati Raj is essential as it helps to empowerthem and to develop their competence so that they may be able to influenceand affect the development and decision-making processes independently atthe grass root level. Several factors such as educational development, socio-economic and cultural changes technological development and the efforts ofNGO’s have contributed in a significant manner to awaken a sizeable numberof women. It is an established fact that reservation system has helped them toacquire political positions in the Panchayati Raj Institutions, but mere acquisitionof position does not imply the effective participation.Methodology- To study the participations and empowerment of women inPanchayati Raj Institutions, We have take women representative in PanchayatiRaj Institutions as our unit of study. For the present study random samplingwas employed. There are 21 districts in Haryana. We have selected Jhajjardistrict by lottery method.Jhajjar District comprises of five blocks i.e. Jhajjar,Bahadurgarh, Beri, Salhawas and Matanhail. There are 249 Gram Panchayatsin Jhajjar district. There are 71 panchayats in Jhajjar block, 36 panchayats inSalhawas block, 43 panchayats in Matanhail block, 63 in Bahadurgarh blockand 36 panchayats in Beri Block. In the present study four women headedpanchayats are randomly selected from each block. Thus, twenty womenheaded panchayat are selected in the present study. all the former electedmembers of panchayat samities and zilla Parishads are also interviewed. allthe women who had been elected members of panchayati since a period of1999, 2004, and 2009 are interviewed. So total 398 woman representativeshave been selected as a sample. Therefore, an attempt has been made in thispaper to assess the women empowerment in Panchayati Raj Institutions inHaryana.Association of Respondents with social and Political Organizations-Itis generally believed that most of women are engaged in household activitiesand domestic responsibilities. the table 1 shows that there are few womenleaders who have association with other social or political organization.

Table 1, Association of Respondents in political OrganizationAssociation with political organization

Gram Panchayat Panchayat Samiti

Members

Zilla Parishad Members

Total Panch Sarpanch

Yes 50(20.66) 3(15) 8(6.78) 5(27.78) 66(16.58) No 192(79.34) 17(85) 110(93.22) 13(72.22) 332(83.42) Total 242(100) 20(100) 118(100) 18(100) 398(100) *Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage


It is evident from the table 1 that 16.58 per cent of respondents areassociate with other political organization like Mahila Samiti, Mahila Mandal,which are common platforms to discuss their problem, while majority of 83.42per cent respondents have worked only as a Panchayati Raj representatives.At Zilla Parishad level situation is different in comparison gram panchayat.27.78 per cent respondents of Zilla parishad have the affiliation with otherpolitical organization. 79.34 per cent Panches, 85 per cent Sarpanches, 93.22per cent respondents of the Panchayat Samiti and 72.22 per cent respondentof the Zilla Parishad have worked only as a Panchayati Raj representative. Itis observed that majority of women respondents do not have the affiliationwith other political organizations.Length of Experiences in Panchayati Raj Institutions- Political experienceof Panchayati Raj Institutions leaders can also been seen on the basis of theirlength of political involvement in any form of organized activity that affects orseeks the power relationship. These activities being mainly intended to influencethe attitude and behaviour of those, who have power for decision making.Table 2] Experiences of Respondents in Panchayati Raj Institutions

Experiences of

respondents


Members

Zilla Parishad Member

s

Total

Panch Sarpanch

One Tenure 206(85.12) 16(80) 85(72.03) 15(83.33) 322(80.90) Two Tenure 30(12.40) 4(20) 33(27.97) 3(16.67) 70(17.59) Three Tenure 6(2.48) - - - 6(1.51) Total 242(100) 20(100) 118(100) 18(100) 398(100) *Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage

The table 2 shows that 19.10 per cent respondents have earlierexperiences of working in Panchayati Raj Institutions, while 80.90 per centonly have first exposure of working in Panchayat Raj. Similarly, 27.97 per centof Panchayat Samiti members and 16.67 per cent Zilla Parishad membersfollowed by 20 per cent women Sarpanches and 14.88 per cent Panches alreadyworked in PRIs. To start a new thing, an individual wants to help other becauseman is a social being who lives in a society in which every individual isinterdependent. In election, leaders get support of family members, husband,community or others.

Table No. 3, Support Received during electionsSupport Received


Members


Total Panch

Sarpanch

Family Member

29(11.98) 4(20) 9(7.63) 3(16.67) 45(11.31)

Spouse 90(37.19) 5(25) 25(21.19) 4(22.22) 124(31.16) Relatives 26(10.74) 3(15) 4(3.39) 1(5.56) 34(8.54) Community 97 (40.08) 8(40) 80(67.80) 10(55.56) 195(48.99) Total 242(100) 20(100) 118(100) 18(100) 398(100)


*Figures in the Brackets Represent PercentageTable 3 shows that 48.99 per cent respondents are supported by

community, 31.16 per cent by their husbands, 11.31 per cent by family members,8.54 per cent by relatives. Similarly, at the Gram Panchayat level, 11.98 percent Panches are supported by family members, 40.08 per cent by community.Another 25 per cent women Sarpanches are supported by their spouse followedby 20 per cent from their family members. At the Panchayat Samiti level, 7.63per cent supported by family members, while 21.19 per cent by their husbands.It is observed during the field work that most of women representativessupported by their community people and spouses.

Table 4Participation of Respondents in Different Political Activities

Political Activities


Members


Total

Panch Sarpanch

Formed Different Associations

17(7.02) 3(15) 18(15.25) 5(27.78) 43(10.80)

Rallies 57(23.55) 6(30) 15(12.71) 2(11.11) 80(20.10) Political Parties campaign

21(8.68) 1(5) 18(15.25) 2(11.11) 42(10.55)

No Participation

147(60.74) 10(50) 67(56.78) 9(50) 233(58.54)

Total 242(100) 20(100) 118(100) 18(100) 398(100) *Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage

The table 4 shows that majority of 58.54 per cent respondents have noexperience of participation in any type of political activities, 10.80 per centrespondents have experience of working in association with Mahila Mandal,Mahila Manch, Mahila Sabha, followed by 10.55 per cent who take part inpolitical activities like meeting, campaigning, canvassing and rallies. Lack ofparticipation in political activity is regarded as burden because it conflicthousehold activities. Similarly at the Gram Panchayat level 60.74 per centPanches, 50 per cent Sarpanches, 56.78 per cent Panchayat Samiti membersand 50 per cent Zilla Parishad members who did not take participation in anypolitical activities. Further at the Zilla Parishad level, 27.78 per cent followedby 15.25 per cent Panchayat Samiti members, 15 per cent Sarpanch and 7.02per cent panches have experience in functioning of association. It is observedthat majority of respondents never participated in any type of political activity.Knowledge of the Panchayati Raj Act-

For the successful working of the Panchayati Raj system, people’sparticipation is considered essential and important. an effort is made to educatethe masses for their full participation and active involvement.


Table 5Respondent’s Knowledge about Panchayati Raj Act

Response Gram Panchayat Panchayat Samiti

Members



Have heard about the Act

96(39.67) 4(20) 67(56.78) 7(38.89) 174(43.72)

Have read about the Act

51(21.07) 8(40) 20(16.95) 5(27.78) 84(21.10)

Husbands knows about the Act

59(24.38) 5(25) 19(16.10) 4(22.22) 87(21.86)

Don’t know 36(14.88) 3(15) 12(10.17) 2(11.11) 53(13.32) Total 242(100) 20(100) 118(100) 18(100) 398(100)

*Figures in the Brackets Represent PercentageThe table 5 shows that only 21.10 per cent respondents have read the

Haryana Panchayati Raj Act, whereas 43.72 per cent respondents reportedthat they have heard about the act. 21.86 per cent respondents stated thattheir husband have the knowledge about the act. as many as 13.32 per centrespondents reported that they have no knowledge and have neither heardabout it. It seems that the introduction of democratic decentralization has becomesomething like an imposition of democratic structures upon the traditional socialstructure. Majority of the women PRIs members have shown little commitmentto development and to the democratic process. the present study shows that13.32 per cent women do not have any knowledge about new panchayati rajact.It was also observed during the field work that educated women weremore assertive and having knowledge about Panchayati Raj Institutions.

Table 6Respondents perception about Women Empowerment

Perception about women Empowerment


Members



Women developed their own identity

77(31.82) 4(20) 46(38.98) 4(22.22) 131(32.91)

Atrocity on women decreased

25(10.33) 1(5) 2(1.69) 2(11.11) 30(7.54)

Women started speaking for their rights

86(35.54) 13(65) 67(56.78) 10(55.56) 176(44.22)

No effect on women status

37(15.29) 2(10) 3(2.54) 2(11.11) 44(11.06)

Don’t know 17(7.02) - - - 17(4.27) Total 242(100) 20(100) 118(100) 18(100) 398(100)

*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage


Table 6 reveals that the women empowerment programmes haveaffected the women’s status. Majority of 44.22 Per cent respondents admitthat the women have started speaking for their rights. 32.91 per cent respondentsare stated that reservations in PRIs have been able to develop women’s identity.7.54 per cent respondent states that the case of atrocities against women hasdecreased because of their participation in panchayati raj institutions. About 5per cent respondents are enable to respond on the question of womenempowerment.the present study shows that new panchayati raj act has providedweapon to the powerless section of the society.

Table 7Caste and awareness about the Meeting

Caste Awareness about meeting

Higher caste

Backward class

Scheduled caste

Total

Yes 175(59.73) 13(54.17) 53(65.43) 241(60.56) No 118(40.27) 11(45.48) 28(34.57) 157(39.44) Total 293(100) 24(100) 81(100) 398(100)

* The bracket figures represent percentageThe table 7 shows that 60.56 per cent women respondents admit that

they know about the meeting among them 59.73 per cent belonging to highercaste, 54.17 per cent backward classes and 65.43 per cent scheduled castewomen respondent respectively. 39.44 per cent women respondent did notknow about the meeting among them 40.27 per cent belonging to higher caste,34.57 per cent schedule caste and 45.83 per cent backward classes respectively.The study shows that majority of women were aware about meeting ofPanchayati Raj Institutions. It is necessary for each woman to know about thesystem of decision making in the institution. Keeping this in mind the questionwas asked, “How are decision taken in your Panchayat”?

Table 8Caste and Decision making of women respondents

Caste Process of Decision Making

Higher caste

Backward class

Scheduled caste

Total

Consensus 69(23.55) 14(58.83) 20(24.69) 103(26.14) On advise of husband

55(18.77) 5(20.83) 15(18.52) 75(18.89)

Independently 169(57.68) 4(16.67) 40(49.38) 213(53.52) Any other basis

- 1(4.17) 6(7.41) 7(1.76)

Total 293(100) 24(100) 81(100) 398(100) * The bracket figures represent percentage

The table 8 shows the relationship between caste and decision makingof the respondents. Majority of the respondents i.e. 53.52 per cent of the


sample take decision independently among whom 57.68 per cent belong tohigher caste, 49.38 per cent belong to scheduled caste and 16.67 per centbelong to backward class respectively. 18.89 per cent respondents of the totalare taking decision on advice of husband. 26.14 per cent women respondentsare taking decision regarding panchayat matter with consensus among them23.53 per cent were belonging higher caste, 24.69 per cent scheduled casteand 58.83 per cent are from backward classes.Conclusion- Empowerment for women in India requires a crosscuttingapproach and one which addresses the diversity of social structures that governwomen’s lives. There are numerous social movements fighting for the rightsof the marginalized, such as the Dalit and Tribal. These movements haveachieved many gains in assuring representation of the traditionally marginalizedcommunities into main stream society. Women’s rights within these movementsare largely unarticulated and thus reinforce inequalities within the very structuresfrom which they are demanding inclusion. Empowerment approaches forwomen therefore is not only about providing services, but also about recognizingtheir lived realities of multiple layers of the discrimination that hinder theiraccess to services.

The present study shows that majority of women respondents do nothave the affiliation with other political organizations and most of womenrepresentatives supported by their community people and spouse. It is alsoobserved that majority of respondents never participated in any type of politicalactivity. It was found that majority of elected women representative whobelongs to higher caste are taking decision independently in panchayat. On theother hand women member belonging to Scheduled caste and backward classesare working on the advise of other people. The new Panchayati Raj Act createdspace for women leadership and has provided weapon to the powerless sectionof the society. Most of uneducated women are taking decision regardingpanchayat matter on the advice of their husbands or other relatives. They arenot in a position to exercise the power which is given to them. However someof the women representatives do find some space to put forward their viewsand agenda. Caste and class structure of the society does not allow the poorestsection to assert their Constitutional rights through panchayats. The electionof gram panchayats brings out the identity of caste. Caste identity is used formobilizing voters at village and block levels. These processes have strengthenedthe caste based politics. It was also found that block and district panchayat’srepresentatives were more conscious about their political career. They allaspired to become MLA’s or MP’s. For them panchayat is a ladder for achievingtheir political aspirations.

The present study shows that 88.94 per cent women respondent haveawareness in terms of casting their vote in general election, while 11.06 percent women respondent don’t use their right to vote. During the study it is


found that they are not interested in politics but while working it PanchayatRaj Institution they have started realizing the importance of casting their vote.The data suggest that 49 per cent women respondents were supported bycommunity people during elections and 31.16 per cent respondent are supportedby spouse. It is observed that most of representatives are supported by theircommunity and spouse. The present study also indicates that reservation ofseats for women in Panchayati Raj institutions has encouraged them for activeinvolvement in political process of the country. It has provided opportunity forthem to participate in decision-making and implementation processes in ruralsociety. Nevertheless, the Act has changed the concept of male dominanceover rural local bodies after passing of the Haryana Panchayati Raj Act anumber of women have come forward to contest elections and in some ofPanchayats, they have contested and won general seats also. Their number inPanchayats, presence in meetings and involvement in the decision-makingprocess proved the way for their entry into politics. as a result of this, thewomen’s organizations and political parties have started demanding reservationof one-third for women in state assemblies and parliament. The study alsoshows that about of 60 per cent women representatives motivated for electiondue to 1/3 reservation in Panchayati Raj Institutions.======================References-1. Abraham, francis (1974), Dynamics of Leadership in Villages in India, Indian

Internationa publication, Allahabad.2. Bakshi, Rajni (1985), The Women’s Movement in India: A Historical

Perspective, Lokayan publication, Delhi.3. Baviskar, B.S. and George Mathew (2009), Inclusion and Exclusion in Local

Governance: Field studies from Rural India, Sage Publications, new Delhi.4. Buch, Nirmala (2001), “Panchayats and Women”, Kurukshetra, Vol. 49, No. 7.5. Chand,Pramod (1997), “Impect of 73rd Amendment on Women Leadership in

Haryana: A Study of Panchayat Samiti of Thanesar Subdivision, DistrictKurukshetra”,Unpublished M.Phil Dissertation, Deptt. Of Political Science,Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra.

6. Chafe, W. H. (1972), The American Woman: Her Changing Social, Economicand Political Roles, New York: Oxford University Press.

7. Garg, Nisha and Verma, Neera (2004), “Women and Panchayati Raj in Haryana:A Review Article”, In (ed.) Surat Singh, Decentralized Governance in India,Myth and Reality, Deep and Deep Publication, New Delhi.

8. Jahan. R. (1987), “Women in South Asian Politics,” Mainstream, vol. XXV, No.48, August.

9. Mathew, George (1994), Panchayati Raj-From Legislation to Movement,Concept publication, New Delhi.

10. Kaushik, Sushila (1989), “Women’s Issues in Ninth General Elections,”Teaching Politics. vol. XV, No. 3 & 4.

11. Mandal, Amal (2003), women in Panchayati Raj Institutions, KanishkaPublishers, New Delhi.


12. Malik, Shamser (2002), The New Panchayati Raj Rural Transformation, inthe state of Haryana, Aleka publication, Jaipur.

13. Mohanti, Bidyut (1995), “Panchayati Raj, 73rd Constitutional Amendment andWomen” Economic and Political Weekly, vol. X\X, No. 52. December.

14. Mishra, Sweta (1994), Democratic Decentralization in India, Mittal publication,New Delhi.

15. Pai, Sudha (1998), “Pradhanis in New Panchayats,” Economic and PoliticalWeekly, vol. XXXIII. No. 18, May.

16. Pal, Mahi (1998), “Women in Panchayats: Experiences of a Training Camp,”Economic and Political Weekly, vol. XXXIII. No. 4. January.

17. Reghunandan,T.R.(2012), Decentralization and local Governments. TheIndian Experience, Orient Blackswan Publication, New Delhi.

18. Reddy, G Ram (1977), Patterns of Panchayati Raj in India, Macmillanpublication Delhi.

19. Shanta,E.K. (1999), Political participation of Women in Panchayati Raj,Institute of Social Science, New Delhi.

20. Sharma, S.S. (1979), Rural Elite in India, Sterling publication, New Delhi.21. Singh, Surat (1994), “Women Participation in Panchayati Raj Institutions”,

Gramin Vikas Sameeksha, No. 17, Part II, July-December.





[email protected]








Problems of Dowry among Muslim Famil ies withSpecial Reference to Rewa City

* Akhilesh Shukla**Tajammul Hussain Mir

==========================================================Abstract- Dowry is both a practice and a problem associated with marriage.Dowry generally understood as money, goods, estate, ornaments or anyother kind of wealth that a woman brings to her husband at the time ofmarriage and also it contrast with the bride price. Which is paid by thegroom or hs family to the bride's parents and with dower, which is propertygiven to the bride herself by the groom at the time of marriage? The sameculture may simultaneously practice both dowry and bride price. Dowryis an ancient custom, and its existence may well predate records of it.Key Words- Marriage, Bride, Property, Groom, Money, Jahez==========================================================

===========================* Department of Sociology, Government T. R. S. College Rewa (M.P.)** M.Phil, Sociology, Second Semester, Government T. R. S. College Rewa (M.P.)

Introduction- Dowry means any property or valuable Security given or agreedto be given either directly or indirectly by the party to a marriage to the otherparty to the marriage, or by the parents of the either party to a marriage; or byany other person to either party to the marriage or to any other person; at orbefore or after the marriage as consideration for the marriage of the saidparties, but does not include dower or Mohr in the case of persons to whomthe Muslim personal law [sharat] apllies.”1 The practice of Dowry amongMuslims as it has existed and continues to exit in different forms and in differentregions. ‘Dowry’ is an ambiguous word that does not have a uniform or standarddefinition, and there are wide ranging regional variations in peoplesunderstanding of it. Technically, it is the property of the bride but, in practice,the husbands parents, brothers and sisters have access to it. Indian Muslimscommonly use the Arabic word jahez1 for dowry and very often, justify thepractice inters of jahaz-e-fatmi islamists classify jahez into two categories.The first comprise some essential articles for the outfit of the bride as well asfor conjugal life. The other is made up of valuable goods, clothes, bargaining,and devish food and hospitality for the barat. They say the former is very oldand established practice, while the later is a recent phenomenon among Indian


Muslims and mostly prevalent in south India another words dowry may be ascompensation for bride price. This May be the case in culture where the dowryand bride price are both customary. Many other authors believe that givingand receiving of dowry reflects social and even the effort to climb higher in asocial hierarchy. A dowry may also have served as a form of protection for thewife against the possibility of ill treatment by her husband and his family providingand incentive for the husband not to harm his wife.Review of Literature- The rise of the dowry among Muslims to date backonly some decades.1. White (1992:102) and Razoria (1992;134) note that the prevalence

of the system reflects a change over the last two generations. Dowrywas previously practiced mainly in urbanized, more affluent classes.The “Tyranny of dowry” existed in urban areas since the late 1960s,buthas now spread to rural populations (Atom and Martin)

2. Ansari (1978) some authors have tried to justify this system of dowryby reference to the practice of the prophet Mohammad; (saw) that is,sunna. Despite agreement that dowry payments are Not among thebasic of Muslim marriage, there are contentions that it forms part of thesunna of the prophet, who gave certain items to his daughter Fatma ather marriage to Ali, the Prophet “s cousin.

3. Sabzwari (1984) A dower (Mahr). A bridal gift from the groom whichis generally intended to provide some insurance for her in the case ofdivorcee.

4. Ansari (1978:81) the second instance quoted by those who see dowryas Islamic in the marriage of zainab, another daughter of the prophet,who was given a costly necklace by her rich mother.

Objectives-1. To explore about the cause of Dowry and its impact on Muslim families.2. To investigate and explore the impact of Dowry on society.3. To explore the problem of woman caused due to dowry among Muslim

families.4. What measures should be taken to control the dowry. Among Muslim

families.Methodology- When the fundamental matter of science are implemented inthe field of social science. Then it is called study method of search a fixed andwell organized study method has adopted, this method of study is called studymethod. Study method are the base of scientific research for being significationfor that following study method has adopted, both primary and secondarydeveloping the research problem. Methodology For study the dowry in Muslimfamilies i have taken the sample of five respondents from the study area and ialso use For this purpose self study, printed materials, internet and referencebooks has been consulted.


Study Area- Rewa is located at 240320 north 810 180 east 24.530 north 81.30

east 24.530, 81.360 it has an average elevation 275 meters (902 fed). Thepresent study focuses on “Problems of dowry among Muslim families in districtRewa (M.P.) So the sample of ‘Dowry’ has been mostly taken from Rewatown. Rewa had population about 2,363,744 in census 2011 in which male are1,2249,18 and female 1,38,8626, Rewa has an average literacy rate of 73.42%male literacy 62.49% Rewa City has population 235, 442 as per census 2011male constitute 124,634 and females, 110,788. Rewa city has total 185291,literates in which male 103,599 and female 81,692 approx. average literacy87.74% male 92.91% and female 81.95%.Analysis of Data- Clear and easy statics method has adopted for analysis ofdata provided by respondents through interview method, to present correctthoughts of respondents behaviors and mentality, that has made in the form ofsimple and under stable through of tabulation for the analysis of data. Thewhole research has divided into three chapters first reveals the introductionthere for second chapter causes of dowry, third chapter related to evil effectsof dowry and the last chapter is passed on the conclusion.The Description- Causes of Dowry-1. Aspiration to establish marital Relation with Rich Family: Girlsparents are always interested to giving their daughters in marriage to well todo families. Many of them do not want to take a risk in arranging the marriageof their daughter with a Boy who belongs to a poor family just because the boyis good. They look in to the future prospects of their daughter, her comforts,her pleasure, her satisfaction and so on. High market value of the boys belongingto rich and high social status families has caused the amount of dowry to goup.22. False conceptions of social status: - Many a time girls parentsthemselves offer huge amount of money as “dowry gift” just to exhibit therehigh social status and parade their economic capacity.3. Impact of the vicious circle which Dowry has created: - The practiceof dowry has become very dominant because many parents demand dowry onbehalf of their sons just to compensate the dowry they have given whilecelebrating the marriage of their daughters. Sometimes, individuals who areagainst this system are also compelled to accept as few thousands or lacks ofrupees in cash as dowry only because they have to spend an equal amount ormore on their sisters’ or daughters marriage. Thus the vicious circle of dowrystarts operating and individuals get entangled with it, whether they desire it oroppose it.Evil Effects of Dowry- Practice of dowry which assumed the form of aninstitution over the years has caused a lot of hardships to a large number ofpeople in the Indian society, at one time, dowry was being given willinging bythe bride’s parents, and it was being “accepted” by the grooms party as a kind


of voluntary gift. But today dowry has come to be “demanded” though thepractice of dowry leads to various evil consequences.31. Economic Burden on bride’s family: Dowry has become a greateconomic burden to the middle and lower middle families. People belonging tothese classes spend on maintaining the family standard, in providing thenecessities of life, educating children, and meeting various social obligations.Hence to arrange the marriage of their daughters they have to borrow moneyor sell a piece of their property or mortgage valuable articles of the family.2. Dowry Harassment and murders: - Women are ill treated disrespectedman handled, tortured and subject to all sorts’ cruelties in the name of dowry.Very often, our daily papers flash news about the tragic results of the dowrysystem in which the newly married girls are always the victims of harassment,violence, murder and suicide.3. Psychological crises and emotional disturbances In the family :-(a) Girls with strong character and self dignity may refuse to marry a boy

who demands dowry. Some of them may be forced to remain spinstersthroughout their lives. Forcible suppression of sex urge may make themto become irritable, frustrated, disgusted and pessimistic.

(b) Some courageous women resist the way in which they are treated atthe house of their husbands even after the payment of dowry. This typeof resistance may spoil their mental peace and cause continuousirritation.4The following five responders have taken as a sample from the study

area. S.No. Respondent Percentage

1 Dowry Harassment 30% 2 Economic burden on brides family 20% 3 Child marriage 20% 4 Demand of dowry 20% 5 High Social status 10%

Total - 100% Thus it shows that in Muslim Families in there are also huge demand of

dowry which sometimes causes deaths, harassments, Divorce, suicide andalso similar cases like that dowry has covered all the religions in its net.Conclusion- It is clear that the dowry system in our country has become akind of business deal a big bargain in matrimony. It is unspiritual and is devoidof ethical values. It is a stigma associated with the Indian morital system; ithas become equally rampant in the other religions communities of India. It hasmade a few young women to remain as spinsters, it is high time that is stopped.The successful abolition of the practice of dowry would be land mark towardssocial reform. But is not an easy task. Some of the highly educated andprofessionally well placed individuals including the foreign returned young menare clining on to it. Determined efforts should be made on all India basis to


combat this problem. Social and moral consciousness of the people, educationand economic independence of women, effective enforcement of legislationagainst dowry system, civil marriage, community weddings, launching of theyouth movements against the dowry system or some of the mean of counteringthis practice. The sooner it disappears the better it will be for the progress ofthis society.======================References-1. Shankar Rao C.N. 2011, Sociology of Indian society S.Chand and Company

Ltd. Ram nagar, New Delhi, 7th edition.P.P.6472. I Bid P.P. 6483. Shankar Rao C.N. 1990 Principles of sociology, S. Chand and Company Ltd.

Ram nagar New Delhi, 19th P.P. 8564. I Bid P.P. 6505. I Bid P.P. 650-6516. I. Pathak 1990 Women and family violence, arihant publishers jaipur 1st edition7. R. Kumari 1989 Dowry vicious in India Radiant Publishers New Delhi.



[email protected]





(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)


ISSN 0975-4083


==========================================================Abstract- The Main aim of R.T.I i.e. "Right to information" is Transparencyin the Working of public Authorities. The Authorities are accountable tothe pubic with regard to their aims, progrmmes, polices regardingadministrative and financial decisions .The greater secrecy In workingdoes not speak well rather reflects badly because it gives birth tocorruption, whereas working in openness makes the administration soundto proceed on right line because it will have to face obstructive criticismof the public and will lose trust.==========================================================

Impact of RTI in Administrative Culture in India(With special reference to Punjab state)

* Rama

===========================* Research Scholar, Department of Public Administration, Kurukshetra

University, Kurukshetra

It also strengthens the foundation of democracy because governmenthas to work as per public views. The essential ingredients of a democraticgovernment are its programmes and policies which must be known to thepublic. The secrecy of the same will lose public trust and there must not onlybe a hue and cry to oppose the same but country can face strikes and other illattitude of the public. The “Right to Information” will help the public to getinformation /documents from the administration and will know about thefunctioning of govt. Thus they will become vigilant to the working of govt. andgovt. Will also keep in mind the legitimate needs and grievances of publicwhich will bring administration and public near to each other. This will furthercheck the administration not to maintain secrecy in any functional decisionwhich will improve quality of working. This will also strengthen the grassrootsof democracy because people participation will be must in local governess inany kind of administrative, financial decisions. Thus mistakes, Frauds will beavoided. In India this Right to information issue attracted the attention ofgovernment during loke sabha election of 1977, but could not achieve anyprogress for a period of 12 years when in Dec 1989 the then primeminister sh.V.P singh assured the public for giving them this right so that there should betransparency and openness in the working of the govt. and the public must beaware of that. Instead of giving such like strong commitment by theprimeminster the issue could not get speedy finalization because of political


change in the country. At last in Oct.2005; RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT’came in to existence in country.Punjab Govt. Right to Information Rules 2005- Punjab govt. framed rulesfor the implementation of “RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT”. These rulescame into force w.e.f. 12.10.05, making provision for submission of applicationfor required information/ document under R.T.I., fee to be deposited, modeof deposit, time with in which application is to be disposed off, procedure forapproaching appellant authority and procedure to be followed by them.The implementation of this Act in Punjab can be seen from the report of stateinformation commission (SIC).some problems were highlighted in the reportson which survey was conducted by the research staff of the PGRS and majorproblem noticed by them were considered by the second A.R.C. They gavethe recommendations and suggestions as under.• The system of deposit of fees should be simplified to provide for

acceptance of cash by the PIOS.• Single window system at District Level to be declared as APIOS

acceptance of all departments.• The district unites of different department could be considered as separate

public authority.• Information to be made public for examination every year.These are summarized as under:a. Standardization of modules for mandatory disclosure of

information- The information to be disclosed will be discussed andreviewed annually by the concerned department in consultation withSIC.

b. Revisiting the present practice of appointment of RTI officials-To minimize transaction costs, the following have been authorized todeal such application and appeals.

APIOs: District Suvidha centers to be the single windowAPIOs for all govt. departments.PIOs: The District head of the department and one of the senior most personsin other public authorities to be the PIO in most cases.This will ensure speedy response, proper accountability and systematicfeedback.Appellate authorities: Head of the department the CEO, the electedchairperson to be the appellate authority in case of departments, Autonomousbodies and rural and urban PRLs respectively.Structure of fees: To be accepted in cash and allowed to be utilized on RTIrelated work.District level monitoring of RTI implementation: District grievancecommittees should have a standing agenda on RTI implementation. Review ofbasic performance parameter, number of cases filled with in the year and


cases disposed of well in time.The current status of implementation of Act in Punjab can be seen from SICreport and state govt. website. The latest position as on 28th Feb. 2013 is givenas under.Status of Complaints and Appeals- The status of Complaint/Appeal (cases)under the Right to Information Act, 2005 before the State InformationCommission Punjab as on 28 February 2013 is as under:

Year Balance Received Total (Received + Balance

of Last Year)

Disposed of

Balance

2005 - 20 20 - 20 2006 20 1083 1103 624 479 2007 479 2900 3379 2429 950 2008 950 3854 4804 3058 1746 2009 1746 5098 6844 5543 1301 2010 1301 5101 6402 5522 880 2011 880 5279 6159 4870 1289 2012 1289 5667 6956 5413 1543 2013 Month Monthly

Institution Disposal

January 868 624 February 542 508

For the information and benefit of the public, this information is updated everymonth on the Commission’s website: www.infocommpunjab.comBecause of implementation of this Act:-1. Moga-kotkapura bypass which was in worst condition is now one of the

best roads of Punjab with flyovers.2. The highest penalty of 50.000 in two cases (Rs.25.000 in each case) for

not supplying the information under RTI and then not attending to theappellate authority has been imposed on sh. Manjeet singh project officerof Punjab house fed society. Orders are also passed for deposit ofpenalty within ten days failing the same shall be recovered from his pay.

The govt. should make aware the public about the various provisions ofthis Act through electronic media, paper media and other adds etc, becausethis is a revolutionary law and main institution for providing information/documents on demands covering all major areas of citizen demands andinterest. Last but not the least the administration should know that law is notonly their commands but it is also command of the people because law isabove all. Their corrupt practices are not only harmful for economy of thecountry but endangers national security. This Right To Information Act isweapon in the hands of public to check mall practices of the administration.======================References-1. Anand,V. Eshwar,RTI under Attack, The Tribune, Jalandhar, August 17,2010


2. http:en. Wikipedia.org./wiki/right-to -information- Act-20053. http:/ www.right to information.gov.4. htt://rti.gov.in/rtiact.htmhttp://www.bank of baroda.com/right to information

Act.asp5. http://www.th.gov.in/rti.-act6. http://www.gighttoinformation.org/punjab.html7. http://wikimediafoundation .org/wiki/donate/le-accessed on 20.01.2011.8. Kashyap, Rajan, its bank & its bite, The Tribune, jalnadhar, Augst 17,2010.9. Right to information Act, from Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia,10. Right to information from www.ndtv.com/rti/sucess-tories.asp-accessed on

25.01.2011.11. www.infocommpunjab.com

ISSN 0975-4083






[email protected]








Environmental Degradation Causes, Consequencesand Preventive Measures

* B. P. Singh** Gulzar Qadir Ganaie

==========================================================Abstract- The role of social, economic, industrial and natural factors onthe degradation of environment in general is analysed. Social, economicand natural factors are playing a vital role in degrading the quality ofenvironment. This article provides analyses of environmental degradationscenario under varying intensities of natural factors in general andanthropological factors in particular.==========================================================

===========================* Department of Geography, Government T. R. S. College Rewa (M.P.)** M.Phil Geography, Second Semester, Government T. R. S. College Rewa (M.P.)

Methodology- This paper is totally worked both out on both primary andsecondary sources of data collection. The primary sources of data collectionmostly consist of observation.Objectives- The main objectives of this paper are:1.To asses the human impact on environment geographically.2.To describe the various human activities causing environmental degradation.3.To find out the strategies for the conservation or prevention of environment.Introduction- Environmental degradation is the deterioration of the environmentthrough depletion of resources such as air, water and soil, the destruction ofecosystems and the extinction of wildlife. It is a process through which thenatural environment is compromised in some way, reducing biological diversityand the general health of the environment. This can be entirely natural in originor it can be accelerated or caused by human activities. Many internationalorganisations recognize environmental degradation as one of the major threatfacing the planet. Since humans have only been given one earth to work with,and if the environment becomes irreparably compromised, it could mean theend of human existence.Causes and consequences- In general the environment is degraded in twoways:• Natural factors• Human factorsNatural factors- Many natural phenomena adversely affect the environment.


There is no role of man in this type of degradation. Some important agents ofenvironmental degradation are as under:Volcanoes and earthquakes- volcanism plays a significant role in deterioratingthe quality of environment. All though it has some positive effects, but theimmediate effect is negative. The heart and burning lava with steam and manyother types of burning material are ejected out from the interior of earth on tothe surface of earth that is covered with fertile soil. The whole area is coveredwith ejected material thus eroding the soil layer.Floods and Droughts- Floods and droughts are natural hazards that areassociated with the rainfall. Heavy rain falls leads to floods because the rivervalley is unable to hold the water on the other hand, a drought is caused by thefailure of rainfall. The soil properties, plant and animal life and agriculture isthe worst hit by these calamities.Soil Erosion- Soil erosion also plays an important role in environmentdegradation. The adverse effects of soil erosion are :a. Gullies and ravines are formed which make the area undulating and thus

unsuitable for the human activity.b. Soil erosion also causes frequent floods.c. Plants are uprooted because of removal of topsoild. Landslides bring heavy damage to the area.2. Human factor: Role of human factors is more servers in affecting theenvironment. Damage caused by natural factors in recovered with the passageof time but damage caused factors is not easily recovered. Major human factorsthat cause environmental degradation are;-a. Deforestation:- Environment is worst affected by deforestation. Vastareas of forests are cleared for various human activities like settlement,agriculture, pastures, industries etc. Deforestation severely affected the climateconditions of the whole earth. Soil erosion is the immediate effect ofdeforestation. Other adverse affect of soil erosion are decreased soil fertility,bad land topography, increase in temperature, destruction of animal habitats.b. Air pollution :- A large amount of fossil fuels is burnt by the Industriesand the transport. After the burning of these fuels a verity of chemicals andparticulate matter are realised in to the air. These pollutants together causeswide spread damage to the environment. It badly damages the trees and soil(acid rain and smog) and also affects the animal life of water.c. Water pollution:- Pollution of water is also one of the critical problemsof 20th century. Main sources of river water contamination are sewage disposaland industrial waste disposal. Also pesticides leach down with water andcontaminate the ground water. Polluted water severely affects the life in waterbodies. Growth of fish and water animals is retarded.d. Ozone depletion:- Ozone sphere is the thin layer in the upperstratosphere, its major role is to block the harmful ultraviolet rays from reaching


earth. It has been proved that chloro fluoro carbons (cfcs) are realised fromthe refrigeration systems, air conditioning systems, spray cans etc. In thestratosphere the react with the ozone gas in this process the chlorine gas isrealised which reacts with the ozone gas and breaks apart the ozone moleculesthus reducing them in the stratosphere. As a result, the UV radiation is able toreach the surface of earth. These rays can cause skin cancer, cataract andaffects the immune system of the body.

Environmental degradation

Natural factors Human factors

Volcanism Floods Soil Deforestation Air Water Ozone& & Erosion Pollution PollutionDepletion

Earthquakes DroughtsPrevention- Man must learn that earth does not have infinite resources. Thelimited resources of environment must be conserved. Efforts should be madeto reuse the resources in a scientific and creative manner. Man is an intelligentcreature therefore; he is capable of devising new strategies which can interlinkthe environmental conservation and economic development. Both can go handin hand. The ministry of environment and forests (MOEF) is responsible forprotection, conservation, and development of environment. The ministry worksin close collaboration with other ministries, state, govt’s , pollution control boardsand a number of scientific and technical institutions etc. Environmental(protection) Act 1986 is the key legislation governing environment management.Other important legislations include forest (conservation) Act, 1980 and thewildlife (protection) Act, 1972 in short people must be motivated towards theconservation of the environment. All rich and poor, literate and illiterate, youngand old, man and woman must be involved to protect the environment.Conclusion- At last I may conclude this topic with these lines “i request allpeople that we should join hands together so that we can protect our environmentfrom future degradation’’. Don’t be afraid to give your best to all small jobs.Every time you conquer one it makes you much stronger. If you do the littlejobs well, the big jobs will tend to take care of themselves. For this purpose,the nations of the world particularly developed ones have to cooperate withineach other in controlling and putting a check on environment degradation, sothe need of the hour is to formulate and frame such laws, Which will notensure only the future survival possible, but will make the present habitat Safeand sound.======================References-


1. Rajaram K ,(2003), Geography spectrum books, New Delhi.2. Aggarwal R.N,(2000), "Pioneer refresher course in Geography" Dhanpat Roy

and co, Delhi.3. Jeelani M, (2004), "Essentials of environment studies" Bismah books, bemina

srinagr.4. Hussain M,(2005), "Geography of J&K" Rawat publications, jaipur.5. Wasil Farooq, (2009), "Environmental Education" evergreen publications new

Delhi.6. Singh S, (1998) "Environmental Geography" prayag pustak Bhawan publications

Allahabad.7. Chakravorty p .Bhatt, (2oo4) "Environmental awareness" M.P Hindi granth

Academy publication, Bhopal.





[email protected]








Solid Waste Management Plan Ujjain

* Amita Singhal** Dinesh Singhal

==========================================================Abstract- Solid wastes can be defined as those wastes which have beenrejected for further uses and which can neither be transported by waterinto streams nor can readily escape into the atmosphere. Any unwantedor discorted material from residential, commercial, industrial, mining andagricultural activities thus causes environmental problems may be termedas solid wastes.==========================================================

===========================* Professor, Chemistry, Government Kalidas Girls College, Ujjain** Professor Commerce, Government Kalidas Girls College, Ujjain

Ujjain is situated on the right bank of River Shipra. It is a very holy cityfor the Hindus, a site for the triennial Kumbh mela. There are many greatmythological legend about Ujjain city. Apart from mythological legends, thecity has a long distinguished history. It was governed by the likes of Vikramadityaand Ashoka. Kalidas wrote his souls stirring poetry here. Today, Ujjainrepresents an interesting blend of an age old legacy and the modern day lifestyle.The population of Ujjain city shown in table no.01

Table01Papulation of Ujjain City.

No. Census Population Decadal Growth 1 1951 1,29.817 59.74% 2 1961 1,44,161 11.00% 3 1971 2,08561 44.70% 4 1981 2,82,207 35.31% 5 1991 3,62,633 28.50% 6 2001 4,30,427 18.69% 7 2011 5,15,215 19.69

Solid waste management is an urban service that requires a log otattention and is one of very important obligatory functions of any urban localbody. The Ujjain municipal corporation estimates that 160T/day of solid wasteis generated in the urban area, waste generation estimates. Suggest that about83% of generated waste is removed. There is a strong decline in the standardof services with respect to collection, transportation and disposal. Presently


municipal waste is simply dumped at MR-V Agar Road trenching ground,about 4 km from the city Corporation data, discussion with UMC (UjjainMunicipal Corporation) authorities and visits to the disposal site all indicateinadequate solid waste management. Municipal waste as collected is mixed innature including bio-waste, night soil waste and septic tank sludge. Storagefacilities are inadequate.The overall waste generation and related available facilities and equipmentwith UMC are summarized in table No.02

Table02Solid waste details (Ujjain City).

No. Waste generation source Waste tons Proportion a Domestic 66.00 41.51% b Commercial & Trade 50.00 31.45% c Industrial 5.0 3.14% d Hospital 1.0 0.63% e Construction and Demolition 30.00 18.87% f Others (Floating population) 7.00 4.40% Total 159.00

The above table shows that the major contribution of solid waste aredomestic and commercial. Which combinable account for more than 70% ofsolid waste . The city has adequate dustbins covering nearly 85% of the cityarea. The average dustbin spacing is nearly 500 mts the expenditure per capitalon conservancy comes out to be Rs. 2.5 for every meter. One of the mostimportant functions of city of Ujjain is to cater to religious pursuits. A largenumber of persons come to the city during religions fairs such as Simhasthaand Cultural functions like ‘Kalidas Samaroh’. The current rate of solid wastegeneration in UMC is about 150 tones per day. The waste generation rate in2021 is estimated to be about 456 gpcd. The total municipal solid waste generatedin 2021 by a projected population of 6,88,000 is estimated to be about 300 tonsper day.Suggestions- The day-to-day management of solid wastes is a complex andexpensive activity. Solid waste management is important to health, environmentalprotection natural resources management and sustainable development.Developed countries have adopted sophisticated management practicesimporting the same in low-income countries is not economically, and technicallyviable and socially acceptable.1. To Implement proper solid waste management, various aspects have tobe considered such as - a) Source reduction b) On site storage c) Collectionand transfer d) Processing technique f) Disposal.

The flow chart shows the interrelationship between the functionalelements in solid waste management


Waste generation

Storage

Collection

Transfer and transport Processing and recovery

Disposal

2. Management strategies should be in sucha) Protection of environmental health and quality.b) Supporting the efficiency and productivity of economy.c) Generation of employment and income.

3. Proper incentives should be given to the staff to treatment of SWM.4. Proper maintenance of vehicles and other equipments.5. Old vehicles should be replaced.6. The corporation should involve NGOs and community groups, tostrengthen SWM system in the city.Conclusion- Economic development is an important factor affecting the solidwaste generation. Over population is a major cause of environmental imbalance,Growing population, fast urbanization, industrialization and consumption patternscombine the waste management problem in India and World.======================References-1. H.Y. Jadhav 'Environmental pollution' Sterling Pub. House, Mumbai.2. P.A. Koli and V.V. Mahamuni 'Environmental Economics of Solid Waste

Management', University Book House, Jaipur.3. M. Karpagam 'Environmental Economics' Sterling Pub. Pvt. Ltd., Delhi.4. City Development Plan, Ujjain Page 75, 76, 1515. H. Kaur 'Environmental Chemistry' Pragati Prakashan Meerut.6. B.K. Sharma, Environmental Chemistry Goel Publ. House Merrut.


Eco-Tourism Status of Bandhavgarh National Park-A Case Study

* Neerja Khare** Shikha Dwivedi

==========================================================Abstract- Bandhavgarh National Park is one of the most famous parksand widely sought after destinations to wildlife lovers. Because of itsunique nature and easy sightings of Tigers. Every year a number of Indianas well as foreign tourists visit Bandhavgarh. In 2005-06 seasons about28300 Indian and 4500 foreign tourists visited Bandhavgarh. The incomegenerated uses 1.53 park for betterment of Tourists facilities andImplementation of management activities. Present studies deals withManage and Eco-tourism status of Bandhavgarh national park, around25000 tourists visit his park every year. However, Eco-tourism inBandhavgarh is subordinated to the main objective of wildlifeconservation. The management believes that the visitors should beprovided a meaningful exposure to the protected Area so that they canappreciate India's magnificent natural heritage and conservation benefits.Key words- Eco-tourism, Bandhavgarh, National Park.==========================================================

===========================* Department of zoology Govt. P.G. College, Satna (M.P.)** Department of Zoology Govt. College Nagoud Dist. Satna (M.P.)

Introduction- Bandhavgarh National Park is one of the most sought afterwilderness destinations in India. Tourism in Bandhavgarh had its modestbeginnings in the late seventies. Present day wildlife tourism or Eco-Tourismis a result of evolution and not a result of revolution. Subsequently, it receivedan impetus with the improved facilities and publicity. In tune with the objectivesof wildlife conservation and project tiger, tourism is allowed on a limited andregulated basis in the National Park. Bandhavgarh has the unique distinctionof having highest density of tigers in wilderness probably anywhere in theworld. Eco-tourism in the Bandhavgarh is a balance of conservation educationand entertainment with the active participation of local people. The under layingprinciple is that the tourism should be ecologically and socio-culturallysustainable.Objective- Consistent with the four broad objectives of the Ecotourism thatprimarily lay emphasis on protection and conservation of natural resources


but not in the utilization or exploitation of national heritage, the objectives oftourism set for Bandhavgarh National Park.(a) To enhance the Eco-Tourism experience among the visitors bypreventing informed wilderness experience.(b) To promote conservation awareness among the visitors and the localmasses through conservation education to elicit their support to the cause ofconservation in general and of management of the protected area in particularby enabling them to view a cross section of protected area values.(c) To promote the interest of indigenous communities who are the majorstakeholders, relating to tourism linked economy.Material and Methods- The study was carried out to a certain the status ofEco-tourism in Bandhavgarh National Park in relation to a wild life and touristand impact of ecotourism. The study involves collection of data from primaryand secondary sources. To collect the data, investigators visited various Touristsinterest places of Bandhvgarh National Park in year 2000-01 to 2005-06.

Table 1Tourists Influx and Proceeds during 2000-01 2005-06

Year Indian Tourists

Foreign Tourists

Total Tourists

% of foreigners

Proceeds (Rs.

Lakh) 2000-01 9994 2299 12293 18.70 33.20

2001-02 13803 1729 15532 11.13 39.87

2002-03 15795 1965 17760 11.06 46.64

2003-04 16373 3221 19594 16.43 55.32

2004-05 21494 3812 25306 15.06 127.67

2005-06 28300 4520 32800 13.71 153.00

Fig. 1-Number of Indian & Foreign Tourists Visiting Bandhavgarh

(During the last 6 years)

9994

1380315795 16373

21494

28300

2299 1729 1965 3221 3812 4520

0

5000

10000

15000

20000

25000

30000

2000-01 2001-02 2002-03 2003-04 2004-05 2005-06

Indian Tourists Foreign Tourists


Result and Discussion-Tourism zone- It is only 105 Sq. km. of Tala ranges, which constitutes around24% of the total park area. It has very rich in floral and faunal diversity andretained it pristine beauty because of the protection it enjoyed since long.The area with hills and the valleys scattered all around interspersed withgreen valleys and marshes while in plains meadows are dotted through outthe area with freely wandering wild animals is a paradise for and wildlifelovers. There are 23 spots of tourists interest including Bandhavgarh fort.Eco-Tourism status in Bandhavgarh National Park - Though Ecotourismis an important aspect it is only subordinate to the main objective of wildlifeconservation. Every year the park remains open for tourist from Ist Octobersto 30th June or rains whichever is earlier. The average annual tourists influxis around 25000. During peak i.e. in the months of November and Decembernearly 4000 tourists visit the park in a month and during weekends and holidaysthe number some times goes more than 300 visitors/day. Foreigners constitutearound 16% of total visitors. They are mostly from Great Britain, France,Germany and USA. Their best preferred season to visit is winters Novemberto mid March to avoid the wrath of the sun and enjoy the pleasant weather ofIndia. Bandhavgarh received the National Tourism award of the Ministry ofTourism, Govt. of India for the year 2003-04 as the best maintained TouristsFriendly National Park.

It is highlighted that very tourists destination has an off day in a weekbut there is no such provision here and the park is opened continuously for 9months. Therefore, it is very much essential to declare a day off in a week sothat the staff and departmental elephants engaged in tourism as well as thetourism zone get some respite.Timing for the park visit- Timings for the Park excursions will very withseasons considering the sunrise and sun set as visitors are not allowed, beforedown and beyond dusk.The timing being followed are as under :1. 1st November to 15th February 06-30 hrs to 11.00 hrs

14.30 hrs to 17.30 hrs.2. 15st February to 31st March 06-00 hrs to 10.30 hrs

15.30 hrs to 18.30 hrs.3. 1st April to 30th June 05.30 hrs to 10.00 hrs

16.00 hrs to 19.00 hrs.The above timings should be displayed at entry paints for the convenience

of the visitors and to regulate the park entry and exits.Places of tourists interests - Some of the places of Tourists interests areas under :1. Siddha Baba : The Holy Meadow .The marshy meadow is the merger of hills, grassland and riparian zone creates


an edge, which results in good sighting of wild fauna especially Sambar andChital.2. Chakradhara : The sprawling Meadow.Surrounded by the hillocks, this marshy meadow is rich in both flora & fauna.A proliferating fern, availability of food, water and cover makes it an idealplace for the sighting of wild animals including Tigers.3. Gopalpur : A place for Bird watching.Approach with a slow drive may give moments of memorable sighting of avianfauna like Kingfishers, Storks, lapwings & Stilts.4. Shesh Shayya : Origin of River Charanganga.The Statue of Lord Vishnu, the preserver, reclining on the seven-hoodedserpent dating back to 10th century AD, is the classic example of thearchitectural treasure of the past. The vicinity around is rich in fruit bearingtrees. The life line of the park is well named as Charanganga as this riveroriginates and flows through the feet, charan of Lord Vishun. A species ofcane brakes is present on the slopes of Bandhavgarh hillock at Shesh shayya.5. Bari Gupha : Ancient Monument of Past.This is the biggest man made cave of the Park dating back to 10th centuryA.D. Apart from its archaeological importance this cave is the abode of avariety of bats.6. Ketkiha : Pendanus Point.This wet patch of aromatic plant “Pendanus” (Kewra) in the shadow of loftyJamun and Arjun trees is the real treasure of floristic wealth of the Reserve.7. Bhitari Bah : Tranquility in Wilderness.A drive along the meadow induces thrills of jungle. An important medicinalplant Bunch (Achorus calamus) is found here.8. Three Cave Point : The Archeological Remains .These caves, visible from Ganesh hillock road, are the mute testimony of richhistorical past. Wild animals for shelter especially by “ Sloth Bear” now usethese caves.9. Sita Mandap : Nature’s creation.This rock intact over a stream in the shape of a bridge, gives an impression ofa ‘Mandap’ (arch). The famous tigress “Sita” got her name after this place.10. Ghorademon : The Deep Gorge.This narrow and deep gorge is the creation of geological process.11. Rampur Hillock : Also called Photographer’s point.Panoramic view of undulating terrain of the Tiger Reserve is clear from thispoint. Photographers may capture the Sylvan beauty of Sal and Bamboo forests.12. Andhyari Jhiriya : Sparkling Stream in Darkness.Reward by lofty Mango Arjun and saptaparni (Alstion scholaris) trees thisstrean gives of a feeling of awesome wilderness.13. Rajbehra : The BandhainiView .


This marshy meadow is the origin of River Damnar. One can have the clearview of Bandhaini hillock from here. Sprawling meadow with water overflowingover the stop dam almost through out the year abours many vultures & herdsof Chital, Sambar and Wild Pigs.14. Climber’s Point : Nature’s BeautyWoody climbers of Butea superba and Bahunia wahlii amidst the lush greenSal tress offer spectacular view for the tourists.15. Sehra : The Fort View :This is the biggest meadow of the Reserve. In the month of June breedingpair of Saras, Crane can be seen in and around this meadow. It harbours theinsectivore plant Drosera. One captures the majestic view of Bandhavgarhhillock from here.16. Mahaman Pond : Place to Quench the Thirst.This waterhole surrounded by dense bamboo clumps is an ideal place to watchvariety of herbivores and as well as some carnivores.17. Charger Point : In memory of Charger.“Charger” the beloved male tiger of Bandhavgarh, dominated the tourism zonefor a decade. He died on 29th Sept. 2000 & rests here in peace.18. Dinosaur Rock : Nature’s WonderRocky outcrop surrounded by greenery. Reminds the “Jurassic Age’Bandhavgarh Fort : The fort of brother.It is a treasure of archeology and history. Its history remains obscure withonly sparse but tantalizing glimpses in to the past afforded by the fascinatinginscriptions written in Brahmi script in the excavated caves one can climbthe fort on foot from shesha Shayya.Bamera Dam : A scenic place in Panpatha Sanctuary, 12 km. from Tala. It isplace to watch variety of birds.Approach/Access to Badhavgarh (Gohdi Gate) :Entrance to the park is located near Tala. It is a small village located on Umaria-Rewa State Highway. During 2004-05, another existing gate at Gohdi, theother end of the tourism zone has been opened for entry to reduce pressurefrom Tala side. However, it has been noticed that only few visitors haveentered through this gate so for. The Park management should encourage andwork out some modalities so that entry from Gohdi gate increases and pressurefrom Tala side is eased out. The approach to Gohdi is as under.By Road : Private transport buses are available from Umaria Distt. HeadQuarter (27 km), Amarpatan (75 km), Shahdol (92 km) and Rewa (155 km).By Rail : Nearest railway station are Jabalpur (159 km). Katni (97 Km) andSatna (115 Km.) on West Central Railway and Umaria (27 Km ) on SouthEastern Railway.By Air : Jabalpur (159 km) and Khajuraho (232 km) are the nearest airports.From Khajuraho it is a 5 hrs. drive to Tala via Satna-Barhi and Khitoli.


======================References-1. Frame, M. (1981). The National Parks- A plan for the future. National Parks.

Nov/Dec. 1981. 10-13.2. Gilbert, V.C. (1976). Biosphere reserves and National Parks 1 (2) : 12-14.3. Haber, W. (1971). Bayerischer wild National park. fedral Repulic of Germoney,

Biological Conservation. 3: 313-314.4. Jain, D.K. (1977) Bandhavgarh National park in Madhya Pradesh Tourism and

Wild life.5. Shukla, S.M. (1981). Bandhavgarh National park : A case Study, M.Phil.

Dissertation, A.P.S. University, Rewa (M.P.)



[email protected]





(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)


ISSN 0975-4083


Adjustment Patterns of Scheduled Caste andScheduled Tribe College Students

*Jago Choudhary==========================================================Abstract- The present investigation aims to explore the variations inadjustment-patterns of the most depressed classed of our society-thescheduled caste (SC) and the scheduled tribe (ST) college students ofBihar. The study was conducted on a sample of 200 degree level malestudents (100 SC+100 ST) belonging to both urban and rural areas.Mohsin-shamshad adaptation of Bell Adjustment inventory was appliedto measure adjustment pattern. A separate personal data sheet was alsoused to assess background factors. Analysis of data by using t-ratioindicates significant statistical differences on home, health, social,emotional and overall adjustment scores of the SC & ST respondents.Some implications of the finding have also been discussed.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant Professor, Department of Psychology Jagdam College,Chapra

Introduction:Adjustment is the core of all human interactions. The variableand adaptive behaviour by which the organism and its environment are kept inbalance is known as adjustment. Development of adjustment-patterns withinan individual or group is influenced, apart from other thing, by the social-culturalfactors namely, caste, social-economic status (SES) of the family, parentaleducation, cultural norms, urban and rural background etc. The social-culturalbackground may be either advantageous or disadvantageous. There are studieswhich support that the persons or group belonging to the advantageous and thedisadvantageous groups differ markedly in their adjustment patterns. Apparentlyscheduled caste (SC) and scheduled tribe (ST) people are extremely backwardand disadvantageous in respect of family situations, education, economiccondition, social status and political power, but they, too, differ significantly oncertain cultural points and consequent adjustment patterns. The SC people,though having the heritage of Hindu culture, have to suffer the caste inferiority.They are kept alienated from the general mass, living still at the outskirts ofvillage without land and job. The social-economic conditions of the tribal’s tooare no better than the SC people. They are also alienated from the generalmass, living in forest area and holding the aboriginal characteristics with taboos


and totams of Adimanav. This restricts their mobility to modern changes ascompared to the SC people. Thus, differences in the cultural background makethe SC and ST people behave and adjust differently to the demands of theirsociety. Very few studies have attempted to highlight this point. The presentstudy intends to fill this gap,Methodology:Tools used-(i) In order to measure adjustment pattern, Mohsin-shamshad adaptation

(Hindi) of bell adjustment inventory (modified vision, 1987) was used.(ii) in order to assess the background factors of the respondents, a ‘personal

information, especially prepared for the purpose was used.Sample :-200 college students belonging to SC and ST from Siwan chapra,Gopalgang, Ranchi, Daltonganj and Hazaribagh districts were purposefullyselected and approached for the study. All respondents were male degreecollage students. Initially three hundred collage students were approached butthe final responses complete in all respects were available in 200 cases only(100 SC+100ST). Distribution of SC and ST sample area-wise is as follows:

SC (100)

Rural (50) Urban (50)ST (100)

Rural (50) Urban (50)

Hypothesis:-The following hypothesis was framed. It was hypothesis thatSC and ST collage students would differ markedly with respect to their home,health, social, emotional and over-all adjustment.Results & Discussion- After the careful administration of the tests on thesample above, the obtained data were analysed by using t-ratio. The results(area-wise) are shown in the tables below:

Table-1Comparison of ST and ST respondents on Home Adjustment

Group N Mean SD t df Sig. level

SC 100 10.00 6.24

3.28 198 .01 St 100 7.51 4.44


Higher mean scores of respondents (10.00) indicate poor adjustments inrespect of home as compared to ST counterparts (7, 51). The difference maybe explained due to the fact that the home situation of SC respondents is notable to provide conditions lending to better relations and satisfaction. All SCpeople suffer from inferior caste prejudices embedded in Hindu system, whereasST people are free from caste humiliation.

Table-2Comparison of & ST respondents on Health Adjustment.


SC 100 9.43 4.95

8.14 198 .01 St 100 7.07 3.99

As pre table, poor adjustment of SC respondents speak of their

impoverished health conditions, e.g., dwelling in slum areas of the city or inoutskirts of the village Further, the food in-take of the SCs are found to beinferior to the tribal’s (Singh, 1982). On general habits of cleanliness, bathing,clothing etc. We find tribal’s relatively superior. Thus, on health conditions thedifference between SC and STs is significant at .01 levels.

Table-3Comparison of SC and ST on social adjustment scores.


SC 100 11.32 5.16

2.10 198 .01 St 100 12.75 4.35

As is evident from the table, SC respondents are found to be superior to

STs in respect of their social adjustment; Socio-political participation of SCs inBihar has profoundly increased in recent years as compared to the tribal’s.

Table-4Comparison of SC &ST on Emotional adjustment scores.


SC 100 10.51 4.74

5.00 198 .01 St 100 12.75 6.45


Table indicates that SC respondents are better adjusted emotionally StCounterparts (.01 level). In face of crisis SCs Do not feel as much do not feelas much depressed as the STs Feel. Manifestations of extremist behavioursamong SC people are contrary to Depression.

Table-5Comparison of the SC & ST s on overall adjustment scores’


SC 100 40.10 12.14

4.88 198 .01 St 100 47.19 8.18

As per the table it is clearly established that SC respondents have

superior adjustive patterns in matters of over-all adjustment (.01 level).Conclusion- It may finally be concluded that SC and ST student thoughtbackward and depressed, show over–all difference in respect of their adjustiveresponses. The reasons are mainly social-cultural variations. Frustratingconditions of the SC make them more prone to maladjustive behaviours ascompared to the tribals. The present study, therefore, alerts the social andpolitical leaders to take note of this while preparing policy for future welfare ofthe depressed class.======================References-1. Moshin, s.m.- shamshad Hussain (1987)- Hindi adaptation of bell Adjustment

Inventory,1934.2. Singh, R.B. (1982)-Food habits of the tribal’s, jr.of Applied psychology.3. Vyaktigat Suchna (1985)- postgraduate department of psychology, Ranchi

University, Ranchi.


The Price Rise and Senior Citizens' Perception: AStudy of Aurangabad City

* I. M. Farooqui==========================================================Abstract-The rising prices always directly or indirectly affect the behaviorof consumers. The present paper attempts to gauge the affect of risingprices and their impact on buying decision of senior citizens a veryimportant segment of consumers. The perception of this class of consumershas been studied considering different aspects like price level, price controletc.The analysis show significant details about the perception ofconsumers during these days of inflationary trend.Keywords- Buying Behaviour, Senior Citizen, Rising Prices.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant Professor, Department of Commerce & Management Science,

Maulana Azad College, Aurangabad (MS)

Introduction- The consumer is rightly the king in this set up of global businessand borderless economies. The term consumer behavior is the action ofconsumer with regard to purchase of a product. It is a sub-set of humanbehavior, it is the total process by which an individual interact with theenvironment. It includes attitude, action, and motivation for buying a productfor satisfaction of wants. The buying behavior is the result of many interactingelements and factors. The buying decision process passes through five stagesproblem recognition, information search evaluation of alternatives purchasedecision & purchase behavior. The present study deals with analyzing theconsumer behavior of a segment of consumers referred as senior citizens withregard to rising prices.Objectives of the Study:1) To analyze the perception of senior citizens about price level and its

impact.2) To understand the behavior of senior citizens in times of inflationary

trends.3) To analyze the perception of senior citizens on different factors

associated with rising pricesResearch Methodology-The present study is mainly based on primary datacollection method. A structured questionnaire with close ended options were


provided to the respondents who are having age of more than 60 years. Atarget of 100 senior citizens was set but due to limitations the researcher couldcollect 96 responses. The respondents were selected randomly and hailedfrom Aruangabad City.Limitations-The study is limited to the selected respondents form Aurangabadonly. The study is also limited to target consumer i.e., senior citizensData Analysis and Discussion:

Analysis on the basis of Age of respondents and substitutes theyprefer due to price rise.

Age YES NO TOTAL 60-65 27 30 57 65-70 9 9 18

70 & Above 3 18 21 Total 39 57 96

Percentage 40.62 59.38 100.00

Buying behavior of customers influenced by many factors. As a resultof continuous increase in price rise consumers could shift to some othersubstitutes. A cross analysis on the basis of respondents and their opinionabout shifting to some other substitutes revealed that even though pricesincreased the buying behavior of majority of respondents (59.38%) was notaffected and they have not shifted to substitutes. On the other hand 40.62%respondents replied positively that due to price rise they had shifted to substituteproducts. Out of this majority of respondents were found to be in the agegroup of 60-65 years.

Analysis of Income of respondents with opinion about rate of pricerise is highest in this decade.

Income YES NO TOTAL 1 To 2 Lakh 45 0 45 2 To 3 Lakh 39 0 39

More than 3 Lakh 12 0 12 Total 96 0 96

Percentage 100.00 0.00 100.00

Prices are continuously rising. Senior citizens compare the presentcircumstances with the earlier times. They compare the current price levelwith earlier decades. In order to know the opinion in this regard respondentswere classified into three categories of income. All the senior citizensirrespective of income group responded that the price rise is highest in thisdecade. Majority of the respondents who were of the opinion that price rise iscomparatively highest in this decade fall in the income group of 1 to 2 lakhrupees. On the other hand not a single respondent gave opinion that the pricerise is not highest in this decade.


Analysis of Age with the opinion of respondentsabout in which decade they were more comfortable.

Age 1980 1990 2000 2010 TOTAL 60-65 33 18 6 0 57 65-70 18 0 0 0 18

70 & Above 15 0 0 6 21 Total 66 18 6 6 96

Percentage 68.75 18.75 6.25 6.25 100.00 Senior citizens usually talk of their experiences at different stages of

their life. In order to obtain their opinion on inflationary trend a question wasasked them as to in which period they felt comfortable. A cross analysis of ageof senior citizens with their opinion on price rise in the last four decades revealedthat majority of respondents (68.75%) had given the opinion that as comparedto current trends in 1980’s they felt more comfortable. Only 6.25% of therespondents each were of the opinion that comparatively they were morecomfortable in last two decades. Majority (33) of respondents who felt morecomfortable during 1980’s belonged to the age group of 60-65 years and theyconstitute nearly 35% of the total senior citizens.

Analysis of Income of respondents with their opinionabout the products which they expect at concessional rate.

Income GOODS OF

DAILY NEEDS

COMFORTS

LUXURIES

MEDICINES

TOTAL

1 To 2 Lakh 30 9 0 6 45 2 To 3 Lakh 36 0 0 3 39 More than 3

Lakh 12 0 0 0 12 Total 78 9 0 9 96

Percentage 81.25 9.38 0.00 9.37 100.00

Senior citizens generally dependent on others or retirement benefits.The expect some sort of help from society or government for their living. Aquestion was asked to the respondents that at this stage of life which productsthey expect to receive at concessional rate. They were given four opinions.i.e. goods of daily needs, comforts, luxuries and medicine. In response to thisquestion majority (81.25%) of the senior citizens replied that at this age theyexpect goods of daily needs to receive at concessional rate. A total of about10% respondents who fall in the income group of 1 to 2 lakh rupees repliedthat they expect comfort articles at concessional rate. However not a singlerespondent expected to receive luxurious items at concessional rate whereasabout a total of 10% senior citizens wanted medicines to be available atconcessional rate to them out of which majority belonged to lower incomegroup.


Analysis of Age with opinion of respondents to control rising prices.

Age CONTROL ON

FUEL/LPG PRICE

CONTROL THROUGH TAXATION

CONTROL THROUGH

BANK RATE TOTAL

60-65 48 9 0 57 65-70 18 0 0 18

70 & Above 21 0 0 21 Total 87 9 0 96

Percentage 90.62 9.38 0.00 100.00

There are different measures to control inflation. In order to obtain theiropinion a question was asked and three opinion were provided to respondents.A cross analysis of age with opinion about measures to control price rise revealedthat more than 90% of the senior citizens were of the opinion that there shouldbe control on rising fuel / LPG prices. Out of this majority of respondentsbelonged to the age group of 60-65 years. On the other hand about 10%respondents only were of the opinion that price rise should be controlled throughtaxation measures. However, not a single senior citizen under study was of theopinion that rising prices to be controlled through bank rate.

Analysis of Age of respondents with their opinionabout reduction in general price level.

Age 10% 20% 30% 40% TOTAL 60-65 0 6 18 33 57 65-70 0 0 9 9 18

70 & Above 3 0 6 12 21 Total 3 6 33 54 96

Percentage 3.12 6.25 34.38 56.25 100.00

People in general feel that the price level in general should go down.Senior citizens under study were asked to give their opinion about how muchgeneral price level they expect to be reduced. The respondents were providedfour opinions ranging from 10 to 40%. A cross analysis of age of senior citizenswith their opinion about reduction in general price level revealed that majorityof them who belonged to the age group of 60 to 65 years were of the opinionthat the general price level to be reduced by 40%. In all the age groups suchrespondents who were of this opinion constitute 56.25% of the total seniorcitizens under study. Those who were of the opinion that general price level tobe reduced by 10% were lowest.Conclusions-1. Irrespective of inflationary trend the respondents under study did not

preferred to shift to the substitute products.2. All the senior citizens belonging to lower income group under study


were of the opinion that the present price level is the highest in thisdecade.

3. In general majority of senior citizens with reference to rising pricesreplied that in last four decades from 1980 to 2010, they felt morecomfortable in 1980’s. The consumer confidence was found to be goodamong senior citizens of Aurangabad city during 1980’s.

4. Senior citizens expect some sort of help from Society/Government fortheir peaceful living. Majority of respondents falling in the income groupof upto 3 lakh rupees expected to receive goods of daily needs atconcessional rate. Out of this majority of senior citizens belonged to theincome group of upto 3 lakh rupees. The senior citizens belonged tolower income group expected medicines to be supplied to them atconcessional rate.

5. More than 90% of the senior citizens were of the opinion that control onfuel/LPG prices should be used as a measure to control inflationarytrend. All the respondents were silent on bank rate as a measure tocontrol inflation.

6. Majority of the senior citizens opined that general price level to be reducedby 40%. The highest number of respondents who were of this opinionbelonged to the age group of 60 to 65 years.

======================References-1. Philip Kotler & others, "Marketing Management", Pearson, 13th Ed., A South

Asia Perspective.2. Economic Survey 2011-12, "State of Economy & Prospects", Southern

Economist, Vol. 50, No. 24, April, 15, 2012 .3. Economic Survy 2012-13, "Budget Speech of Union Minister of Finance", Mr.

Pranab Mukherjee, Part-A.4. A.C. Kavitha & Paravathy P., "High Food Inflation: A Cause for Worry?",

Southern Economist, Vol. 50, No. 23 .5. Joel Dean, "Managerial Economist" PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2010.6. D. N. Dwivedi, "Managerial Economics", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. 6th

Ed. 2001.7. Datt & Sundaram, "Indian Economy", S. Chand & Co. Ltd. 63 Ed., 2011.8. Dr. C. B. Gupta, Dr. N. Rajan Nair, "Marketing Management", Sultan Chand &

Songs, 12th Edn. 2009.9. V.S. Ramaswamy, S. Namakumari, "Marketing Management", 4th Edn. 2009.


Ethics: Globalization and International MarketingProblems

* V. L. Bhangdia==========================================================Abstract- Due to the globalization of markets and production processes,an ever increasing number of marketers and business people have todeal with ethical issues in cross-cultural settings. In this article, mainapproaches in marketing ethics have been reviewed for ethical analysisand decision making in international settings. The purpose of this articleis to present some guidelines that can serve as a guide for global marketersin the important areas for marketing ethics. It is supposed to assistmarketers in their efforts to behave in an ethical fashion. It is assumedthat, local conditions of international markets may be different; but thesome global marketing ethics principles should be applicable to allmarkets. It is proposed that a uniform code of ethics should be createdby WTO and UN organizations to solve diverse cultural differences toarrive at cooperative strategies in international marketing.==========================================================

===========================* Principal, Smt.Kesharbai Lahoti Mahavidyalaya, Amravati M.S.

I. Introduction- Globalization and International Marketing Ethics Problemsare closely related to each other. Increased globalization resulted in manyproblems including ethical ones. From 1950 to 2000, world trade expandedalmost 20-fold, far outstripping world output, which grew by six and a halftimes (WTO, 2001). In this expansion, exports and foreign direct investmenthas played an increasing role in the global economy. Even small businessesare increasing their cross border investments. In general, the average yearlyoutflow of FDI increased from about $25 billion in 1975 to a record $1.3 trillionin 2000 (UN, 2001). These mean that millions of business people workingabroad in different geographical, political, International Research Journalof Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) 94 legal, social and culturalenvironments. It is easy to guess that different environments have createdmany problems, including ethical problems, for international marketing personnelat home and abroad. Especially during the past 55 years, technologicalimprovements in transportation, communication and information processingand internet made great contribution to the development of globalization. Ifthis trend continues, the prophesies of Levitt, about globalization, in 1960‘s,


will become reality in 2020‘s. To manage this trend fairly, it is advisable tocreate universal ethical norms, rules and regulations.A. Dimensions of Globalization- Globalization is an umbrella term andhas some dimensions. It can be related to every fields of daily life. For instance,a marketing staff versus an engineer could interpret globalization in differentways.Dimensions are as follows (www.globalpolicy.org)• Economics – related to globalization in trade, money, corporations,

banking, capital,• Political – science, governance, wars, peace, IGOS, NGOS, and

regimes,• Sociology-communities, conflict, classes, nations, agreements,• Psychology-individuals as subjects and objects of global action,• Anthropology- cultures overlapping, adapting, clashing, merging,• Communications- information as knowledge and tools-internet,• Geography- Everything provided it can be anchored in space.

Each of these social sciences looks at a special aspect of the wholesystem of interdependent parts that constitutes our world system. Eachdiscipline constructs a concept of globalization that reflects its special point ofview: Consider how it relates its focal concerns to the contemporary worldSystem (www.kongar.org). According to Kongar, globalization has threedimensions. These are political, economic, and Cultural aspects of globalism(www.kongar.org). Political dimension denotes that after collapsing of theSoviet Union, the U.S. of America has become the superpower and the singleauthority of the new world order and security. On the other 95 InternationalResearch Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) hand,economic dimension of the globalization denotes the economic sovereigntyand domination of international capital globally. As the third dimension ofglobalization, cultural aspect, denotes two unrelated results of this phenomenon:One of them is globalism of the consumer behaviors, such as. Consumingsimilar food, clothes, entertainment and similar products in any aspects of dailylife. The second dimension is the micro-nationalism; too much freedom forcitizens results in destruction of the unitary structures of independent states,such as Yugoslavia and Iraq.B. The Emergence of Global Institutions- In international business,globalization has several facets, including the globalization of markets andglobalization of production (Hill, 2004: 7-8). The globalization of markets refersto the merging of historically distinct and separate national markets into onehuge global markets. On the other hand, the globalization of production refersto the sourcing of goods and services from locations around the globe to takeadvantage of national differences in cost and quality factors of production(such as labor,energy, raw materials, land, and capital). As markets globalize


and an increasing proportion of business activity transcends national borders,institutions need to help manage, regulate, and police the global marketplace,and to promote the establishment of multinational treaties to govern the globalbusiness system. During the past 55 years, a number of important globalinstitutions have been created to help perform these functions. These institutionsinclude the “General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade”(GATT) and its successor,the “World Trade Organization” (WTO); the “International Monetary Fund”(IMF) and its twin sister, the “World Bank “; and the “United Nations” (UN).All these institutions were created by voluntary agreement between individualnation-states, and their functions are enshrined in international treaties (Hill,ibid: 9). These organizations have many important roles in creating internationalbusiness ethical rules and regulations. Especially, The World Trade Organizationis primarily responsible for policing the world trading system and making surenation states adhere to the rules laid down in trade treaties signed by WTOmember states. Now it has over 145 nations, and the last member is the Republicof China. The WTO is also responsible for facilitating the establishment ofadditional multinational agreements between WTO member states(www.imf.org).C. Drivers of Globalization- From the economical point of view, two macrofactors seem to underlie the trend toward globalization (Frankel, 2000). Thefirst is the decline in barriers to flow of goods, services and capital that hasoccurred since the end of World War II. The second factor is technologicalchange, particularly the dramatic developments in recent years incommunication, information processing, and transportation technologies.Everybody knows the importance of the role technological innovations anddevelopments in globalization; on the other hand, “declining trade and investmentbarriers” with the help of GATT and WTO is as important as the first one.

During the 1920s and 30s, many nations erected formidable barriers tointernational trade and foreign direct investment. International trade occurswhen a firm exports goods or services to consumers in another country. Foreigndirect investment occurs when a firm invests resources in business activitiesoutside its home country. Many of the barriers to international trade took theform of high tariffs on imports of manufactured goods. The typical aim of suchtariffs was to protect domestic industries from foreign competition. Ultimately,this practice depressed world demand and contributed to the Great Depressionof the 1930s (Hill, ibid: 11). Having learned from this experience, the advancedindustrial nations of the West committed themselves after World War II toremoving barriers to the free flow of goods, services, and capital betweennations (Bhagwati, 1989). This goal was protected and realized in the GeneralAgreement on Tariffs and Trade. Under the umbrella of GATT, nine rounds ofnegotiations among member states have worked to lower barriers to the flowof goods and services. The impacts of GATT agreements on average tariff


rates for manufactured goods were formidable. If we give a figure, averagetariff rates International Research Journal of Finance and Economics -Issue 26 (2009) 96 have been fallen significantly since 1950, from average30-40 percent to 3.9 percent in 2000 (The United Nations, 2001). In order tonullify this tariff rate, Regional economic integrations have been created. Suchas, European (EU), North American Free Trade Area (NAFTA), Free TradeArea of the America (FTAA), Association of Southeast Asian Nations(ASEAN), and Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) are importantattempts to achieve economic gains from the free flow of trade & investmentbetween neighboring countries.The most successful regional economic cooperation is the EU. The SingleEuropean Act sought to create a true single market by abolishing administrativebarriers to the free flow of trade and investment between EU countries. In thenear future, it is expected that the EU will become a political union like theUSA (Swann, 1990).II. Ethical Issues in International MarketingA. History of Ethics- Ethics is a branch of philosophy that studies moralsand values. Interest in ethics and ethical codes has been around for a longtime. Centuries ago, Aristotle referred to character, which he called “ethos”,as the most potent means of persuasion (Lane Cooper, 1960). He also identifiedelements of virtue as “justice, courage, temperance, magnificence, magnanimity,liberality, gentleness, prudence, and wisdom”. In Roman times, the emperorJustinian was the first to incorporate ethics into the legal system and to establishschools to educate lawyers concerning ethics morality, and law. Napoleonestablished a code of thirty-six statutes based on the concept that all citizens,regardless of circumstances of birth or social stature, should be treated fairlyand equally. Indeed, every civilization has recognized the need for establishinglaws and codes to guide human relationship and behavior (Metcalfe, 2003:74). Ethics studies the differences between right and wrong, and through thesestudies philosophers have developed several theories. Some major ethicaltheories are egoism, intuitionism, emotivism, rationalism, and utilitarianism.Egoism is the belief that people should only look at how the consequences ofan action affect them. Intuitionism is the belief in an immediate awareness ofmoral value. Emotivism is the belief that ethical decisions are expressions ofemotion. Rationalism focuses on the metaphysical aspects of ethics.Utilitarianism in ethics considers how moral actions produce the greatest overallgood for everyone (www.questia.com).B. Ethical Perceptions and Culture- A research conducted by Armstrongreveals that there is a relationship between the cultural environment (Australia,Singapore and Malaysia) and the perceived ethical problems. In another study,Armstrong finds out the most frequently cited problem of Australian InternationalBusiness Managers is gifts/favours/entertainment and that this problem may


be related to the culture where the international business is being conducted.And the most important ethical problem to Australian international managersis large-scale bribery (Armstrong, 1992).Although, different cultural environments result in different ethical perceptionsin international marketing, for the sake of ethical consistency, it is necessary togenerate internationally applicable ethical rules and regulations. As a matter offact, a finding of an empirical research conducted by Armstrong proposes that“The Australian general managers disagreed that it is necessary to compromiseone`s ethics to succeed in international marketing”(Armstrong, ibid: 161).C. Ethical Approaches in International Marketing- Due to the globalizationof markets and production, ever increasing number of international marketingpersonnel has to deal with ethical issues in cross-cultural settings. Murphy andLaczniak (1981: 58) asserted two decades ago that “as more firms move intomultinational marketing, ethical issues tend to increase”.Actually, internationalmarketers are often criticized for ethical misconduct (Armstrong et al., 1990:6-15). In a cross-cultural environment, marketers are exposed to differentvalues and ethical norms (Nill, 2003: 90-104). Which ethical position shouldmarketers take when acting in a foreign culture? In other words, whose ethicsdo we use in international marketing? is very important to be answered.DeGeorge answers this question as “our ethics”; our ethical values are notlike a coat that we put on in certain seasons and places throw off elsewhere.We cannot leave our ethics behind as we venture around globe. If we think wecan, or if we have no ethics, then, of course, the question is beside the point(DeGeorge, Business Credit, and 2000: 50). In International Marketing, ethicaldecision- making process can be influenced by many ethical approaches. Theseapproaches can be classified “descriptive-prescriptive and communicativeapproach” (Nill, 2003: 90), and “normative (prescriptive), and descriptive(positive)” theory of marketing ethics approach (Hunt and Vitel.1986: 5-15).1. Descriptive Approach- Descriptive ethics describe the values and moralreasoning of individuals and groups and attempt to provide an understanding ofthe ethical decision-making process (Schopenhauer, 1979). It is assumed thatthe ethical decision-making process affected by a variety of individual,situational, and contextual factors such as personal experiences, opportunity,the organizational environment and the cultural environment (Nill, ibid: 91). 99International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26(2009)2. Normative Approach- Normative ethics suggest an answer to the generalmoral question of what ought to do (Schlegelmilch, 1998; Murphy and Laczniak,1981, Chonko, 1995). These researchers are concerned with the justificationof moral norms and ethical values. It has been debated for many years whethermoral responsibility can be attributed to business organizations. Some yearsago, ethics have nothing to do with international business; then, normative


ethics cannot be a concern for business corporations. Some scholars discussthat business organizations cannot assume moral responsibility. Only individualsacting on behalf of the corporation are morally motivated, have intensions, andcan be held accountable (Ranken, 1987: 633-37).On the other hand, some scholars argue that some aspects of the organizationare not Reconcilable with moral responsibility. Organizations serve a purposeand in that sense are not entirely autonomous. Organizations can never end inthemselves; they have been created for a specific purpose. The organizationcannot be held responsible for actions that go beyond or against that purpose(Wilmot, 2001: 161-169). Normative approaches can be classified as“deontological theories” and “teleological theories”.One of the purposes ofthese theories is to develop guidelines or rules to assist international marketersin their efforts to behave in an ethical fashion (Hunt and Vitell, 1986: 5-15).Fundamental difference between these theories is that deontological theoriesfocus on the specific actions or behaviors of an individual, whereas teleologicaltheories focus on the consequences of the actions or behaviors.a. Deontological Evaluations- Deontologists believe that “certain featuresof the act itself other than the value it brings into existence” make an action orrule right (Frankena, 1963). Deontological views have a rich intellectual historydating back at least as far as Socrates. For them the problem has been todetermine the “best” set of rules to live by. Examples proposed have been the“golden rule” of “doing unto others as you would have them do unto you”(Sidgwick, 1907). According to Laczniak; international marketers have certainduties, under most circumstances, constitute moral obligations that include theduties of fidelity, gratitude, justice, beneficence, self-improvement and noninjury.b. Teleological Evaluation- Teleologists suggest that people ought todetermine the results of various behaviors in a situation and evaluate thegoodness or badness of all the consequences. A behavior is then ethical if itproduces a greater balance of good over evil than any available alternative(Nill, Ibid). Teleology can be divided into two subcategories as egoism andutilitarianism (Ferrel et al., 1989: 55-64).(1). Egoism- Egoism defines rightness in terms of the consequences for theindividual (Mengüç, 1998: 333-352). It postulates that one should choose actionsthat result in the maximum of good for oneself (Rosen,1978).(2). Utilitarianism- In contrast to the egoist,the utilitarian does not minimize“bad “ or maximize his/her own “good” in general. Ethical universalism(utilitarianism) holds that an act is right only if it creates the greatest good forthe greatest number. Hobbes and Nietzsche were ethical egoists but suchphilosophers as G.E. Moore and John Stuart Mill were ethical universalists. Ifwe explain these theories with an example; deontologists do not tell a lie andthey do not consider the results of the action, on the other hand, teleologistscould tell a lie if they save a life, or when telling the truth hurts another person.


3. Dialogic Approach- As a third approach proposed by Nill and Shultz (1997:4) is communicative approach as an alternative ethical framework for macromarketers. Dialogic idealism combines moral universalism with moralInternational Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26(2009) 100 relativism by suggesting universally valid rules that prescribe howan ideal dialogue is to be conducted without imposing moral core values orhyper norms. Thus, the actual outcome of the dialogue will depend on itsparticipants. Only the way in which the dialogue should be conducted can beseen as a universal obligation for everyone who is truly motivated in participatingin the dialogue.Depending on the nature of the ethical problem and specific situationalrequirements a dialogic approach could be a helpful tool for marketers. Nill(2003: 92-97) argues that “ more work is needed to find out how acommunicative approach can be implemented as a real-world corporate ethicalresponsibility approach”.D. Ethical Problems in International Marketing- The moral question ofwhat is right or appropriate poses many dilemmas for domestic marketers.Even within a country, ethical standards are frequently not defined or alwaysclear (Cateora and Graham: 142). The problem of business ethics is infinitelymore complex in international marketplace, because value judgments differwidely among culturally diverse groups. That which is commonly accepted asright on one country may be completely unacceptable in another. Giving businessgifts of high value, for example, is generally condemned in the United States,but in many countries of the world gifts are not only accepted but also expected(www.business-ethics.org).Upon examination of existing ethical frameworksin the field of international marketing from a macro marketing perspective, it isargued that marketers cannot always rely on universally accepted ethical norms,such as hyper norms or core values that have been suggested by a deluge ofmarketing literature (Dunfee,1995; Dunfee, Smith, and Ross, 1999: 14;DeGeorge, 2000). Some basic moral values could be used in evaluatinginternational marketing ethical issues. Violations of basic moral values ininternational marketing settings should be accepted as ethical problems. Afterstudying the literature related to international marketing, it is easily seen thatmost of the marketing ethics studies involve the use of scenarios as researchinstruments and relate to the following marketing sub-disciplines (Armstrong,1992: 167): market research, retail management, purchasing management,advertising management, marketing management, industrial marketing, andmarketing education. Few studies relate to International Marketing Ethics havebeen most prominent (Armstrong and Everett, 1991:61-71; Armstrong, Stening,Ryands, Marks, and Mayo, 1990: 6-15; Armstrong, 1992). Major InternationalMarketing Ethical Problems derived from applied researches by Armstrong(Ibid) are presented with their short definitions as follows:


• Traditional Small Scale Bribery- involves the payment of small sumsof money, typically to a foreign official in exchange for him/her violatingsome official duty or responsibility or to speed routine government actions(grease payments, kickbacks).

• Large Scale Bribery- a relatively large payment intended to allow aviolation of the law or designed to influence policy directly or indirectly(eg, political contribution).

• Gifts/Favours/Entertainment- includes a range of items such as: lavishphysical gifts, call girls, opportunities for personal travel at the company‘sexpense, gifts received after the completion of transaction and otherextravagant expensive entertainment.

• Pricing – includes unfair differential pricing, questionable invoicing –where the buyer requests a written invoice showing a price other thanthe actual price paid, pricing to force out local competition, dumpingproducts at prices well below that in the home country, pricing practicesthat are illegal in the home country but legal in host country (eg, pricefixing agreements).

• Products/Technology – includes products and technology that arebanned for use in the home country but permitted in the host countryand/or appear unsuitable or inappropriate for use by the people of thehost country.

• Tax Evasion Practices - used specifically to evade tax such as transferpricing (i.e., where prices paid between affiliates and/or parent companyadjusted to affect profit allocation) including the use of tax havens, whereany profit made is in low tax jurisdiction, adjusted 101 InternationalResearch Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009)interest payments on intra-firm loans, questionable management andservice fees charged between affiliates and /or the parent company.

• Illegal/Immoral Activities in the Host Country – practices such as:polluting theenvironment, maintaining unsafe working conditions; product/technology copying where protection of patents, trademarks or copyrightshas not been enforced and shortweighting overseas shipments so as tocharge a country a phantom weight.

• Questionable Commissions to Channel Members – unreasonablylarge commissions of fees paid to channel members, such as sales agents,middlemen, consultants, dealers and importers.

• Cultural Differences – between cultures involving potentialmisunderstandings related to the traditional requirements of the exchangeprocess (e.g., transactions) may be regarded by one culture as bribesbut be acceptable business practices in another culture. These practicesinclude: gifts, monetary payments, favours, entertainment and politicalcontributions.


• Involvement in Political Affairs- related to the combination ofmarketing activities and politics including the following: the exertion ofpolitical influence by multinationals, engaging in marketing activities wheneither home or host countries are at war and illegal technology transfers(Armstrong, Ibid).

IV. Concluding Remarks- It is accepted that globalization is an unavoidableprocess and will progress forever. All business that firms desire to competesuccessfully in international environment, should obey to legal and ethical rulesand regulations. To behave in an ethically and socially responsible way shouldbe a hallmark of every marketer‘s behavior, domestic or international. It requireslittle thought for most of us to know the socially responsible or ethically correctresponse to questions about breaking the law, destroying the environment,denying someone his or her rights, taking unfair advantage, or behaving in amanner that would bring bodily harm or damage (Cateora and Graham, Ibid).Actually, the difficult international marketing issues are not the obvious andsimple right-or wrong ones. In many countries the international marketer facesthe dilemma of responding to many situations where there is no local law,where local practices forgive a certain behavior, or the company willing to “ dowhat is necessary” is favored over the company that refuses to engage inpractices that are not ethical.In many countries, laws may help define the borders of minimal ethical orsocial responsibility, but the law is only the basis above which one‘s social andpersonal morality is tested. In the U.S.A., in general, legal sanctions preventmarketers from doing unethical transactions. The problems related tointernational marketing ethics are not important problems in U.S. domesticmarket; but in international settings, especially differences in culture createssome ethical dilemmas.Perhaps the best guide to good international marketing ethics are the examplesset by ethical business leaders (J. Byrne, 2003). DeGeorge (Ibid) proposes tosolve international business ethics problems in five guidelines:1. Do not direct intentional harm.2. Produce more good than harm for the host country.3. Respect the rights of employees and of all others affected by one‘s

actions or policies.4. To the extent consistent with ethical norms, respect the local culture and

work with and not against it.5. Multinationals should pay their fair share of taxes and cooperate with

the local governments in developing equitable laws and other backgroundinstitutions.On the other hand, Cateora and Graham (Ibid) propose to be used some

guidelines in international business: such as,Utilitarian ethics-Does the actionoptimize the “common good” or benefits of all constituencies? And


who are the constituencies?. Rights of the parties- Does the actionInternational Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26(2009) 102 respect the rights of the individuals involved? Justice orfairness- Does the action respect the canons of justice or fairness to allparties involved?

Answers to these questions can help the international marketer ascertainthe degree to which decisions are beneficial or harmful, right or wrong, orwhether the consequences of actions are ethically or socially responsible.Perhaps the best framework to work within is defined by asking: Is it legal? Isit right? Can it withstand disclosure to stockholders, to company officials, andto the public? (Dunfee, et al., 1999: 14). Though the U.S.A. has clearly led thecampaign against international bribery, European firms and institutions areapparently putting more effort and money into the promotion of what they call“corporate social responsibility (Maignan and Ralston,2002: 497-514). Forexample, the watch dog group Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Europe,in cooperation with the INSEAD business school outside Paris, is studying therelationship between investment attractiveness and positive corporate behaviorson several dimensions. Their studies find a strong link between firms` socialresponsibility and European institutional investors` choices for equity investments(Stock, 2003:1, and www.csreurope.org). All this is not to say that Europeanfirms do not still have their corporate misbehaviors (C.Matlack, 2003: 48-50).However, it is expected that more efforts in the future to focus on measuringand monitoring corporate social responsibility around the world. In a globaleconomy, to solve international marketing ethics problems, self regulation bycompanies and industries is important, but that additional background institutionswith having authority to direct globalization is very important. Under thesecircumstances international sanctions can be applied for ethical violations.

DeGeorge(2000:50) asserts that “ for purposes of international business,there are certain basic claims and norms that are necessary for business, andthese throw some light on claims to universality in ethics”. For example, theUniversal Declaration of Human Rights is an important norm which has beenratified by almost every country and lays down basic principles that shouldalways be adhered to irrespective of the culture in which one is doing business.For instance, Article 23 of this declaration states that :• Everyone has the right to work, to free choice of employment, to just

and favorable Conditions of work, and to protection against employment.• Every one without any discrimination has the right to equal pay for equal

work.• Everyone who works has the right to just and favorable remuneration

ensuring for himself and his family and existence worthy of human dignityand supplemented, if necessary, by other means of social protection.

• Everyone has the right to form and to join trade unions for the protection


of his interests (Www.un.org/Overview/rights.html.).There are many articles like article 23; they can be accepted as building

blocks of universal ethical norms and rules. In addition to such internationalorganizations as UN, IMF, World Bank, World Trade Organization, theInternational Chamber of Commerce; “International Court of Justice forBusiness and Commerce” should be established to solve international marketingethics problems legally. Then ethical will become legal. If we want to dobusiness honest and fair in international marketing area, we can find manyuniversal ethical rules and regulations to obey. Cultural differences should notresult in violations of universal ethics. If UN is reorganized as a more powerfulinstitution, it can enforce global business agents to conform to the universalethics norms.Today, it is generally believed that, the U.S. of America as a superpower hasbeen taking advantage of official political power of UN and related institutions,such as IMF, WTO, and World Bank in order to realize his political andeconomic benefits to sustain global domination. These institutions could notfunction effectively and freely to their predefined objectives. A reorganizationand reform is necessary to empower UN and other international institutions tomeet the common needs of all humanity, instead of only U.S. and other developedcountries. Otherwise, instead of peace and stabilization, chaos and terror coulddominate the whole world. Adapted to the contemporary world 103International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26(2009) conditions, well-organized, reformed, empowered and equitable workingUN and related institutions could really contribute to the global peace, securityand, social and economic wealth of nations. All nations could obey the rulesand regulations of independent global institutions in regulating and reorganizingworld trade and global economy. Under these conditions, to solve internationalmarketing ethics problems: international institutions should manage, regulate,and police the global marketplace, and to promote the establishment ofmultinational treaties to govern the global business system.======================References-[1] Armstrong, R. W. (1992), “An Empirical Investigation of International Marketing

Ethics: Problems Encountered by Australian Firms, Journal of Business Ethics,11:165.

[2] Armstrong,R. W. and Everett, J.E.(1991), The Dimensions of Ethical Perceptionsin Marketing, Asia Journal of Marketing, Vol.1, December,61-71.

[3] Armstrong,R.W.,Stenig, B.W., Ryands, J.K.,Marks, L. and Mayo, M.(1990),“International Ethics: Problems Encountered by Australian Firms”, Asia Pacificof International Marketing, pp., 6-15.

[4] Bartlett C. A. and S. Ghoshal (1989), “Managing across Borders: TheTransnational Solution”, Boston: Harvard Business School Press.

[5] Byrne, J. (2003), “Goodbye to an Ethicist,” Business Week, February 10, 2003.


[6] Bhagwati, J.(1989), “Protectionism”, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.[7] Cateora, P. R. And J.L. Graham (2005), International Marketing, 12th edition,

New York: Mc Graw Hill/Irwin.[8] Chonko, L. (1995), “Ethical Decision Making in Marketing”, CA: Sage.[9] Cooper, L. (1960), (ed.), “The Rhetoric of Aristotle”, NY: Appleton Century

Crofts Inc.[10] DeGeorge, R. T. (2000),”Ethics in International Business-A Contradiction in

Terms?”, Business Credit, September 1, 2000, Vol:102, Issue:8, p.50.[11] Douglas, S., and Y. Wind (1987), The Myth of Globalization,…NY:

www.ingentaconnect.com/content/mcb/036/2001, April 13, 2005.[12] Dunfee, T. W.,N. C. Smith, and W. T. Ross (1999), “Social Contracts And

Marketing Ethics”, Journal of Marketing, July 1999, p. 14.[13] Erevelles, Sunil etall (2002), “Advertising Strategy in China: An Analysis of

Cultural And Regulatory Factors,”Journal of International Consumer Marketing,15(1), 91-123.

[14] Ferrell, O.C., Gresham, L.G. and Fraedrich, J. (1989) “ A Synthesis of EthicalDecision Models in Marketing”, Journal of Macromarketing, 9 (Fall), 55-64.

[15] Frankel, J.A. (200), “Globalization of the Economy”, National Bureau ofEconomic Research, working paper no:7858,2000.

[16] Frankena, W. (1963), “Ethics”,Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc.[17] Friedman, Milton, “Capitalism and Freedom”, www.globalpolicy.org/globaliz/

econ/chmsky99.htm.[18] Herskovitz, M., Man and His Works, New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1952.[19] Hill, C.W.L. (2004), “Global Business Today”, 3th edition, New York: Mc Graw

Hill/Irwin.[20] Hofstede, Geert (1984), “Culture`s Consequences: International Differences in

Work Related Values”, Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications, p. 21.[21] http:// www.business-ethics.org/corpadv.html, April 12, 2005.[22] http:// www.business.org/index.php?show, April 12, 2005.[23] http:// www.csreurope.org ; and Howard Stock, Euro Funds Bank on Social

Metrics,” Investor Relations Business, April 21, 2003, p.1.[24] http:// www.globalpolicy.org/globaliz/define, April 23, 2005.[25] http:// www.questia.com/popularSearches/ethics.jsp, May 2, 2005.[26] http:// www.imf.org/external/np/2000, April 26, 2005. International Research

Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) 104[27] http:// www.un.org/Overview/rights.html., January 30, 2006.[28] Hunt, Shelby D., and Scott A. Vitell (1986), “General Theory of Marketing

Ethics”, Journal of Macromarketing,1986, 6 (Spring):5-15.[29] John A. Byrne (2003), “Goodbye to an Ethicist”, Business Week, February

10,2003.[30] Kongar, Emre, Kuresellesme ve Kulturel Farkliliklar Cercevesinde Ulusal Kultur,

May.


Role of Information Technology in Taxation

*Vinod Triapathi==========================================================Abstract- Tax information and tax privacy remain important, but areincreasingly subject to the same forces, legal, social, and technical, asother personal information. Much of the essential regulation for personalfinancial information occurs outside of the tax content.==========================================================

===========================* Head, Department of commerce, Kusum Bai Jain Girls College Bhind (M.P.)

Introduction- Advances in technology will clearly change the tax environment.Technology will provide additional tools to tax administrators to observe andmonitor individuals and transactions (e.g., it is likely that many capital goodssuch as cars, heavy machinery, or even televisions will have identification andtracking tags included as part of the manufacturing process.) This combinationwill provide an opportunity for countries to make tax policy changes both as tothe relative role of different taxes in financing government, and as to the designof specific tax instruments. With potential benefits come substantial potentialcosts. One of the key questions is whether the tax system is capable of takingadvantage of the promise of technology in ways that are consistent withindividuals’ normal modes of life and conceptions of privacy. Throughout theyears, the tax administrators have been constantly concerned about developingnew ways of improving institutional performance by increasing the effectivenessof tax control and providing taxpayer services that may allow them to bettercomply with their tax obligations. With varying levels of result, a fundamentallyimportant problem appears to be the difficulty faced by the tax administrationsto adopt and put into operation integral management models that may leadtheir administrative processes. The complexity of the mission of the taxadministrations and the dispersion and multiplicity of its various activities in apermanently changing environment, call for the development of these modelswhich are, in essence, the determining success factor of the organization incomplying with its mission.

Additionally, in operational terms there have been difficulties related tothe implementation of information systems whose qualities and merits mayallow it to become part of the organizational context wherein they render theirservices, with adequate levels of effectiveness.


Basic Concepts- Starting from an adequate analysis of the outside environmentand real internal capabilities, one must explicitly determine the control strategiesand service for the taxpayer. This means establishing clearly on which sectorof taxpayer or segments of tax evasion one will act, what actions will be takento control efficiently the sectors of major noncompliance, how one will makeavailable the resources to exercise the controls, what actions will be taken toimprove institutional abilities and related control capabilities, and what type ofservice and attention will be offered to the taxpayer.The administrative process(planning, organization, direction, execution and control) establishing workand information flows, which operate horizontally through the different keyareas finalizing in specific actions of service to, or control of, the taxpayers. Inthis manner the operating work is a part of the flow of a process and not assomething separate, to ensure its integration and consistency with specific andsuperior objectives and strategies. Technology will allow the evolution of thetax administrations where in administrative control (AC) plays a preponderantrole. It will allow passing from the measurement of production or service units,to the relevant measurements of the performance of processes, and themeasurement of final results of the operation. But this is only possible if onehas an available which functions in accordance with the needs of the taxadministration, and which develops and strengthens the key factors for thesuccess of the mission.Vision of Impact of New Technology in Tax Administration- When werefer to new technologies, we are talking principally of the infra-structure ofconnectivity at high speed, the software and hardware products which operateon it, and the effects of the synergy of their popularization on all areas, and thesubsequent impact on technological evolution. The popularization of systemsthat operate in real time will permit the immediate interconnection with differentdatabases and the immediate crossing of transactions for their verification,loading or tax credit. Now it is possible to have access to the systems fromanywhere, with only a PC and a navigator, or a mobile phone, which in turncauses the systems to adjust themselves, change their formats, and modificationof processes. Technology allows us increasingly to know more details of eachtaxpayer and administrate this information to be able to offer personalizedservices and specific specialized controls. The quality of the information of thetransactions carried out by the taxpayers with the tax administration improvessignificantly. Not only can we capture the data from the source that generatesthem, but we can offer the programs that allows them to generate the data,prepare their returns, settle their taxes and in general allows them to complywith their tax obligations. The new technologies qualify us to improve all stagesof the administrative process (planning, organization, management, executionand control) may be carried out with greater speed, better information and byinterrelating the different organizational levels. “For example, from the overall


analysis of the tax returns, information from other parties and relevant economicdata, one can establish guidelines and trends that allow one to define in adynamic manner programs of tax control, to be executed on a real time basiscarrying out the selection of cases to verify, control and audit.” Consequently,the process of feeding the results is accelerated, the agility of the planningprocess is increased, one obtains closeness with reality, and communicationand interactivity is improved.The Process Network- Since the control base is in the processes, and inhow these, when integrating and flowing through the organization, generateinformation flows, we should analyze the creation of networks of processes.In essence, they are the ones that allow us to undertake the control and serviceactions and certainly may guarantee us a better quality in taxpayer assistance.The importance of this aspect is also found in technology’s significantcontribution to this area. We will add to the technological definitions known byeveryone such as Internet, intranet, e-mail, Web applications, databases, call-centers, one more: work flow. To make more effective the creation of networksof processes, it is essential to identify the key management factors and workon them to define their most relevant processes, their main indicators and thepriority order for their integration. The design of processes will consider themost adequate technological means to apply, and the scope of automation, i.e.up to what point technology interferes to carry out day-to-day tasks.Conclusion- In the future, tax information in the electronic age will be subjectto the same critical issues, such as those involving data security, as otherpersonal information. The government, the private sector, and sometimes eventhe general public have numerous opportunities to gain access to the sametypes of information that in the past were found exclusively in tax returns. Theproblems of data security for tax information are heightened by fourdevelopments of particular significance. First, more Americans file their taxreturns with the IRS every year through e-filing. Second, tax preparationsoftware, like other software, is subject to hacking, viruses, data securitybreaches, software failures, as well as use of online tracking tools by professionaltax preparers. Third, tax returns may be prepared by U.S. firms that outsourcework internationally. Fourth, the IRS already has faced the same problems asthe private sector concerning data security. In sum, there are now threats ofprivacy meltdowns, or dramatic loss of gigabytes of personal information, in away that was unthinkable in the age of paper tax returns. The government inits tax administration follows a data processing model that it uses in othermanagerial areas. The IRS gathers information about income from employees,investments from financial service companies, outstanding government loansfrom other branches of the federal government, and a broad variety of otherdata points about financial events. Much of the essential regulation for personalfinancial information occurs outside of the tax content. In conclusion, one’s


tax information and tax privacy remain important, but are increasingly subjectto the same forces, legal, social, and technical, as other personal information.======================References-1. www.business.mapsofindia.com2. www.itrust.in3. www.wikipedia.org4. www.google.com5. www.gmail.com

ISSN 0975-4083






[email protected]







Dynamics of Passion: A Study of Shakespeare’s Othel lo

* P.K.Jain==========================================================Abstract- Othello is a tragedy of a passionate and unreasoned characterwho falls prey to misapprehensions of his own that leads to his tragicruin. Bradley treats Othello as a drama of modern life. Othello is the mostpainfully exciting and the most terrible.==========================================================

===========================* Professor of English, Govt. P. G. College, Satna (M.P.)


Great art, literature, cinema and legends would not be the same withoutthe crime of passion. Without it, there would be no Othello, no Dante’s Inferno.It is pathological obsession that breeds the germs of a perfect passion crime. Itpushes either sex unthinkable and overrides the dictates of reason thus benumbsrational brain. Psychiatrists call such disorders of mind as a case of delusion,while Doctors say ‘violence occurs as an extreme act of impulsiveness and aloss of inhibition’1. Othello is a tragedy of a passionate and unreasoned characterwho falls prey to misapprehensions of his own that leads to his tragic ruin.Bradley treats Othello as a drama of modern life. He says” ….. the unlikenessof Othello to Hamlet is much greater than the likeness, and the later playbelongs decidedly to one group with it successors. We have seen that, likethem it is a tragedy of passion, a description inapplicable to Julius Caeser orHamlet”. He further comments ; “Of all Shakespeare’s tragedies. I wouldanswer, not even excepting ‘King Lear’, Othello is the most painfully excitingand the most terrible”2. Harrison expresses about the play, “Othello perfectlyfulfils all the demands of deep tragedy. The technique is magnificent ; thetheme – the overwhelming power of evil unrestrained and unsuspected – isuniversal ; the suffering is in the highest degree charged with pathos; and evenwith a performance that is no more than adequate the final effect leaves onlya clod unmoved.3 Othello, being a domestic tragedy, deals with marital relationsof husband and wife, thus reducing the scope of the play to a narrow range.The characters are limited and the incidents and episodes are confined to onefamily, and their friends. It marks the single passion of jealousy. In it, we learnhow the pure relations of a credulous husband and an innocent wife is poisonedby lago, a polished villain. The idea of ‘Othello’ being a domestic tragedybecomes more confirmed when we think that the sufferers are mainly membersof a family the husband and wife. Even the villain remains alive at the end of


the play. It is different from the other great tragedies of Shakespeare. A.Nicoll comments : “The atmosphere of the tragedy is decidedly not royal andit may be that there was being exercised on Shakespeare some influence fromthe group of domestic tragedies later to be considered”4.

Othello is as civilized as any senator but there is no subject more excitingthan sexual jealousy rising to the pitch of passion in him. This passion pusheshim to a crime, which is also a hideous blunder. It is this jealousy which convertsOthello’s human nature into chaos and liberates the beast in man. NicholasRowse comments : “He has certainly pointed out some faults very judiciously: and indeed they are such as most people will agree, with him to be faults”5.He does not know the clam waters of love, he is more familiar with the tempestof passion. The suffering of Desdemona is the most intolerable spectacle thatShakespeare offers us. Her helplessness only makes the sight of her sufferingmore painful. For Othello, a woman is either absolutely chaste or she must bea common whore. There is no middle path for him. The feeling of jealousyruins him. This is wonderful state of innocence in which we find Othello. Theaction and catastrophe of Othello depend largely on intrigue of I ago that turnsa noble character into an evil.

Othello is not a man of practical bearing. Being a soldier he possesses amighty rough and tough body but his mind and heart remain much simple andunsuspecting. I ago calls him, “Black rum and devil”. Roderigo refers to his“thick lips” and Brabantio to his, “Soothy bosom”. Despite all his outer uglinesshe is a man of true and noble character. Hje is most popular in woman folk forhis braver. Desdemona also loves him for his braver, Othello himself confessesin the third Scene of Act. I ;

“Upon this hint I spake;She lov’d me for the dangers I had pass’d:And I lov’d her that she did pity them”.

He is a true person. He does not possess any complexity in his mind.And this character of his nature becomes his weakness. His judgement ofothers stands very poor. Hence, he is entrapped by I ago. A.C. Bradley remarksthat, “His tragedy lies in this – that his whole nature was indisposed to jealousy,and yet was such that he was usually open to deception, and, if one wrought topassion, likely to act with little reflection, with no delay, and in the most decisivemanner conceivable”.6 He is hasty in his action free from introspection. Hisactions are guided by passion, not by reason. His decision of eloping withDesdemona and marrying her, dismissal of Cassio, and believing unreasonedlyin I ago’s words show that he is not a man of practical sense. I ago encashesthe weakness of Othello and he dominates his entire personality and hurts himdown headlong to his doom. He poisons his mind against Desdemona and hislove dies for Desdemona. The event of handkerchief blinded his mind and heis now completely a changed man. He can only think of his wife making love


to Cassio. Bradley comments on his mental condition; “ He is physicallyexhausted and his mind is dazed. He sees everything blurred through a mist ofblood and tears”.7

He loses his all sense of reality. He reportedly calls his wife a prostitute andwants to kill her. The deed he is bound to do is not murder, but a sacrifice. Hethinks that he is not committing any evil but he is doing it to save Desdemonafrom herself, not in hate but in honour, and also in love. His anger has passedand a boundless sorrow has taken its place. He kisses her and asks her to prayto God for the crime she has committed.

Othello murders Desdemona to keep her away from further sin and evildoings. From the beginning to the end, she confesses that she had no illicitaffair with Cassio. As he comes to know the truth that Emilia has stolen thehandkerchief for Iago, who misused the same, on deathbed, she cries;

“Alas, he is betray’d and I undone”.Othello is dazed at this revelation and is mortally hurt by his own credulity

and jealousy. He realizes his mistake after the damage is done. This scene inthe play, which shows the evil act of Othello to its extreme, is the most painfulact. Bradley remarks:

“Desdemona is helplessly passive. She can do nothing whatever. Shecannot retaliate even in speech; no, not even in silent feeling. And the chiefreason of her helplessness only makes the sight of her suffering more exquisitelypainful. She is helpless because her nature is infinitely sweet and her loveabsolute”.8 At last when truth was revealed to Othello through Emilia thatDesdemona had no illicit relation with Cassio, he is at once shocked and repents.Now he realizes the value of Desdemona and says to Lodovico in Scene II ofAct. V;

“Then must you speakOf one that loved not wisely but too well;Of one not easily jealous, but, being wrought;Perplexed in the extreme; of one whose hand,Like the base Indian, threw a pearl awayRicher than all his tribe; of one whose subdu’d eyes”.

With these words he stabs himself and dies. Thus in the whole dramawe see jealousy and exciting nature of a husband bring both the husband andwife to complete ruin. He behaves as a credulous fool, he believes in others soeasily without reasoning the words and its effect. Earlier he gives the samefeeling by accepting the words of Desdemona at once and marries herimmediately by eloping with her. But later on it is a surprise for the audience toknow that he is a character who can be led by the nose by a character like Iago. He should have a strong sense to differentiate good from evil. He doesnot have quality to recognize good people from evil ones. His knowledge ofhuman nature is inadequate. He becomes a victim of his own disbelief, which


is exploited by I ago to its full length. Charlton remarks; “He is of constant,loving, noble nature. His response to life is simpler far than that of more civilizedman : living has been for him a continuity of passionate experience and not aseries of intellectual states. A spontaneous surge of feeling is the vitalizingform of his being. As his instinct rouses feeling, he is compelled to express it indeed”.9 The deep study of the play shows that the cause of tragedy lies not inthe external causes like Desdemona’s pleading with Othello to reinstate Cassionor in the handkerchief which Othello has given to Desdemona as a token of hislove and which he sees in Cassio’s hands. But the actual cause of tragedy liesin the internal design relating to the complex personality of Othello. He thinksthat he being black would not be attractive to Desdemona in due course oftime when fury of passion subsides. There is a disbelief in his mina that a fairlady like Desdemona can not be faithful to a bloackmoor like him. This disbeliefenters his mind because of social disparity and status between the two racesthey belonged to. When these thoughts kiss his mind he loses control over him.He immdediately becomes over reactive. His obsession for Desdemona makeshim extra sensitive for not losing her to any other man. This frenzy of his minddrives him to murder Desdemona, but on knowing truth he repents by stabbinghimself. Psychiatrists call this state of mind as a case of delusion. In medicallanguage it can be said that this violent state of the mind of Othello, understress, sends the message straight from thalamus to amygdala by-passing neo-cortex, flooding the brain with a crisis call resulting in abrupt reaction beforethe cortex can register the event10 culminating into murder of Desdermona.After the dreaded act the rationality returns, he is overcome by remorse. Butthe damage has been done. The feeling of irreparable damage brings him backto the state of frenzy he commits second crime by stabbing himself and thushis passionate act completes the cycle of tragedy.======================References-1. Times of India, August 2, 2004 ; p. 10.2. A.C. Bradley ; Shakespearean Tragedy, (Delhi : Atlantic Publishers &

Distributers; 1994), p. 1763. G.B. Harrison ; Shakespeare's Tragedies, (London : Routledge & Kegan Paul,

Ltd. 1951), p. 1574. A. Nicoll : British Drama, (London : George G. Harrap & Co. Ltd., 1955), p. 174.5. Nicholas Rowse ": Critics on Shakespeare, (London : Methuen Ltd., 1953), p.226. A.C. Bradley : Shakespearean Tragedy, p. 186.7. Ibid : p.1968. Ibid : p.1799. H. B. Charlton, Shakespearian Tragedy, (London : Cambridge University Press,

1961) p. 121.10. Times of India, August 2, 2004 ; p.10.


Ritualistic Drama: A Progressive Indian Tradition

* Apara Tiwari==========================================================Abstract- Absorbed in the largest mangrove forest of the world inSunderbans, displaying an array of bounteous flora, we cruised alongriver Vidya, and many other similar distributaries in the delta of the Gangathis winter. Well known for its ferocious man-eaters (royal Bengal tiger),crocodiles, wide variety of birds, other fauna and even a rare species ofdolphins, there was excitement among those on board the launch then, tospot the king of the jungle initially. The excitement gradually receding,got converted next day for one of the other harmless species for moreobvious reasons; the tiger refused to make a guest appearance without aprice.==========================================================

===========================* Professor and Head, Department of English, Govt. Shyam Sunder Agrawal

College, Sihora, Jabalpur (M.P.)

With little choice, the inhabitants of Sunderbans practice vocations likewood-picking, honey-collection and fishing. A land where people, easy prey tonot only man-eaters but also to alarmingly ceasing to be swampy land, belongto various faiths and sects, live and pray for sustenance together. A livingexample of ecological balance and at the same time a land where people andthe wild are threatened every moment on the question of survival, the experiencewas an exceptional feeling enlightened and reminded by a creative art form;the folk theatre called jatra.The chilling Christmas-eve at the resort in one ofthe biggest islands, Gosaba, was set aside for the open air theatrical performanceof the jatra. The entertainment value emerging from the technically typicalform took me down memory lane, when as a child I was used to watchingthem in the Durga Puja pandal. The enactment of the folk tale also revivedmemories of having heard a few of them from my sewing teacher at school,who used to capture our young minds and arouse unending curiosity with herstyle of rendering the tales. Recently Amitav Ghosh has related the tale in hisgripping fictional work; The Hungry Tide. Inferences drawn by manyresearchers as one of the purposes of the novel are two very pertinent issues.The purpose of this writing is to introduce these two issues through jatratheatrical art to anyone not knowing about it. Before proceeding to narrate thepopular Bonbibi legend, the most watched episode of the jatras in this region,


and pointing to its significant instructive value, it is also necessary to highlightsome features which identify this folk theatre called jatra, as it is incidentallyin communion with the nature of the tale too.Like the Tamasha of Maharashtra,Nautanki and Ramlila of U.P., the Pandwani of Madhya Pradesh, the Phadof Rajasthan and the Theyyam of Kerela, and folk theatre of other regions ofIndia, traditional jatra is a living and very popular theatrical folk art originatedin Bengal and later also became popular in the neighboring Odisha, Assam,Bihar, Tripura and Bangladesh. ‘Jatra’ in Sanskrit means journey. Devoteesduring the Bhakti movement in India moved in a procession singing, dancing,falling into a trance, enacting scenes from God’s lives. Intense frenzy withother dramatic elements and singing accompanied by loud clangs of musicalinstruments came to be known as jatra. It is said that Sri. Chaitanya Debintroduced make-up and costume in the form. Since then its transformationfrom devotional, mythological and historical themes into didactic and later secular,paved its entrance into urban proscenium theatre. It is not only alive and relevanttoday but is thriving exceptionally due to its innate malleability of adapting tochanging social milieu and catering to heterogeneous audience. The traditionalperformance in open air arenas accompanied by monologues, melodramaticand highly stylized dialogue delivery with exaggerated gestures and orationslends a generic character to a jatra even today, despite the inclusion of fewprops and harsh lights. Bibek (conscience) and niyati (fate) as essentialallegorical characters is a distinct feature of a jatra, something which is doneby a chorus in a Greek tragedy. It is a play that also begins with a climax bywhich means it captures the attention of the audience. Free verse and prosedialogues also became a way for the natun or New Jatras. After independenceit became a platform for political satires and protests called swadesi jatras,voicing social concerns and creating awareness against colonial ideologies.Communism, horrors of the World Wars, issues of national and internationalimportance, local issues and even events from television and the cinema havebeen taken up for performances. Badal Sircar and Shombhu Mitra are onlytwo names among quite a few, who have experimented with the form; but onlyin the regional language. Mostly enacted during the festive season there arehundreds of jatra troupes all over Bengal, who have to be booked in advanceand on contractual basis today. The distinctiveness of Sunderban jatras canbe attributed to its ritualistic and progressive spirit. A peep into its genesis andlater its maturity with an interdisciplinary approach will fabricate a comprehensiveeffect. Rapid climate changes and extreme conditions leave no choice for theinhabitants as well as the tigers in the tide country, but the strong survivalinstincts in both have forced them to adapt. It is as necessity that the tigershave become most ferocious, intelligent and excellent swimmers to becomeman-eaters. The same necessity has forced people to invade the wild territory.It is here that the power of the folklore in the legend of Bonbibi becomes


relevant connecting the world of nature and the humans. The local theatrecompanies called jatra-dol move from village to village enacting the popularstory. Bonbibi lives in the forests of Sunderbans with her brother Shah Jongoli.She protects the people there, from the demon, Dokhin Rai, who appears inthe guise of a tiger. No one enters the jungle without seeking her blessings.Although the rituals of worship followed are from Hindu faith but her origin isneither in Hindu mythology nor in Bengal. She is the daughter of a Sufi fakir,Ibrahim in the Arabian city of Medina, the holy city of Islamic faith. ArchangelGabriel set them on a divine mission to make the tide country fit for habitation.Dressed like a typical Bengali housewife, Bonbibi is worshipped equally by theDalit Muslims as well as devout Hindus. The connection thus transcends religiousbarriers. A fine balance to rule the territory is maintained after the goddessovercomes the demon with a truce in which she stays in and rules the humansettlement and the demon is confined to the wilderness. When a greedy fleetowner, Dhona enters the forests with his troops in search of jungle treasures,this balance is broken. The demon in the tiger’s guise traps the troop members.Only when Dhona pleads, the tiger agrees to release them in exchange for aransom in the form of a poor boy, Dukhey. When the tiger is about to pounceon the boy, he remembers his mother’s advice. She had asked him to callBonbibi in times of distress. His ardent prayers are heard and the goddessappears in a flash and saves him from the tiger. She then restores the boy tohis mother. There are two pertinent issues raised. One, do not meddle withnature and you will be safe. Second, a secular society can thrive and fight allodds to live in peace, only when there is communal brotherhood, harmony andunity. Jatra is a passionate and very powerful form of theatrical performingart, which is in tune with the fiery characteristics of Bonbibi folklore. At thesame time it has gained the sanction of the potent concern it has brought to thefore. Like the mainstream theatre, ritualistic theatre, such as the traditionaljatras are valuable source of reviving awareness of Indian ethos in the moderncontext. Similarly, flexibility, especially in its thematic content, to adapt to thetimes is the testimony of its progressive nature which needs to be discoveredand tapped on a wider arena.======================References-1. My travel experiences of the Sunderbans during my stay there from 22 to 25

Dec.2012. The organizers of the trip and the resort, the locals, the jatra troupe,fellow travelers, the launch men and their assistants and the beautiful tidecountry have inspired me and made this piece of writing possible.

2. Ghosh, Amitav. The Hungry Tide. New Delhi: Harper Collins 2005. Print.3. Jatra (http:/ / banglapedia. search. com. bd/ HT/ J_0081. htm) at Banglapedia.

Web.4. Misra, Preetu. The Bon Bibi Legend of the Sundarbans. http://Ezine

Articles. com/ ?expert=Preetu_Misra. Web.


Life in Death in The Novels of Kurt Vonnegut

*Suman Chawla==========================================================Abstract- Kurt Vonnegut (1922 -2007) is thought as an archetypal post-war novelist who concerns himself with the inexplicable, sordid andoften nightmarish aspects of modern American life. Branded categoricallyas a pulp writer and then as a black humourist, he was left in obscurityfor about twenty years. But from there he shot into fame and popularityto become the most talked about American novelist . He became a trulyrepresentative postwar novelist highlighting the sterility and hypocrisyof middle class life, and inveighing against the dehumanized socio-economic system in America. His unique vision and his signal role as arelentless critic of the American way of life have endeared him to hisreaders. While on the surface, Kurt Vonnegut's works appear to singularlycontain the pessimistic views of an aging, black humorist, his underlyingmeanings reveal a much more sympathetic and hopeful glimpse ofhumanity that lends itself to eventual societal improvement. Underlyingall Vonnegut's fiction is humanism. Vonnegut's faith is rooted in the ideaof mercy for fellow humans and for the planet itself. In fact, Vonnegut'spostmodern humanism is the idea that life is precious, and every attemptshould be made to improve the conditions of life in order to preserve it.==========================================================

===========================* Research Scholar, Bhagwant University, Ajmer, Rajasthan

Kurt Vonnegut is thought as an archetypal post-war novelist whoconcerns himself with the inexplicable, sordid and often nightmarish aspectsof modern American life. Branded categorically as a pulp writer and then asa black humourist, he was left in obscurity for about twenty years. But fromthere he shot into fame and popularity to become “the most talked aboutAmerican novelist since Ernest Hemingway” says Klinkowitz in LiteraryDisruptions.1 To millions of youngsters he was a cult figure, whose portrait ofAmerica with its tribulations and complexities matched the America of theirown experience. He became a truly representative postwar novelist highlightingthe sterility and hypocrisy of middle class life, and inveighing against thedehumanized socio-economic system in America. When Kurt Vonnegut startedwriting,the human predicament was disastrous. Kurt Vonnegut’s grim Camus-like view of life, living, and the world was part and parcel of a post–World War


II sensibility. The old optimism of prewar America was gone. Liberal faith hadbeen undermined by the experience of the Spanish Civil War, the Nazi/StalinPact of 1939, World War II, followed by the Holocaust and the droppings ofthe bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki. In many of his works he wonders iflife is worth living. He felt that the so-called American Dream had a dark sidethat led to loneliness, separation, and the denial of community. Americans wereliving in the age of anxiety. The critics raise the question of categorizationabout whether Vonnegut is a bitter pessimist or a sentimental optimist andwhether he can be classified as a despairing nihilist, a courageous Existentialist,a cynical absurdist, a postmodern humanist, an aggressive satirist, an inventivefantasist, an experimental fabulist, or a Black humorist and describe him as“our great public writer”2.

Vonnegut’s first novel Player Piano is a dystopia ofautomationHYPERLINK “http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Player_Piano” \l“cite_note-jcpn2kv-0” and capitalism, describing the dereliction they cause inthe quality of life. Cat’s Cradle is Kurt Vonnegut’s satirical commentary onmodern man and his madness. In Cat’s Cradle Vonnegut brought togetherthemes from his first three novels: the threat of technology from Player Piano,the question of free will from The Sirens of Titan , and the problem ofcommunication from Mother Night. Slaughterhouse-Five, or TheChildren’s Crusade: A Duty-Dance with Death (1969) is a satirical novelby Kurt Vonnegut about War II experiences and journeys through time of asoldier called Billy Pilgrim. In the works written after Slaughterhouse-Five, Vonnegut often focusses on the problems of contemporary society in adirect manner. Breakfast of Champions, or Goodbye Blue Monday (1973)and Slapstick, or Lonesome No More (1976), for example, examine thewidespread feelings of despair and loneliness that result from the loss oftraditional culture in the United States; Jailbird (1979) recounts the story of afictitious participant in the Watergate scandal of the Nixon administration,creating an indictment of the American political system; Galapagos (1985)predicts the dire consequences of environmental pollution; and Hocus-Pocus;or, What’s the Hurry, Son? (1990) deals with the implications and aftermathof the war in Vietnam. In the 1990s, he also published Fates Worse ThanDeath (1991) and Timequake (1997). Although many of these works arehighly regarded, critics frequently argue that in his later works Vonnegut tendsto reiterate themes presented more compellingly in earlier works. Many alsosuggest that Vonnegut’s narrative style, which includes the frequent repetition ofdistinctive phrases, the use of colloquialisms, and a digressive manner, becomesformulaic in some of his later works.Nevertheless, Vonnegut remains one ofthe most esteemed American satirists. Noted for their frank and insightfulsocial criticism as well as their innovative style, his works presentan idiosyncraticyet compelling vision of modern life. Lawrence R.


Broer’s Sanity Plea: Schizophrenia in the Novels of Kurt Vonnegut (1987),starts from the observation that “probably no characters in contemporary fictionare more traumatized and emotionally damaged than those of Kurt Vonnegut”and that Vonnegut’s central aim is “to show us ‘what makes people go crazy’and ‘the different ways they go crazy’. Maintaining that Vonnegut’s “reputationas America’s most popular prose satirist has obscured the more personal andintensely psychological nature of his art”3. Broer tries to prove that Vonnegut’sfictions aren’t as simple as some believe, that his philosophy isn’t easilyaccessible, and that he’s not a defeatist writer. On the contrary, “Vonnegut, atraumatized survivor of the allied bombing of Dresden, has used his writing asa way of purging himself of the terrors of war and adjusting to a postwarworld just as absurd in its suffering and destruction as the war itself.” ForScholes, Vonnegut belongs to the writers whom we read “to keep our humanityin shape, to exercise our consciences and keep them vigorous, free, andgrowing”.4 and he extolled the “range of attitudes Vonnegut brings to bear onmodern life” (186), praised his superb wit, and observed that serious criticshave shown some reluctance to acknowledge that Vonnegut is among the bestwriters of his generation. It seems, C.D.B. Bryan in ‘Kurt Vonnegut, HeadBokononist’, observes his fiction as “quiet, humorous, well-mannered andrational protests against man’s inhumanity to man an articulate bridge acrossthe generation chasm”.5 Robert Scholes employed Bruce Jay Friedman’s newlycoined label of ‘Black Humour’praised Vonnegut’s prose as “deceptivelysimple, suggestive of the ordinary, but capable of startling and illuminatingtwists and turns” While on the surface, Kurt Vonnegut’s works appear tosingularly contain the pessimistic views of an aging, black humorist, his underlyingmeanings reveal a much more sympathetic and hopeful glimpse of humanitythat lends itself to eventual societal improvement. Underlying all Vonnegut’sfiction is humanism. In Kurt Vonnegut’s Crusade or, How a PostmodernHarlequin Preaches a New Kind of Humanism (2006), Todd F. Davis arguesthat “Vonnegut offers a new kind of fiction, a paradigm of postmodernity thatallows the author to struggle with philosophical ideas concerning our conditionin a form that reflects this very struggle”6.and sets out to demonstrate that heis not the cynical commentator on the futility of human endeavor in a contingentuniverse which others take him to be but a committed ethical writer who “ismore concerned with our response to existence than with the philosophicalnature of that existence”.7

Therefore, in each novel, despite the sometimes disheartening sense offutility that pervades it, Vonnegut does offer suggestions for better living andhope for the despondent. “There was never a kinder and, at the same time,wittier writer to be with personally,” author Tom Wolfe, a friend and admirerof Vonneguts, told The Times. .”He was never funny just to be funny,”8.Vonnegut believes that writers can influence people’s ideas profoundly. In one


of his speeches he stated the following: ‘Let us pray that those terriblyinfluential writers who created those our leaders were humane”.9.Hewrites very short books as he wants them to be read byexecutives,politicians in their busy schedule. Vonnegut feels hisresponsibility to the society.In a Play Boy Interview,he expresses inbiological terms that writers are “are the expressions of the entiresociety…when a society is in danger,we’re likely to sound thealarms’’.10 Kurt Vonnegutin A Man Without a Countrysays that”The functionof the artist is to make people like life better than they have before.”11 KurtVonnegut considered humanism to be a modern-day form of freethought, andadvocated it in various writings, speeches and interviews. His ties to organizedhumanism included membership as a Humanist Laureate in the Council forSecular Humanism’s International Academy of Humanism. Vonnegut showsinhuman follies of the society but at the same time,he tries to search sacrednessin human beings.The Charlotte Observer calls “VONNEGUT:A MEDICINEMAN conjuring up fantsies to warn the world’’.12

Vonnegut tries to give his characters free will and meaning to life. Humanpredicament is that “man attempts to make order out of chaos. The universe isabsurd, unintelligible, but man must pretend that he understands it and musttry to exert some control over it” to eliminate futility.13 Vonnegut believes thatperfect happiness can be achieved when man discovers “that someone orsomething somewhere wants us to like it here on Earth” says Vonnegut inFates Worse Than Death.14 Each of Vonnegut’s novels indicates a belief ina meaningful universe, and each of his heroes –Paul Proteus, Howard W.Campbell, Jr., Jonah, Rosewater, and Billy—is a modern pilgrim engaged in anuncertain quest along an unmapped route. Although the pilgrim often musst goit alone, Vonnegut provides an unusually large number of messiahs, real andphony, major and minor, to aid in the quest. Winston Niles RumfoordinThe Sirens of Titanwithhis messiahic intentions, proves to the inhabitantsof Earth that their old religions are useless and myopic, while his at least hasthe benefit of being headed by someone who can see into the future. LionelBoyd Johnson, alias Bokonon’sideas are based on love and compassion forothers. Kilgore Trout, the next messiah first appears inGod Bless You,Mr. Rosewater ,he seems reincarnation of Jesus Christ, representing theineffectuality of the Christian ethic today, he is at least a Christ figure. In thenext novel, Vonnegut goes to some length to vitiate this impression by showinghis “cracked messiah”.15

Life is not thoroughly meaningless, and one purpose for survival is love.Affection is treasured and expressed in many ways. One incredible display ofdevotion is love for the sake of others, “unselfish love”.16 For Vonnegut,meaningless life is not worth living, so for a life that seems to be bothuncontrollable and meaning less, one must find a personal meaning in order to


bring about at least a semblance of self control. In Cat’s Cradle Bokononrealizes that life has no meaning, but he also realizes that he can make peoplehappy just by pretending life has a purpose. These harmless untruths, or foma,allow people to enjoy their truly meaningless life. His solution toavoid suicide isto find meaning in his life. Criticized by his own father for never having createda villain, Vonnegut’s characters are motivated by either lonesomeness, boredomor biological and environmental factors beyond their control. But an at leastpartial corrective for all three conditions exists—artificial extended familiesanalogous to the tribal cultures of his anthropology studies and the real-lifeextended family of Vonneguts idyllic Indiana boyhood.The theme gainsprominence with each subsequent book most overtly explained in the flawedSlapstick and most eloquently summarized in God Bless You, Mr.Rosewater: “We’re here to help each other get through this thing, whatever itis.”17 Vonnegut’s ideas are so humane, his words so compassionate, his adviceso sensible, that his readers feel a strong connection to the man, and, byextension, to one another. Perhaps his greatest contribution has been theunwitting creation of a global family of admirers who share and recognize inone another the desire to exhibit that most uncommon of human traits—commondecency. For Vonnegut, meaningless life is not worth living, so for a life thatseems to be both uncontrollable and meaning less, one must find a personalmeaning in order to bring about at least a semblance of self control.

Man’s relationship to religion, destiny and God also plays a large role inthe novel. As the name of The Church of God the Utterly Indifferentindicates, Vonnegut seems to be saying that, if there is a God, he/she abandonedhumanity long ago. He does not say this to be cruel, but to force people to stopbeing cruel to one another in the name of some nonexistent/uncaring deity.”Themost important message of a crucifix, to me anyway, was how unspeakablycruel supposedly sane human beings can be when under orders from a superiorauthority’’, says Kurt Vonnegut in Hocus Pocus .18 Beatrice Rumfoord andMalachi, in The Sirens of Titan unwilling partners in marriage, had onlyduring the last year of their lives come to love one another. “It took us thatlong.” Malachi admits, “to realize that a purpose of human life, no matter whois controlling it, is to love whoever is around to be loved” (ST. 313).Vonnegut’sviews on religion and technology are often mistaken.since he is opposed tothose who ignore reality,and since he is a self-proclaimed agnostic, it seemsthat he scorns religion but in reality,he does not scorn religion .There is confusion,writes Conrad Festa,” he is an activist interested in the specific good that canbe done and impatient with all abstractions, including dogma of any kind.”19 Heis first a humanist,and opposes religion which blocks path to human dignity.Hechooses compassionate religion, which contributes to collective happiness.Sometimes harmless lies are necessary to achieve peace of mind that wouldbe otherwise impossible


It is through his novels that Vonnegut tries to bring order into the dosordereduniverse.Kurt Vonnegut himself remarks:”Most of my adult life has been spentbringing some order to sheets of paper eight and a half inches wide and eleveninches long.This severely limited activity has allowed me to ignore many astorm,”20. In Vonnegut’s novels,there are many artistic figures likepainters,sculptors,writers who make efforts to bring order to their experiencesby writing ,painting or composing music.The artist in Palm Sunday glosses,” Ican do very little about chaos around me,but atleast Ican reduce to perfectorder this square of canvas,this piece of paper,this chunk of stone21. InBluebeard,Karabekian’s mission in the narrative is to find a family that hefeels a part of, which he achieves with the army and the Abstract Expressionismcommunity because Rabo Karabekian is an old abstract expressionist painter.Karabekian’s revelation of human awareness sparks Vonnegut’s realizationthat human beings are not hollow machines since awareness allows us torecognize our condition, giving rise to the motivation and ability to change it. InBreakfast of Champions,Vonnegut’s ultimate message is that if we wish tobe happy we must exercise our awareness to think and act rationally, whileexorcising irrational thoughts and beliefs.

It is no secret that Vonnegut experienced numerous adverse events andendured considerable personal tragedy during his adult life. Chief among thesewere: (a) his mother’s suicide in 1944 on Mother’s Day; (b) the mentalbreakdown of his son, Mark; (c) the horrific events he witnessed andparticipated in as a prisoner of war during the firebombing of Dresden; (d) thedeath of his beloved sister, Alice, due to cancer (and her husband’s tragicdeath a few days earlier in a freak train accident); and (e) his own apparentsuicide attempt in 1984. These events undoubtedly left their mark on his psycheand contributed to forging his philosophy of life. Indeed, Vonnegut admittedthat because of his experiences he repeatedly faced the temptation ofcommitting suicide, explaining that the “child of a suicide will naturally think ofdeath . . . as a logical solution to any problem”. (Palm Sunday 278). Given theconsiderable stress and emotional trauma he endured, it is no surprise thatVonnegut’s works often directly reference or allude to the psychological issueshe faced throughout his life.However, he believed that writing has beneficial“physiological and psychological effects on a human being”.(Bagombo 5),and he acknowledged using writing as a form of therapy, observing that “writersget a nice break in one way, at least: They can treat their mental illnessesevery day” (Wampeters 283). Accordingly, Vonnegut used his work as an“autobiographical pscychodrama – a career-long process of cleansing andrenewal” (Sanity Plea 152). Indeed, his novels “attempt to come to termswith or even to dispel the more worrisome aspects of his own psyche . . . andpersonal anxieties”22.Vonnegut understood that the “only way” human beingscan “rescue themselves” is by “enthusiastic intimacy with works of their own


imaginations” (Wampeters xxvii).Vonnegut’s has humanistic belief that the meaning of life is that which

we give to it. Man is made by his belief. As he believes, so he is. Vonnegutunderstands the psychological importance of humor. Indeed, the use of humorin handling reality is a “given” in Vonnegut’s writing, which “speaks of lifeitself as a dirty joke” (Fates 194). Vonnegut’s wit is “therapeutic brand ofhumor”23. “points toward mental health, toward life, and away from insanityand morbidity”says Lundquist24. Vonnegut’s believes “Be aware of this truththat the people on this earth could be joyous, if only they would live rationally”(PalmSunday176) Rather than suggesting the hopelessness of the humancondition, Vonnegut’s writings evidence a belief in the ability to change ouroften reflexive response to this absurd. Although Vonnegut sometimes probesthe limits of free will in works such as Slaughterhouse Five, Breakfast ofChampions, Galapagos, andTimequake, he does not dismiss it or fatalisticallycondemn his characters to a predetermined existence. While their paths arenot lined with rose petals, a number of Vonnegut’s characters successfullyexert free will and exercise rational thinking. Vonnegut’s novels underscorethe conclusion that, without self-awareness, the ability to control irrationalthinking, and the rational exercise of free will, human beings are condemned toconstant psychological manipulation by external events. In Forever PursingGenesis, Leonard Mustazza argues that Vonnegut’s protagonists attempt toact against upsetting events inherent to the human condition by retreating to“states of mind that are associated with the Edenic place and its attendantstate of mind, the state of innocence”25.

Vonnegut’s works suggest that in the face of a senseless reality,humanity’s appropriately measured response to the unalterable aspects of thatreality consists of “simply accepting the absurdity of our condition, neitheraffirming nor denying it and never asking the most meaningless of questions.Why?”says Harris26. The challenge of finding meaning within oneself andaccepting the absurdity of the human situation as an unalterable condition oflife, while still attempting to change what we can for the better, is a majorconcern of Vonnegut and he explores it in perhaps his most famous novel,Slaughterhouse-Five. The centerpiece of the novel in this respect is theframed prayer that hangs on protagonist Billy Pilgrim’s office wall “expressinghis method for keeping going” (SHF.58). the so-called Serenity Prayer states:“GOD GRANT ME THE SERENITY TO ACCEPT THE THINGS ICANNOT CHANGE, COURAGE TO CHANGE THE THINGS I CAN,AND WISDOM ALWAYS TO TELL THE DIFFERENCE”. Attempting toemulate the teaching of the prayer allows Billy,the hero to overcome the self-defeating belief that “life is meaningless” (SHF.96), and empowers him to “re-invent” himself (SHF 96).Vonnegut’s continued search for meaning surelycounts for a great deal as he balances hope and despair.Vonnegut feels that


the great American disease is loneliness because we no longer have extendedfamily. Loneliness, spurned by the dissolution of individuality - the reality ofbecoming an “interchangeable part in the American machine”.(Slapstick 5) -can only be resolved in companionship with others. The true fallacy of modernsociety is lovelessness. Vonnegut writes as though America would be moresincere if a more definite family atmosphere were implemented .Whileloneliness is often the root of artificial family growth, Vonnegut submits thatoften the absence or poor quality of one’s own biological family creates a voidthat is only to be filled by a comparable kinship. “In a hell-hole like Americawhere everybody takes such lousy care of their own relatives” (Slapstick132), Such artificial extended families are absolutely imperative in providingan ideal diet for human spirit. Throughout his writings, Vonnegut illustratesman’s necessity of family, whether hereditary or artificial, as a vital contributionto his survival and healthy intercourse with society. All relatives, be theynaturally procured or synthetically acquired, possess the unique ability, andresponsibility, to support, contribute to, and inspire his fellow man, which inturn ultimately appeals to the betterment of humankind. Vonnegut proves,through philosophic anecdotes and personal examples, that life is made easierand more enjoyable when artificial family members are relied upon to providesustenance and counsel. In Cat’s Cradle, Bokonists believe that humanity isorganized into teams, teams that do God’s Will without ever discovering whatthey are doing. Such a team is called a karass by Bokonon. In revealing thisparticular aspect of companionship, George Kraft and Howard W. Campbell,Jr. in Mother Night kindle a friendship encouraged by the absence of boththeir wives.

Whereas love is often equated with successful family life andrelationships, Vonnegut emphasizes that common decency, rather than love, isthe most effective and useful agent in perfecting relations with others. “A littleless love, and a little more common decency” (Slapstick 3), according toVonnegut, is all that is needed to ensure a near utopian climate when practicedby all members of a society. As proved by Eliza and Wilbur Swain in Slapstick,one can survive, and even thrive, in life without being showered with lovefrom others. In Mother Night, Vonnegut emphasizes this importance of relyingon others as Resi asks, “What is life without friends?” (MN151). Vonnegutconstantly petitions society with the pervading message that “you’ve got to bekind”(MN.127). Therefore, fruitful relationships as exhibited in artificial familygroups, through treating members with respect and sincerity, creates a utopianatmosphere for individuals. Vonnegut creates a web of interdependence andreliance on others for his characters; even in the midst of suffering and vilediscomfort, to truly be satisfied one must rely on the positive influences ofothers.The most daring thing is to create stable communities in which theterrible disease of loneliness can be cured. ). It seems that Vonnegut may


have felt as Anne Frank, quoted in the epigraph of Galapagos, did - “In spiteof everything, I still believe people are really good at heart”27. Kurt Vonnegutgives the ideas about loving humanity through Kilgore Trout,his alter-ego andhis characters.In God Bless You, Mr. Rosewater, Eliot gets most of hisinspiration, as well as his ideas about what can be done with it, from science-fiction writers, particularly Kilgore Trout, whom he considers to be America’s“greatest prophet” (GBYMR28)and he feels “I’m going to love these discardedAmericans,” he proclaims, “even though they’re useless and unattractive. Thatis going to be my work of art” (GBYMR. 47) and There’s only one rule that Iknow of, babies -: “God damn it, you’ve got to be kind”(GBYMR. 110).Vonnegut’s attempt to shake our consciences and awaken us to the reality ofour folly, evidenced by our disdainful attitude towards the rules of nature, isnone other than the essential mission of any artist who prizes his condition assuch. In this sense, John Cooley states: “Thus, one of the traditional functionsof the poet is invoked anew: to warn against violations of natural law, and tocreate images, metaphors, and myths both ecologically harmonious andsufficiently compelling to protect the natural world” 139. Vonnegut fulfils hisduty as an artist and a humanist, demanding more natural and healthier conditionsfor humanity by means of the recurrent natural elements in his works, whichmonitor the foolish, unnatural behaviour of human beings. Science, technology,and the mechanization of certain activities can surely make life easier andmore gratifying for human beings, bettering our conditions of existence, butonly as long as such means of improvement remain subject to prudence,rationality, and above all, respect towards nature and humanity itself as a partof it. Consequently, the only formula by means of which technology andhumanity may co-exist in harmony with the enveloping environment resides inthe human being’s own awareness of the need to preserve nature and everythingconnected with it, attempting a truly symbiotic relationship between the artificialand the natural, in order to achieve the necessary balance. Vonnegut seems toexpress the idea that, if we humans were to realise the deep moral responsibilitiesimplied, knowledge would be better employed –that is, not in search of unlikelyutopias, but of a greater stability and a healthier state of harmony with theworld around us.

In contrast to these appalling descriptions of the after-effects of humanfolly –although intrinsically connected to them within Vonnegut’s apocalypticperspective–, it is likewise common to find the compensating presence of severalamiable natural elements in many of his novels, among which we may observethe recurrent use of animals as part of the scenery or taking part in the action.His persistence in the use of this positive imagery leads him to describe anentire biological ecosystem in Galápagos. Vonnegut shows a special fondnesstowards dogs, for instance –as can be seen in Mother Night–, as well ascats, horses and other domestic creatures in his other novels. However, the


most outstanding and significant animal interventions are those carried out bya wide range of birds throughout his narrative, comprising both imaginary andreal-life species in an array moving from the most unusual to the plainest.They all serve as a means of support for the human characters involved in theplots. They do this by sympathising with the humans in the course of theirproblematical affairs, relieving, consoling or even warning them about somethingin their whereabouts. Thus, we encounter common pets, such as Paul’s cat inPlayer Piano, performing the same essential mission as the curious and exoticmarine iguanas found in Galápagos, both admonishing the human being forhis dangerous betrayal to nature and to himself .The tragic extinction of themajestic eagle-like Bermuda Erns in Breakfast of Champions, as well asthe peaceful and placid cohabitation of the Titanic bluebirds in The Sirens ofTitan, and above all, the awesome beauty of the courtship dance carried outby the blue-footed boobies in Galápagos, are all attempts to draw our attention,appealing to our common sense as the narrator describes the gratifying simplicityof natural life in contrast to the over-sophisticated, artificial, and harmfulexistence we lead in modern technological society.Cat’s Cradle, one of themost apocalyptic of Vonnegut’s works and the first to employ this resource,although with a slight variation in its chant, expressed as “poo-tee-weet”. Thebird is a symbol of universal value, representing the pastoral view of natureand its idealistic sense of harmony, peace, and joy. Vonnegut’s purpose isagain fulfilled, but with greater impetus in Slaughterhouse-Fivein which themessage is that, although death is a necessary phase in the natural cycle, it ispointless and contrary to the rules of nature to bring unnecessary death anddevastation to any living creature, which is precisely what war brings about.The bird’s interrogative reproof invites humanity to look after the most preciousgift in the universe, which is life itself.

He writes about the most excruciatingly painful things. But Vonnegut,armed with his schizophrenia, takes an absurd, distorted, wildly funny frameworkwhich is ultimately anaesthetic. Vonnegut is rightly remembered as a darklyhumorous social critic but the personal impression we always hold of him is ofa rather daft and kind old man whose vulnerability and honesty puncturedthrough the pretensions of the world around him. Kurt Vonnegut weaves satireand black humor effectively through his novel, Cat’s Cradle. Vonnegut’s satireof religion seems to be pointing to the fact that religion can be formed andperpetuated around any type of ritual or verse. Leslie Fiedler is of opinion thathis satire is mild because he tempers it with irony. But it has to be seen asemanating from his sense of being a conscientious agent for social change,and from his feeling of rage and guilt in being a part of the very dehumanizingsociety that he was always inveighing against. Although behind his fantasiesand his sentimentality there lurks a world of horror and desolation but hisbooks make us wish we were better. Accounting for the unusual Vonnegutean


humour, Robert W. Uphaus remarks: “Vonnegut’s humor represents aperceptual slant that makes destruction a bit more tolerable .157 Whatdistinguishes him from the other satirists is his refusal to give ethical absolutesagainst which we can form our judgements about the evils or excesses heattacks. He recommends “resigned passivity”160. , but the humanist in himand his ardent humanitarian zeal have made it impossible for him to beindifferent. His satire sweeps over several unwholesome aspects of modernlife and it often hurts even amidst the comic negligence which he occasionallyexhibits. Critics have often compared him with Jonathan Swift, Mark Twainand George Orwell. Most readers find that in Vonnegut’s work there is still aglimmer of desperate hope. Vonnegut’s continued search for meaning surelycounts for a great deal as he balances hope and despair.======================References-1. Klinkowitz, Jerome. “Kurt Vonnegut, Jr.” Literary Disruptions: The Making of

a Post-Contemporary American Fiction. Ed. Klinkowitz, Jerome. Urbana: U ofIllinois P, 1975.

2. Cited, Greene,graham: Vonnegu t, Kurt, Jr. 1922– (Contemporary LiteraryCriticism)Kurt Vonnegut, Novelist Who Caught the Imagination of His Age, IsDead at 84, Dinitia Smith, Published: April 12, 2007

3. Broer, Lawrence R.(editor). Sanity Plea: Schizophrenia in the Novels of KurtVonnegut (revised edition). Tuscaloosa, AL: University of Alabama Press, 1994.

4. Robert Scholes, “‘Mithridates, he died old’: Black Humor and Kurt Vonnegut,Jr.,” in The Sounder Few: Essays from the “Hollins Critic,”edited by R. H. W.Dillard, George Garrett, and John Rees Moore, University of Georgia Press,1971, pp. 173-85.

5. Bryan, C. D. B. “Kurt Vonnegut on Target.” New Republic October 8, 1966:21–22, 24–26.

6. Todd F. Davis, Kurt Vonnegut’s Crusade; or, How a Postmodern HarlequinPreached a New Kind of Humanism,SUNY series in Postmodern Culture,ReleaseDate: February 2006

7. Ibid.8. Cited, Tom Wolfe, Kurt Vonnegut, who wrote “Slaughterhouse-Five,” dies at

age 84,By Cristian Salazar,The Associated Press.9. Vonnegut, Kurt Jr ,Wampeters, Foma & Granfalloons(1974) Copy: Paperback

Dell, New York, New York, U.S.A.p.22810. Vonnegut, Kurt Jr,The Playboy Interview: Marshall McLuhan, Playboy

Magazine, March 1969,11. Vonnegut,Kurt,A Man Without Country. New York:Putnam,1991.12. The Charlotte Observer ,quoted ,cover jacket, Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, Slapstick:

Or, Lonesone No More,New York:Delacorte,1976.13. Holland, Thomas R.Vonnegut’s Major Works : Notes, MW Books Ltd. (Galway,

., Ireland)14. Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, Fates Worse Than Death: An Autobiographical Collage of

the 1980’s Paperback 9780425134061 Berkley Pub Group, E Rutherford, NewJersey, U.S.A.


15. Quoted, Stanley Schatt, “The Whale and the Cross: Vonnegut’s Jonah andChrist Figures,” in Southwest Review, Winter, 1971, pp. 29-42.

16. Holland, Thomas R.17. Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, God Bless You, Mr. Rosewater, Random House Publishing

Group, 1998.18. Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, Hocus Pocus, Berkley Pub Group, E Rutherford, New Jersey,

U.S.A.19. Festa, Conrad. “Vonnegut’s Satire.” Vonnegut in America: An Introduction to

the Life and Work of Kurt Vonnegut. Eds. Klinkowitz, Jerome and Donald L.Lawler. New York: Dell, 1977. 133-49.

20. Kurt Vonnegut, “In the Capital of the World,” essay within Palm Sunday: AnAutobiographical Collage, New York: Delacorte, 1981.

21. Ibid.22. Joseph J. Ward ,The Accidental Practitioner: Principles of Rational Emotive

Behavior Therapy in the Works of Kurt Vonnegut,university of South Florida,Tampa, FL, USA

23. Joseph J. Ward, The Accidental Practitioner: Principles of Rational EmotiveBehavior Therapy in the Works of Kurt Vonnegut

24. James Lundquist,The “New Reality” of Slaughterhouse-Five,From KurtVonnegut (NY, Frederic Ungar Pub. Co., 1977)

25. Mustazza, Leonard. “A Darwinian Eden: Science and Myth in Kurt Vonnegut’sScience and Myth in Kurt Vonnegut’s Galapagos.” Journal of the Fantastic inthe Arts. 3,2,10(1991):55-65.

26. Harris, Charles B. “Illusion and Absurdity: The Novels of Kurt Vonnegut, Jr.”Contemporary American Novelists of the Absurd. Ed. Harris, Charles B. NewHaven CN.: College & UP, 1971. 51-75 and 139-141.

27. Vonnegut, Kurt. Galápagos. New York: Dell Publishing, 1999. 28. Cooley, John R. “The Garden in the Machine: Three Postmodern Pastorals.”

Michigan Academician: Papers of the Michigan Academy of Science, Arts,and Letters. 13, 4 (Spring 1981): 405-420.

29. Uphaus, Robert W. “Expected Meaning in Vonnegut’s Dead-End Fiction.”Novel. 8 (1975):164-174.

30. Benjamin DeMott —Vonnegut’s Otherworldly Laughter in his cover storyfor Saturday Review in May 1971 quoted ,Literary Luxuries: AmericanWriting at the End of the Millenium By Joe David Bellamy.


V. S. Naipaul India: The Homeland

*P. K. Sharma==========================================================Abstract- Consider the fact that Indian written history stretches backalmost 4000 years, to the civilisation centres of the Indus Valley Cultureat Harappa & Mohenjo-Daro. The era most important for the study ofthe works of V. S. Naipaul is the era of the British as the mentalcolonisation institutionalised during their era is the focus of the worksof Naipaul on India. According to his vision, it was this era which playedwith the minds of the Indians and made them see the history of the pre-British and ancient period in a very different light as traditionally viewedby Indian historians==========================================================

===========================* Professor of English, Government K.R.G. Post Graduate (Autonomous)

College Gwalior (M.P.)

By 1850 A.D., India had a population of some 200 million or more1.Britain, on the other hand, had no indigenous written language until the 9th

century A.D. Its population was about 16.6 million in 1850. The keys seem tohave been superior weaponry, a strong profit motive and Eurocentricconfidence.From the moment the Portuguese rounded the Cape of Good Hopeon Africa’s southern tip in 1488, opening sea lanes to the Far East, the Europeanpowers strove to acquire Asian trading posts of their own. For centuries, theViennese had controlled the European branch of the Silk Road, reaping enormousprofits on silk, spices, fine china and precious metals. The Viennese monopolyended with the establishment of the sea route. At first, the European powers inAsia were solely interested in trade but over time, the acquisition of territorygrew in importance. Among the nations looking for a piece of the action wasBritain. Britain had been trading in India since about 1600, but it did not beginto seize large sections of land until 1757, after the battle of Plassey. This battlepitted 3000 soldiers of the British East India Company against the 5000- strongarmy of the young Nawab of Bengal, Siraj ud Daulah, and his French EastIndia Company allies. Fighting began on the morning of June 23, 1757. Heavyrain spoiled the Nawab’s cannon powder (the British covered theirs), leadingto his defeat $5 million from the Bengali treasury which financed furtherexpansion.2 The East India Company traded in cotton silk, tea and opium


following the Battle of Plassey , it functioned as the military authority in growingsections on India as well. By 1770, heavy Company taxation and other policieshad left millions of Bengalis impoverished. While British soldiers and tradersmade their fortunes, the Indians starved. Between 1770-1773, about 10 millionpeople died of famine in Bengal- 1/3rd of the population. At this time, Indianswere also barred from high office in their own land. The British consideredthem inherently corrupt and untrustworthy. Many Indians were distressed bythe rapid cultural changes imposed by the British. They worried that Hinduand Muslim India would be ‘Christianized’3. Early in 1857, a new type of riflecartridge was given to the solders of the British Indian Army. Rumours spreadthat the cartridges had been greased with pig and cow fat, an abomination toboth major Indian religions. On May 10, 1857, the revolt started, when mainlyBengali Muslim troops marched to Delhi and pledged their support to the Mughalemperor. Both sides moved slowly unsure of public reaction. After a year-longstruggle, the revels surrendered on June 20, 1858. Following the Rebellion of1857-58, the British Government abolished both the Mughal Dynasty, whichhad ruled India more or less for 300 years and the East India Company. Theemperor, Bahadur Shah was convicted of sedition and exiled to Burma. Controlof India was given to a British Government General, who reported back to theSecretary of state for India and the British parliament. It should be noted thatthe British Raj included only 2/3rd of modern India, with the other portionsunder the control of local Princes. However, Britain exerted a lot of pressureon these Princes, effectively controlling all of India.

Queen Victoria promised that the British Government would work tobetter its Indian subjects. To the British, this meant educating them in Britishmodes of thought and stamping out cultural practices such as sati. The Britishalso practised ‘Divide and Rule’ policies, pitting Hindu and Muslim Indiansagainst one another. In 1905 the colonial government divided Bengal into Hinduand Muslim sections; this division was revoked after strong protests. Britainalso encouraged the formation of the Muslim League of India in 1990. TheIndian Army was made up mostly of Sikhs, Nepalese Gurkhas and other minoritygroups as well. During World War I, Britain declared war on Germany onIndia’s behalf. More than 1.3 million soldiers and labourers were serving in theBritish Indian Army by the time of the Armistice. 43,000 Indian and Gourkhasoldiers also died. Although most of India relied to the British flag, Bengal andPunjab were restive. Many Indian were eager for independence; they wereled by a political new-comer called Mohandas Gandhi. In April, 1919, morethan 5000 unnamed protesters gathered at Amritsar, in the Punjab. Britishtroops fired on the crowd, killing an estimated 1500 men, women and children.The official toll was 379.4 When World War II broke out, once again, Indiacontributed hugely to the British war effort. In addition to troops the princelystates donated substantial amount of cash. By the end of the war, India had an


incredible 2.5 million – volunteer army. 87,000 Indian soldiers had died incombat. The Indian Independence Moment was very strong by this time, though,and British rule was widely resented. Some 30,000 Indian POWs were recruitedby the Germans and Japanese to fight against the Allies, in exchange for theirfreedom. Most, however, remained loyal. Indian troops fought in Burma, NorthAfrica, Italy and elsewhere. Even as World War II raged, Gandhi and othermembers of the Indian National Congress(INC) demonstrated against Britishrule over India. The earlier government of India Act (1935) had provided forthe establishment of provincial legislatures across the colony. The act alsocreated an umbrella federal government for the provinces and princely statesand granted the vote to about 10% of India’s male population.5 These movestowards limited self-governance only made India impatient for true self- rule.In 1942, Britain sent the Cripps Mission to offer future dominion status inreturn for help to recruit more soldiers. Cripps may have made a secretagreement with the Muslim League, allowing Muslims to opt out of a futureIndian state. In any case, Gandhi and the INC did not trust the British envoyand demanded immediate independence in return for their cooperation. Whenthe talks broke down, the INC launched the Quit India moment calling for theimmediate withdrawal of Britons from India. In response, the British arrestedthe INC’s leadership. Mass demonstrations burst out across the country butwere crushed by the British Army. The offer of independence had been made,however, Britain may not have realised it, but it was now just a question ofwhen the British Raj would end. The soldiers who had joined Japan and Germanyin fighting the British were put on trial at Delhi’s Red Fort early in 1946. Aseries of ten courts –martial were held, trying 45 prisoners on charges oftreason, murder and torture. The men were convicted but huge public protestsforced the commutation of their sentences. Sympathetic mutinies broke out inthe Indian Army and Navy during the trial, as well. On August 17, 1946, violentfighting broke out between Hindus and Muslims in Culcutta. The trouble quicklyspread across India6. Meanwhile, cash-strapped Britain announced its decisionto withdraw from India by June of 1948. Millions of refugees flooded acrossthe border in each direction. Between 2,50,000 and 5,00,000 people were killedin sectarian violence during the partition. Pakistan became independent onAugust 14, 1947. India followed the next day. Subsequently, as far as theconclusion for the study is concerned, the study found that the era most importantfor the study of the works of Naipaul is the era of the British as the mentalcolonisation institutionalised during their era is the focus of the works of Naipaulin India.======================References-1. James, Lawrence. Raj: The Making and Unmaking of British India. London: St.

Martin’s Griffin. 2000.p.61


2. James, Lawrence. The Rise and Fall Of the British Empire. London: St. Martin’sGriffin. 1997.p.166

3. Ibid.p.2024. Ibid.p.125. James, Lawrence. Raj: The Making and Unmaking of British India. London: St.

Martin’s Griffin. 2000.p.796. Ibid.p.41





[email protected]








Role of Ideology in Translation Practice

*Alka Rani Agrawal==========================================================Abstract- Ideology serves to fulfill political purposes and controls selectionof texts to be translated, translation strategies, and the spreading of certaintranslated texts. Translation cannot be separated from ideology. The corereason is that ideology is often coded in the linguistic expression. Thevery fact of choosing to translate one particular article or book can bean ideological decision in itself. In reality, ideology is usually what causesa translator to stray from close, literal translation. It is therefore worthyto consider it impossible to divide the ideological aspect from the otheraspects of translation.==========================================================

===========================* Associate Professor & Head, Department of English, N. K. B. M. G. P.G. College,

Chandausi

Ideology plays an extremely significant role in translation practice becauseideology that serves to fulfill political purposes, controls selection of texts to betranslated, translation strategies, and the spreading of certain translated texts.Schaffner claims that all translations are ideological since “the choice of asource text and the use to which the subsequent target text is put are determinedby the interests, aims, and objectives of social agents”. Translation cannot beseparated from ideology. The core reason is that ideology is often coded in thelinguistic expression. Translation that engages in a transfer from one languageinto another language is selected as an effective tool of ideological operation.Schaffner further says that ideological aspects can be determined within atranslated text itself, at “the lexical level, for example, in the deliberate choiceor avoidance of a particular word” and at “the grammatical level, for example,in the use of passive structures to avoid an expression of agency.” Thesearguments support that translation is a site for ideological clashes, encounters,compromises and challenges. Translation scholars who slant in favor of thepolitical definitions of ideology mainly believe that translating itself is a politicalact as Tahir-Gurcaglar argues, “is translation political because, both as activityand product, it displays process of negotiation among different agents? Onmicro-level, these agents are translators, authors, critics, publishers, editors,and readers”. Ideology, no doubt plays an important role in translation practicebecause translation and interpretation is affected by ideology. Rather the problem


is which ideology does not influence translation? Besides, the translator remainsinvolved in shaping the culture. In this ideal world, ideology would not color ourtranslations. But sometimes especially for texts that are not primarily factual,such as contracts, it is impossible to avoid. We translators must simply behyperaware of the fact that our opinions and experiences do influence andthey may make us choose certain translatorial strategies or words or styles ofwriting that perhaps are not exactly right for the text. Scholars in the field oflanguage-related, cultural and translation studies, however, often tend to extendthe concept of ideology beyond political sphere and define it in a rather politicallyneutralized sense as “a set of ideas, which organize our lives and help usunderstand the relation to our environment”. (Calzada-Perez). The strategyof paraphrasing is the most common way of translating idioms when a matchcannot be found in the target language. Its purpose is unpacking the meaningof the source item, particularly if the item in question is semantically complex.In translation strategy, literal translation often fails to translate the genuinemeaning or the implication, so it needs an added note to provide furtherinformation. Furthermore, any information you find in a reference book shouldnot be used to replace any statement or stretch of the text but only to supplementthe text, where you think the readers are likely to find it inadequate, incomplete,or obscure. The strategy of adding notes is obviously used to supplement extrainformation for clear and adequate understanding of the translated text.According to Tymoczko, “the ideology of translation resides not simply in thetext translated, but in the voicing and stance of the translator, and in its relevanceto the receiving audience. In forming a certain kind of subject, in presentingparticular versions of the colonized, translation brings into being overarchingconcepts of reality and representation. These concepts, and what they allowus to assume, completely occlude the violence that accompanies theconstruction of the colonial subject. The very fact that you choose to translateone particular article or book, but not another, can be an ideological decision initself.

Ultimately the translator always has to judge how close to stay to thesource text. A translator is only as great a translator as he or she is a judge ofhow far to stray from the source text and when to do it. Ultimately it all comesdown to who the audience for the translation. Certainly, a translator cannotchange everything crude or ugly or racist. Nor would you want a translator to.Usually the translator shouldn’t change anything. But occasionally it’snecessary. A text does not exist in a vacuum; it is the product of a culture. Andcultures don’t always translate in balance. Knowing when to make the changeand when not to, is what makes a good translator. Ultimately knowing the rightthing to do for a text is the mark of a good translator! Translation is viewed asa communicative act. In this view, translation is conceived primarily “as aprocess of intercultural communication, whose end product is a text which is


capable of functioning appropriately in specific situations and context of use”.(Schaffner) Translation teaching is now not seen as a set of rules andinstructions prescribed by translation teachers to the students as to whatstrategies will lead to a ‘good’ or ‘correct’ translation and what to a ‘wrong’and ‘incorrect’ one. Understanding the importance of decision-making intranslation, the translation teachers should try to describe the actual translationaldecisions made by actual translators under different socio-cultural andideological settings in real life and real situations, and explain the elocutionaryconsequences resulted from adoption of such decisions for the students.Translation teachers should make it clear for the students that every translationhas its own aim determined by its translator, and that they could freely choosethe options that best serve their intended aim of translation. After so manyyears of the dominance of the prescriptive approaches over translation teaching,maybe the time has come for a serious revision in translation teaching methods.Ideology is usually what causes a translator to stray from close, literal translation.Sometimes it’s professionalism and common sense. About translation andideology, Landers writes “What does the profession of translation do?Obviously, it translates. If a translator allows ideology to color anything he orshe translates, the profession suffers. And when translation is stifled ether byrepression or self-censorship entire nations are deprived of a glimpse into themind of the other.” Nord has presented a series of questions arise in thetranslation practice from the power-oriented perspective: “What gets translatedi. e. what is valued and what is excluded? Who does the translation that is whocontrols the production of translation? Who is translated for or who is givenaccess to foreign materials and who denied? How is the material translatedand what is omitted, added, altered, to control the message?” These questionsinvolve who is saying what to whom for what purposes and therefore confirmthat ideological manipulation also exists in the translation as it does in mostforms of communication. Ideology explicitly identified as power relations isimplicated in every aspect of human communication, and translation as oneway of interlingual and intercultural communication has also been subject toideological manipulation. This means that it is necessary for each translator tohave at least some control over his/her own mental processes and own deepideology so as to be able to inform his/her readers of the kind of ideologicaldeformation inevitably following from such a premise. It is therefore worthy toconsider it impossible to divide the ideological aspect from the other aspects oftranslation. Since everybody has an ideology, and everybody translatinginterferes with the translation process with their own ideology, the best solutionfor such ideology is to be explicit at least for the translator.======================References-


1. Calzada-Perez, M. (2003). Introduction. In M. Calzada-Perez (Ed.) Apropos ofIdeology (pp. 1-22). Manchester: St. Jerome.

2. E. Landers: Literary Translation: A Practical Clifford al Guide.3. Nord, C. (2003). Function and Loyalty in Bible Translation. In M. Calzada-Perez

(ed.). Apropos of ideology (pp. 36, 89-112). Philadelphia: Multilingual Matters.4. Schaffner, C. (2003). Third ways and new Centres: Ideological unity or

difference? In M. Calzada-Pérez (Ed.) Apropos of ideology (pp. 23-42).Manchester: St. Jerome.

5. Tahir-Gurcaglar.S.(2003). The Translation Bureau Revisited: Translation asSymbol. In M. Calzada-Perez (Ed.) Apropos of Ideology (pp. 113-130).Manchester: St. Jerome.

6. Tymoczko, M. (2003). Ideology and the Position of the Translator: In whatSense is a Translator 'in between'? In M. Calzada-Perez (Ed.) Apropos ofIdeology (pp.181-202). Manchester: St. Jerome.



[email protected]





(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)


ISSN 0975-4083


Literacy in India

*Archana Singhal==========================================================Abstract-A Literacy is the skill of being able to read and write fairly well.Unlike speech, reading and writing do not come naturally; they have tobe learned. Most people who live in industrialized or "developed"countries can read and write because everyday activities there dependon it. "Developing" countries in places like Asia and Africa-with verydifferent ways of life from the industrialized nations-have low literacyrates because most people there can get along without the skill. (Sometribal languages) cannot read and write, or are illiterate. Even in suchwealthy, highly developed nations as the United States, many people don'tknow how to read and write.==========================================================

===========================* Lecturar, D.A.V. College, Muzaffarnagar (U.P.)

Defining literacy in our changing world is not easy. Several years ago,being literate meant being able to read and write a little. Now, being literatemeans being able to read and write at a level to be successful in today’s worldand also being proficient at math, knowing how to use technology, and knowinghow to solve problems and make decisions. Over the 1980’s and 1990’sdefinitions of literacy broadened to accommodate the challenges of globalisation,including the impact of new technology and information media and theemergence of knowledge economics .The World Declaration on Educationfor All placed the challenges of literacy within the broader context of :Meetingthe basic learning needs of every child ,youth and adults .Literacy is no longerexclusively understood as an individual phenomenon ,but is seen also as acontextual and societal and societal one.Literacy Rate in India- To know development in a society, Literacy is anotherproper indicator of economic development. For purpose of census, a person inage limit of seven and above, who can both write and read with understandingin any of the language is considered as a literate in India. In 1944, the Governmentof British India presented a Literacy in India grew very slowly untilindependence in 1947. An acceleration in the rate of literacy growth occurredin the 1991–2001 period. Prior to the British era, education in Indian commencedunder the supervision of a guru in traditional schools called gurukuls.The gurukuls


were supported by public donation and were one of the earliest forms of publicschool offices. In the colonial era, the gurukul system began to decline as thesystem promoted by the British began to gradually take over. Between 1881–82 and 1946–47, the number of English primary schools grew from 82,916 to134,866 and the number of students in English Schools grew from 2,061,541 to10,525,943. Literacy rates in accordance to British in India rose from 3.2 percent in 1881 to 7.2 per cent in 1931 and 12.2 per cent in 1947. In 2000–01,there were 60,840 pre-primary and pre-basic schools, and 664,041 primaryand junior basic schools. Total enrolment at the primary level has increasedfrom 19,200,000 in 1950–51 to 109,800,000 in 2001–02. The number of highschools in 2000–01 was higher than the number of primary schools at the timeof independence plan, called the Sergeant Scheme for the educationalreconstruction of India, with a goal of producing 100% literacy in the countrywithin 40 years, i.e. by 1984. Although the 40-year time-frame was derided atthe time by leaders of the Indian independence movement as being too long aperiod to achieve universal literacy, India had only just crossed the 74% levelby the 2011 census.

The provision of universal and compulsory education for all children inthe age group of 6–14 was a cherished national ideal and had been givenoverriding priority by incorporaton as a Directive Policy in Article 45 of theConstitution, but it is still to be achieved more than half a century since theConstitution was adopted in 1949. Parliament has passed the Constitution 86thAmendment Act, 2002, to make elementary education a Fundamental Rightfor children in the age group of 6–14 years. In order to provide more funds foreducation, an education cess of 2 per cent has been imposed on all direct andindirect central taxes through the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2004. As of almost 9percent. It has gone up to 74.04% in 2011 from 65.38% in 2001, thus perPopulation Census of India 2011, the Literacy rate of India has shown asimprovement showing an increase of 9 percent in the last 10 years. It consistsof male literacy rate 82.14% and female literacy rate is 65.46%. Kerala with93.9% literacy rate is the top state in India. Lakshadweep and Mizoram are atsecond and third position with 92.3% and 91.06% literacy rate respectively.Bihar with 63.08% literacy rate is the last in terms of literacy rate in India.

Ranking of States in India by Literacy Rate

S.No State Literacy Rate (2011

Census)

Male Literacy Rate

(2011 Census)

Female Literacy Rate

(2011 Census)

1 Andaman & Nicobar Islands

86.3% 90.1% 81.8%

2 Andhra Pradesh 67.7% 75.6% 59.7% 3 Arunachal Pradesh 67.0% 73.7% 59.6% 4 Assam 73.2% 78.8% 67.3%


5 Bihar 63.8% 73.5% 53.3% 6 Chandigarh 86.4% 90.5% 81.4% 7 Chattisgarh 71.0% 81.5% 60.6% 8 Dadra & Nagar Haveli 77.7% 86.5% 65.9% 9 Daman & Diu 87.1% 91.5% 79.6% 10 Delhi 86.3% 91.0% 80.9% 11 Goa 87.4% 92.8% 81.8% 12 Gujarat 79.3% 87.2% 70.7% 13 Haryana 76.6% 85.4% 66.8% 14 Himachal Pradesh 83.8% 90.8% 76.6% 15 Jammu and Kashmir 68.7% 78.3% 58.0% 16 Jharkhand 67.6% 78.5% 56.2% 17 Karnataka 75.6% 82.8% 68.1% 18 Kerala 93.9% 96.0% 92.0% 19 Lakshadweep 92.3% 96.1% 88.2% 20 Madhya Pradesh 70.6% 80.5% 60.0% 21 Maharashtra 82.9% 89.8% 75.5% 22 Manipur 79.8% 86.5% 73.2% 23 Meghalaya 75.5% 77.2% 73.8% 24 Mizoram 91.6% 93.7% 89.4% 25 Nagaland 80.1% 83.3% 76.7% 26 Orissa 73.5% 82.4% 64.4% 27 Puducherry 86.5% 92.1% 81.2% 28 Punjab 76.7% 81.5% 71.3% 29 Rajasthan 67.1% 80.5% 52.7% 30 Sikkim 82.2% 87.3% 76.4% 31 Tamil Nadu 80.3% 86.8% 73.9% 32 Tripura 87.8% 92.2% 83.1% 33 Uttar Pradesh 69.7% 79.2% 59.3% 34 Uttarakhand 79.6% 88.3% 70.7% 35 West Bengal 77.1% 82.7% 71.2% - INDIA 74.04% 82.14% 65.46%

Source:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/India_states_ranking_by_literacy_rateReasons for Low Literacy Rate-1. The absence of adequate school infrastructure like improper facilities

and inefficient teaching staff is one of the main factors affecting literacyin India. There is a shortage of classrooms to accommodate all thestudents in 2006–2007

2. In addition, there is no proper sanitation in most schools. The study of188 government-run primary schools in central and northern India revealedthat 59% of the schools had no drinking water facility and 89% no toilets.

3. In 600,000 villages and multiplying urban slum habitats, ‘free andcompulsory education’ is the basic literacy instruction dispensed by barelyqualified ‘para teachers’.

4. The average Pupil Teacher Ratio for All India is 1:42, implying teachershortage.

5. Such inadequacies resulted in a non-standardized school system whereliteracy rates may differ.


6. Furthermore, the expenditure allocated to education was never above4.3% of the GDP from 1951–2002 despite the target of 6% by the KothariCommission.

7. Discrimination of lower castes has resulted in high dropout rates andlow enrolment rates. The National Sample Survey Organization and theNational Family Health Survey collected data in India on the percentageof children completing primary school which are reported to be only36.8% and 37.7% respectively.

8. On 21 February 2005, the Prime Minister of India said that he waspained to note that “only 47 out of 100 children enrolled in class I reachclass VIII, putting the dropout rate at 52.78 per cent.”

9. It is estimated that at least 35 million, and possibly as many as 60 million,children aged 6–14 years are not in school.

10. Absolute poverty in India has also deterred the pursuit of formal educationas education is not deemed of as the highest priority among the poor ascompared to other basic necessities. The MRP-based (mixed recallperiod) poverty estimates of about 22% of poverty in 2004–05 whichtranslated to 22 out of per 100 people are not meeting their basic needs,much less than meeting the need for education.

11. The large proportion of illiterate females is another reason for low literacyin India. Inequality based on gender differences resulted in female literacyrates being lower at 65.46% than that of their male counterparts at82.14%.

12. Due to strong stereotyping of female and male roles, Sons are thoughtof to be more useful and hence are educated. Females are pulled to helpout on agricultural farms at home as they are increasingly replacing themales on such activities which require no formal education.

Government schemes for literacy:National Literacy Mission- The National Literacy Mission, launched in1988, aimed at attaining a literacy rate of 75 per cent by 2007. It impartsfunctional literacy to non-literates in the age group of 15–35 years. The TotalLiteracy Campaign is the principal strategy of the NLM for eradication ofilliteracy. The Continuing Education Scheme provides a learning continuumto the efforts of the Total Literacy and Post literacy programmes.Sarva Siksha Abhiyan- The Sarva Siksha Abhiyan (Hindi for Total LiteracyCampaign) was launched in 2001 to ensure that all children in the 6–14-yearage-group attend school and complete eight years of schooling by 2010. Animportant component of the scheme is the Education Guarantee Schemeand Alternative and Innovative Education, meant primarily for children inareas with no formal school within a one kilometre radius. The centrallysponsored District Primary Education Programme, launched in 1994, hadopened more than 160,000 new schools by 2005, including almost 84,000


alternative schools.Non-governmental efforts-The bulk of Indian illiterates live in the country’srural areas, where social and economic barriers play an important role in keepingthe lowest strata of society illiterate. Government programmes alone, howeverwell intentioned, may not be able to dismantle barriers built over centuries.Major social reformation efforts are sometimes required to bring about a changein the rural scenario. Several non-governmental organisations such as ITC,Rotary Club, Lions Club have worked to improve the literacy rate in India.Conclusion- Every citizen studying in some or other universities be giventask of educating few number of Indian people in their localities in the way andmanner it is desirable. Local survey groups be nominated by eminent people ofthe targeted area and they may be put to analyze,formulate efficacious plan tocover up largest population bringing up rate of literacy in India. Every personin the government job be given options of getting some pay increments orincentives if they are utilizing their leave or holidays in educating those masseswho need literacy.Free education programs to poor people living in villagesand towns. Setting up of new schools and collegesat district and statelevels.Several committees should be form to ensure proper utilization of fundsallotted to improve literacy rate.======================References-1. Ashok Gulati, National Literacy Policy , The Economic Times, August 3, 2001

, p. 12.2. Ramesh Chandra and Linu Mathew Phillip, op.cit; p. 30163. Woman with a Mission: Kaur, Raj Kumari Amrit.4. Women's Struggle : History of AIWC 2002, Basu, Arpna and Roy, Bharti.5. Population Census 2001.6. Population Census 2011.


Regional Imbalances and Disparities in India:Natural Endowments or Man Made

*Meenakshi Chahal==========================================================Abstract-In India, Sectoral and Regional Imbalances have always beena source of great social and psychological tensions. It is difficult taskfor the government of India to take up lead in reconciling regional interestswith national unity. There is a wide gap between region to region andprovince to province etc. There are pockets of poverty amidst plenty withineach province/state. Dry and Hilly areas as well as those with tribalpopulation are still far below the national average. It has widened thegap between prosperous and backward states thus creating a wide gapbetween rich and poor within a region. One of the main consequencesof regional imbalances is the 'Migration' of people to the developed areas.Fruits of development are not reaching all people equitably. Thesedisparities may generate friction among various sections of the societywith tragic, undesirable and even violent outcomes. Lok Satta governmenthad stated that it will strive to remove disparities at various levels andtake immediate measures to ensure sustainable and balanced developmentof all the regions. A right balance is needed between our developmentneeds and environmental commitments to ensure long run growthsustainability.Key Words-Disparities, Imbalances, Reconciliation, Sustainability.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant Professor, B.Ed.(2-year) Programme,Directorate Of Distance

Education, Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra

Introduction- Problem of Regional Imbalances has become a worldwidephenomenon today. After the Second World War the main problem of 1980’shas been the regional imbalances. Regional Disparity in India is now a matterof serious concern. Major States that constitute 96% total population, Forwardgroup consists of Andhra Pradesh, Gujarat, Haryana, Karnataka, Kerala, Punjaband Tamilnadu while Backward group consists of Assam, Bihar, MadhyaPradesh, Orissa, Rajasthan, Uttar Pradesh & West Bengal. Forward group ofStates account for 42% of the National population, Backward group accountsfor 54% of the National population of the country. Thus Disparities in economicand social development across the regions and intra-regional disparities among


different segments of the society have been one major area of concern. It hasinfluenced planning in India since independence.Regional Violence: A Flare Up Of Tensions- Constitutionally, India is asecular state but large scale violence have periodically occurred in India sinceindependence. In recent decades, communal tensions and religion-based politicshave become more prominent. Although, India is generally known for religiouspluralism, the Hindutva ideology propagates that India belongs to the Hindusand Christians, Muslims are aliens. Many religion and communal violence tookplace throughout the history of post-Independence India. Major religious violentincidents include Ayodhya Debate, Bombay Riots,1993 Bombay Bombings,2002 Gujarat violence. In recent years, there has been a sharp increase inviolent attacks on Christians in India, often perpetrated by Hindu Nationalists.Acts of violence include arson of churches, re-conversion of Christians toHinduism, distribution of threatening literature, burning of Bibles, raping ofnuns, murder of Christian priests and destruction of Christian schools, colleges,and cemeteries. India is sub-divided into 29 states differing in terms of theirproductive potential and the type of industry they can support. The actualizationof their potential holds the key to increase the competitiveness of the nation asa whole. Sub-national regions are the locus of important determinants ofcompetitiveness for the nation. The potential of the states drives the diversifiedcompetency of the nation where regional specialization provides the impetusfor growth of the nation. Secret of growth of USA and UK lies in relegatingthe economic roles to the appropriate levels of the geographical strata. Indianeeds to be perceived as an amalgamation of resources and competenciesspread across its states. Business and companies need to adjudge investmentopportunities through the lens of the competencies offered by the states. It’stime for all the Indian states to realize their roles in the development of theindustrial base in the country and take a productive initiative in this race forcompetitiveness.• Variation in Economic Aspects- Economically, some countries arehighly developed, some other countries are still developing and some more areunder developed. Several factors are responsible for such variations amongthe nations besides political factors as availability of sufficient natural resources,quality of human resources and its quantity, abundance of financial resourcesand technological skills among the people etc. U.S.A, U.K, Western EuropeanNations, Japan, Australia etc. are best examples for economically developednations. India,China, Srilanka are some of the examples for developingnations.African Nations, Bangladesh etc. are some examples for underdeveloped nations. There have been demands for separate states in India sinceindependence e.g. a separate state in Andhra Pradesh, Vidharbha inMaharashtra, Chhatishgarh from Madhya Pradesh, Jharkhand from Bihar andUttaranchal from Uttar Pradesh. These demands have been mainly due to


lack of economic development in different regions that further leads to regionalimbalances.• Migration to Developed Areas : Lack of Civic Amenities- One ofthe main consequences of regional imbalances is the ‘Migration’ of people tothe developed areas. Many skilled people from India migrate to the developednations. Similarly within India, people from rural areas or under developedregions have been migrating to highly developed cities or regions e.g. Mumbaicity has been facing the menace of population pressure on its resources. City’scivic authorities have been facing a challenging task of providing the basiccivic amenities to the citizens.Violence, Law and Order problems are otherconsequences of such migrations to the developed regions from the underdeveloped or developing regions.• Inter-state differences : Caste and Political Nexus- Some stateslike Punjab, Maharashtra, Gujarat, and Tamil Nadu are marching ahead rapidlyunder the stimulus of the plan schemes while others are lagging behind and areunable to find adequate resources to implement the schemes. Four most populousand large states of Bihar, MP, Rajasthan and UP lag far behind and are knownas BIMARU (sick) states. Caste politics and politicial- criminal nexus are atits peak dragging the BIMARU states backwards. Most disturbing is North-South divide due to regional imbalances. Southern parts of India had movedahead of North in matter of birth control, literacy and prosperity during lastfew decades. Many people of South India think that their superior genes haveled them to prosperity. They are of the opinion that they are more intelligent,aware, enterprising and forward looking than North Indians.• Ideological attack by British : Enflaming Casteist Tendencies-British Rulers, Missionaries, Philosophers and Writers jointly launched anideological attack on Indian social structure and its value system. They describedIndian social structure as ‘discriminatory’,‘exploitative’, ‘oppressive’,‘barbarous’, ‘uncivilized’ and ‘highly stratified’. They held these aspectsresponsible for causing illiteracy, communal problems, escalating violence,crimes and corruption, disparities of power, wealth and culture, evil socialpractices, feudalistic attitude, backward thinking, belief in dogmas andsuperstitions. Laying down the foundations of democratic institutions in Indiathey started ‘Quota System Based On Castes’, introduced ‘ElectoralPolitics’ on communal basis and enflamed casteist tendencies through ‘CensusOperations’.Thus, there are serious regional disparities among different states of our country.Similarly, we have regional inequalities among different regions in a state.Even in a district there are disparities among different ‘Mandals’. Fruits ofdevelopment are not reaching all people equitably. These disparities maygenerate friction among various sections of the society with tragic, undesirableand even violent outcomes, if not addressed immediately.


Various Facets Of Sustainability : An Important Dimension- Sustainabledevelopment has been defined in many ways but the most frequently quoteddefinition is from Our Common Future, also known as the Brundtland Report(1987): “Sustainable development is development that meets the needsof the present without compromising the ability of future generationsto meet their own needs. There are different aspects to sustainability, mostimportant among these are Environmental and Social. ‘Environmentsustainability’ refers to the need to preserve ecology and ecosystems forsustainable growth. ‘Social Sustainability’ entails that the developmentprocess promotes social cohesion and reduces inequities. A balanced focus onboth these aspects is a hallmark of sustainable development.Environment Sustainability- has a global dimension. As regards India, itremains fully committed to the global initiative to address environmental issues.It is participating in the ongoing international negotiations and has been part of94 multilateral environmental agreements. In the recently held DohaConference (December 2012), India protected its interests fully and succeededin bringing the equity aspect firmly on the table. It has also voluntarily agreedto reduce the carbon emission intensity of its GDP by 20-25 per cent over2005 levels by 2020. Within the country, the Government is also consistentlymaking efforts/policies towards ensuring environmental sustainability. Thisincludes policies like Joint Forest Management, Green Rating for IntegratedHabitat Assessment, Coastal Regulation Zone, Clean energy drive througheco labeling and energy efficiency labeling, Fuel efficiency standards, etc.Sustainability is now seen as a key challenge as well as an opportunity inbusiness. In future, only companies that make sustainability a goal will achievecompetitive advantage. Industry being the catalyst of development, it needs topatronise the concept of sustainability in its various processes. NationalAgricultural Policy in India focuses on sustainable development of agricultureby promoting technically sound and economically viable, environmentally non-degrading and socially acceptable uses of the country’s natural resources.Towards this end, productivity enhancements are needed through higherinvestments in agriculture, greater research in the area of regionally adaptedvarieties and hybrids, adoption of eco-friendly integrated pest managementtechnologies and use of manure and composite instead of artificialfertilizers.Green Banking i.e the banks as the financing agent of the economicand developmental activities of the world could also play a crucial role inpromoting overall sustainable development. It is in this respect that the conceptof green banking has emerged and is recognized as an important strategy toaddress sustainable development concerns and creating awareness amongpeople about environmental responsibility. Green banking has two dimensions.Firstly, the way the banking business is being done i.e. paperless or not. Thereare several guidelines from the Reserve Bank on e-banking and banks are


also putting sincere efforts towards adopting paperless banking. Secondly,dimension of green banking relates to where the bank puts its money. GreenBanking entails banks to encourage environment friendly investments and givelending priority to those industries which have already turned green or aretrying to go green and thereby help to restore the natural environment.

Social Sustainability-No programme for controlling environmentdegradation can be effective without education, jobs for everyone and withouta visible rise in the standard of living of common masses. Social sustainabilityfocuses both on ‘Inter-generational equity’ i.e. future generations shouldhave the same or greater access to social resources as the current generation,and ‘Intra- generational equity’ i.e. allowing equal access to social resourceswithin the current generation. Thus we need to strike a right balance betweenour development needs and environmental commitments to ensure long rungrowth sustainability. United Nations, post Rio+20 summit held in June 2012,has endorsed the idea of adopting Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) inthe post-2015 period. At the national level, Twelfth Five Year Plan for Indiahas emphasized the need for faster, more inclusive and sustainable growth forthe period 2012-17 and accordingly has made this the theme of the 12th Plandocument.Blueprint For Special Status to H-K Region : To Identify Disparities-Vijesh Kamath in Bangalore on June 2, 2013, addressed about the ‘Blueprintfor special status to H-K’. It indicated that Implementation of special statusfor the Hyderabad-Karnataka Region has come closer with the Stategovernment. A draft notification has been prepared specifying the compositionand functions of a high-powered ‘Hyderabad-Karnataka Area DevelopmentBoard’ to identify disparities. The Board will suggest the quantum of grantsrequired to bring the region on a par with the rest of the State. The parliamenthad recently passed the Constitution (118th Amendment) Bill, 2012, toinsert a new Article 371-J to provide special recognition for the six backwarddistricts of Hyderabad-Karnataka region - Gulbarga, Yadgir, Raichur, Bidar,Koppal and Bellary. Article 371-J provides for establishing a separatedevelopment board and equitable allocation of funds for the development ofthe region. It also provides for quota in public employment through local cadresand reservation in education and vocational training institutions for those whobelong to the region by birth or by domicile. According to the draft ‘DevelopmentBoards for Hyderabad-Karnataka Region Order 2013,’ a copy of which isavailable with Deccan Herald, the 13-member Board will have one memberof parliament and three MLAs whose electoral constituencies lie within thejurisdiction of the region. The government will nominate the members on atwo-year rotation basis. The panel will also have the president of one of theZilla Panchayats of the six districts, again nominated on a two-year rotationbasis. It will also have five experts, one each from the fields of planning,


finance, irrigation and public works, agriculture and industry, education andemployment. The draft specifies that the Board will have to assess the impactof various development efforts in clearing backlog and in achieving overalldevelopment within the region. The panel will have to meet at least once everythree months. High-powered Committee for Redressal of Regional Imbalancesheaded by D.M. Nanjundappa had classified that of the 39 most backwardtaluks in the State, 21 were in the Hyderabad-Karnataka region . Section 21of the Order mandates that the funds or outlays specified by the Board willhave to be reflected in the Annual Financial Statement (budget). An officiallevel Implementation Committee will be constituted to monitor the overalldevelopment activities in the region. Once the Board is constituted, the presentHyderabad-Karnataka Development Board Act, 1991, will be repealed.Measures Taken For Removing Regional Disparities- Lok Sattagovernment had stated that it will strive to remove disparities at various levelsand take immediate measures to ensure sustainable and balanced developmentof all the regions. Lok Satta will work within the framework of the constitutionand will take the following immediate measures to remove these inequalities.• Article 321 D of Indian Constitution, Regional Boards with necessary

Legal powers will be instituted to remove regional disparities in the stateby the Lok Satta Government. Further, establishment of DistrictGovernments and allocation of funds on the basis of developmentindicators is guaranteed.

• Lok Satta Government will duly implement all agreements, legislationsand government orders that have been formulated so far to address theregional inequalities in the state. District-wise budget allocation will bedone.

• Lok Satta government will appoint an independent commission to examinewater allocation among different regions and its recommendations willbe fully implemented.

• Growth corridors comprised of Education zones, Agricultural zones andIndustrial zones will be operationalized for the rapid development ofbackward areas in the state.

• There will be strict restrictions on usage of productive agricultural landsfor non-agricultural purposes. Permissions for non-agricultural usagewill be granted only after the farmers have been guaranteed a betterlife.

• Usage of natural resources for the development of tribal areas etc.Thus in India, Sectoral and Regional Imbalances have always been a

source of great social and psychological tensions. Fruits of economic boomhave never been equally shared by all the regions and their people throughoutIndia. It has given rise to new tensions in social, economic and political areas.It poses a danger to the integrity and stability of whole society as well as unity


of the nation. It is difficult task for the government of India to take up lead inreconciling regional interests with national unity. There is a wide gap betweenregion to region/province to province. There are pockets of poverty amidstplenty within each province/state. Dry and hilly areas as well as those withtribal populations are still far below the national average. It has widened thegap between the prosperous and backward states and created a wide gapbetween the rich and poor within a region.Conclusions- India is a witness of Regional Disparities in many spheres ofsocio- economic development. On one side, world’s majority of new billionairesare in India and on the another side, India has majority of poor people. DevelopedStates like Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Punjab and Gujrat are in forefront andBIMURAO (Bihar, Madhya Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Rajasthan and Orissa)are far behind in many aspects. Main objective of the Eleventh Plan wasFaster and Inclusive growth and it is going to emphasize itself in the forthcomingTwelfth Plan also. Twelfth Plan said that expanding educational facilities andimproving quality of education are key instruments. Reducing poverty is a keyelement for achieving faster and inclusive growth. Many International studiesrevealed that Improvement in Education and Reduction in Poverty resulted inregional balanced development. Today the definition of development is fastchanging so the feeling is growing that we should re-order our priorities andmove away from the single dimensional model.======================References-1. Tirumala Prasad , Regional Imbalances in Economic Development, BASIC

PLUS, A Magazine, 28 Articles, October 24, 20082. Latasinha's weblog, 'Regional Disparities In India', WordPress.com3. Umakanta Tripathy, Milida, Pragnya Laxmi Pandit , Lecturer in Economics,

Department of BSH, Silicon Institute of Technology, Sambalpur , RegionalVariation In Development Profile Of Orissa: An econometric analysis of indicatorof development, ZENITH International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research,Vol.1 Issue 6, October 2011, www.zenithresearch.org.in

4. Sriram, Marimuthu Sivakumar and M Vijay, K.N. Raj Library, CDS,Thiruvananthapuram, Regional Disparities in Poverty and Education in India,April 25, 2012

5. Dr. Amit Kapoor , Regional Disparity in India: Why It Matters, Harvard BusinessReview, Honorary Chairman of Institute for Competitiveness, Gurgaon, India

6. Dr. K. C. Chakrabarty, Deputy Governor, Reserve Bank of India at the YesBank-GIZ-UNEP, A Speech Address, Sustainability Series event onEnvironment and Social Risk Management, Environmental and SocialSustainability: Key Issues and Concerns, Mumbai, April 23, 2013

7. Vijesh Kamath, Deccan Herald : A News Magazine, Updated News, Blueprintfor special status to H-K ready, Bangalore, June 13, 2013


Teachers' Awareness and Atti tude towardsInformation and Communication Technologies

* Mohsin Uddin==========================================================Abstract- The present study is about the teachers' Awareness and Attitudetowards Information and Communication Technologies (ICT). The samplewas of 40 teachers (20 Male and 20 Female) selected form two universitiesin Madhaya Pradesh namely Madhya Pradesh Bhoj Open UniversityBhopal (MPBOU) and Dr. Hari Singh Gour Central University Sagar(DHGCU). They were selected purposively. The result showed that nearly75% faculty of MPBOU has experience in using power point in theirteaching. It is interesting to note that majority of the teaching faculty inboth the universities have no exposure to network related tools. It is alsorevealed that almost all the respondents from both universities expressedthe view that lack of infrastructure, training and technical support is themain constraint in using ICT.==========================================================

===========================* Training Manager, Distance Education Cell, National Institute of Rural

Development, Hyderabad.

Introduction-Information and Communication Technology (ICT) is becomingan integral part of our day-to-day activity including the areas such as Education,Administration, Communication, Agriculture, Healthcare and good Governance.Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) have an important andsignificant role in distance mode education, to deliver the instructions. Thecapabilities of technology provide support to traditional educational programsto meet the needs of individual learners more effectively and take the advantageof growing use of the Internet and web-based technologies. Studies indicatedthat, the teachers play a key role in this regard, and therefore need good workingknowledge, skills and confidence in the use of ICT in the classrooms. Teachers’attitudes and beliefs on ICT are the important factors in the integration of ICTtools with traditional classroom methods.

Attitudes towards ICT, may be barriers in themselves and can influenceor be influenced by other barriers. Computer anxiety and anxiety about changeare key factors limiting teachers‘ use of technology (Larner & Timberlake1995). Fear might be other reasons of losing professional status through adowngrading of traditional pedagogical skills (Fabry & Higgs 1997). In order


to assess the awareness and attitude of teachers involved in Distance Modetowards ICT, the study has been undertaken to facilitate the information to theDistance Education Council and related academic institutions. Therefore thestudy is undertaken with the following objectives:-Objectives• To find the awareness levels of the teachers on ICT• To find the attitude towards using ICTMethodologySampling- The purposive sampling method was used. The total sample consistedof 40 teachers in which 20 from Madhya Pradesh Bhoj Open UniversityBhopal and 20 from Dr. Hari Singh Gour Central University, Sagar.Selection criteria for the respondents: Respondents above 35 years ofage with 5 years teaching experience in distance or regular modeData Collection- The data collected with mixed approach i.e. qualitative andquantitative methods were used. Quantitative method includes schedule cumobservation check list and qualitative method include Focus Group Discussions.The method of using multiple approaches permitted triangulation of the data toestablished reliability and validity of findings.Instrument- The instrument was developed keeping the aim of the research.The schedule cum observation checklist consisted of two parts. The first partasked about personal information such as gender, age, qualification, training,UGC- refreshers course and teaching experience. The second part of thescheduled cum observation checklist contained ten items. Three experts in thefield were contacted to review the items on the tool for content validity. Hence,only seven items received the experts’ consent.Administration and Scoring- Initially the participants were contacted andrapport was established with them. The purpose of the study was explained tothem and their consent was obtained. Data were collected and properlyscrutinized.Discussion and Findings

Table- 1Awareness about ICT tools

S. No. D.H.G.C.U N=20

MPBOU N=20

Male N=10

Female N=10

Male N=10

Female N=10

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No 1 7(70%) 3(30%) 6(60%) 4(40%) 8(80%) 2(20%) 9(90% 1(10%)

From the above table, it is understood that the awareness of ICT was90% in MPBOU both in male and female teaching faculty. It also indicatesthat the ICT awareness is more in open university than traditional university.


Table-2: Use of ICT tools in teaching

S. No. ICT tool D.H.G.C.U MPBOU 1 Never 19(95%) 17(85%) 2 Rarely 1(5%) 1(5%) 3 Sometimes 0 2(10%) Total 20(100%) 20(100%)

Regarding use of ICT tools almost all the respondents expressed theview that 95% from DHGCU and 85% from MPBOU never used it. Thismight be due to lack of infrastructure facility, lack of training and encouragementfrom administration.

Table-3- Attitude towards using ICT tools during teachingS. No.

D.H.G.C.U MPBOU Male Female Male Female

Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative 1 17 3 20 0 20 0 20 0 Data from table-3, reveals that attitude of the faculty members towards

ICT almost positive which is a welcome sign among them to adopt newtechnologies in pedagogy.

Table- 3- Experience with ICT toolsS. No.

ICT tool D.H.G.C.U MPBOU Experience No

experience Experience No

experience 1 Interactive Board 0 20(100%) 0 20(100%) 2 Interactive Radio 0 20(100%) 2(10%) 18(90%) 3 Power point 10(50%) 10(50%) 15(75%) 5(25%) 4 Computer 10(50%) 10(50%) 20(100%) 0 5 E module 0 20(100%) 0 20(100%) 6 Animation 0 20(100%) 0 20(100%) 7 Virtual video 0 20(100%) 0 20(100%) The above table on the experience in the use of ICT tools shows that

nearly 75% faculty of MPBOU possesses experience in using power point intheir teaching. But it was distressing to note that majority of the teachingfaculty in both the universities have no exposure to network related tools.

Table 5: Constrains for using ICTS. No. ICT tool D.H.G.C.U MPBOU

Yes No Yes No 1. No technical

support and lack of infrastructure

20(100%) 0 20(100%) 0

2 Lack of training 20(100%) 0 0 20(100%) 3 Resistance to

change 17(85%) 3(25%) 2(10%) 18(90%)

4 No interest 12(60%) 8(40%) 7(35%) 13(65%) 5 Fear 4(20%) 16(80%) 2(10%) 18(90%)

From table -5 indicates that almost all the respondents from both the


universities expressed the view that lacks of infrastructure, training andtechnical support were the main constraints in using ICT. It was appreciableto note that faculty of Bhopal was not resistant to change and they welcomedtraining inputs, if extended. The faculty of central university of Sagar requiredwide exposure.Suggestions- The overall findings of the study suggest that• Teachers of Madhya Pradesh required exposure to new technologies in

university elsewhere in the country. Special courses may be run duringvacation for some teachers.

• A thorough knowledge is needed on the use of ICT tools in servicetraining programme may be introduced for the existing faculty. Wherevernecessary, study leave may sanction to those willing to have ICT input.

• Academic Staff college should provide training on uses of ICT tools inclassroom situation especially for distance education faculty.

• Academic qualification for faculty positions should contain element ofICT knowledge as “essential” and not “desirable”.

• ICT based teacher education curriculum should be developed andadopted.

• ICT tools should be incorporated in the syllabus of teacher trainingprogrammes.

• Teacher should also get opportunity to attend seminars, workshops, UGC-refresher course to enrich their knowledge on use of ICT.

• UGC and Boards of Secondary Education in States should assist privateacademic institutions in the country to launch ICT based institutions.

Limitations of the study-• Due to small sample the finding in the study may be considered asinformative and should be used cautiously to generalize.Suggestions for Further Research1. Similar studies can be carried out to find out the attitude of learners on

ICT.2. An experimental study can be carried out to find out the effectiveness

of ICT in distance Education.======================References-1. Anastasia, A. 1961. Psychological Testing, Macmillan Company, New York.2. Fabry, D. & Higgs, J.1997. Barriers to the effective use of technology in

education, Journal of Educational Computing, 17 (4): 385-395.3. Gupta, A.K. and Ghosh, C.K.2008. Literacy, Elementary Education and Teachers'

Training in the State of Madhya Pradesh by effective use of ICT, UniversityNews, Vol. 46, No. 31.

4. Karlinger, F.N. 1973. Research Method in Behavioural Sciences, Rinehart andWinston, New York.

5. Larner, D. & Timberlake, L.1995.Teachers with limited computer knowledge:


variables affecting use and hints to increase use, The Curry School of Education,University of Virginia.

6. Sorgo, A., Verckocnik, J. and Kocijanca, C.2010. Information CommunicationTechnologies(ICT) in Biology Teaching in Slovenian Secondary School, EurasiaJournal of Mathematics, Science and Technology Education, 6(1):37-46.

ISSN 0975-4083






[email protected]








===========================* Lecturer,Govt.Institute of Advanced Studies in Eduction(IASE) Ajmer

(Rajasthan)** Research Scholor (Eduction),Mewar University ,Gangrar,Chittorgarh

(Rajasthan)

A Study of Correlation among Emotional Behaviour,Communication Sk i l l and Adjustment of Students on the

Base of Different School Areas

* Rakesh Katara**Dhruva Kumar Mittal

==========================================================Abstract- This study was carried out on 640 students between 12-16years age group of Senior Secondary school of Rural and Urban ofAjmer district is done for the study of correlation among Emotionalbehaviour, Communition skill and Adjustment of students on the base ofdifferent school areas, is revealed for the sample of the purpose of randommethod. Emotional Behaviour Scale, Communition Skill Scale (Selfcreated) and Adjustment Scale, are used as tools for data collection. T-test and cofficient test of correlaion, statistics mehtod are used for theAnalysis of collected data's. A difference is noticed in EmotionalBehaviour, Communication Skill and Adjustment of Rural and Urbanschool students at the some time, a difference is stuied in the relation ofcommunition skill and Adjustment.==========================================================Introduction- Education can only be significant when it can mould a man insuch a way that he can choose peace as his life style and an have a power tosolve any problem that he can not only be an idle spectator. It has capacity tokeep the nation, healthy and energetic with the peaceful attitude in whichcurriculum of school is harmonised but 12-18 year is teen age, that is a stageof Emotional development of young pupils, if they are not paid attention theirlife in future is effected. Emotion is internal feeling So the experience ofEmotions is found different from other. IZARD has presented a group of tenbasic Emotions like- Joy, surprize, anger, avamang, fear, shame, crime, interestand excitement, these connectivity produce different kinds of Emotions.Volter (1974), theire are eight basic Emotions all other Emotions are theconscience of the mixture of same basic Emotions. He has revealed theseEmotions in for contrary couples like - joy, sorrow, willing, unwilling, fear, angerand wonder pre-realisation. The experience of Emotional Behaviour depends


on the sequence of the activation of physical sense. The assumption of Emotionis by their verbal and nonverbal expressions. These verbal and non-verbalexpressions do the work of communication source. A man becomes able tounderstand. the feelings and expressions of himself and others. The highervolume of speaking levels peach like specialities and accent of the words areincluded in the medium of pronunciation of Communication Skill. These othernon-verbal characteristic of language and timely characteristic are calledovercome language, facial expressions, dynemic (physical position and bodylanguage) and nearest (physical distance in face of face interaction) Behaviourare included in other non-verbal mediums. The most famous medium ofEmotional Behaviour is blandishment of face Communication of mouth placeof very important in a daily life most other people are successful in balancingof Emotions. They try to ajdust with them and follow defence mechanism ofprogressive work to face. These Adjustment solution protect them from differentEmotional Behaviour like anxeity, weariness etc. Anxeity is that state which aman develops in his failure of self resepect.

We often face douatful circumstances in our life, fear anxeity,unwillingness like negotional emotions are developed in any man during difficultand stress condition. If these types of negotional Emotions are continuouslyallowed for long time, they may have negative effect on physical health andpsychology of man, this is the reason that most of the functions of stressmanagement considered the management of the Emotions is necessary forstress management. The focus of Emotional management depends on decreasein negotional Emtionas and increase of Negational. Successful EmotinalManagement is the key of Effective Social Adjustment. According to Mehlla,S.K. (2008) has considered Emotional Development as a very important factorof Educational Growth and Development in every activity of man, his EmotionalBehaviour is revealed effect physical, social, mental nad learning process aswell as his areas of Adjustment. According to Scott, T. & Joseph, P. (2010).The students are correlated with various Communication Skills and Emotionsin school environment. According to Nishida (1985) cultural Adjustment,Communication Skilland language, all are correlated. Logan, Sarah, Nughes,N. (2011) told that cognitive factor communication depends on InternalInspiration and intelligence of the students like- reading, writing and speaking,these are correlated with the internal relation of the students. According toKhan, M.A. (1976) Adjustment effects the man in Emotional, Creativity andsensivity. Kumari, S. (1982) told that the level of Adjustment is effected bymany factors in Sociometic Groups like- Social Status, Family Status, EmotionalBehaviour and Educational Environment. Above Mentioned Research studiesrevealed that the relation of Emotional Behaviour, Communication Skill andAdjustment these three variable are not studied together. Thus Researchershave tried to study the correlation of above variables.


Emotional Behaviour :Baran, Byrne and Kantowitz (1980), by Emotion wemean a subjective feeling state involving psychological arousal, accompaniedby characteristic behaviours. Sanstrok (2000), We will define Emotion as feelingor effect, that can involve psychological arousal, conscious, experience andBehavioural expression. Emotional Element of man is connected with theextrovert expression in which divert communication, body language physicalposture, volume, ideas are some such elements that revealed EmotionalBehaviour of a man. these are effected by learning, culture and the Environmentof the school. In this present study Emotional Behaviour means- students ofadequate depth of feeling, adequate expresion and control of Emotions, abilityto function with emotions, ability to cope with problem. Emotions, enhancementof positive Emotions.Communication Skill :Communication is called heart of education becausenot only education but also teacher and common Behaviour can’t be imaginedwithout communication. Communication is a process to communicate, ideas,attitude, sensivity, logics and exchanged of knowledge between too or morethan two persons. So commuication works to maintain human and SocialEnvironment. Singh (2005) Explained that the working behaviour of all livingand non-living exist in nature are directly or indirectly dominated bycommunication as language is developed, the various methods of communication,as complition in communicatoin, clearity, unity, effects are also developed. Inthe present study communication skill is used, in language writing, languagespeaking language listening, body language.Adjustment :According to Boring, Longfield & Weld ‘Adjustment is theprocess by which a living organism maintains a balance between its needs andthe circumstances that influence, the satisfaction of these needs.According toabove definition there is blanace of Adjustment and the Adjustment is arrangedin the atmosphere which is constituted with complicated. aspects of natural,Emotional, Biological, Social, Cutlural and Educational. The standard opinionof Dr.S.K. Thakur explained that if biological and psychological demands ofany man are self satisfied than life will be very easy and comfortable but thereare several hinderence. Regarding individual environmental problems preventsatisfaction. So these obstracts create difficulty to adjust Emotional, Socialand Educationals. Problems in present study, the meaning of Adjustment is theadjustment of aspects.In present study, the Adjustment of correlation Behaviour and CommunicationSkill of Rural & Urban students of school is tried to explain.Objectives of the study :• To find out the effect of different school areas on correlation between

Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skills of Rural and UrbanSchool students.

• To find out the effect of different school areas on correlation between


Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment Skills of Rural and Urban Schoolstudents.

• To find out the effect of different school areas on correlation betweenCommunication Skills and Adjustment of Rural and Urban School students.

Hypothesis of the study :• There will be no significant difference between the effect of different

school areas on correlation between Emotional behaviour andCommunication Skill of Rural and Urban schools students.

• There will be no significant difference between the effect of differentschool areas on correlation between Emotional behaviour and AdjustmentSkill of Rural and Urban schools students.

• There will be no significant difference between the effect of differentschool areas on correlation between Communication Skill and Adjustmentof Rural and Urban schools students.

Method of the study- Survey method of research was used in this presentstudy.Sample for the study- This study was carried out on 640 students from 12-16 year age group of senior secondary school studying students at Rural andUrban areas of Ajmer District is done for the study o sample selection bypurpose of Random Method.Tool used for the study :1. Emotional Behaviour scale - standarised by Dr. Harish Sharma and

Dr. Rajivlochan Bhandari.2. Communication Skill Scale - Developed by Investigator Dr. Rakesh

Katara and Dhruva Kumar Mittal.3. Adjustment Inventory - Standarised by prof. A.K.P. Sinha and Prof.

R.P. Singh.Statistical Techniques used In Study- The obtained datas were analyzedusing ‘t’ test and coefficient test of correlation.Analysis and Interpretation of the data- Statistical Analysis of Rural andUrban schools students (n=640) about Emotional Behaviour, CommunicationSkill and Adjustment are measured in datas and shown in following tables :

Table No. - 1Correlation and ‘t’- value between Emotional Behaviour andCommunication Skills of Rural and Urban school students.

First Variable Second Variable

Emotional Behaviour Students of

Rural School Students of Urban

Schools 't'- value

Communication Skill 0.102 – 0.071 2.184

Significant level of Correlation on the level of 0.05 - .113 on the level of 0.01 - .148Significant level of ‘t’ value on the level of 0.05 – 1.96 on the level of 0.01 - 2.54

It is observed from table no. 1 that correlation 0.102 is acquired between


the Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skill in the group of students ofRural Schools. It is no. significant value on the level 0.05 on the other hand, inurban schools, this correlation –0.071 is acquired in the group of students it isnegative correlation and no significant on the level 0.05.‘t’ value 2.184 is the scores of correlation of Emotional Behaviour andCommunication Skill Correlation in the schools of Rural and Urban Areas.This is more than 1.96 Significant value of significant level 0.05. So correlationbetween above mentioned both variables, their difference in school areas, issignificant in the conclusion. There is no significant difference in differentschool areas effect on Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skills ofhypothesis of Rural Urban students of school. HO1 is first rejected.

Table No. -2Correlation and ‘t’- value between between Emotional Behaviour and

Adjustment of Rural and Urban school students.First Variable Second Variable

Emotional Behaviour Students of


Schools 't'- value

Adjustment 0.108 – 0.269 2.107

It is observed from table no. 2 that correlation 0.108 is acquired betweenthe Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment in the group of students of RuralSchools. It is no. significant value on the level 0.05 on the other hand, in urbanschools, this correlation – 0.269 is acquired in the group of students it is negativecorrelation and significant on the level 0.01.’t’ value 2.107 is the scores ofcorrelation of Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment Correlation in the schoolsof Rural and Urban Areas. This is more than 1.96 Significant value of significantlevel 0.05. So correlation between above mentioned both variables, theirdifference in school areas, is significant in the conclusion. There is no significantdifferent in different school areas effect on Emotional Behaviour andAdjustment of hypothesis of Rural Urban students of school. HO2 is secondrejected.

Table No. -3Correlation and ‘t’- value between between Communication Skill and

Adjustment of Rural and Urban school students.

First Variable Second Variable

Communication Skill Students of


Schools 't'- value

Adjustment 0.084 – 0.034 1.488

It is observed from table no. 3 that correlation 0.084 is acquired betweenthe Communication Skill and Adjustment in the group of students of RuralSchools. It is no. significant value on the level 0.05 on the other hand, in urbanschools, this correlation – 0.034 is acquired in the group of students it is negative


correlation and no significant on the level 0.05.’t’ value 1.488 is the scores ofcorrelation of Communication Skill and Adjustment Correlation in the schoolsof Rural and Urban Areas. This is more than 1.96 Significant value of significantlevel 0.05. So correlation between above mentioned both variables, theirdifference in school areas, is significant in the conclusion. There is no significantdifferent in different school areas effect on Communication Skill and Adjustmentof hypothesis of Rural Urban students of school. HO3 is third selected.Conclusion :1. There is no significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour and

Communication Skills of the students of the school 12-16 years old RuralAreas.

2. There is no significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour andCommunication Skills of 12-16 years old students of the school of urbanAreas.

3. There is significant difference in the scores of correlation betweenEmotional Behaviour and Communication Skill between students of schoolof Rural and Urban Areas. Consiquently a difference is found betweenEmotional Behaviour and Communication Skill of the student of the schoolof Rural and Urban Areas.

4. There is no significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour andAdjustment of the students of the school 12-16 years old Rural Areas.

5. There is no significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour andAdjustment of 12-16 years old students of the school of urban Areas.

6. There is significant difference in the scores of correlation betweenEmotional Behaviour and Adjustment between students of school ofRural and Urban Areas. Consiquently a difference is found betweenEmotional Behaviour and Adjustment of the student of the school ofRural and Urban Areas.

7. There is no significant correlation between Communication Skill andAdjustment of the students of the school 12-16 years old Rural Areas.

8. There is no significant correlation between Communication Skill andAdjustment of 12-16 years old students of the school of urban Areas.

9. There is no significant difference in the scores of correlation betweenCommunication Skill and Adjustment between students of school of Ruraland Urban Areas.

Educational Implication- It is observed from the conclusion study that thereis no direct significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour andCommunication Skill of the students of school of only Rural Areas or onlyUrban Areas but the difference of correlation is significant between EmotionalBehaviour and Communication Skill of the students of both the areas on theother side no significant correlation is found between Emotional Behaviourand Adjustment of the students of Rural schools but this correlation is negaive


and significant in the students of urban areas and difference is significantbetween the correlation of the students of both the areas. So the educatnistshould identity those factors which create difference between correlation ofEmotional Behaviour and Communication Skills of the students due to thedifference of school areas. Those factor should also be identified that creatthe difference between correlation of Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment ofthe students on the base of difference of areas of study. Also announces thatlaps of Emotional Behaviour effects the adjustment of the students negativity.So the students of Urban school should be trained for Emotional Managementso that their Adjustment may be strong, stage play, Games competition, debateand creative efforts of presentation can direct the positive.Emotional Behaviourof the students, this Emotional Behaviour can be helpful in the Adjustment ofthe students after transformation.======================References-1. Baron, Byrne & kantowitiz (1980) psychology, p. 273.2. Dowine N.M. & Health R.W. (1977) Basic Statistical Methods (third Edition)

Harper & Raw Publisher's, New York, Evenston and London p. 240.3. http://ncert.nic.in/sites/publication/4. Khan, M.A. (1976) Effect of parental deprivation on peronality Adjustment

(With Special Reference to Denotified Tribes of U.P) Ph.D. Psy., Agra Uni,5. Kumari S. (1982) A study of Intelligence , Achievement, Adjustment and

Socio-economic Patterns of different Sociometric Groups of Adolescents, Ph.D.Education, Pan, Uni.

6. Logan S.H.N. (2011) The importance of intrinsic motivation for high and lowability and individual differences, research publication, Vol-2, p. 124-128.

7. Mahlla, S.K. (2008) Balkon ke samvegatmak vikas Mein shikshakon ki bhiumika,Naie Shiksha, Vol - 58(2), P. 19-20.

8. NCERT (2005) National Curriculum Framework, NCERT New Delhi.9. NCERT (2006) psychology, NCERT, Arvind Marg, New Dehli, p.184-187.10. Nishida, H. (1984) Japanese Inter Cultural communication competence and

cross cultural Adjustment Relations, Vol-9, Issue-3, p. 249-269.11. Pathak, P.D. (2008) Education Psychology, Agrawal Publication, Agra, p. 450.12. Santrock (2000) psychology, p. 393.13. Scoott, T. and Joseph, P, (2010) Eomotion in teaching and Learning, Development

and vaildation of the classrrom emotion Scale Communication Education, V 59p. 431.

14. Singh , Sumitra (2005) Samprashan Prakriya Avum Shekshik Vikas, Pariprakshya(NUPA) year -12, Edition-2, p. 51-57.

15. Singh, A. K. (2006) Higher Genral Psychology, Motilal Banarsidas, New Delhi.P. 785.

16. Walter, D. and Smitson W.S. (1974) The Meaning of Emotional Maturity, MH.Winter, 58:9-11.


Linking Higher Education with Regional Needs:The Dialogue of Universities with Society

* Ritu Bakshi==========================================================Abstract- For many higher education institutions regional engagement isbecoming the crucible within which an appropriate response to overalltrends in higher education is being forged. Responding to the newdemands requires new kinds of resources and new forms of managementthat enable higher education institutions to make a dynamic contributionto the development process in the round. The challenge is to link withinthe institution the teaching, research and community service roles byinternal mechanisms (e.g. funding, staff development, incentives andrewards, communications) and to engage the institution with all facets ofthe regional development process (e.g. skills enhancement, technologicaldevelopment and innovation, cultural awareness) in a region/highereducation institution ‘value added management’ process in the ‘learningregion’. Given the above considerations, the principle objective of thearticle is to provide an understanding of the ways in which highereducation institutions are seeking to respond to regional needs. Thesecondary objective is to guide the formulation of policy by nationaland regional governments seeking to mobilize higher educationinstitutions towards the achievement of regional development goals. Thisarticle falls into three parts. The first expands upon the discussion ofregional development and the territorial dimension to higher educationpolicy. The second discusses the response of higher education institutionsto the changing context in relation to teaching, research and communityservice. The final part provides the conclusions and recommendations. Itexplores some of the factors that inhibit and drive the adoption of aregional role by higher education institutions and makes some remarksconcerning the contribution of universities and colleges, through criticaldebate, to the creation of a common understanding of priorities forregional development amongst regional stakeholders.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant Professor, Department of Educational Studies, Central University

of Jammu (J & K)

Introduction- Within advanced economies, there is a general concern thatteaching and research within higher education institutions are not directed


enough towards specific economic and social objectives. One of the fieldswhere this demand for ‘specificity’ is clearest is regional development. Beinglocated ̀ in’ regions, universities and colleges are asked by a new set of regionalactors and agencies to make an active contribution to the development ofthese regions. These demands are driven, amongst other things, by processesof globalisation and regionalization (or localisation) in economic development,whereby the regional (or local) environment is as relevant as the national macroeconomic situation in determining the ability of enterprises to compete in thenational, supra-national and global economies. Within this environment, theregional availability of knowledge and skills is as important as the physicalinfrastructure. As a result, regionally-engaged higher education institutions canbecome a key asset and powerhouse for economic development. Highereducation institutions have always contributed to the social and culturaldevelopment of the places in which they are located. However, the emergingregional development agenda can be argued to require regional engagement tobe formally recognised as a third role for universities and colleges not onlysitting alongside but fully integrated with mainstream teaching and research.Therefore the requirements for regional engagement embrace many facets ofthe ‘responsive higher education institution’ that are being generated byevolving priorities within the higher education system. These priorities all comeunder the following heading:Meeting the various needs of a more diverse client population- Amongthese needs are relatively new demands such as:• flexible structures for lifelong learning created by changing skill demands;• more locally based education as public maintenance support for students’

declines;• greater links between research and teaching; and• more engagement with the end users of research.

For many higher education institutions regional engagement is becomingthe crucible within which an appropriate response to overall trends in highereducation is being forged. Responding to the new demands requires new kindsof resources and new forms of management that enable higher educationinstitutions to make a dynamic contribution to the development process in theround. The challenge is to link within the institution the teaching, research andcommunity service roles by internal mechanisms (e.g. funding, staffdevelopment, incentives and rewards, communications) and to engage theinstitution with all facets of the regional development process (e.g. skillsenhancement, technological development and innovation, cultural awareness)in a region/higher education institution ‘value added management’ process inthe ‘learning region’. Given the above considerations, the principle objectiveof the article is to provide an understanding of the ways in which highereducation institutions are seeking to respond to regional needs. The secondary


objective is to guide the formulation of policy by national and regionalgovernments seeking to mobilize higher education institutions towards theachievement of regional development goals. This article falls into three parts.The first expands upon the discussion of regional development and the territorialdimension to higher education policy. The second discusses the response ofhigher education institutions to the changing context in relation to teaching,research and community service. The final part provides the conclusions andrecommendations. It explores some of the factors that inhibit and drive theadoption of a regional role by higher education institutions and makes someremarks concerning the contribution of universities and colleges, through criticaldebate, to the creation of a common understanding of priorities for regionaldevelopment amongst regional stakeholders.Higher Education Institutions and Territoriality- The capacity of a highereducation institution to respond to regional needs is influenced by conditionsthat result from the interrelations between several geographic scales from theglobal to the local as well as from the historical legacy of each higher educationinstitution and its region. Policy makers need to be aware of the demandsexerted upon higher education institutions from each of these different spatialscales.These include:• restructuring in the global economy;• changing national contexts for higher education;• the particular characteristics of the region in terms of the regional

economic base;• the regional policy;• the regional educational system; and• the particularities of each institution.

Below, this context will be discussed through a review of territorialityand higher education institutions.Problematising Territoriality- Territoriality is an extremely complex andproblematic concept for higher education institutions. Universities, in particular,exist as autonomous institutions that are often characterised by low levels oflocal territorial embeddedness, regulation at the national level, and preoccupationwith international and national academic and research communities. All highereducation institutions embrace some notion of territoriality within their missionstatements and institutional plans. These range from general notions ofcontributing to ‘society’ and international research to more precise commitmentsto local and regional communities. Moreover, UNESCOs ‘Framework forpriority action for change and development of higher education’ (1998) hasstated that higher education institutions should:

Develop innovative schemes of collaboration between institutionsof higher education and different sectors of society to ensure that higher


education and research programmes effectively contribute to local,regional and national development.Reconceptualising Territorial Development and Governance- Thechanging role of higher education institutions in regional development must beseen within a broader context of globalisation and the changing nature of regionaldevelopment and governance, notably the shift in emphasis from material tonon-material assets (knowledge, skills, culture, and institutions) and theresurgence of the region as an important arena for political and economicactivity. This section briefly reviews this changing context and outlines newforms of territorial governance based upon the concept of the learning region.The link between the information society, Information CommunicationTechnologies (ICTs), and learning regions is considered to be mutual and self-reinforcing. Regions with strong learning cultures that support the developmentand uptake of ICT applications may be able to develop competitive advantagesand use the information society as a mechanism for growth, whilst the ICTsthemselves are constructed through certain social networking processes andcontexts to be found in particular regions. For less favoured regions theimplications are clear: without some attempt to make better use of ICTs, theprospects of cohesion and convergence are poor. In the context of the lifelonglearning agenda, learning and teaching activities have moved away from alinear model of transmission of knowledge based upon the classroom and arebecoming more interactive and experiential, drawing upon, for example, projectwork and work-based learning, much of which is locationally specific. Withinthis changed context, learning and knowledge creation take on differentcharacteristics. In particular, it is important to differentiate between modifiableknowledge, i.e. know-what (data, etc.) and tacit knowledge such as know-how (skills), know-who (networking) and know-why (experience). These latterforms of ‘hybrid knowledge’, then, become the most valuable type of knowledgedepending upon interpersonal relationships, trust and cooperation and are mostreadily developed within the region. Moreover, according to Gibbons et al.(1994), there has been a shift from ‘mode 1’ knowledge creation, which ishomogeneous, disciplinary and hierarchical and which characterises theautonomous and distinct academic disciplines, to ‘mode 2’ knowledge productionthat is heterogeneous, transient, transdisciplinary, socially accountable, andreflexive, and undertaken in a context of application.Responding to Regional Needs- Higher education institutions are respondingto this changing environment, amongst other things, by establishing newinstitutional management structures to meet more effectively the demands ofvarious regional stakeholders. Such changes are occurring not only within thetraditional teaching and research roles of universities and colleges, but alsowithin their community service role. A core function of higher educationinstitutions has been to educate through the dissemination of its knowledge


base. Whilst this teaching function was initially offered to a national elite ofpoliticians, industrialists, the clergy, and civil servants, through the 20th centuryaccess has continually been widened to much larger groups. In spite of thisextension of access, the development of the teaching function within longestablished higher education institutions has not been influenced by regionalneeds, as most still recruit from, and provide graduates for, national andinternational markets. However, the context for education provision is changingas a result of demands to create more regionally relevant education systems.Such demands are a result of policy changes from national governments,especially those associated with the concept of the ‘learning society’, andfrom impulses within regions to enhance the relevance of the teaching function.Newer institutions and those incorporated into the higher education sectorfrom outside are creating or have inherited a tradition of providing locally-relevant education. For all types of higher education institutions the challengeis to balance the need to meet regional labour needs with the need to encouragethe national and global mobility and competitiveness of staff and students andto position the institution in the global market. In order to realise the potentialof higher education institutions for regions, there is a requirement to bringtogether all regional education providers to reduce duplicative functions, enhancecollaborative provision and create a regional learning system by expanding theoverall size of the education market. However, this agenda is problematic, asthere are tendencies towards the localisation and delocalisation of teachingand learning as the regionally embedded higher education institution isrenegotiated with the emergence of the virtual or placeless higher educationinstitution. Higher education institutions can localise the learning process bydrawing upon the specific characteristics of a region to aid learning and teaching.The creation of specialist, locally-oriented courses that draw upon thecharacteristics of the region can give higher education institutions a competitiveadvantage in national and international student recruitment pools. Further,locally-oriented courses, especially those that are closely connected to growingindustries in the region, can offer graduates greater chances of success andmobility in the regional labour market. Locally-based teaching, then, is aneffective way of exposing the region to the work of higher education institutionsand the skills and talents of their students. Such teaching often draws uponrepresentatives from local industry to add practical experience to the teachingprocess. Moreover, project and course work, particularly at the post-graduatelevel can be undertaken collaboratively with regional partners and can befocused upon regional issues.

Overly localised teaching programmes can have several shortcomings;if tied too closely to the economic base of the region, courses can be susceptibleto cycles of growth and contraction in the regional economy. Regionally-orientedcourses may also have a limited appeal in terms of attracting non-local students


and could also adversely affect the performance of students in national labourmarkets. Finally, many higher education institutions regard their role asgenerating expert knowledge and providing graduates of the highest quality.One cannot assume that young people in (or outside) a region will be attractedto study those courses that are particularly in the region’s economic interests.Indeed, there is evidence that in areas of economic hardship, home-basedstudents will see a degree as a way of escaping from the region and willexplicitly reject staying in the area. There is a real tension here. Higher educationinstitutions have always enabled young people to leave their home region insearch of the kinds of jobs they want elsewhere, as well as being a means ofmatching the acquisition of knowledge and skills to the region’s developingeconomy. They have to seriously consider the problems associated with localisingthe curriculum.

Research within higher education institutions, especially the universitysector, has traditionally emphasised the production of ‘basic’ knowledge forthe (inter)-national academic community and neglected the application ofestablished knowledge for the local/regional community. Some researchers inuniversities have been reluctant to seek external research sponsors and haveoften been guarded towards collaborative research activities. Furthermore,many national funding regimes exacerbate inter-institutional competition ratherthan collaboration in terms of research activity and funding. However, thereare a number of trends that are encouraging universities to develop mechanismsfor commercialising their research base and link their research and expertisemore closely to the external environment.

Firstly, it is important to understand the ways in which the shiftingproduction of knowledge (Gibbons et al., 1994) is being reconfigured and howthis is altering the conduct of research in higher education systems. Universitiesno longer have a monopoly on knowledge production. They must enter intostrategic alliances with a range of other knowledge producers in order to remainat the cutting edge of research. Universities are increasingly seeking externalresearch partners to tap into wider knowledge networks and meet the risingcosts of research. This is being achieved by an expansion of research activitiesaway from traditional academic units to new collaborative units such as researchcentres and science parks. The important point for universities is that thesenew vehicles for knowledge production have significant organisationalimplications.

Secondly, higher education institutions have responded to opportunitiesprovided by, for example, the historical, cultural, political or economic contextof the region by developing research agendas that reflect these characteristics.The region is often used as a test bed or laboratory for research that givesthem a competitive advantage both nationally and internationally. A key questionto pursue is the extent to which university research can draw down new ideas


into the region to aid its development. Research activities can also be directedtowards promoting the growth of regionally-based industrial clusters. Fromthe perspective of many development agencies, universities (and to a lesserextent colleges) are seen as key actors to promote the establishment anddevelopment of new clusters of economic activity. Higher education institutionshave established a number of mechanisms to manage their research interfacewith the outside world. However, the transfer of research between highereducation institutions and other stakeholders is a complex process. Ratherthan regarding research and knowledge transfer as a simple linear modelbetween higher education institutions and their partners, there are a number ofsimultaneous flows between clusters of stakeholders and higher educationinstitutions that occur on a spectrum from individual and ad-hoc interactionand consultancy work to centrally-organised activities. Explicit mechanismsthrough which research results are transferred between higher educationinstitutions and regional stakeholders include single-entry points such as regionaldevelopment offices, research centres, spin-off companies, incubator units,advice and training services, science parks, and mechanisms to exploitintellectual property rights (IPR). However, it is necessary to recognise thatthe most effective technology and knowledge transfer mechanism betweenhigher education institutions and the external environment is through theinstitutional teaching function, that is to say through staff and students via theteaching curriculum, placements, teaching company schemes, etc. Thisreinforces the intimate relationship between the teaching and research functionsof higher education institutions.Community Service- The contribution that higher education institutions maketo civil society through the extra-mural activities of individual staff (e.g. in themedia, politics, the arts, advising government bodies, socio-economic, andtechnological analyses), through providing liberal adult education, eveningclasses, access to facilities such as libraries, theatres, and museums, and throughpublic lectures is being bundled together and recognised as a ‘third role’ alongsideteaching and research. Perhaps more than the other roles, it is this third role ofcommunity service which embeds higher education institutions in the region.In certain contexts, this role reflects the 19th century paternalism of industrialistsand philanthropists who gave endowments to establish higher educationinstitutions in their home area, amongst other things, to create a ‘cultured’ and‘civilised’ local and regional population. In other contexts, this service role tothe local community stems from the obligations on higher education institutionsthat arise from being major recipients of local taxes.

A number of trends are converging that are increasing this traditionalservice role. The growing awareness of the global, or supra-national, nature ofmany problems such as environmental degradation, poverty, and economicdevelopment, has created a number of interconnected local responses. Higher


education institutions, because of their multi-territoriality and inter-disciplinarity,are institutions that are strongly placed to interpret global issues on a localscale. Also, the rise of the local state and local voluntary and community groupsin response to the declining influence of national structures is of relevance.Moreover, fiscal constraints at both local and national level are creatingpartnerships between the public, private and voluntary sectors to meetcommunity needs. In this context, higher education institutions, their staff andstudents, are heavily involved in community service through volunteering, projectwork, mentoring, leadership and commentary. In sum, through this third role,higher education institutions are one of several factors involved in the governanceof local civic society. What this role highlights is the increasing embeddednessof higher education institutions in their regions and their duty as responsiblelocal, as well as national and international agents.This is evident in severalways. First, regional development and promotional organisations are increasinglylooking towards higher education institutions to provide leadership, analysis,resources, and credibility. In this sense, higher education institutions contributeto the less tangible aspects of the development process by building socialnetworks that link key actors in the local community and feed intelligence intothese networks. The participation of a university or college can inject an elementof unbiased and informed realism into such networks. This ‘partnershipprinciple’ is increasingly a prerequisite for securing certain forms of fundingand for creating an effective platform for enhancing inward investment activity.Further, higher education institutions provide the region with commentary,analysis, information and access to wider networks through mechanisms suchas media links and public lectures. They also provide a framework throughwhich ideas and cultures can be shared and transmitted. In this sense, theycan play an important role in opening up and internationalising regions. A secondaspect of the service role of higher education institutions concerns communityand voluntary action in the region. In particular, the student population representsa significant resource to the local community in terms of volunteer workers.Third, higher education institutions own a number of facilities such as libraries,sports centres, and arts and cultural venues that are often significant regionalfacilities offering public access. Since the funding for such facilities at manyhigher education institutions is discretionary and not provided for in earmarkedgovernment block grants, their economic viability often depends uponpartnerships, especially financial-based ones, with regional stakeholders.Regional access to facilities at higher education institutions may be a morepressing issue in lagging regions that have a less developed educational, socialand cultural infrastructure. Many regional cultural facilities are offered throughstudents’ unions. They often play a central role in entertainment provision inthe region by providing comedy, live-music, dance events, and late-night drinking.As such, they can increase the overall ‘popular’ cultural reputation of a city or


region. As in the area of teaching and research it is often necessary for highereducation institutions within a region to work together with external partners indeveloping a portfolio of facilities and services that can be tailored to regionalneeds. Regional funding levered in this way can widen the range of facilitiesavailable on campus to students, thereby enhancing the learning experience.At the same time, active engagement in the community can enrich the life ofboth students and teachers. In short, the third role is not a one way street.Conclusion- This article has discussed the ways in which higher educationinstitutions are responding to regional needs in terms of teaching, research andcommunity service. What are the drivers and barriers that each institution hasto confront when engaging with the region? What actions can and do variousstakeholders take that can either enhance or inhibit greater regionalengagement?It should be apparent from the discussion that responding to regional needs isnot a clear-cut process for higher education institutions. Teaching-related driversto greater regional engagement include: historical roots that link the institutionfirmly to its local economic base; a desire to increase the uptake of graduatesinto employment within the region; an increase in postgraduate, professionaldevelopment and part-time teaching to attract more revenue; recruitment ofsenior management on to boards of regional agencies and initiatives;opportunities for undergraduate students to study from home and avoid debts;new ‘ladders of opportunity’ for students through access, franchise, compact,and other arrangements; demand from mature and non-traditional studentswho are rooted in the region. Concerning research, drivers include: a renewedthrust of government policy towards promoting industrial links and clusters ata regional level; the regionalisation of national technology development andtransfer policy; closer links between higher education institutions and the healthsector; and in the European context, funding accruing to the regions throughthe structural funds. However, there are also significant barriers to greaterregional engagement. As regards teaching, these include historic patterns ofnationally-driven subject provision and demand for courses that are notparticularly congruent with the development needs of the region; academicpromotion systems that do not sufficiently reward regional teaching and learningopportunities; the influence of external accreditation from professional bodiesthat pay little attention to regional development needs; lack of links betweenthe formulation of regional policy initiatives by senior management andimplementation by teaching staff; high start up costs of regional collaborativeprojects; and lack of regional seed corn funds. There are also a number ofbarriers associated with greater localisation and regionalisation of teachingthat include anxiety about the ‘decline in standards’ and a fear that enhancedskills increase rather than decrease regional labour mobility.

There are a number of tasks national governments could undertake to


enhance the response of higher education institutions to regional needs. Firstly,Ministries of Education can map the geography of higher education, for example,which courses are taught where, what are the home origins of students, andwhere do graduates enter the labour market. A particular concern of this mappingtask will be to identify the steps between different levels of the educationsystem in schools, further/vocational education/community colleges, highereducation, post graduate institutions in order to assess how far the regionalpattern of provision assists or inhibits access and progress of students. Theseshould aim at strengthening cooperative activities within the region andpromoting partnerships and dialogue between regional education providers suchas schools, further education, higher education and other training providers.Higher education institutions also can play a role in the formulation of regionalaction plans and programmes. In each of the main themes within a developmentprogramme there is likely to be a requirement for active institutional participation.For example, in the search for inward investment there will be room forinstitutional participation in overseas delegations; in regional technologicaldevelopment programmes there will be opportunities for higher educationinstitutions to provide expertise to assist with product and process innovationthrough consultancies, student placements and management development; inskills enhancement linked to raising regional competitiveness there should be aplace for targeted graduate retention and continuing professional developmentinitiatives; in cultural development, there will be scope for joint planning ofprovision of non-vocational education and of opening up of higher educationfacilities to the general public; and in terms of regional capacity building, highereducation staff and facilities can be mobilised to promote public debate.

Undertaking the third role of community service seriously requires anumber of components. The starting point for engagement should be astraightforward mapping of regional links in terms of teaching, research andparticipation in regional public affairs. A very basic task is to identify the homeorigin of students, what academic programmes they participate in, and thedestination of graduates by occupation, industry and geographical location.With the judicious use of external data, the higher education institution shouldbe able to establish its share of national and regional student and graduatemarkets, its contribution to raising levels of participation in higher education inthe region and graduate skills in the regional labour market. The institutionshould aim to establish mechanisms that track students on a longitudinal basis,including their careers as alumni and use this information to guide the shapingof teaching programmes. On the research side, the geography of collaborationwith the users and beneficiaries needs to be established. External benchmarkswill be required to make sense of these data, for example, to identify regionalcompanies and organisations absent from the list. The mapping should identifythe participating departments within the institution, again to reveal possible


missing links.Further, the contribution of the higher education institution to regional

public affairs can be mapped by identifying participation in employers’organisations, politics, the media, the voluntary sector, the arts, and othereducational institutions. An important distinction will need to be made betweeninformal engagement where staff act in an individual capacity and formalinstitutional participation in partnership arrangements. Further, it is importantto recognize the unique characteristics of each stakeholder such asorganisational culture, territorial remit, and funding sources. Documenting thepresent linkages and publicising them within the region will be an importantfirst step in raising the profile of the institution. Publicity within the institutionwill be equally important to draw the attention of all of the staff to the extentand significance of regional engagement. Such documentation is an essentialprelude to a self-evaluation of the institution’s desire and capacity to respondto regional needs. Ideally, this should be undertaken with the assistance of anexternal peer review group to gauge ‘institutional capacity’ to respond to regionalneeds. Such exercises can lead to a thorough re-evaluation of institutionalculture. They can also stimulate a shift from a loosely coupled institutionalform to a more managerial one. Regional offices and regional ‘animators’ playa central role in such institutional reconfiguring. This challenge has been neatlycaptured by Duke: For universities, the learning region may be the best-keptsecret of the dying days of this century. In practical terms this implies blendingand combining competition in the “new enterprise environment” withcollaboration; fostering and supporting ̀ `boundary spanners’’ who can workacross the borders of the university in effective discourse with otherorganisations and their different cultures; fostering cultural change to enableuniversities to speak and work with partners from many traditions andpersuasions as more learning organisations emerge and together enrich theirvarious overlapping learning zones or regions. (Duke, 1998, p. 5).======================References-1. Duke, C. (1998) Lifelong Learning: Implications for the University of the 21st

Century. Paper presented at the Fourteenth General Conference of IMHE memberinstitutions.

2. Gibsons, M.(1994) The New Production of Knowledge: the dynamics of scienceand research in contemporary societies (London, Sage).

3. Prakesh, Ved. (2011). Concerns about autonomy and Academic Freedom inHigher education Institutions, Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. XLVI, No.16, April 16, 2011.

4. UNESCO (2008). EFA Global Monitoring Report, www.unesco.org5. w w w . a i c t e - i n d i a . o r g / . . . /

RUSA%20Version%2018%20Narrative%207th%206.6. www.indiaeducationreview.com/.../higher-education-india-glanc


7. www.planningcommission.nic .in/aboutus/committee/wrkgrp12/.. . /wg_hiedu.pdf

8. www.un.org/millenniumgoals/pdf/MDG%20Report%202012.pdf9. www.unmillenniumproject.org/.../MainReportComplete-lowres.pdfý





[email protected]








The Comprehensive Study on the PlacementScenario of the Management Education Insti tute: A

Case study in Guwahati City of Assam

* Safiqur Rahman, ** Binita Devi***Tarana Rafique ****Rani Talukdar

==========================================================Abstract- Education is the process of receiving or giving systematicinstruction especially at a school or university level. Every society givesimportance to Education, it is panacea for all evils. Education makes theperson knowledgeable and enhances his skills. It thus leads the persontowards progress. It is responsible for creating better human beings anda better world. The objective of Education is to help on the establishmentof such a society in which the individuals are able to develop theirpotential to do well.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant professor, Department of Geography Guwahati College, Guwahati,

Assam.** Lecturer, Department of Geography, Guwahati College, Guwahati, Assam*** Lecturer, Department of Commerce (Management),Guwahati College,

Guwahati, Assam.**** Lecturer, Department of Mathematics, Guwahati College, Guwahati, Assam.

Introduction: Education has the responsibility to provide opportunities toinculcate basic life skills. These life skills may be foundational skills incommunication, computation, social skills and manual skills so that the studentsare enable to get job in their desired specific field. Research reveals that thereis a strong positive co-relationship between education and occupationalattainment. The more education an individual receives, the more likely he is toworks outside the home, to enjoy his work and to advance on the job. However,it has been observed that the number of educated unemployed is increasingday by day. The academicians commonly believes that one of the importantcauses of educated unemployment is wrong education system. Specifically,present system of non technical education has failed to generate efficient workforce for variety of jobs in today’s modern world. But, fortunately, the scenariohas changed in the recent times. Among the various branches, of study withinthe purview of non technical education, Management education is a specialbranch, which has diversified employment opportunities at the present age of


economic development in India both in private and in public sector as well.Objectives:1) To get an account of the Management Education Institutions of Guwahati

City.2) To find out the placement record of the selected institutions.3) To analyse the challenges of placement in Guwahati city.Methodology- In preparing this paper, we have visited the managementinstitutions of the Guwahati city by taking random samples and collected datafrom the primary source regarding placement. Moreover, various secondarysources of data like Internet, newspaper, Journals etc have been used to preparethis paper. Chart has been used to exhibit the various data.Management Education- Management is an essential part of any groupactivity. It is a primary force within the group or organisation which tends tolead it towards the group goal. Management is required to plan, organise, co-ordinate and control the affairs of the organisation. It brings the human andmaterial resources together and motivates people for the achievement of theorganisation. Without management, resources of production remain resources,merely and never become production. Management is a universal process inall organised, social and economic activities. Whenever there is human activity,there is management. In our real life, we see that every activity we undertakeinvolves an element that ensure co-ordination and cohesiveness to the activity,without which our acts would be unproductive and ineffective. Like the domainof ancient philosophers all mankind is the management’s province.

So, Management Education has utmost necessity in real life world. Careersin management are available in the field of (i) Personnel Management (ii)Production Management (iii) Financial Management (iv) MarketingManagement (v) Materials Management (vi) Other areas of Managementsuch as Hotel Management, Hospital Management, Tourism Management ,Event Management and Office Management.Management Education in Assam- Management education has now beenheld inevitable for acquiring employment either in public or private sectorundertakings. With the pace of fast changing world economy, ManagementEducation has become popular in Assam too. In recent years, a few numbersof educational institutions are providing management education in Assam viz.Assam Institute of Management, North Eastern Regional Institute ofManagement and Asian Institute of Management and Technology, Royal Groupsof Institutes, Girijananda Institute of Management and Technology, GauhatiUniversity, MBA Department, Guwahati Commerce College, Indian Instituteof Finance and Management, Dibrugarh University etc. However, most of theManagement Education Institutes are situated in Guwahati city.The Study Area (Guwahati city)- Guwahati is a major city in eastern India,often considered as the gateway to the North-East Region (NER) of the country


and in the largest city within the region. Guwahati city located in 260 10´45´´ Nlatitude and 910 45´0´ ́E longitude of Kamrup District, Assam, India, is said tobe the legendary Pragjyotishpur, the city of Eastern light. Presently, Guwahaticovers an area of 216.79 KM (Corporation area), 313 KM (including rivers)and has population of 5, 84, 342 (male – 3, 27, 727 and female – 2, 56, 617).Now, Guwahati is a major commercial and educational centre of eastern India.The Management Institutions of the Guwahati City- A large number ofManagement Institutes have grown up in Guwahati city contributing towardsmanagement education. Management education has been significant in theNorth East region because of the wider scope for employment, it createsefficient and effective managers, corporate leaders and executives and it helpsin building greater confidence and ability to face challenges. The GauhatiUniversity, Guwahati Commerce College, North Eastern Regional Institute ofManagement (NERIM), Indian Institute for Finance and Management, AsianInstitute of Management and Technology, Assam Institute of Management,Xavier Institute of Management and Information Technology, Hindustan College,Girijananda Institute for Management and Technology, Royal Group ofInstitutions are providing management education in the city. Various coursesare imparted by these renowned institutions Viz, BBA, MBA,PGDM, PGDBM,EMBA etc. To analyse the placement Scenario of these institutions, a casestudy has been conducted on four management Institutes of the city. Thispaper gives an account of the four selected institute, placement rate,opportunities and the scenario of engagement of management students inGuwahati city.The selected Institutes for case study-(A) The Assam Institute of management- It was incorporated as anautonomous society of the government of Assam in 1988. Originally the Institutewas called the Assam Institute of management and Accounting (AIMA). Thename was shortened to Assam Institute of Management (AIM) in 1993 toreflect truly its mission and activities. Initially, the institute was under the publicenterprises department of the government of Assam. In 1996 it was broughtunder the Planning and Development (P&D) Department of the state. Sinceits initiation, the Government of Assam has nurtured the institute and has takenpride of its attainment. In the beginning the institute was conducting professionalcourses, management programmes and short term courses. In 1994, the instituteobtained approval of the All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) tostart two year full time and three year part-time post graduate Diplomaprogrammes in Business management. However, after, 2006 the institute hasdiscontinued the part-time PGDBM programme.(B) North Eastern Regional Institute of Management- North EasternRegional Institute of Management (NERIM) is a post graduate collegeestablished by the NERIM Educational Society in the year 1992. The


department of Technical Education, Government of Assam, initially extendedthe active support for the establishment of this institute with a view to promotemanagement causes like BBA, MBA, etc in the North Eastern region of thecountry. NERIM is affiliated to Dibrugarh University. The All India council ofTechnical Education (AICTE) and the Bar council of India (BCI) have grantedtheir approval to the courses conducted at NERIM.(C) Asian Institute of Management and Technology- Asian Institute ofManagement and Technology is the brain child of the Gyanjyoti Foundation, aconglomeration of corporate houses and eminent personalities who aredetermined to bring about some complete changes in the education scenario ofthe North – East Region. The institute was established in the year 2008 underthe Gyanjyoti. Gyanjyoti foundation is ISO 9001: 2008 certified organisation isa partner Institution of Indira Gandhi Technological and Medical ScienceUniversity, Arunachal Pradesh, under National Community College for skilldevelopment. The institute is providing courses like BBA, MBA etc.(D) Indian Institute for Finance and Management- The Indian Institute forFinance and Management, a premier institution in commerce and managementin North East India. This institute is established by the Sagar Foundation Society(SFS). The institute has made significant contributions in its inception and hasearned a name for its high academic standard. The institute was established in2011 and it is offering management programmes like BBA, PGDBM, MBA,EMBA etc.Observation and findings- The word ‘Placement’ means the act of placingthe applicants in suitable jobs. However, the right persons should be placed inright job according to one’s capability and satisfaction on the part of theemployees is also necessary. It has been observed that training and placementcell is an integral part of all the institution surveyed so far. The base yearstaken for the analysis are 2009 – 2011 and 2010-2012. The findings are asfollows:(A) The Assam Institute of Management- In both the years Seventy (70)participants have joined the PGDBM Programme in the institute. Out of 70participants, 68 have completed the programme in 2009-2012 and 62 havecompleted the programme in 2010-2012. A wide majority of the graduates ofthe institutions were placed in some of the leading corporate organisation ofthe country. The major recruiters of 2009-2011. Batch were State Bank ofIndia, United bank of India, SBI life Insurance, ICICI Bank, HDFC Bank,AXIS Bank, CRISIL, Gati Ltd. Berger Paints and Star Cement among others.And the major recruiters of 2010 – 2012 Batch were ITC Ltd, Nestle IndiaLtd, SBI General Insurance Co. Ltd. etc.(B) The North Eastern Regional Institute of Management (NERIM)- Foradmission to the Management Courses NERIM conducted NERIM EntranceTest (NET) or CAT/MAT Score followed by GD&PI. In 2011-2012, NERIM


has the record of 100% placement of its students in various corporateorganisation like IDBI Bank, LIC, ICICI Prudential, HCL, Adidas, SamsungElectronics, TATA, Bajaj Allianze, LG, Kotak, SBI Life Insurance, HindustanUnilever Limited, Asian Paints, Pepsi, Erricson Coca-Cola, Dabur, Surya GoldCement, AVIVA, Canon, HDFC Bank etc.(C) The Asian Institute of Management and Technology- The Asian Instituteof Management and Technology has the record of 95% placement as informedby the Administrative officer of the Institute. An indicative list of the placementin 2010 offered to the students is presented below in summarized form –

Organisation Name No. of Candidates Selected ICICI Bank 12 SBI Life Insurance 1 ABC Ltd. 1 Vidyut Metallic (Supermax) 4 MARICO LTD 1 Nestle India 5 International Development Enterprises India (IDE-1)

1

Amara Raja Batteries Ltd (AMARON)

3

Whirlpool of India Ltd. 1 Assam Company Ltd 1 UB Group 1 HDFC Bank 6 The average salary of the passed out batch has also increased over the

years and in 2010 the highest CTC earned by AIM graduate is around Rs. 3.5Lac. P.a. . From 2009 onwards, various corporate organisations recruit studentsfrom the institute. Some of the recruiters are Bharati Airtel, ITC Ltd., Aircel,Hyundai, USHA, Nerolac Paints, HDFC, ICICI Bank, L & T Finance, Infosys,Reliance, REBI, Wipro, Dulux, Horlicks, Prodigy, Oxfam, T.I.M.E., ACSITSolutions, UB Group, Dabur, Dalmia cement, Kurlon News Live, NIIT, CadilaPharma, Jaquar, TCS, Sony, Godrej& Boyce,ING Vysya, Assam Air product ,Data pro, cipla etc.D) Indian Institute For Finance & Management- From 2010 onwards theplacement rate of the institute is increasing. In every batch it has the intakestudents of 60 (sixty). Some of the recruiters of the students of this organisationare Axis Bank, ICICI, Mahesh Bajaj, Amrit (food), Hayat Hospital Ltd., ICA(Panbazar), Various BPO, Nokia, Reebok etc.Analysis- The Management Students of the Guwahati city is recruited by theboth government and private organisation as well. The following list gives apicture of the placement scenario of the Guwahti City, where four managementInstitutes have been taken as sample .


Name of the Institutes Recruiters Remarks A) Assam Institute of

Management SBI, UBI, SBI Life Insurance, ICICI Bank, HDFC, Axis, CRISIL, Gati Ltd, Berger paints, ICI Ltd., Nestle

B) The North Eastern Regional Institute of Management (NERIM)

IDBI Bank, LIC, ICICI, ICICI Prudential, HCL, Adidas, Samsung Electronics, TATA, BAJA Allianze, LG, Kotak, SBI Life Insurance, Hindustan Unilever Limited, Asian Paints, Pepsi, Ericsson, Coca-Cola, Aviva, CANON, HDFC Bank etc.

100% placement

C) The Asian Institute of Management & Technology

Bharati Airtel, ITC Ltd, Aircel, Hyundai, USHA, Nerolac Paints, HDFC, ICICI Bank, Horlicks , Wipro, Dulux, Dalmia Cement, Sony, Cadila Pharma, ING Vysya, Cipla etc.

95% placement

D) Indian Institution for Finance & Management

Axis Bank, ICICI, Mahesh Bajaj, Hayat Hospitals, Nokia, Reebok etc.

It has been observed that numbers of recruiters are increasing day by

day. However, the Management Institutes of the Guwahati city is facing lotsof challenges regarding the placement of the students. Some of them are –(i) An acute demand – supply mismatch have been observed in Guwahti

city regarding management Institutions. A large numbers of Institutionhave grown up of different capacities in the city, whereas member ofrecruiters are less, lead to gloomy placement Scenario in the city.

(ii) The present global Economic recession has affected the placementscenario of the management institute as the corporate organization havecurtailed the number of employees in their respective organisations. Lackof MNC’s, organizations and projects in North East India have affectedthe placement scenario of the management Institute.

Conclusion- Management education have become quite popular in the Northeastern part of India and in Guwahati city as well. And a large number ofmanagement students of Guwahati city have been placed in various Governmentand private organization across the globe. But all organization want goodmanagers these days, so improvement and addition in skill and quality of


management students will certainly lead to better placement. It has beenexpected that with globalization of the Indian economy,more number of MNC’sare entering the city will increase the rate of employment of the managementstudents. The upcoming “Look East Policy” will make North East India abusiness and Commercial Hub and Guwahati city, the gateway of North eastIndia will surely be benefitted.. So, employment prospects are likely to be highin near future. Importance of management education is increasing day by day.So, it is high time for the Institutions as well the students to improve theirquality for recruitment in various organization as specific knowledge and skilldominating the present day job market all over the world.======================References-1. Mathur S.S;(2011) Teacher and Secondary Education, Shri Vinod pustak Mandir.2. Mahanta N.N, (2012). Philosophical and Sociological Dimensions Of Education,

Mani Manik Prakash, Guwahati.3. Prospectus, (2013). Assam Institute of management, Guwahati.4. Prospectus, (2013).Asian Institute of management & Technology.5. Prospectus, (2013). North Eastern Regional Institute of Management.6. Prospectus,(2013). Indian Institute for Finance and Management.7. Sarkar, Sharma, Gupta, (2012). Principles of Management, Kalyani Publishers.8. www.google.com.


Role of Education in Preventing Skin Cancer

* Megha Das**Ratnesh Das ***Kamlesh Das

==========================================================Abstract- Skin cancer is the most commonly diagnosed cancer inpopulations of predominantly Caucasian origins. As the main cause ofskin cancer is excessive sun exposure among a sun-sensitive population,most skin cancers are theoretically avoidable, and prevention is animportant topic for public health purposes. The development of skincancer may be limited by effective primary prevention campaigns, causingpeople to protect themselves from the sun as well as harmfulelectromagnetic radiations and chemicals. In order to be effective, theright people need to become aware of the risks and benefits; they alsoneed to be convinced that they can take effective protective measures.Secondary skin cancer prevention aims to avoid skin cancer morbidityand mortality and is, therefore, mainly aimed at early detection ofcutaneous melanomas. This paper highlights various aspects of skincancer and role of education for preventing the society from skin cancer.Keywords- Cutaneous Melanomas, Environment, Electromagneticradiations, Education.==========================================================

===========================* Department of Education, Dr.Harisingh Gour University, Sagar (M.P.)** Department of Chemistry, Dr.Harisingh Gour University, Sagar (M.P.)*** Department of Botany , Government P.G.College, Bina (M.P.)

Introduction- Cancer is a disease caused due to immortality of the cells. Theterm cancer is not indicative of one disease but refers to more than hundredforms of diseases having certain key commonalities. In healthy cells, cellmultiplication is controlled by proto-oncogene and tumor suppressor proteins.During the cancerous state the proto-oncogene change to oncogene anddecrease the amount of tumor suppressor proteins in the cell ,thus causinguncontrolled multiplication. It has been well established that cells which don’tadhere to normal regulation of multiplication leads to development of carcinoma.Hence, all cancer cells are capable of becoming malignant and possess theability to transmit to other areas of the body. As a result cancer is a complexmultifactorial disease in which a group of cells display uncontrolled and unwantedgrowth. In spite of good advancements for diagnosis and treatment, cancer is


still a big threat to our society. This is the second most common disease aftercardiovascular disorders for maximum deaths in the world. It accounts forabout 23 and 7% deaths in USA and India, respectively. The world’s populationis expected to be 7.5 billion by 2020 and approximations predict that about 15.0million new cancer cases will be diagnosed; with deaths of about 12.0 millioncancer patients. The prevalence of cancer in India is estimated to be around2.5 million, with about 8, 00,000 new cases and 5,50,000 deaths perannum.Cancer is caused by both external factor (tobacco, infectious viruses,chemical pollutants and radiations) and internal factors (mutations, hormonalimbalances etc.While cancer can develop in many parts of the body, the mostcommon form is skin cancer, especially since the skin is considered the largestorgan in the body and it is the organ most exposed to the harsh environment.Skin cancers are named for the type of cells that become malignant (cancer).The three most common types are:• Melanoma: Melanoma begins in melanocytes (pigment cells). Mostmelanocytes are in the skin.

Melanoma can occur on any skin surface. In men, it’s often found onthe skin on the head, on the neck, or between the shoulders and the hips. Inwomen, it’s often found on the skin on the lower legs or between the shouldersand the hips.

Melanoma is rare in people with dark skin. When it does develop inpeople with dark skin, it’s usually found under the fingernails, under the toenails,on the palms of the hands, or on the soles of the feet.• Basal cell carcinoma: Basal cell skin cancer begins in the basal celllayer of the skin. It usually occurs in places that have been in the sun. Forexample, the face is the most common place to find basal cell skin cancer.In people with fair skin, basal cell skin cancer is the most common type of skincancer.• Squamous cell carcinoma: Squamous cell skin cancer begins insquamous cells. In people with dark skin, squamous cell skin cancer is themost common type of skin cancer, and it’s usually found in places that are notin the sun, such as the legs or feet. However, in people with fair skin, squamouscell skin cancer usually occurs on parts of the skin that have been in the sun,such as the head, face, ears, and neck. Unlike moles, skin cancer can invadethe normal tissue nearby. Also, skin cancer can spread throughout the body.Melanoma is more likely than other skin cancers to spread to other parts of thebody. Squamous cell skin cancer sometimes spreads to other parts of the body,but basal cell skin cancer rarely does.

When skin cancer cells do spread, they break away from the originalgrowth and enter blood vessels or lymph vessels. The cancer cells may befound in nearby lymph nodes. The cancer cells can also spread to othertissues and attach there to form new tumors that may damage those


tissues. The spread of cancer is called metastasis.Environmental Risk Factors Associated With Skin Cancer- Worldwide skin cancer epidemic has many causative factors including age, familyhistory, genomic changes etc. But mainly it is caused by environmentalfactors among which pollutants, pesticides and radiations are the majorcontributors (a) Chemicals- Few people realize that many of the everyday things we areexposed to may be chemicals that cause cancer. Throughout our lives we areexposed to a wide variety of chemicals. They are in cleaning products, inpesticides used to grow the produce we purchase for our families, medicationsand even in things we consider innocuous such as candles.Smoking- Smoking is one of the most common chemicals that cause skincancer. However, a common misconception is that it only causes lung cancer.Research has shown that it can actually cause many more cancers thanthis. Leukoplakia and erythroplakia are oral precancerous lesions. Smokingis one of the main risk factors for these conditions. In some cases, thesedevelop into skin cancer inside the mouth. According to a study publishedin Nature Reviews Immunology in 2002, smoking can also have moredamaging effects. Researchers in New Mexico found that nicotine, one ofthe main compounds found in cigarette smoke, suppresses the immunesystem. This leaves the body vulnerable to cancer and other diseases.Alcohol- A study published in Cancer Epidemiology, Biomarkers &Prevention, explored the link between alcohol use and basal cell carcinoma.The researchers found a definite association. However, they did note thatalcohol from beer did not affect basal cell carcinoma risk. There was aninverse relationship between women who drank red wine and cancer risk;the same was not true of male red wine drinkers. Alcohol use is also a riskfactor for a condition called actinic cheilitis. This precancerous lip conditiondevelops into squamous cell carcinoma in six to ten percent of cases.Alcohol use should be limited to help reduce your risk of cancer.Coal Tar Product- Coal, tar and pitch are all polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons(PAHs). According to the Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry,a part of the United States Department of Health and Human Services,some people exposed to PAHs later developed cancer. In laboratory studies,some PAHs caused stomach, lung and skin cancer. To protect against thesechemicals that cause cancer, care should be taken to limit exposure. Ifworking in an industry that exposes you to these chemicals, wear protectiveequipment whenever possible. The Occupational Safety and HealthAdministration (OSHA) have set limits to limit exposure.Soot- Soot also contains PAHs. It has been linked to lung cancer. Whilesome soot exposure is unavoidable, it should be avoided wheneverpossible. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has worked to protect


the public with strict rules. However, there are some companies who tryto get around the rules. Ideally, you want to live in an area that does nothave this type of pollution in the air.Creosote- Creosote can refer to more than one thing. The most commonlyused is coal tar creosote, a wood preservative. It can also refer to thecarbon buildup in chimneys or the creosote bush, sometimes calledchaparral. Like coal tar, creosote contains PAHs. According to EPA data,there is evidence that creosote is carcinogenic. When purchasing wood,consider untreated varieties. If you must purchase treated, look for a saferalternative. To prevent exposure when cleaning the chimney, wear a maskand gloves. You can also pay a professional to do the job!Arsenic- Arsenic is a naturally occurring component of the earth’s crustand is found in rock, soil, plants, water and in the air. It can be dispersedand transported by volcanic eruptions, soil and rock erosion and throughwater via rivers and underground streams. Our modern world increasesthe levels of inorganic arsenic (the most toxic) in our environment byindustries such as glass manufacturing, timber preservation, metalsmelting, burning fossil fuels, mining and in pesticides, such as rat poisonand weed killers. Arsenic in our water supply is closely regulated to ensuretoxic levels are kept to a minimum, however in some areas of the worldsuch as South America and Bangladesh, levels can be much higher. In highdoses, it can have devastating effect on the human body. According toCancer Research UK, it can increase your risk of non-melanoma skin cancer.Long term exposure to arsenic has also been linked to liver cancer. Exposureshould be limited as much as possible and protective gear should be usedif your work requires exposure to this or other chemicals that cause cancer.Paraffin Wax- Some of the candles you have in your home may be made ofparaffin wax. Recent research has found that paraffin wax candles give offtoxic fumes when they are burned. These fumes have been linked to cancer.The researchers did note that occasional candle usage was not somethingto be concerned about. However, those that use candles regularly shoulduse caution. When purchasing candles, select ones made of beeswax andsoy. The researchers stated that these did not give off toxic fumes likeparaffin wax did. Also, if you regularly use candles, do so only in a wellventilated room to minimize the fumes you are exposed to.Motor OilMotor Oil- Mineral-based motor oils are made from petroleum. Whenused as designed to help lubricate the engine of your vehicle, it can exposeyou to potential carcinogens. The used oil contains PAHs, additives, metalsfrom the motor parts and small amounts of automobile fluids includinggasoline and antifreeze. In animal research studies, long-term exposureto used oils caused skin cancer (8). Exposure can occur in one of three


ways, while changing the oil in your vehicle, breathing the chemicals inthrough exhaust fumes or when it has contaminated soil or water. Whenchanging the oil in your car, you should be careful to avoid getting it onyour hands. If it does touch your skin, wash it immediately. Used oil shouldbe disposed of properly to prevent soil or water contamination. (B) Ionising Radiations- Radiations penetrate biological matter and alterthe cells and its constituents by causing chemical, molecular and physicaldamage resulting in cell death or genetic mutation. Since ionizing radiationsare sufficiently high-energy radiations they disrupt atoms and constituteone of the most dangerous type of radiation for all living organisms.Commonly known ionizing radiations present in environment are:• Natural resources like sun (Ultraviolet radiations)• Industrial sources like nuclear explosion and power station accidents• Medical sources- X-ray• Domestic sources like cathode ray tubes(computers and TV’s),some

smoke alarms, and fluorescent dials• Manmade nuclear fission products

Frequent exposure to X-ray and gamma rays are significant andcausative environmental factors for skin cancer. Radiation therapy donefor diseases like tuberculosis has also been proven to cause skin cancer.(C) Electromagnetism-Electromagnetic fields (EMFs) are long wavesforms of non-ionizing radiations. Natural resources like sun and earth’smagnetic field and man made resources like high-voltage power lines,power transmission stations, electrical appliances such ascomputers,hairdryers,TVsets and microwave ovens emit EMFs.EMFsinterfere with normal production of melatonin which has been foundsignificant in development of skin cancer. Researchers at Battell PacificNorthwest Laboratory in Richland,Washington,have shown that EMFssuppress the levels of hormone melatonin which is produced by pinealgland in the central part of the brain and regulates the functioning of theimmune system. Melatonin is also able to suppress ultraviolet (UV)-induced damage to skin cells and shows strong antioxidant activity in UVexposed cells. Low levels of melatonin have been linked to skincancer,breast cancer, as well as prostrate cancer.Thus EMFs arehypothesized to cause skin cancer by alteing melatonin levels.Need of Education for Preventing Society from Skin Cancer -Skin care isone of the most common type of cancer seen in the world today. Surprisingit is mainly caused due to negligence in our daily life activities such asexposure in sun light for a long time, use of chemicals which act ascarcinogen for our body or improper handling of devices generatingelectromagnetic raditions etc.All these evidences suggests the need ofeducating people for preventing them from dangers of skin cancer. Skin is


largely preventable, and if caught early, it’s usually curable. Therefore it isnecessary to educate people about various ways for skin cancer prevention.There is need to start awareness campaign like The American Cancer Societywhich promotes the slogan “Slip! Slop! Slap! and Wrap” which is a catchphrase that reminds people of the 4 key ways they can protect themselvesfrom UV radiation:• Slip on a shirt,• Slop on sunscreen,• Slap on a hat, and• Wrap on sunglasses to protect the eyes and sensitive skin around themfrom ultraviolet light.

Apart from this it is needed to educate people about the early symptomsand pro-diagnosis of skin lesions for early detection and cure. Not only this,other agents which may be responsible for causing skin cancer may behighlighted through media and educational activities to make people aware ofthis disease. Interventions in primary schools may promote sun protectivebehaviors among children in kindergartenthrough 8th grade. These interventions would include at least one of thefollowing activities:1. provision of information to children (through instruction, small media, or

both);2. activities to influence children’s behavior (e.g., modeling, demonstration,

or role playing);3. activities to change the knowledge, attitudes, or behavior of caregivers

(e.g., teachers or parents); and4. Environmental and policy approaches (e.g., providing sunscreen,

increasing availability of shade, or scheduling outdoor activities to avoidhours of peak sunlight).

Conclusion- Skin cancer forms a serious health issue creating a significanthealth burden in almost every country of the world. There are various majorand minor risk factors that induce skin carcinoma. Various studies have providedsufficient and convincing evidence to demonstrate that environmental pollutantsand excessive sunlight are the major causal factors. The rate of mounting skincancer is directly proportional to the rate of increasing pollution in theenvironment and depletion of ozone layer. However skin cancer is curable ifdiagnosed earlier also it could be controlled by minimizing environmental pollutionand taking precautions in daily life activities. For that there arises a need foreducating about skin cancer, its causative agents, diagnosis, treatment etc,through awareness campaigns at school levels, and community levels. Thuseducation would become a boon for several lives and prevent them from illeffects of skin cancer.


======================References-1. Abegunde D, Mathers C, Adam T, Ortegon M, Strong K (2007) The burden and

costs of chronic diseases in lowincome and middle-income countries. TheLancet 370,1929-38.

2. Alabaster O (1972) Colorectal Cancer: Epidemiology risks and prevention. JPLippincott, Philadelphia.

3. Ali I, Rahis-ud-din, Saleem k, Aboul-Enein HY, Rather MA (2011) Social Aspectsof Cancer Genesis. Cancer Therapy 8, 6-14.

4. Anand P, Ajaikumar BK, Sundaram C, Kuzhuvelil BH, Sheeja TT, Oiki SL, SungB, Bharat BA (2008) Cancer is a Preventable Disease that Requires MajorLifestyle Changes. Pharm Res 25, 2097-2116.

5. Baan R, Straif K, Grosse Y (2007) Carcinogenicity of alcoholic beverages. LancetOncol 8, 292-3.

6. Banker DD (1955) J Post Grad Med 1, 108. (Cited in Nagrath SP, Hazra DK,Lahiri B, Kishore B, Kumar R (1970) Primary carcinoma of the lung:Clinicopathological study of 35 cases. Indian J Chest Dis 12, 15-24.

7. Belpomme D, Irigaray P, Hardell L, Clapp R, Montagnier L, Epstein S, Sasco AJ(2007) The multitude and diversity of environmental carcinogens. Environ Res105, 414-429.

8. Carmaeia B (1993) Molecular mechanisms in cancer induction and Prevention.Environmental Health perspectives supplements 101, 237-245.

9. Doll R, Peto R (1981) The causes of cancer: quantitative estimates of avoidablerisks of Cancer in the United States today. J Natl Cancer Inst 66, 1191-308.

10. Kotnis A, Sarin R, Mulherkar R (2005) Genotype, phenotype and cancer: Roleof low penetrance genes and environment in tumor susceptibility. J Biosci 30,93-102.

11. Parkin DM, Pisani P, Ferlay J (1999) Global Cancer Statistics.C A Cancer J Clin49, 33-64.

12. Parkin DM, Bray F, Ferlay J, Pisani P (2005) Global cancer statistics 2002. CACancer J Clin 55, 74-108.

13. Parkin DM, Muir CS, Whelan SL, Gao YT, Ferlay J, Powell J (1992) CancerIncidence in Five Continents Vol. VI.


Status of Public Libraries in Karnal District

* Sandhya Rani==========================================================Abstract- Attempts to examine the statues of public libraries in Karnal interms of physical facilities, manpower, collection development, collectionorganization, finance, automation, services offered, etc. Based on theresult of the survey and major findings. This paper tries to assess thecurrent situation of Public Libraries in Karnal.==========================================================

===========================* Research Scholar (M.Phil), Department of Library & Information Science,

K.U.Kurukshetra.

Introduction- According to Dr. S.R. Ranganathan, “Any library establishedor maintained by a local library authority, including travelling libraries andservices”, the Public Library is a place for all community members irrespectiveof age, sex, religion, language, status and education supported by a mandate oflaw. The year 1972 is play an important role in the history of Public Librarybecause Raja Rammohun Roy Library Foundation came into existence.Public Libraries in Karnal- Karnal was of the District’s from seven Districtsof Haryana on 1 November, 1966 when Haryana became an independentstate from composite Punjab and known as a city of ‘DaanveerKarna’. TheDistrict is famous all over the world for its production of Rice, Wheat and milkthere are many research institutes like NDRI, CSSRI, Wheat ResearchDirectorate, Sugarcane Breeding Institute, National Bureau of Animal GeneticsResources etc. There are four Public Libraries in Karnal and One MunicipalPublic Library in Karnal and Nelokheri also. In spite of these Public Libraries,there is a Library in Karnal Jail. This library is very useful for the prisoners ofJail. It is also mentioned here that the municipal public library was situated inKarnal when the Haryana and Punjab was joint.Objectives- This study has been conducted to assess the current situation ofthe public libraries in Karnal. Here, we have tried to point out the problem ofdifferent aspects of these libraries. The specific objectives of the present studywere to know the following aspects of the functioning of the libraries:-1. Collection development policy and practice2. Availability of staff members in the library.3. Annual budget4. Various library services being provided.


5. Year of Established.6. Status of computerization in libraries.7. Library membership fee.Scope- This study includes the Municipal Libraries of Karnal and DistrictPublic Library. There are four Public Libraries and two Municipal Libraries inKarnal District.Methodology-This research paper was designed to know the status of PublicLibraries in Karnal District. There are four Public Library and one MunicipalLibrary in Karnal city and one Municipal Library in Nelokheri (Sub. Divisionof Karnal). It was decided to study these Public Libraries situated at Karnalto use questionnaire for data collection. The questionnaire was designed makingself-use of various sources mentioned under literature review and practicalexperience of the authors. The questionnaire was put up to the authority ofthese public libraries personally and support collected.

Table No. 1, Library CollectionLibrary Collection

DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

Books 34,000 60,000 22,500 10,000 10,500 100

Reference Collection

--- 1500 --- ---- --- ---

Newspapers 10 14 10 10 8 ---

Maps/Atlas --- --- --- ---- --- ---

Magazine 10 35 26 7 --- ---

Microfilm --- --- --- ---- --- ---

CD-Rom Database

--- --- --- ---- --- ---

Audio-Visual Materials

--- 20 --- ---- --- ---

Back Volumes --- --- --- --- ----

DLK=District Library, Karnal; PPLK=Partap Public Library, Karnal;PCTLK=Purshtuam Charitable Trust Library, Karnal; PPK=Pass Pusthaklya,Karnal; GMLK=Gandhi Municipal Library, Karnal; VRMLN=VeerRaghuvinder Mahajan Library, Nilokheri.

The affluence of a library can be accessed by its collection. Librarycollection is a sum of the total of library materials that make up the holding ofa particulars library. Table-1 shows that Partap Public Library has largestcollection of text books i.e. 60000 followed by District Library with 34000books, Purshtuam Charitable Trust Library with 22500 books, GhandhiMunicipal Library with 10500 books and Pass Pusthaklya with 10000 books.Veer Raghuvinder Mahajan Library has the smallest collection of 100 books.It is also observed from above table that only Partap Public Library has thereference collection and audio-visual materials. Regarding newspapers and


magazines Pratap Public Library has the maximum collection with compare toothers.

Table 2, Library StaffPosts DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

Sr. Librarian

01 01 --- 01* ---- ---

Jr. Librarian

01* 01 --- --- --- ---

Asstt. Librarian

--- ---- --- --- --- ---

Librarian --- 01 01 --- --- 01**

Library Attendant

--- --- --- --- --- ---

Library Cleaner

--- --- --- --- --- ---

Restorer 01 --- --- --- --- ---

Peon 01 01 --- 01 ---- ---

Sweeper 01 --- --- --- ---

Chowkidar 01# 01 --- --- --- ---

Table-2 shows that Partap Public Library has enough library staff and

District Library is also follow this. But there is no Librarian in all four libraries.The meaning of the above stars is as:- *means that post sanctioned but notfilled. # means that this post is Sweeper-cum-chowkidar. ** A.S.I works onthe post of librarian. Veer Raghuvinder MahajanLibray have no staff and thislibrary were handed over to the Senior Citizen of Nilokheri by the Nagar Palika,Nilokheri.

Table 3, Annual BudgetsDLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

Rs. 50,000/- Rs. 1,00,000/- Rs. 35,000/- Rs.4,00,000/- Rs.1,00,000/- No Budget

It is mentioned here that all public libraries have their budget in spite ofPass Pusthaklya. This library is run by the donation of social workers and S.P.Karnal.

Table 4Circulation System

DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN Computerized No Yes No No No No

Register Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Reservation of Books

No Yes No No No No

Open during lunch time

Yes Yes No No No No


Table-4 shows that out of 6 public libraries only four library havecirculation system. It is observed that Ghandhi Municipal Library is closedfrom a long time & Vir Raghuvinder Mahajan Library is handed over to theSenior Citizen of Nilokheri so these library has no circulation system.

Table 5Library Access

DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN Open Access Yes Yes Yes Yes --- ---

Close Access --- --- --- --- Yes Yes

Table-5 shows that out of 6 public libraries only four library have openAccess system and Ghandhi Municipal Library & Vir Raghuvinder MahajanLibrary were followed close access system.

Table 6Catalogue Code

Code followed DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

ACCR-II Yes Yes --- --- --- ---

CCC --- --- --- --- --- ---

No information --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes

Table-6 shows that two library have followed catalogue code and fourlibraries have no information about catalogue code.

Table 7Scheme for classification

Scheme DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

DDC Yes Yes --- --- --- ---

CC --- --- --- --- --- ---

UDC --- --- --- --- ---

No scheme --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes

Table-7 shows that two libraries have catalogue and other four librarieshave no information about Catalogue Code.

Table 8Year of established/now status of Building

Year/ Status DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

Year 1984 1968 1982 1965 1981 1993

Own Building Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Rent Building --- --- --- --- --- ---


Table-8 shows, all public library has their own building and this showsthat the oldest public library is Ghandhi Municipal Library, Karnal.

Table 9, Automation

Status of Automation DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

Fully Automated --- Yes --- --- --- ---

Partially Automated Yes --- --- --- --- ---

Not Response --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes

Table-9 shows that only Partap Public Library, Karnal is fully automatedand District Library, Karnal is partially automated and other libraries have noresponse about the area of automation.

Table 10USE OF LIBRARY SOFTWARE

Use of Library Software DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

In-house build --- --- --- --- --- ---

Readymade Yes Yes --- ---- --- ---

No Response --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes

Table-10 shows that only Partap Public Library, Karnal & District Library,Karnal are used the library software and remaining libraries do not use anysoftware.Automation Facilities- None of the public libraries have networking facilities,internet facilities to the users, online facility, CD-ROM search facility and arenot the member of any library Networks

Table 11- Library Membership fee.Rs. DLK PPLK PCTLK PPK GMLK VRMLN

Annually fee No fee 60/- 50/- 50/- --- No fee

Table-11 shows that District Library, Karnal has no annual fee but get

a security from the users. Veer Raghuvinder Mahajan Library, Nilokheri isoftenly closed so there is no membership fee and all other public libraries takea minor annual fee from the user + security charges extra.======================References-1. VenkaappaiahVelaga & Madhusudhan M.(2006). Public Library Legislation in

the New Millennium, New Delhi: Book, P- 39.2. www.karnal.govt.in/location.asp3. Deswal, Arpana R(2010). Status of Public Libraries in Haryana: An Analytical

Study. ILA Bulletin; 46(1-2): P-17-22.;4. Yadav K.C, Haryana: Itihaas&Sanskriti. Manohar; New Delhi, 1982, P- 342-343.


Encouragement of Physical Education andPhysical Fitness in Modern Society

*Hasan Mehdi**Lilly Pushpam Isaac

==========================================================Abstract- Today, preparing individuals for meaningful. Self-directedexistence is viewed as a primary focus of education. When properlytaught, physical education, with its emphasis on building a physically,emotionally - mentally, and socially fit society, plays an important role inthe educational process. Physical Fitness in one's richest possession; itcannot be purchased, to be earned through a daily routine of physicalexercise.It is self-evident that fit citizens are nation's best asset and weakones its liability, It is therefore the responsibility of every country topromote physical fitness of its citizens as it is the basic requirement formost of the tasks to be undertaken by an individual in his daily life.==========================================================

===========================* Lecturer, Department of Physical Education, Maulana Azad Institute of

Humanities Science and Technology, Mahmudabad, Sitapur.** Assistant Professor, Department of Physical Education, Tamil Nadu Physical

Education and Sports University Chennai-60012

The World Health Organization has set a target that every person in theworld should become health-conscious by 2000 A.D.; and it is a right step inthe realization of the objective, ‘health for all’, The international OlympicCommittee has signed an agreement with W.H.O for furthering the cause of‘health for all’ and ‘sport for all’ by 2000 A.D. This agreement is clearly directedtowards attaining total fitness of all individuals by the end of the century. Toattain this objective the citizens of the world are to be made healthy and,fitness-conscious and for this purpose, scientific programmes and criteria toevaluate fitness are to be formulated to cater to all individuals belonging toboth sexes and of all ages. As a primitive objective of physical education theattainment of total fitness has overwhelming implications for growth anddevelopment of youth. A Child who is fit enjoys robust health, a time lookingphysique, a satisfactory level of social and emotional adjustment, and aproficiency in the basic skills of movement. Physical fitness is positive qualities,extending on a scale from death to “abundant life” All living individuals, thus


have some degree of physical fitness, which varies considerably in differentpeople and in the same person from time to time. Physical Fitness is an essentialquality of man. The world’s leading philosophers have stressed the importanceof physical fitness in living a productive and meaningful life. The Greekphilosopher, Aristotle stated that the body is the temple of the soul, and toreach harmony of body, mind and spirit, the body must be physically fit. JohnLocke, an English philosopher wrote that a sound mind in a sound body is ashort but full description of a happy state in this world, he that has these twohave little more to wish for.

According to Williams “Physical fitness is essential not only in terms ofgeneral health, but also for the special physical requirements for competitivesports and certain highly specialized and demanding occupations. As a resultof current work, particularly in the field of ergonomics and physical education,it is becoming increasingly obvious though, not generally appreciated that theachievement and maintenance of high levels of physical fitness producesignificant efforts on the working of the human body.

Physical fitness in on a continuum and is often defined in relation to aperson’s life style and energy needs. Physical fitness is commonly defined asthe ability to handle normal physical demands of life, to have ample energy toperform variety of leisure time activities, and still be able to function effectivelyin emergency situations The American Association of Health physical educationand recreation defines fitness as a state. Which characterizes the degree towhich a person is able to function efficiently. Fitness is an individual matter. Itimplies the ability of each person to live most effectively within his potentialities.Ability to function depends upon the physical, mental, emotional, social, moraland spiritual components of fitness all of which is related to each other and ismutually interdependent. Physical fitness is more than cardio-vascular fitness.Most experts agree that fitness has many different components of which cardio-vascular fitness is only one. From a public health perspective, strength muscularendurance flexibility and body composition also merit consideration. Historypoints out that the people and communities which cared for their physique andengaged in various physical activities remained strong and prosperous, whereasthose which neglected the health and fitness aspect had waned and perished.The great Roman civilization crumbled and came to an ignominious end preciselybecause its people became disproportionately affluent and took to a life ofwanton luxury. They lost touch with physical exercises and sports and becamesoft in mind, flesh and spirit. The lesson is borne out in. Rome as it has been inmany other civilization, which have fallen along the way that for a nation toremain strong and to endure it must be physically as well as morally fit. Thestory of physical education and sports in Indian is strewn with ups and downsIn turmoil-torn periods Indian society paid some attention to physical fitnesswhile in periods of security and religious abundance it shifted its attention to


intellectual and spiritual attainments Thus neglecting the most vital aspect ofphysical awakening as a result of which Indian had to bear the brunt of foreignintrusion and invasion till the nineteenth century apart from other modernity’sthe British also brought to Indian their love of outdoor activity, games andsports, No doubt, the foreign rulers declared physical exercise an importantaspect of general education, they made no serious attempt to make it acompulsory subject in school and colleges and a way of life for the commonmasses. After independence, Educational reconstruction became a necessity.The center shouldered considerable responsibility in re-organizing and expandingvarious programmes of physical education with the object of developing physical,mental and social aspects of the youth making them worthy citizens ofdemocratic India, The University education commission (1948) and secondaryeducation commission (1950) suggested measures for developing physicaleducation for the youth of different stages of education The all Indian councilof sport was set in 1954 to suggest measures for development of sports thefirst national plan of Physical Education was prepared by Central AdvisoryBoard of Physical Education and recreation in 1956 which emphasized theneed for physical education in the educational institutions in the country Thesteps for improvement were also suggested in the plan. In 1959 the Governmentof Indian formed a committee under the chairmanship of Dr. H.N. Kunzru toevaluate various schemes of Physical education and recreation. The KunzruCommittee recommended an integrated programme of physical education witha uniform compulsory curriculum for all. The first All Indian Seminar on PhysicalEducation for the Principals of Physical Education Institutions was held in theyear 1958. At the Young Men Christian Association, College of PhysicalEducation, Madras. The purpose of the Seminar was to draw up soundprinciples and procedures to develop physical education and recreation on anation-wide basis. The seminar also suggested the conduct of the physicalfitness test as prescribed in the National Plan at various places in the countryto ascertain its validity and to set norms for different age groups. An All IndianSeminar for state inspectors of Physical Education and the University Directorsof Physical Education was held at Mahabaleswar in 1958 It was organized bythe Union ministry of Education. The objective of the Seminal was to discussthe then existing system of inspection and supervision of physical educationand also to discuss the development of physical education activities at college/university level and in rural areas. The seminar recommended the inclusion ofphysical education as one of the curricular subjects in schools and at all levelson par with the other subjects. National Physical Efficiency Drive Was launchedin 1959-60 by the Union ministry of Education with an aim to create fitnessconsciousness and enthusiasm amount the people of our country for betterand healthy living. In order to put the scheme on more scientific lines and onsound footing. It was entrusted to the Lakshmibai National College of Physical


Education, Gwalior, in the year 1972. This scheme was renamed as “NationalPhysical Fitness programme” (NPFP) to make it more effective in the country.The National policy framed in 1980 recommended that physical education andsports must be made a compulsory subject in all schools and colleges. At leasttwo disciplines in sports must form an essential subject in the educationalinstitutions. The National education policy which was designed by thegovernment of Indian in 1985 also gave adequate importance to the programmesof physical education and physical fitness at the institutional level and stipulatedthat every educational institution should have adequate sports facilities andscientific programmes to enable every school-going child to participate in gamesand sports and fitness activities of his/her choice. In order to spread the conceptof mass sports and physical fitness for all, the Government of India sponsoreda programme of Mass Gymnastic and fitness activities (Bharatiyam). Thefirst pilot project of this programme was held in December 1987, at Trivandrum,Which involved about 7,000 school children and the success of the programmeprovided encouragement for spreading the fitness culture in the entire country.In order to involve masses in the programme of mass fitness, efforts weremade through Sports Authority of Indian and Lakshsmbai National College ofPhysical Education, Gwalior to train teachers from different state/Us in massfitness activities. As of today about 20,000 teachers have been oriented in thecountry who in turn have involved about 20 lakh school going youth in thetender ate group of 8 to 14 years in different mass fitness activities.======================References-1. Charles A . Bucher and D.A Wuest, Foundation of Physical Education and

Sport 10th ed. (st. Louid : Mosby College publishing, 1987)2. A.K.Uppal, Physical Fitness: How to develop (New Delhi: Friends Publication,

1992)3. Donald K. Mathews, Measurement in Physical Education (London : W.B.

Sauners Company, 1978)4. H. Harrison Clarke, Application of Measurement of Health and Physical

Education 5th ed. (Engleweed Cliffs, N.J. : Prentice Hall Ins., 1976)5. Robert J. Antonacci et al., Physical Education for Life (New York: McGraw Hill

Book Co., 1969)6. J.C.P Williams, Sports Medicine (London : Adward Aronot Ltd., 1962)7. P.M Swegin et al., Physical Best Instructor Guide (Reston V.A. AAHPER, 1989)8. American Association for Health, Physical Education and Recreation,

Application of Measurement to Health and Physical Education (EnglewoodCliffs, N.J. : Prentice Hall Inc., 1967)

9. American Alliance for Health, Physical Education Recreation and Dance, HealthRelated Fitness Test Manual (Teston, V.A. : AAHPERD, 1980)

10. Earle F. Zeigler, History of Physical Education and Sports (Englewood Cliffs,N.J : Prenticer Hall Inc, 1979)

11. M.L. Kamlesh, Physical Education : Facts and Foundation (Faridabad : P.B.


Publication, 1988)12. A National Plan of Physical Education, Ministry of Education, Government of

India (New Delhi : Government of Indian press, 1956)13. Report of Kunzru Committee for Coordination and Integration of Schemes

Operating in the Field of Physical Education, Recreation, and Youth Welfare,Ministry of Education, Govt. of India (New Delhi : Government of India press,1964).

14. Report of All Indian Seminar on Physical Education for Principals of PhysicalEducation Institutions, Ministry of Education, Govt, of Indian (New Delhi:Govt, of Indian Press, 1959)

15. Report of All India Seminar on Physical Education for State Inspectors andUniversity Directors, Ministry of Education, Government of Indian (New Delhi:Govt. of Indian Press, 1959)

16. National Physical Efficiency Drive, Ministry of Education and Youth Services(Faridabad; Government of Indian Publication, 1969)

17. J.C Aggarwal and S.P.Agarwal, National Policy on Education (New DelhiConcept Publishing Company, 1988).



[email protected]





(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)


ISSN 0975-4083


The Development of Physical Fitness ThroughYoga Training

* Parixitsinh D . Mandora==========================================================Abstract- The purpose of the study was to find out the development ofphysical fitness of school children through yoga training. To achieve thepurpose of the study 60 male students were selected from Sonawala Highschool of kheda and their age ranged between 14 to 17 years. The selectedsubjects were divided into two equal groups of 30 subjects each. Onewas treated as experimental group and the other was control group. Theexperimental group was underwent the yoga training for 6 days a weekfor a duration of 6 weeks. The yoga training consists of differentyoga(asana) exercises. The session was for one hour in the evening.The pre test and post test were conducted for the both groups. AAHPERDtest was used for the measurement of physical fitness. The differencebetween the pre test and post test means of each group was calculated byapplying T- test. It was concluded that yoga training had significantimprovement in the physical fitness of experimental group than controlgroup.==========================================================

===========================* Associate Professor, Swaminarayan Arts College, Ahmedabad. Gujarat.

Affiliation for PhD Research : JJT University, Jhunjhunu, Rajasthan, India.

Introduction- Physical fitness as a term refers to the total dynamic physiologicalstate of individual. There are number of physical fitness components e.g. speed,flexibility, strength, endurance, power, agility, reaction time, cardio vascularendurance. Physical fitness is a trunk of a tree that supports many brancheswhich represent all the activities and make life worth living, intellectual life,spiritual life, occupation and social activities. It is one’s richest position; it can’tbe purchased but can be earned through a daily routine of physical exercises.Training denotes the process of preparing one for same task. Training is asystematic activity of long duration progressively to achieve the goal for anysports. Developing an individual physical fitness is one of the major objectivesof the physical education. Physical fitness is one of the potential characteristicsof every human being. Physical fit citizens are the major assets for a strongnation and hence the physical fitness of the youth should be national concern.Children’s physical fitness is of interest to educate us to improve health and


prevent diseases. Ayurved is a science of life having its roots in Vedic literatureand inheritance continued since Vedic times. Similarly yoga also finds rootsoriginating from Vedic period. Since a time immemorial yoga have proved tobe beneficial for human existence. Yoga provides an ideal and healthy life andit’s important for the overall development of health. Yogic practices gettingpopular are looked upon. It’s systematic for the improvement of physical fitnessof an individual. Yet we lack in the experimental evidence about the utility ofphysical exercise and yogic exercises for promoting physical fitness. Despitethis fact many people misunderstand yoga even in India. If we were to take across-section of society and make a general survey of the public’s opinionabout yoga we would find many misconceptions about yoga. In order to bringyoga to life and to really gain profit by it one must take it to heart in everysense of word and live it as an essential part of one’s daily life. As per Indiantradition Yoga, especially Hathayoga, comprises of different yogic exercisesviz., asana (body postures), pranayama (controlled regulation of breath),bandha (physiological locks or holds of the semi-voluntary muscles), kriyas(cleansing process), and mudras (attitude which spontaneously arousesmeditation). Yogic exercises are also becoming popular in the area of gamesand sports and also in the curriculum of Indian schools, colleges anduniversities.Yoga offers tremendous health and wellness benefits. Yoga isbecoming increasingly popular among athletes and sports enthusiasts. Yoga isa time honoured tool for integrating the physical, mental and spiritual aspectsof life. Yoga practise might in the turn benefit from the influence of otheractivities. Especially in athletics yoga can be done at a high or low intensitythat can provide a workout for best fitness.Methodology-Subject:- The study was conducted on 60 male students of sonawala school,kheda and their age ranged from 14 to 17 years. The subjects were equallydivided into one experimental group and the other was treated as control group.Data collection :- The pre-test and post-test was conducted for AAHPERDyouth physical fitness test before and after 6 weeks of yoga training programme.The difference between pre test and post test means of each group weretested by applying T- test and the level of significance was set at 0.05 level.Criterion measures

No. Variable Measurement Unit 1 Muscular strength Number of pull ups in 60 seconds 2 Abdominal muscular

strength Number of bent knee sit ups in 60 seconds

3 Agility 4*30 M Shuttle run time was taken in 1/100 seconds

4 Explosive leg strength Standing broad jump 5 Speed 50 yard run test time was taken in

1/100 seconds 6 Cardiovascular

Endurance 600 yards run time was taken in minutes and seconds

7 Seat and reach test Best result was recorded


Administration of Training- The training schedule was prepared for theexperimental group namely yoga training group. The control group was notinvolved in any training. The time for training was in the evening from 5 to 6p.m for one hour. The experimental group were underwent yoga training for 5days a week with a set of following yoga exercises.

1. Dhanurasana 5. Matsyasana2. Chakrasana 6. Ardhapadmasana3. Shavasana 7. Mayurasana4. Padmasana 8. Utkatasana

Result- The result of the study development of physical fitness through yogatraining is presented in table.

Table-1, Significance of difference between pre -test and post- testmeans of a experimental group and control group for the

development of physical fitness.No Activity Group Pre-

test Mean

Post- test

Mean

Mean difference

SD “t”- ratio

1 Pull-ups Experimental 2.25 4.38 2.04 1.25 9.57* Control 1.7 2.05 0.44 1.51 1.57

2 Bent knee seat ups

Experimental 42.78 47.05 4.33 4.2 5.65* Control 45.23 41.20 3.70 4.58 4.67*

3 Shuttle Run

Experimental 11.77 11.55 0.21 0.62 1.90 Control 11.69 12.45 0.74 0.80 4.94*

4 Standing broad jump

Experimental 1.50 1.74 0.16 0.12 6.90 Control 1.63 1.64 0.018 0.12 0.91

5 50 yard Run

experimental 8.50 8.34 0.127 0.67 1.07 Control 8.53 8.59 0.09 0.44 1.12

6 600 yard Run

Experimental 134.29 134.65 1.37 12.3 0.61 Control 143.78 139.26 4.251 12.58 0.97

7 Seat and reach test

Experimental 21.62 24 1.47 1.99 3.90 Control 24.65 23.01 1.62 2.11 4.19

Significant at 0.05 levelTable-2

Significance of difference between post test means of anExperimental group and control group for development of physical

Fitness.No Activity Post test mean Mean

ratio SD

Experimental group

Control group

1 Pull Ups 4.27 2.03 2.23 3.85* 2 Bent Knee Seat ups 47.2 41.37 4.33 5.07 3 Shuttle run 11.57 12.41 0.95 3.48 4 Standing Broad jump 1.73 1.648 0.22 1.52 5 50 yard Run 8.44 8.61 0.67 1.02 6 600 yard Run 135.65 137.26 12.23 1.14 7 Seat and reach test 23 21.02 5.89 0.01 Significant at 0.05 level


Graphical presentation of Mean difference of experimental group andcontrol group on different variables of physical fitness

Result1. The experimental group trained with Yoga training found significant

improvement as compared to control group in muscular strength ofshoulder was found through the training of yoga training.

2. The experimental group trained with yoga training was shown significantimprovement as compared to control group in abdominal muscular strengthby applying bent knee sit ups test. This significant improvement inabdominal muscular strength was due to yoga training.

3. The experimental group was shown significant differences as comparedto control group in agility by applying shuttle Run test. These differenceswere due to yoga training.

4. Explosive strength of leg of experimental group was shown improvementafter six weeks of yoga training than control group. The result showsthat the improvement in explosive strength was due to yoga training.

5. There was improvement in speed of experimental group than controlgroup after six weeks of yoga training.

6. There were no significant differences between experimental group andcontrol group on cardiovascular endurance after six week of yogatraining.

7. From the mean differences of seat and reach test it could be concludedthat there was improvement in experimental group than control groupdue to six weeks of yoga training.

Discussion- From the finding of above analysis and statistical information itshows that the yoga training shown more effective for the development ofabdominal muscular strength, muscular strength of shoulders and explosive


leg strength and flexibility than speed. When there was no effect oncardiovascular endurance. Overall statistical analysis and finding of the studyit could be concluded that there was improvement in physical fitness due toyoga training.Recommendations- Based on the result of the study, the followingrecommendations were drawn,1. It is recommended that the more studies may be conducted to verify

these results using longer period of training duration.2. It is recommended that researches also may be conducted on the

different age group.3. The similar study may be conducted on female students as subjects.4. The similar study may be conducted with large number of samples.======================References-1. Anne, Besant (2006) An introduction to Yoga Theo-sophical Digest (2nd

quarter) 18,2, p. 96.2. B K Acharya, 2010, "Effect of Pranayama (voluntary regulated breathing) and

Yogasana (yoga postures) on lipid profile in normal healthy junior footballersInternational Journal of Yoga, 3(2): P 70.

3. Clarke, H Harrison and Clarke, David H. Application of measurement to physicalEducation: New jersey: 1987.

4. Devinder K. Test and measurement, New Delhi: DVS publication,1996.5. Yogendra,Jaydeva (2001). Yoga way of life. Yoga and total Health. 8,p. 14.6. Uppal A. K. Physical Fitness How to develop. New Delhi: Friends Publication

India,1992.


Historical Study of Development of the Game ofVolleyball in Indore

* Vijay Francis Peter==========================================================Abstract- The game of volleyball originated in U.S.A. but it developedrapidly in other countries like Japan. USSR, Poland and India . In India,first it introduced in the earlier part of the twentieth century by H. C.Buck in Y M. C. A. Madras. Indore District Amture Volleyball Associationwas formed in 1942 but came into existence in the year 1976. Themanagement of the association is looking after by the past players. Rapidlygrowth of the number of clubs affiliated with the I.D.A.V. A. Quantity ofNational produced by the Indore Volleyball association are very high.The promotion schemes to identify talent and organized coaching campsfound to be inadequate presently.==========================================================

===========================* School of Physical Education, Devi Ahilya Vishwavidyalaya, Indore (M.P.)

Introduction- The game of Volleyball was invented in 1895 by Mr. William G.Morgan, a Physical Director of the College of Physical Education, run by,Y.M.C.A.at Holyoke, Massachusetts, U.S.A. He named it minttonete, gamein the beginning and later on Dr. A. T. Halsted of Springfield c its name tovolleyball, as then the basic idea of play was to volley the ball back and forth,over the net. Volleyball is a game played on a rectangular court not exceeding18 meter in length and 9 meter in which. used by , team having six players toa side by volleyball a large inflated ball with the hands over net 8 feet high. Itis one of the best games and ranks first in the world in popularity. The gameoffers opportunities for the development of strength, endurance, speed, agilityand neuromuscular skills and coordination of all parts of the body. The defensecalls for quick thinking and immediate action. In India the game of volleyballwas introduced by Y. M. C. A. Madras in early parts of the twentieth century.It was taken to the schools, colleges, universities and private clubs by thetrained physical education. In the year 195 1, volleyball federation of Indiawas formed. The founder president and secretary were principal F. C. Aroraand the late Mr. S. K. Basu. Volleyball federation of India controls volleyballgame in the India and Delhi, Tamilnadu, Kerala, Andhra Pradesh, Servicesand Railways have contributed in producing international players and havewon maximum number of championships. Jimniy George, Balwant Singh Ballu


“ are the recipients of Arjuna Award. Indian Volleyball teams have touredU.S.S.R., Japan .Indonesia, Thailand. Ce\ 7 lon. China and France in the variouscompetitions and test matches . A number of test matches and exhibitionmatches have been planed in India upto 1970 the standard of the game wasquite good but due to dissension in the Federations the standard is deterioratinggradtiativ and India could not participate in the sixth Asian game in 1970.There is no dearth of talent facilities in India. For a long time, the play ofvolleyball was confined to Holyke in the gymnasium where Morgan was thechieftain. Folks watched the play and in time the game was taken up at Springfield and other Massachusetts and New England cities. Dr. A. T. Halsted ofSpringfield after watching, play at the new sports suggested that its name bechanged to volleyball. since the basic idea of lay was to volley the, ball backand forth. over the net. Eventually, volleyball game was stretched out from thegymnasium to the outdoor courts and beaches. Then the amazing growth inthe popularity stared. Youngster .generally were chief among the pioneer outdoorplayers but in time, adults saw that volleyball rightly played could result in agame with thrilling possibilities. As time want on the number of courts had tobe increased to accommodate the increasing army of players. By 1922numerous courts were installed by municipal and school authorities. And in thesame year a national championship was arranged by Y. M. C. A. volleyballgame by both the sexes. After the World war, 11. the game had been adoptedby many countries. American soldiers at play added to the popularity of thesports among foreigners. It is neighborhood 5,000,000 since it is one gamethat can be played by youngsters prior to their teams, in to the teens, and forforty to fifty year after. The men conspicuously. Identified with the sport,wrote a new rules book. In 1022 the Y. M. C. A. conducted a tournament todetermine the national, championship, with the Pittsburgh central Y. M. C. A.the inner. Volleyball is recognized as an international game . Representativesof 106 countries assembled at the time of Olympic games in 1936 at Berlin anda controlling body named the Imitational Volleyball Association was formed in1947 with its headquarters at Paris (France). The first President was Mr. PaulLibaud, Paris (France). The very first world volleyball championship was heldin 1947 at Prague, when twelve countries participated. Russians were the firstrecipients of the trophy defeating Czechoslovakia in the final Since 1964 (TokyoOlympics) volleyball has become Olympic game for both men and women.The first Asian championship was held in the year 1955 at Tokyo and Indiaconquered the title and Japan finished second. Asian championship has nowbecome the integral part of the Asian game.Methodology- The procedure adopted for this study was invariably based onthe following method used for collecting the data.(1) Selected reading from texts. Periodicals articles, reports of volleyball

association of Indore and sports boards.


(2) Interviews(3) Self made questionnaire

Authors make self-made in this a containing number of easily andquickly answerable questions. Though some of them were very lengthy werecarefully prepared to seek all possible relevant information on the problemfrom the respondents. The questionnaire administered and to be responded isas follow. Questionnaire was sent to the presidents secretary and treasurer ofthe volleyball association of Indore to find Out the background of the formationthe District Amture volleyball association of Indore.Conclusion- The game of volleyball originated in U. S. A. but it developedrapidly in other countries like Japan. USSR, Poland and India . In India, first itintroduced in the earlier part of the twentieth century by H. C. Buck in Y M.C. A. Madras. Indore District Amture Volleyball Association was formed in1942 but came into existence in the year 1976. The management of theassociation is looking after by the past players. Rapidly growth of the numberof clubs affiliated with the I. D. A. V. A. Quantity of National produced by theIndore Volleyball association are very high. The promotion schemes to identifytalent and organized coaching camps found to be inadequate presently.======================References-1. Arlett John, The Oxford Companion to Sports and Games, Oxford University

Press, London , New York , Toronto 1975.2. Bown and Rowland, "Cricket: A History of its Growth and Development

Throughout the World".3. Dhanraj Hubert V., Volleyball for Men and Women ., Y. M. C. A. Publishing

House, Massev Hall, Jai Sinp h Road , New Delhi-1, 1969.4. Sotir Nicolas , Winning Volleyball , translated by, John D. Syel-, National Ltd.,

published in Great Britain , July 1973.5. David Manual Raj. "The Origin and Historical Development of Silambam

Fencing An Ancient Self Defense Sports of India" Dissertation AbstractsInternational (November 1977).

6. Sovenir, Pro-Olympics Asia Zone Volleyball Games for Men and Women atNew Delhi in 1963 published by Delhi Volleyball Association, 1963.


Psychological Wel l-beingA Study of P.T.C. and B. Ed. College Students

* Jignesh P. Panchal==========================================================Abstract- The purpose of the present study was to investigate the impactof sex, type of faculty and residential status of students on PsychologicalWell-being. The sample for the study comprised of 120 male and 120female college student from Anand city selected from various P.T.C. andB. Ed. colleges. Personal data sheet and Bhogle and Prakash (1995),Psychological Well-being scale were used to collect the required data.A2x2x2 factorial design was planned where type of faculty, sex andresidential status were considered as independent variables andPsychological Well-being as dependent variables. Accordingly data wereanalysed with 2x2x2 ANOVA. Results revealed no significant differencebetween the male and female students. There was higher level ofPsychological Well-being among the students of B. Ed. stream and studentsresiding at their homes as compared to the students of P.T.C. stream andstudents residing at hostels respectively.==========================================================

===========================* Ph.D. Student, Singhania University, Rajasthan

Introduction- Colleges are institutions or organizations which prepare studentsfor the degree. In some cases, colleges prepare students for the degree of auniversity of which the college is a part, in other cases, colleges are independentinstitutions which prepare students to sit as external candidates at otheruniversities or have authority to run courses that lead to the degrees of thoseuniversities. In general use, a college is an institution between secondary schooland university. Nowadays we find a completely different scenario among themale and the female college going students. They are surrounded by manykinds of problems, not only in relation to the extremely high pace of the ongoingcompetition but also many social and personal problems causing not physicalbut also psychological weakness. The psychological well being of the studentsget affected in such relations and situations. Psychological well-being indicatesphysical and mental wellness. Sinha (1990) has stated that psychological well-being is difficult to define. It has been taken to consist of discomfort or desirabilityand from any disturbance of mental functions. It is a somewhat malleableconcept which has to do with people’s feelings about everyday life activities.


Such feelings may range from negative mental states or psychological strainssuch as anxiety, depression, frustration, emotional exhaustion unhappiness,dissatisfaction to a state which has been identified as positive mental health(Jahoda, 1958; Warr, 1978). A research in psychological well-being of collegestudents has gained momentum since a long time. Studies on indicators ofpsychological well-being demonstrate greater anxiety (Dhillon and Jasra, 1992)and depression (Venkoba Rao, 1989; Mathur and Sen, 1989; Baum and Boxley,1983), Lower life satisfaction (Chadha, 1991; Bhardwaj, Sen and Mathur, 1991),and more adjustment problems among the male and female college studentsboth. (Singh, Singh and Dawra, 1983; Chandrika and Ananthraman, 1982).Aims of the study:1. To study the difference in psychological well-being of P.T.C. and B. Ed.

college students.2. To find out the difference in the psychological well-being of Male and

Female college students.3. To study the difference in psychological well-being among the Hostel

and Home residential college students.Method-Sample - Sample in this study consisted of 240 subjects, 120 P.T.C. and 120B. Ed. College students from Anand city. These college students in the samplewere selected from various P.T.C. and B. Ed. college of Anand city. Bothmale and female students consisted of 60 Male and 60 Female students eachhaving 30 hostel students and 30 home residing students.Measures :1. Personal Data Sheet- A personal data sheet developed by theinvestigator was used to collect information about Type of Faculty P.T.C. andB. Ed., Sex and residential status.2. Psychological well-being Scale- Psychological well-being scaledeveloped by Bhogle and Prakash (1995), was used to measure Psychologicalwell-being. The questionnaire contains 28 items with true and false responsealternative. It covers 13 dimensions of psychological well-being. The maximumpossible score is twenty eight and minimum is zero. High score indicates highlevel of psychological well-being. The test - retest reliability coefficient is 0.72and internal consistency coefficient is 0.84. The author has reported satisfactoryvalidity of the questionnaire.Result and Discussion-

Table No. 1, Means and difference of mean on psychological well-being of students.Independent Variable N Mean Difference of Mean A1 (P.T.C.) 120 20.23 1.25 A2 (B. Ed.) 120 21.48 B1 (Female) 120 20.73 0.25 B2 (Male) 120 20.98 C1 (Hostel) 120 18.69 4.33 C2 (Home) 120 23.02


Table No. 2Summary of the 2x2x2 analysis of variance based on psychological well-being of

P.T.C. and B. Ed. students with respect to types of faculty. Sex and residentialstatus(N=240)

Source of Variation Sum of Square df Mean Sum of Square F A (Types of faculty) 95.00 1 95.00 13.41** B (Sex) 4.00 1 4.00 0.57 C (Residence) 1122.34 1 1122.34 158.37** A x B 124.70 1 124.70 17.60** A x C 59.00 1 59.00 8.33** B x C 10.84 1 10.84 1.53 A x B x C 19.84 1 19.84 2.80 SSW 1644.17 232 7.09 SST 3079.90 239

NS = Not Significant, ** p < 0.01From table No. 1 it can be seen that the mean scores of psychological

well-being of male and female college students of P.T.C. and B. Ed. streamsare 20.23 and 21.48 respectively. The difference between them is 1.25. Fromthe results it can be calculated that science students have more psychologicalwell being than the P.T.C. students. According to Table No. 2 that ‘F’ value ofpsychological well-being of male and female students of P.T.C. and B. Ed.faculties were 13.41, which shows significant difference at the level of 0.01.

Table No. 2 shows that ‘F’ value of psychological well-being of maleand female students residing in hostels and at homes is 158.37, which showssignificant difference at the level of 0.01. Table No. 1 indicates that meanscores of psychological well-being among the male and female students residingat hostels and at homes are 18.69 and 23.02 respectively. The differencebetween the mean score of psychological well-being of the hostel studentsand students living at homes is 4.33 which shows psychological well-being ismore in the students residing at homes.

From Table No. 2 it can be observed that ‘F’ values obtained from fourinteractions AxB and AxC was significant and the BxC but AxBxC are notsignificant. Thus, it can be said that the type of faculty, sex and regidance, andtheir interaction with one another do not affect psychological well-being.======================References-1. Suvera, P. S.,(2001). Religious behavior, death anxiety and psychological

well-being: A comparative study of institutionalized and non-institutionalized aged, Unpublished M.Phil. Thesis, SaurashtraUniversity, Rajkot.

2. Patel, K. S. (2008). A study of psychological well-being and Death anxietyamong Institutionalized and non-institutionalized aged, Unpublished M.Phil. Thesis, Sardar Patel University, Vallabh Vidhyanagar.


3. Warr, P. B. (1978). A study of psychological well-being. British Journalof Psychology, Vol.69, PP.111-121.

4. Singh, J. G., Singh, S., and Dawara, V. (1983). Adjustment problem ofold people. Indian Journal of Clinical Psychology, Vol.10(1), PP.127-131.

5. Sinha, D. (1990). Concept of psychosocial well-being: Western and Indianperspectives. NIMHANS Journal, Vol.8, PP.1-11

6. Venkoba Rao., A. (1989). Psychiatry of old age in India, Ahmedabad/Bombay: Torrent Laboratories/Sun Pharmaceuticals.

7. Bhogle, S. and Jay Prakash, I. (1995), Development of the psychologicalwell-being questionnaire, Journal of Personality and Clinical studies, Vol.11(1&2), PP.5-9.

8. Mathur, D., and Sen, A. (1989). Depression in elderly and some of itspsychological concomitants: A study of efficacy of the age-care centre.Indian Journal of Community Guidance Service, Vol.16, PP.27-39.

9. Chandrika, P., and Ananthraman, R. N. (1982). Life changes andadjustment in old age. Journal of Psychological Researches, Vol.26,PP.137-141.

10. Dhillon, P. K. and Jasra, A. (1992). Personality, anxiety and self-concept:A study across age variation and social class. In P. K. Dhillon (Eds.)Psychological aspects of aging in India (PP.119-136). New Delhi: ConceptPublishing.

11. Jahoda, M. (1958). Current concepts of positive mental health. NewYork: Basic Books.

12. Douglas, C. K., (1980). Adulthood and ageing, Canada. Johan Wileyand sons.


Antibacterial activities of Calotropis procera Linn

*Abhilasha Shrivastava**Suchita Singh, ***Sanchita Singh

==========================================================Abstract- Methanol and aqueous extracts of leaves of Calotropis proceraLinn. were subjected to the antibacterial activities. For antibacterialactivities test, the extract was subjected to its effectiveness against Gram-positive and Gram- negative bacteria in agar diffusion method. The zonesof inhibition produced by the crude methanol and aqueous extract againstfew sensitive strains were measured and compared with those of standardantibiotic Gentamycin. It is evident that both extracts are active againstthe bacteria at low concentrations.Key words- Antibacterial, Calotropis procera Linn.==========================================================

===========================* Department of Biotechnology, Science College Rewa (M.P.)** Department of Biotechnology, A.P.S. University Rewa (M.P.)*** Department of Biotechnology, A.P.S. University Rewa (M.P.)

Introduction- Medicinal plants are usually used for Ayurvedic, Unani andother treatments in rural areas. Calotropis procera Linn. Commonly knownas Arka, is an important medicinal plant both for Ayurveda and traditionalscience of ethnomedicine. Arka was found sculptured on Shiva temple [Gupta1996] symbolizing mythological and the medicinal importance enjoyed by theplant. The number of plants with medicinal properties included in the MateriaMedica of traditional medicine in this sub continental present stands at about2000 [Chopra, J. et.al 1958]. Calotropis procera Linn. A wild growing plantof family Ascelepiadaecae. Different parts of the plants have been used inIndian traditional system of medicine for treatment of leprosy, ulcers, tumors,piles and disease of spleen, liver and abdomen [Kirtikar. et.al 1935].Phytochemical studies of Calotropis procera have afforded several types ofcompounds such as Cardenolide, triterpinoids, alkaloids, resins and proteolyticenzymes in latex, flavonoids, tannins, sterol [Ajay k. Yadav et.al 2010]. Theroot of the Calotropis procera Linn. is used by various tribes of Central Indiaas a curative agent for jaundice [Kumar VL et.al 2006]. So, the present workwas designated to investigate the antibacterial activities of Calotropis proceraLinn. to know the scientific basis of the traditional use of this plant.Materials and Method-


Plant Materials-Fresh leaves of Calotropis procera Linn. were collected from Lucknow.

The dried leaves of Calotropis procera Linn. were ground into fine powderwith the help of grinder. About 400gm of powdered material was extracted bysoxhlet apparatus with 90% methanol at 550C temperature. The extract thusobtained was concentrated by using a rotary evaporator to get a viscous mass.The viscous mass was then kept at room temperature under a ceiling fan toget a dried extract (about 16% yield). The extract thus obtained was used forpharmacological screening.Determination of Antibacterial Activities-

Nutrient agar media was prepared by adding water to a dehydratedproduct that contains all the ingredients. Practically all media are availablecommercially in powdered form [Pelczar, M. J. et.al 1993].

Three types of discs were prepared for antibacterial screening: one gramsample extracts was dissolved in 10ml of ethanol to prepare sample solution,0.03gm/10ml gentamicin standard disc used as positive control to ensure theactivity of standard antibiotic against the test organisms as well as for comparisonof the response produced by known antibacterial agent with that produced bytest samples, and third one was a blank sample (only ethanol) which was usedas a negative control to ensure that the residual solvents was not active. Specificorganisms were inoculated into previously sterilized nutrient agar media, mixedthoroughly and transferred immediately to the sterile petridish in an asepticcondition. It was stored in an incubator for about 24 hours to allow the propergrowth of microbes. Prepared sample solutions were applied to thecorresponding holes with the help of a micropipette. The plates were thenallowed to stand to diffuse the sample solution into the antibiotic medium atroom temperature for 2 hours. The plates were then incubated at 370C forovernight. After proper incubation, clear zones of inhibition around the point ofapplication of sample solution were formed. These inhibition zones weremeasured by slide calipers and expressed in millimetre [Bauer, A. W. et. al2006].Result-For Antibacterial Test-

The results of the antibacterial activity measured in terms of diameterof zone of inhibition in mm. Antibiotic discs of Gentamycin was used as standardcomparison purpose methanol and aqueous extract showed antibacterial activityagainst gram positive and gram negative bacteria. Aqueous extract showedhigher antibacterial activities than methanol extract.

Table 1:Antibacterial activity of methanol and aqueous extract of leaves of

Calotropis procera.


Diameter zone of inhibition in mm

Name of bacteria Gentamycin

Methanol extract

Aqueous extract (500µg/ml)

(30µg/ml) (500µg/ml)

Gram positive bacteria Staphylococcus aureus 21 8

9

Staphylococcus epidermidis

18 8 11

Staphylococcus saprophyticus

30 -

21

Staphylococcus pyogenes

21 -

9

Gram negative bacteria Plesiomonas shigelloides 14 5

6

Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27 -

10

Salmonella typhi 30 -

-

Shigella boydii 22 -

-

Shigella dysenteriae 24 8

10

Shigella flexneri 21 -

10

Shigella sonnei 24 -

9

Vibrio cholera 27 8 9

(-) represents No inhibition

Discussions- Crude methanol extract showed antibacterial activity againstS. aureus, S. epidermidis, P. Shigelloides, S. dysenteriae and Vibrio cholera.Aqueous extract of Calotropis procera showed antibacterial activity againstS. aureus, S. epidermidis, S. saprophyticus, S. pyogenes, P. Shigelloides, S.dysenteriae, V. Cholera, S. flexneri, S. sonnei and P. aeruginosa. S. typhi andS. boydii didnot show any activities against methanol and aqueous extract ofCalotropis procera. Both methanol and aqueous extract of Calotropis procerashown significant antibacterial activity against few gram positive and gramnegative bacterial strains. So, further toxicological study is required to establishthe therapeutic uses of the plant with its active principles.======================References-1. Ajay, K. Yadav, et.al / Drug Invention Today (2010). 2 (2), 185-190.2. Anil, Ku. Sharma, Rajeev, Kharb, and Rajandeep kaur (2011). Pharmacognostical


aspects of CALOTROPIS PROCERA (Ait) R. Br. International Journal of Parmaand Biosciences; ISSN 0975-6299; vol 2/ Issue 3.

3. Bauer, A.W, W.M.M, Kirby, J.C, Sherris and M.Turck (1996). Antibioticsusceptibility testing by a standardized single disc method. Am. J. Clin. Pathola,45:493 -496.

4. Chopra, J. and S. Rajasekharan (1958). Indian Pharmacological Aspects, 55:87-85.

5. Gupta, S.M. (1996). Plants in Indian temple art, B R Publications, New Delhi.6. Kirtikar, K.R. and B.D. Basu (1935). Indian medicinal Plants, PP; 16067. Kumar VL, Arya S. (2006). Medicinal uses and Pharmacological properties of

Calotropis Procera. Recent progress in Medicinal Plants, 373-388.8. Pelczar M.J., J.R.Chan, E.C.S. Noel and K.R. Krieg (1993). Microbiology fifth

edition Tata Mc Graw- Hill Publishing Company Ltd. New Delhi. PP 103-105,510-539.

ISSN 0975-4083






[email protected]








Concept of Sustainable Development forConservation of Environment

* Madhu Sthapak==========================================================Abstract- Sustainable development is the concept of needs and limitationsimposed by technology and society on the environment's ability to meetthe present and future needs. World Commission on Environment andDevelopment (WCED) has defined sustainable development as "a processof change in which the exploitation of resources, the direction ofinvestments. The orientation of technological development andinstitutional change are all in harmony and enhance both current andfuture potential to meet human needs and aspirations." Thus. The conceptof sustainable development provides a framework for the integration ofenvironmental policies and development strategies having implicationsat international, national, regional and local levels. Development shouldnot endanger the natural systems that support life on earth. Many peoplein the in the industrial world today operate with the frontier mentality,which is a human centred view based on the three erroneous basicideas:The world has an unlimited supply of resources for human use;Humans are apart from nature, and Nature is something to overcome.==========================================================

===========================* Professor of Botany, Government Arts and Commerce College, Sagar (M.P.)

Introduction- With this attitude towards nature, technological advancesincrease our ability to use earth’s resources and thus, increase the damage.However. The realization is growing fast that we are in a world of limits, andever-increasing growth of material consumption can only damage, the life-giving physical components of the environment. Hence, the concept ofsustainable development leads us to new resource consumption strategies whichare:• Conservation or reduction of excessive resource use.• Recycling and reuse of materials and• More use of renewable resources like solar energy rather non-renewable

resources such as oil and coal.Sustainable development also requires meeting the basic needs of all

deprived people in this world and extending to all, the opportunities to satisfytheir aspirations for a better life. Otherwise the world, in which poverty and


inequity are endemic, will always, be prone to ecological and other crisis. InGandhiji’s words, “Earth provides enough to satisfy every man’s need but notany man’s greed”.1. Frontier society or nlentaliry :- Humans are supreme and apart from not

are2. Sustainable Society :- Conservation, recycling and reuse of earth’s

resources3. Promotion of common interests :- There is need for economic and social

justice within and amongst nationSustainable development refers to a mode of human development in whichresource use aims to meet human needs while ensuring the sustainability ofnatural systems and the environment, so that these needs can be met not onlyin the present, but also for generations to come. The term ‘sustainabledevelopment’ was used by the Brundtland Commission, which coined whathas become the most often-quoted definition of sustainable development:“development that meets the needs of the present without compromising theability of future generations to meet their own needs.”A sustainable systemgenerally can be defined in environmental terminology as “a living systemwhich operates in a way that it does not use up resources more quickly thanthey can be naturally replenished; a sustainable economic system operates ina way so that expenditures are either equal or less than the income.” Sustainablesocial systems maintain that all members are allowed to contribute, therebysynthesizing the final product Sustainable development ties together concernfor the carrying capacity of natural systems with the social challenges facedby humanity. As early as the 1970s, “sustainability” was employed to describean economy “in equilibrium with basic ecological support systems.”Ecologistshave pointed to The Limits to Growth, and presented the alternative of a“steady state economy” in order to address environmental concerns. Theconcept of sustainable development has in the past most often been brokenout into three constituent parts: environmental sustainability, economicsustainability and sociopolitical sustainability. More recently, it has beensuggested that a more consistent analytical breakdown is to distinguish fourdomains of economic, ecological, political and cultural sustainability. This isconsistent with the UCLG move to make ‘culture’ the fourth domain ofsustainability Environmental sustainability is the process of making sure currentprocesses of interaction with the environment are pursued with the idea ofkeeping the environment as pristine as naturally possible based on ideal-seekingbehavior. Thus, environmental sustainability demands that society designsactivities to meet human needs while indefinitely preserving the life supportsystems of the planet. This, for example, entails using water sustainably, onlyutilizing renewable energy, and sustainable material supplies (e.g. harvestingwood from forests at a rate that maintains the biomass and biodiversity). An


“unsustainable situation” occurs when natural capital (the sum total of nature’sresources) is used up faster than it can be replenished. Sustainability requiresthat human activity only uses nature’s resources at a rate at which they can bereplenished naturally. Inherently the concept of sustainable development isintertwined with the concept of carrying capacity. Theoretically, the long-termresult of environmental degradation is the inability to sustain human life. Suchdegradation on a global scale could imply extinction for humanity.

Environmental sustainability is the “long-term maintenance of ecosystemcomponents and functions for future generations.” In addition, environmentalsustainability is the process of making sure current processes of interactionwith the environment are pursued with the idea of keeping the environment asunspoiled as naturally possible. It maintains that the Earth’s resources mustnot be depleted faster than they can naturally be replenished. Depletion of ourfinite resources inevitably tries the ability of human civilizations to persistEnvironmental sustainability organizations:Bioneers- Working to preserve biological and cultural diversityCenter for a New American Dream- New American Dream helpsAmericans consume responsibly to protect the environment, enhance qualityof life, and promote social justice.Climate Leadership Initiative- Help government, business, and communitiesadopt sustainability-based thinking, policies, and programs.Climate Solutions- Promotes a regional approach to global warming solutionsFriends of the Earth (FOE)- FOE is a national environmental organizationdedicated to preserving the health and diversity of the planet for futuregenerationsInternational Institute for Environmental Development (IIED)-Promotes sustainable patterns of world development through collaborativeresearch, policy studies, networking and knowledge dissemination.International Union for the Conservation of Nature (IUCN)- Seeks toconserve the integrity and diversity of nature and to ensure that any use ofnatural resources is equitable and ecologically sustainable.Northwest Earth Institute- A pioneer in taking earth-centered educationprograms to people where they spend their time-in their neighborhoods,workplaces, homes, schools, and centers of faith.Pacific Northwest Pollution Prevention Resource Center (PPRC)- TheNorthwest’s leading resource for promoting a cleaner environment throughpollution prevention. PPRC provides high quality, unbiased information, facilitatesinformation exchange, and catalyzes pollution prevention projects.Renewable Energy Policy Project (REPP)- Supports the advancement ofrenewable energy technology through policy research.

Sustainability organizations seek to implement sustainability strategieswhich provide them with economic and cultural benefits attained through


environmental responsibility. Recently, the natural environment has become akey strategic issue in both the business and academic communities. Through“implementing sustainability strategies, firms can integrate long-run profitabilitywith their efforts to protect the ecosystem, providing them with opportunitiesto achieve the traditional competitive advantages of & cost leadership andmarket differentiation via environmental responsibility”. Sustainability strategieshave been persistently employed in a number of organizations.Environmental sustainability is the process of making sure current processesof interaction with the environment are pursued with the idea of keeping theenvironment as pristine as naturally possible based on ideal-seeking behavior.Thus, environmental sustainability demands that society designs activities tomeet human needs while indefinitely preserving the life support systems of theplanet. This, for example, entails using water sustainably, only utilizing renewableenergy, and sustainable material supplies (e.g. harvesting wood from forestsat a rate that maintains the biomass and biodiversity).An “unsustainable situation” occurs when natural capital (the sum total ofnature’s resources) is used up faster than it can be replenished. Sustainabilityrequires that human activity only uses nature’s resources at a rate at whichthey can be replenished naturally. Inherently the concept of sustainabledevelopment is intertwined with the concept of carrying capacity. Theoretically,the long-term result of environmental degradation is the inability to sustainhuman life. Such degradation on a global scale could imply extinction forhumanity.

Consumption of renewable resources

State of environment Sustainability

More than nature's ability to replenish

Environmental degradation Not sustainable

Equal to nature's ability to replenish

Environmental equilibrium Steady state economy

Less than nature's ability to replenish

Environmental renewal Environmentally sustainable

Environmental issues are harmful aspects of human activity on the biophysicalenvironment. Environmentalism, a social and environmental movement thatstarted in the 1960s, addresses environmental issues through advocacy,education and activism. Current problems faced by the environment-

The carbon dioxide equivalent of greenhouse gases (GHG) in theatmosphere has already exceeded 400 parts per million (NOAA) (with total“long-term” GHG exceeding 455 parts per million). (Intergovernmental Panelon Climate Change Report) This level is considered a tipping point. “The amountof greenhouse gas in the atmosphere is already above the threshold that canpotentially cause dangerous climate change. We are already at risk...It’s notnext year or next decade, it’s now.” Report from the UN Office for theCoordination of Humanitarian Affairs (OCHA): Non-hydroelectric renewable


energy refers to electricity supplied from the following renewable sources ofpower: solar, geothermal, biomass, landfill gas, and wind. Although installationof these renewable energy resources is growing, non-hydro renewable energyis currently responsible for less than two percent of the electricity generationin the United States.

Air emissions associated with generating electricity from solar,geothermal, and wind technologies are negligible because no fuels are combustedin these processes. The average air emissions rates in the United States fromnon-hydro renewable energy generation are 1.22lbs/MWh of sulfur dioxideand 0.06 lbs/MWh of nitrogen oxides.Conclusion- Hence, the concept of sustainable development leads us to newresource consumption strategies which are: Conservation or reduction ofexcessive resource use. Recycling and reuse of materials and more use ofrenewable resources like solar energy rather non-renewable resources suchas oil and coal. Sustainable development also requires meeting the basic needsof all deprived people in this world and extending to all, the opportunities tosatisfy their aspirations for a better life. Otherwise the world, in which povertyand inequity are endemic, will always, be prone to ecological and other crisis.In Gandhiji’s words, “Earth provides enough to satisfy every man’s need butnot any man’s greed”======================References-1. Stead, W.E. & J.G. Stead (1995)”An Empirical Investigation of Sustainability

Strategy Implementation in Industrial Organizations.” Research in CorporateSocial Performance and Policy, Supplement 1, pp. 43-66

2. “Green Building Pages” accessed 18 November 2010.3. van Marrewijk, M. and M. Werre (2003) “Multiple Levels of Corporate

Sustainability.” Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 44, no. 2/3, CorporateConference 2002: The Impact of CSR on Management Disciplines (May, 2003),pp. 107-119

4. Rod Macrae, “Ecological Agriculture Projects”, 19905. Rod Macrae, “Ecological Agriculture Projects”, 19906. 2002 Green Building Pages. All rights reserved.,”Green Building Pages”7. 2002 Green Building Pages. All rights reserved.,”Green Building Pages”8. “United Nations General Assembly (1987) Report of the World Commission on

Environment and Development: Our Common Future. Transmitted to the GeneralAssembly as an Annex to document A/42/427 - Development and InternationalCo-operation: Environment. Retrieved on: 2009-02-15.

9. Anderson, D. R. (2006). “The critical importance of sustainability riskmanagement.” Risk Management. Vol. 53, no. 4.

10. “United Nations General Assembly (1987) Report of the World Commission onEnvironment and Development: Our Common Future. Transmitted to the GeneralAssembly as an Annex to document A/42/427 - Development and InternationalCo-operation: Environment. Retrieved on: 2009-02-15.

11. Anderson, D. R. (2006). “The critical importance of sustainability risk


management.” Risk Management. Vol. 53, no. 4.12. Rennie, E. (2008). “Growing Green, Boosting the bottom line with sustainable

business practices.” APICS Magazine. Vol. 18, no. 2.13. “Sustainable Business Movement,” accessed 18 November 2010.,14. “Sustainable Community Initiatives,” accessed 18 November 2010.





[email protected]








Transferrin Polymophism in Channa Punctatus

* Umesh Shukla==========================================================Abstract- Agar and starch gel electrophoresis have shown great poetentialin discerning populations through identifications of hemoglobin, musclemyogen and transferrins. The later protein is an iron binding -globulinwhich can be located in electrophorograms either by autoradiographyor specific staining reagents. Using transferrins as the marker, populationstudies have been made on several fish species, including cod, eel andtunas. Transferrin polymorphism have also been reported to occur insera of several freshwater fishes. In this account, we report transferrinphenotypes of Channa punctatus.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant Professor, Department of Zoology, Agra College, Agra (U.P.)

In all 151 fish were analysed; 86 from Rewa and 65 from Sidhi, MadhyaPradesh. Sera were obtained from blood clots of individual fish which werebled by severing the caudal peduncle. A few crystals of ferric ammoniumsulfate were added to sera gels were made and electroporetized essentially inthe system of Davis. Transferrin bands were visualized as faint green bandsby soaking the gels in hydroxilamine hydrochloride and nitroso R regent system.Sera showed the existence of transferrin groups. The comparison of theirrelative mobilities shows the observed groups are the combination of at least 3transferrin zones. The fastest has been designated AA and the next as BB.The slower-most transferrin CC could not be observed, but on the basis of theexistence of BC occurrence as a population unit in other localities can bepredicted.

Table-1, Genotype composition and gene frequencies of ChannaPunctatus transferrins as compared to the Hardy-Weinberg proportions

Collection

site

No. of

samples

analysed

Phenotypes Alleles

AA BB CC AB BC X2 TA TB TC

Rewa

(M.P.) 86

Obs.

Exp.

36.0

37.8

6.0

9.08

0.0

0.01

42.0

37.0

2.0

0.61 5.052 0.662 0.325 0.011

Sindhi

(M.P.) 65

Obs.

Exp.

30.0

28.4

6.0

6.44

0.0

0.03

26.0

27.0

3.0

0.94 4.673 0.661 0.315 0.023


Obs. – Observed; Exp. Expected.Assuming the genetic control by three codominant alleles, and applying

the Hardy-Weinberg law, the distribution of genotype in the sample wascalculated (Table I). The observed values of TA, TB are in agreement withthose calcuated on the basis of Hardy-Weinberg principle and equilibrium existedin the case of their heterozygote TAB also. In the case of BC heterozygote, thecalculated value shows difference with that of the observed. This fact and thedifference with that of the observed. This fact and the apparent failure todetect C genotype may indicate the extremely low representation of this groupof transferrin in this area. The excess of dificiencies in heterozygotes mayoccur owing to differential fertility, viability or changes in composition ofpopulation on account of new recruitment or loss of fish through migration toother ponds. It should be expected in this case, since the composition ofpopulation in perennial ponds may change during monsoon months whenconnections are made with other water sources which would disturb theequilibrium. The detection of transferrin polymorphism even in such a smallsample as the one investigated is of interest. The occurrence of more than onetransferrins in sera of this species indicates that like other fish species themarker exists in multiple forms and that the higher extent of polymorphism isnot confined to marine fishes. Since individual difference are not discernibleon the basis of morphometric character, the study suggests the importance ofusing transferrin as the index of variations in population units.======================References-1. Manwell, C. and Baker, C. M. A. (1970), in Molecular Biology and Origin of

Species : Heterosis, Protein Polymorphism and Animal Breeding, Sidgwickand Jackson, London, p. 100.

2. Tsuyuki, H. and Robberts, E. (1969), J. Fish. Res. Bd. Canada, 26, 2633.3. de Ligny, W. (1968), Proc. 11th European Conference on Animal Groups and

Bichemical Plymorphism, P.W.N., Wara, pp. 527.4. Giblett, E.R., Hickman (1959), C.G. and Smithies, O., Nature, p 1589.5. Nyman, L. and Westin (1969), L., Rept. Inst. Freshwater Res., Drottingholm,

49, 165.6. Blumberg, B.S. (1960), Proc. Soc. Biol. Med., 104, 25.7. Moller, D. (1966), Nature, 212, 824.8. Drilhon, A., Find, J. Boffa, G., Amouch, P. and Drouhet (1966), J. Compt. Rend.

Acad. Sci., Paris, 262, 1315.9. Barrett, I. and Tsuyuki (1967), H., Copeia, 3, 551.10. Fujino, K. and Kang, T. (1968), Genetics, 39, 79.11. Kirpichnikov, V.S. (1973), In Genetics and Mutagenesis of Fish, ed. J. H.

Schroeder, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, p. 223.12. Davis, B.J. Ann. N.Y. (1964), Acad., Sci., 121, 404.


Pond Fish Culture in Rural areas of Bhopal District

*Chourey Pratibha, **Durga Meena,***Geeta Saxcena, ****Alok Verma

===========================* Research Scholar, Government Science and Commerce College, Benazir,

Bhopal (M.P.)** Research Scholar, Government Science and Commerce College, Benazir,

Bhopal (M.P.)*** Head, Department of Zoology, Insititute of Excellence Higher Education

College, Bhopal(M.P.)**** Department of Zoology,Raja Bhoj Govt.College,Mandideep(M.P.)

==========================================================Abstract- Present study highlights the development of pond fish culturethrough the grassroots level. The study was conducted in rural area ofBhopal. The result of the study reveals that, Management and culturalfactors affected pond fish production. The study also indicated that higherproduction could be achieved by to implementation some techniques,which are discuses in this paper.Key-Words- Pond fish culture, management practices.==========================================================Introduction-Bhopal city is capital of M.P. is known as “city of Lakes” owingto the occurrences of large no. of water bodies situated in and around the city.At Present, 5906 ha. Water areas available in Bhopal district and the total fishproduction of 2011-2012 are 810.10 tones. Pond fish culture can generateincome and employment in rural areas of Bhopal and improve the quality oflife of the rural poor. Fish culture in ponds is an old profession with earliestpractices going back to prehistoric time. Pond fish culture is being promotedwidely in Asia, Africa and Central America as a method of improving thenutritional levels of present and future population. Objective of the study:-• Study of fish culture practices in rural areas of Bhopal.• Analysis the factors, which are affecting fish production.• Analysis, how to increase fish production in study areas.Methodology- The field study was conducted in 4 ponds which are situatedin rural area of Bhopal, they are Manikhedi pond,Int khedi pond,Bakania pondand Khedi pond. The information for study was collected from the primarydata and secondary data. The main objective of the field study was to makeanalysis of activities of rural pond fishery. Information was collected through a


structured questionnaire, observation and interviews method.Observation- All these water bodies are given to fishery society on leased(patta).Jan pad panchyat are authorized bodies and responsible for auctioningof water bodies. All the detail of fisheries information is mentioned below tableno.1 and 2.

Table 1:- Fisheries details of study area.Questions of questionnaire

Manikhedi pond

Int khedi pond

Bakania Pond

Khedi Pond

Block Bersia Funda Funda Bersia Total area(Ha.) 60 ha. 15 ha. 10.64 ha. 14 ha. Water Area (ha.) 47 ha. 10 ha. 10.64 ha. 10 ha. Water availability in pond

12 months 9 months 12 months 12 months

Name of Society Ambedkar machua sahkari samittee

Triloki matasya samittee

Rajiv Gandhi machua samittee

Adarsh machua samittee

Ownership members

25 25 11 10

Name of species IMC, Common carp

IMC IMC IMC

Fishing frequency per week

4-5 times 2-3 times 2-3 times 4-5 times

Catch per netting

70-80 kg 10-15 kg 35-40 kg 25-30 kg

Members are trained/untrained

Untrained Untrained Untrained Untrained

(Source: primary data)Table 2: Estimated stocking density in water bodies.

Name of Pond

Area of Pond In Ha.

Present seed

stocking

Standard rate of

Stocking (ha.)

Standard of seed

Stocking (fry)

Manikhedi Pond

40.00 3,00,000 10000 4,00,000

Int Khedi Pond

15.00 50,000 10000 1,50,000

Bakania Pond 10.64 1,50,000 10000 1,06,400 Khedi Pond 14.00 60,000 10000 1,40,000 (Source: primary data)

Result and Discussion- In the study area, fish farmers are used poor qualityof artificial feeds, arbitory stocking of fish seeds, and also fish farmers are nottrained for fish culture. Adjustment of species ratio is the main criteria foroptimum fish production, similarlary Jena (2008) observed that a proportionof 30 – 40 % surface feeders (silver and catla), 30-35 % mid water feeder(rohu and grass carp) and 30-40 % bottom feeder (common carp and mrigal)


are commonly adopted depending on the productivity of the pond. Both sizeand density of fish are important to achieve high yield. Fingerling of 150 mm insize constitute the best stocking material according to Jena (2008) but it isdifficult to obtain them and hence fish seed of 60-100 mm is generallystocked.Sarkar(2002)reported that stocking of small size of fishes may resulthigher mortalities and slow grow during the initial months.Fish production alsoaffected by knowledge of fish farmers about fish culture. Shashikant et al(2001) survey work clearly indicated that the FFDA fish farmers were havingbetter knowledge about fisheries practices as compared to non FFDA farmers.A significant difference in the knowledge of fish culture management practicesbetween.Conclusion- Pond fish culture mostly depended upon selected fish seed, manureand fertilization, artificial feeding, pond management and fish farmer awareness.Pond fish production may be enhance, to avoid arbitory stocking fish seed, sizeand density of fish seed both are properly managed and fish farmer should bewell trained for fish culture.Acknowledgement- Iam thankful to Department of zoology Govt.scienceand commerce college,Benazir,Bhopal to provide me all these facilities tocomplete this study.======================References-1. Jena,J.K.(2008) Sustainable Carp Culture.Trainers’Training Programme on

Recent trends in Aquaculture and Fisheries Development,Organised byCIFA,Bhubaneswar UNDP & Directorate of Fisheries,Govt. of Orissa,17-20march:11-14.

2. Sarkar,S.K.(2002)Fresh water fish culture.Vol.1.,Daya Publishing Houses Dehli.3. Shashikant,S.K.,Mahajan Srivastav,B.S. Kirar and R.K. Shukla(2001)Impact of

fish Farmers Development Programme of FFDA on the Knowledge of selectedfisheries management Practices of small,marginal fish farmers and fishermen ofBalaghat District,Madhya Pradesh.Journal Inland Fish.Soc. of India,34(2):43-50.


Assessment of the Indian species of DigeneticTrematodes of Plagiorchi idae Family in Vindhyan

Region of Madhya Pradesh

*Pushpa Singh**Pushpendra Singh

==========================================================Abstract- Digenea is well known group of platyhelminthes since remotepast . Before critical Assessment of species, genera of familyPlagiorchiidae, it is essential to give an account of 18 Indian species ofdigenetic trematodes of plagiorchiidae family were studied from Vindhyanregion of Madhya Pradesh and arranged according the latest systematicposition are given in this paper.==========================================================

===========================* Department of Zoology, Govt. Vivekanand P.G. College Maihar, Satna (M.P.)** Department of Zoology, Govt. Vivekanand P.G. College Maihar, Satna (M.P.)

Introduction- Vindhyan region, where this research work is being done, is aplace of great antiquity. This is the original home of Tansen. Who bejewleledthe court of Akber, the Great. It was, here, that the worlds first while tiger-Mahan was caught and his progeny is now the delight of many zoos, all overthe world. In the suburb of Rewa, there is a village called Mukundpur. It ishere that the one of the last Mugal kings- Akbar Ali was born. Rewa is thehead quarter of Rewa commissionary. The area of this district is 22,468 s.q.miles. The main objective of his study were to evaluate the present state ofknowledge of the species of digenetic trematode parasite of plagiorchildaefamily of Vindhyan region. As such the present studies of the Indian species ofdigenetic trematodes of plagiorchiidae family from certain vertebrates host ofVindhyan region for which the author feels that it would certainly addfurther more data to the knowledge of the subject to this significant area.Regarding the classification of digenetic trematoda the position of the systematicunit is in state of flux. Tripathi (1991, 1994) has given extensive review onthe systematic of digenetic trematodes of Madhya Pradesh the author hasgiven the justification of utilizing the present classification suggested by Mehraand Amply followed Mehra’s classification for the present paper.Material and Method- The parasite where collected from differentvertebrates hosts ranging from fishes, amphibians and Reptiles. Thesevertebrate host were collected from different localities of Vindhyan region


Nehru Nagar, Nipania like, Lakhauribag, of Govindgarh, Satna, Maihar, Sidhiand various other localities with in 35-60 Km is distance from Rewa.Onprocuring the vertebrates hosts. they were Identified and examined carefully,firstly the buccal cavity was opened and examined. Then the Alimentarycanal was taken out and cut into suitable parts. Every part was separatelyexamined most of the collection of parasites was made from the alimentarycanal. other organs of host like liver, Kidney, lungs, urinary bladder, oviduct,cloca, eyewall and orbits were also examined.Result and Discussion- The present study deals with the assessment of theIndian species of the digenetic trematodes of plagiorchiidae family of Vindhyanregion. The author has attempted here to discuss the various views regardingthe 18 Indian species of Digenetic trematodes of playorchiidae family in vindhyanregion. Digenea occurring in different localities of Vindhyan region. As such18 species of the family plagior chiidae were collected and Identified for theirstudied which include 8 genera as shown the list of table-1.

Table 1, Indian species of digenetic trematodes of Plagiorchiidae family.S.No. Classification of the

Trematodes & Authority

Host Location Locality Year of collection and recorded by

1. Plagiorchis stunkardi Dwivedi, 1970

Chamaeleon calcavatus

Intestine Jabalpur Rewa 1993 Dwivedi 2000 Patel

2. Bilorchi mehrai Dwivedi, 1963

Kachhuga intermdia

Gall bladder Jablpur – Satna 1993 Dwivedi 2000 Patel

3. B. rewai Pidiha, 1977

Kachhuga kachhuga

Gall bladder Sirmour Rewa 1975 Pidiha 2002 Patel

4. Tremiorchsi ranarum Mehra and Negi, 1926

Rana tigrina Intestine Sirmour Rewa 1964 Dwivedi 200 Patel

5. T. vanarum Verma, 1930

Rana tigrina Intestine Jabalpur, Mauganj

1964 Dwivedi 2002 Patel

6. T. mehrai Rai, 1962

Bufo melanosticus

Intestine Pipariya Jabalpur Rewa

1962 Raj 2002 Patel

7. Astiotrema spinosa Chatterji, 1933

Dryophis mycterizans

Rectum Jabalpur Sidhi 1963 Dwivedi 2001 Patel

8. A. giganticum Tiwari, 1958

Kachhuga kachhuga

Intestine Jabalpur Maihar 1964 Tiwari 2000 Patel

9. A mehrai Tiwari, 1958

Kachhuga dhongoka

Instine Raipur Rewa 1958 Tiwari 2000 Patel

10 A. loossii Mehra, 1931

Kachhuga intermedia

Intestine Jabalpur Jhiria, Rewa

1963 Dwivedi 2001 Patel

11. A rewaiensis n. sp. Kachhuga kachhuga

Intestine Rewa 2000 Patel

12. A longicirra Hakeem, 1987

Kachhuga kachhuga

Intestine Ghoghar , Rewa 1988 Tripathi 2001 Patel

13. Xenopharynx solus Nicoll, 1912

Tropidonotus pisccator

Gall bladder Jabalpur Rewa 1963 Dwivedi 1989 Tripathi 2001 Patel

14. X. jagtai n. sp. P. piscator Gall bladder Rewa 2000 Patel 15. Encyclometra

colubrimurorum Rud 1819, Dollfus, 1937

T. piscator Oesophagus, Stomach

Raipur, Rewa Betual Jabalpur Chindwara

1958 Saksena 1972 Tripathi 1987 Dwivedi 2002 Patel

16. E. trilobus Hakeem, 1987

T. piscator Stomach Rewa 1987 Tripathi 2001 Patel

17. Spinometra chauhani Pidiha, 1977

Kachhuga kachuga

Intestine Dihia, Rewa 1975 Pidiha 2000 Patel

18. Telorchis chauhani Dandotia, 1975

K. kachhuga Intestine Gwalior Rewa 1975 Dandotia 2002 Patel


Mostly Identified the host of Digenetic trematodes are KachhugaKachhaga in 6 types of trematodes are founds, tropidenotus Pisccator in 3types of trematodes, Rana tigrina 2 types of trematodes, Kachhugaintermedia 2 type of trematodes speices and other host of one speciesfounds in digenetic trematodes. The total 18 Indian species of digenetictrematodes of plagiorchiidae family which were collected and Identified induring present investigation.======================References-1. Britt, H.G. (1947) Chromosomes of digenetic trematodes. Amer Nature, 81: 276-

2962. Dwivedi M.P. and Chauhan, B.S. (1970) On Some digenetic Trematodes Part III

J. Zool. Soc. India 22 (1&2) : 165-1723. Hakeem, Khema (1989) Studies on the trematode parasite of certain vertebrates

of Rewa region, Ph.D. Thesis A.P.S. University, Rewa (M.P.)4. Mukherji, R.P. and Ghos, R.K. (1970) Studies on some amphibians trematodes

from Uttar Pradesh and West Bengal. Ind. J. Hdm. 22(1) : 61-78 pp.5. Tripathi N.P. (1989) studies on a new trematode spelotrema Jagatai sp. Nov.

from various monitor from Rewa (M.P.) IV National convention of IndianHelminthologists, H.S.I. NoP. 26, 18. 1989

6. Tripathi, N.P. (1992) Studies on digenetic trematodes, their morphology,systematic, cytology and phylogenetic relations, D.Sc. Thesis A.P.S. UniversityRewa (M.P.) , 1992.

7. Tripathi, N.P. (1993) Studies on a new Trematode Astriotrema rewaiensis n. sp.from the intestine of Rana tigrina (Trematoda : plagiorchiidae) Dr. C.B.Shrivastava.

8. Tripathi N.P., Singh, Mamta and Mathur Rachna (1995) Ecological studies ofDigenetic trematodes of alimentary canal to amphibians host of Rewa region.(Trematoda : Digenea) Proc. 9th all India cong. of zool. ESP. 12 : pp 73 BurdhuanUniversity (West Bengal) Sept. 26-28, 1995.

9. Yamaguti, S. (1971) Snapsis of Digenetic trematodes of vertebrates, vol. I & IIkeeguku publ. co. Japan.


Mathematical Modell ing: Applications

* Rupa Salhotra==========================================================Abstract- Mathematical models are designed to describe physical systemby equations or more in general by logical and computational structures.Mathematical modelling operates as a science by means of methods andmathematical structures with well defined objectives. Mathematicalmodelling consist of simplifying real world problems and representingthem as mathematical problems, solving the mathematical problems andinterpreting these solutions in language of the real world. Conversion ofthe real world phenomenon under certain conditions into mathematicalformulation is known as mathematical modelling.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant Professor Mathematics, Govt. Navin Kanya Mahavidyalaya, Raipur

Mathematical modelling prepares the way for better design or control ofa system. It allows the efficient use of modern computing capabilities andsuccessful in many further applications.The use of mathematics in solving realworld problems has become widespread especially due to the increasingcomputation power of digital computer and computing methods both of whichhave facilitated the handling of lengthy and complicated problems. Mathematicalmodelling is basically of two kinds1. Empirical model- This method of modelling is based on experiments.Large numbers of experiments are performed to study the variation of thephysical quantity with respect to another physical quantity. Variation of a physicalquantity with respect to another is being represented graphically. Based onthese graphs the mathematical equation is derived which helps us in optimizationof any problem.2. Theoretical models- In this modelling variables are used to denotephysical quantity (for example: displacement, time, temperature, etc.) and thevariation of these physical quantities are represented in the form ofmathematical equation. The graphical representation of this equation helps usin optimization of any problem.Modelling process can be divided into three main steps• Formulation• Solution• Evaluation


Types of modelling-1. Linear or non linear2. Static or dynamic3. Discrete or continuous4. Deterministic or probabilistic Some of the applications of mathematical modelling in various fields ofscience, arts and environment are• Computer vision• Robotics• Computer animation• Protein folding• Spreading of infectious diseases• Animal and plant breeding• Chemical equilibrium• Molecular modelling• Realistic computer graphics• Labour data analysis• Wind channels• Optimal routing• Automatic translation• Earthquake prediction• Structural optimization• Climate prediction• Blood circulation models• Analysis of election• Environmental modelling• Water resources• Forestry======================References-11. Mathematical modelling in social and behavioral Sciences;Wei-Bin Zhang,

Ritsumeikan Asia Pacafic University, Japan.2. Mathematical modelling and new theories of learning,Jo Boaler, Stanford

University, Teaching mathematics and its applications,vol20,issue3,2001,p.121-128


Science and Society

*S.K. Srivsatava**Reena Singh

==========================================================Abstract- Science has played huge and important role in the developmentof our society, making the life more easier and comfortable. But, globalwarming has now become a major problem for our survival, in the presentscenario of globalization. We should think for development of society,checking the global warming leading to a peaceful environment.==========================================================

===========================* Reader (Chemistry), Smt. Indira Gandhi Govt. P.G.College Lalganj, Mirzapur** Smt. Indira Gandhi Govt. P.G.College Lalganj, Mirzapur (U.P.)

Science has played a major role to uplift the status and life style ofhuman being. It has improved the living standard of mankind multifolds inmultiferous direction. It has created the life more easier in different aspects ofsociety and civilization. Apart from improving the quality life, it is successful inimprovement of cultural and civilization aspects, avoiding prejudice and solvingsocial problems. It has improved the living standard of rural and urban peoplein India, with homogeneous development of rural and urban areas. Sciencewith success has served the society in various aspects of life as Agriculture,food, health, clothing, information, transport etc. In the field of science, failuresare stepping stones of success, success is neither immediate nor certain andsometimes it takes several years and sometimes entire life. The successfulimplementation of scientific researches are very much helpful in improving thestatus of society to a greater extent. The present paper deals with the study ofthe impact of sciences mainly chemistry on the society in the modern scientificage of globalization. Chemistry is an old science that influence every aspect oflife on earth and it is also a mother science, may be called as central science.It stands at the pivot of science. On the one hand it deals with Biology andprovides explanations for how molecules determine the processes of life. Onthe other hand it mingles with Physics as well as Mathematics and findsexplanations for chemical phenomena in the fundamental processes and theparticles of the universe. Chemistry has made an impact on almost everyaspect of daily life from toothpaste to life saving medicines, and the essentialfeature of this central science is synthesis of different molecules. Modern


chemistry is 200 year old which is much more accelerated with organic synthesisin past about 90 years. It is the science of molecules and their transformationsleading to different shapes and colours having different properties for thebetterment of mankind and society. One or two atoms can convert a fuel to apoison, change a colour, render an inedible substance edible, or replace a pungentodour with a fragrant one. That changing a single atom can have suchconsequences is the wonder of chemical world. It can be summed up in thefamous advertising slogan used by “du Pont”: “Better Things for Better Livingthrough Chemistry-Particularly through Organic Chemistry.” It has a uniqueplace in our pattern of understanding of universe. The essence of chemicalscience thus finds its full expression in the words of Leonardo da Vinci; “Wherenature finishes producing its own species, man begins, using natural things,and in harmony with this very nature, to create an infinity of species.”

There are tremendous changes in our life-style in the last 50 years. Oneof the most significant changes has been the gradual replacement of naturalmaterial, such as wood, wool and cotton with man made synthetic polymers;leading to a ‘plastic’ society. Tereylene (Decron or Teron) is the most importantpolyester which has revolutionized the cloth industry. The polymer melt can bespun into fibres and combined with naturally occurring fibres and cotton. Thecomposition of cotton and polyester yields a fabric (e.g. 60/40 cloth-Terecot),that dries quickly without wrinkling, yet still retains the coolness and comfortof 100% cotton. Some of the polymers like Nylon-6,6, Teflon, Bakelite etc. arevery much useful to the mankind in various aspects. Nylon-6,6 was developedas a synthetic fibre for production of stockings and other wearing apparels. Itwas introduced to the public at the New York World’s fair in 1939. It is used tomake fibres for clothing and carpeting, filaments for fishing lines and ropes,bristles for brushes, and molded objects such as gears and bearings. For thebetter application no lubrication is required, because nylon surfaces are inherentlyslippery. Teflon is familiar because of its use as non-stick coating, particularlyfor cooking utensils. Nirlep non-stick frying pans have Teflon coating. Becauseof its low chemical reactivity, excellent toughness, electrical and heat resistance,it is widely used as insulation for electrical items and in the manufacture ofgaskets and vales. Bakelite is widely used for making molded products suchas handles on electrical and cooking utensil, electrical plates and switches andas a bonding adhesive in plywood. Epoxy Resins are well known for theirbonding properties, are used in adhesives such as Araldite, Fevicol etc. So,various polymers being synthesized have huge applications, making the lifemore easier, comfortable and economical.

Polythene is widely used in packaging, house ware, such as buckets anddustbins, cable insulation and flexile bottles etc. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) isused in imitation leathers, floor covering, corrugated roofing material etc. Withthe addition of plasticizer, it has a rubber like texture, widely used in squeeze


bottles, pipes etc. But, excessive use of these polymers (Polythene etc) havecreated a major problem of their disposal resulting the pollution problem andglobal- warming. Science plays a huge and important role in society with relationto shelter and clothing. We have come up with new paints and epoxy spraysthat protects shelters from wear and tear inflicted by rain, wind, sun andpollution. These coating and paints are designed to make properties look better,perform better and last longer. Thermal chemical compounds may protectroof-tops and also help structures stay at right temperatures. These chemicalcompounds have been proven to reduce energy costs and to create a morecomfortable shelter for use as a private residence, business headquarters orany other purpose.

Chemical engineers who create fabric that offer special, stain-resistantproperties are also designing technologically advanced fabric that come out ofthe dryer without wrinkles or creases. These new fabric are reducing theamount of time it takes to care for clothes; they are also helping the environmentby making it easier for people to avoid dry-cleaning and other energy wastingcleaning methods. Today, chemical technology is revolutionizing the way peoplewear and take care of clothing. Each fabric can be chosen based on its aestheticappeal, as well as its special chemical properties. Stain resistant fabrics containa coating that will allow liquids, such as coffee or red wine, to “roll off” of thesurface; make them easier to clean, in the event that a stain does transfer onto fibre.

In the field of Agriculture, Urea synthesized by Friedrich Wholer in 1928,has played a very important role as a fertilizer. Several pesticides, insecticidesetc. have been synthesized which helped in improving the crop productionleading the development of villages and rural areas. Various chemical substanceshave been used in storage of seeds, grains and food processing for improvingtheir shelf-life. They should be safely used only in desired quantity; can createproblems for existence of mankind. There is a great tragedy in the history ofIndia, on December 3, 1984 (Bhopal Gas Tragedy), Union Carbide pesticideplant released methyl isocyanate (MIC) gas, resulting in the exposure of over5,00,000 people. MIC is an intermediate chemical in the production of carbamatepesticide. About 8,000 to 10,000 people died within 72 hours of tragedy andabout 25,000 have since died from gas related diseases.

Man needs Food, Health and Energy; and science plays a key role in it.Sir Alexander Fleming got the Nobel Prize for medicine in 1945 for discoveryof penicillin. After that different antibiotics and life saving medicines havebeen synthesized. These chemicals and medicines are being successful in curingdifferent harmful diseases, resulting the increase in average age and decreasein death rate in India.With the advancement of science, structure propertycorrelation of materials could be better understood and the new discipline ofscience known as Materials science and Nano Science has been emerged. It


is claimed that 21st Century is the century of nano materials (The word nano istaken from Greek word “Nanos” meaning Dwarf. It is a prefix used to describe“One billionth” of something), The change in properties in Nano Regime withincreased surface area leads to “New” chemical processes through changesin chemical reactivity, melting and boiling point etc. There is a growing need todevelop clean, nontoxic and environmentally friendly (“Green Chemistry”)procedures for syntesis and assembly on nanoparticles. Carbon nanotubes arethe nature’s finest gift to mankind, the most amazing and wonderful nanostructure that the human being has discovered so far. Carbon naontube (CNTs)are the allotropes of carbon; such cylindrical carbon molecules have novelproperties that make them potentially useful in many applications innanotechnology, electronics, optics and other fields of materials science. Nanosizing causes changes in colour. Bulk gold is golden in colour whereas 1nm,20nm and 100nm gold particle are brown-yellow, red and purple-pink coluredrespectively. Nano-gold is recent years has drawn more attention fromresearches as a potential catalyst in chemical processing, pollution control andfuel cell applications. Osaka National Research Institute in Japan, recentlycommercialized nano scale gold particles supported on ferric oxide as the ODOREATERS in bath rooms. By changing the shapes of gold nano spheres intocylindrical gold nanorods, they can detect malignant tumars hidden deeperunder the skin, as in case with breast cancer and selectively destroy themwithout harming the healthy cells.

Zinc oxide is interesting compound widely used in medicinal purposes(cold, rashes, antiseptics, sunscrean lotions etc.), manufacturing of rubber asrubber cure (or as filler), and pigment for paints and coatings. It has promisingsigns in the filed of nanotechnology, that could replace silicon as the mainsubstrate in chip manufacturing. Structured polymeric fibres with diameter tothe nanometer scale results in a number of favourable properties such asincrease in surface to volume ratio, decrease in pore size and a drop in structuraldefects, and superior mechanical characteristics. As a result these fibres aregood candidates for use in number of areas such as high performance filtration,chemical-biological protective clothing and polymer composite reinforcement.Conclusion- In nut shell, science has played huge and important role in thedevelopment of our society, making the life more easier and comfortable. But,global warming has now become a major problem for our survival, in the presentscenario of globalization. We should think for development of society, checkingthe global warming leading to a peaceful environment. In the words of AlbertEinstein, “If mankind is to survive, we shall require a substantially new mannerof thinking”. We must have high ambition and high thinking with patience toachieve something great useful to the society. Success is the best friend ofpatience and in fact, they are always together. Science with success in positivedirection will definitely lead the society to a significant level with upliftment of


socio-economic status of the mankind.It is better to prevent the waste formation, rather than to treat or clean

up waste after it is formed. We should develop and design such methods andreactions which are eco-friendly with no waste formation. It will be helpful inchecking the pollution and global-warming leading to a clean environment. Weshould develop the concept of green chemistry for pollution prevention, withthe mission to promote innovative chemical technologies that reduce or eliminatethe use or generation of hazardous substance in the design, manufacture anduse of chemical products. Green chemistry will be very much helpful in creatinga clean and green society with green environment. Substances and forms ofsubstances used in a chemical process should be chosen so as to minimize thepotential for chemical accidents, including releases, explosions and fires. So,with the new concept of green chemistry and nano sciences, the society willbe highly benefited with development and advancement, achieving a sustainablecivilization. For a sustainable future society, it is necessary to redirect thetraditional chemical industry towards one that is environmentally acceptable(green and clean) and in harmony with the society.======================References-1. CNR Rao, P.P. Edwards et. al, chem. Eur. J. 8(1), 2002, 282. Singh and Das, Materials Research Bulletin, 2008


Impact of Age in Adoption of Diversified FarmingTechnology in the Development of Rural Community

*Jitendra Singh “Bhadauria”==========================================================Abstract- Age of an individual is influencing factor in taking variousdecision in his life . The rate of working of steps involve in an innovationdecision process are awareness, interest, evaluation, trail and adoptionare influenced by the age factor. The level of these elements may differin person to person according to their age. Difference of age may alsoreflect experiences of an individual. Keeping these things in mind aresearch was conducted in Western Uttar Pradesh with an specificobjective to compare the social profile with age variables of the adopters& non-adopters to observe the role of Uttar Pradesh DiversifiedAgricultural Support Project (UPDASP) regarding rural development inWestern Uttar Pradesh funded by world bank. In the study age taken asimportant variable that affects the adoption behaviour of technologyand intensification of technology for the development of rural community.This research offers an important findings that is useful to understandhow age of the people is influenced the adoption of technology. Localeof the research was selected purposively. To get first hand information200 respondents (100 Adopters & 100 non adopters ) were interviewedfrom two blocks. The selection of respondents, villages, & blocks wasmade randomly. Data were collected with help of interview schedule thendata were tabulated analised by using statistical tools. The respondentswere belonging to Kshatriya Brahmin (Upper Caste), Jaat (BackwardCaste), Chamar, Balmiki etc (Schedule Caste). To test the significantdifference in the age between adopters & non-adopters regardingadoption of technology Null Hypothesis (H0) was formed. The findingsof the study revealed that majority of the respondents were belongingwith the age of twenty eighty years to forty eighty years and age variableswas not effective in the adoption of diversified farming technologybetween two groups in the development of rural community.==========================================================

===========================* Assistant Professor & Head, Department of Agricultural Extension, Janata

Mahavidyalaya Ajitmal, Distt. Auraiya (UP)

Introduction- Age is an important factor to learn and adopt the new technology.It affects the human body morphologicaly, physiologicaly and neurologicaly


too. Generaly when people in the age of adult may learn more and morewhereas in the old age learning process decrease. The factor of age is alsorelated to the awareness and adoption of new technology for the developmentof human beings. Therefore, to asses the impact of age in adoption of technologyunder the Uttar Pradesh Diversified Agricultural Support Project a study entitled“The Role of Uttar Pradesh Diversified Agricultural support project regardingrural development in Western Uttar Pradesh” in district Baghpat was undertaken with an specific objective to compare the social profile with age variables.In the study age was taken as important variable that effects the adoptionbehaviour of the technology and intensification of technology for thedevelopment of people. Through out the past decade, changing demographicpatterns and cultural influences have led to an increasingly older workforce (Sharit & Czaja, 1994, Warr, 1990 ) Although age difference have been ofsignificant interest to the researchers for over six decades ( Girard, 1993, McCarty & Shrum, 1993, Minton & Schneiderays, 1980, Rhodes, 1983 ). Therehas been relatively little research on the enfluence of age on technology adoptiondecision. As result of todays fast paced and complex work environment,organization have often elected to deploy sophisticated information technologyto help employee manages this complexity ( Gilroy & Desaie, 1986 ) Yet thereis some evidence that age has an important influences on technology usages.A long time of research exists that looks socio cognitive changes amongindividuals based on chronological age. For many years researchers arguedthat aging was accompanied by a decline in intellectual ability of intelligence (Wechsler,1958). Today there is less support for a unidimentional view ofintelligence rather more contemporary views have focused on spesific type ofabilities having different age while performance scores decline with age.(Botwinic, 1967, 1977 ). Likwise, crystallized intelligence does not changewith age, while fluid intelligence can change or remain constant ( Baltes &Lindenberger, 1977, Horn,1977, Schaie & wills, 1986).Research Methodology-The purpose of this study is to present, impact ofage on adoption of diversified farming system in rural india. This researchinvestigated age difference in individual adoption and sustained usages oftechnology. Adopters and non adopters behaviour were studied at the point ofadopters of diversified technology through Uttar Pradesh diversified AgriculturalSupport Project compare to rural people those were adopted the technlogyand compare between older people and younger people technology usagesdecision. Keeping in view the opinions were obtained through personal interviewwith the pre structured schedule. The data thus collected were coded, tabulated,analysed and interpreted in the light of objectives set up for the study. Thesurvey was carried out in selected blocks of Baghpat district Uttar pradesh forcollecting related information through direct interview.Selection of Area - District Baghpat of Western Uttar Pradesh was selected


purposively for these reason.1. It is reported that district Baghpat has covered under Uttar Pradeshdiversified project. 2. In the district most of the farmers were deeply interestedto diversify their agriculture. . Researcher was familier with local dilect of thedistrict. 4. Good transport facilities were available for conducting researchwork properly. 5. Communication facilities were more effective in Baghpatdistrict.Selection of Blocks, villages and respondentsDistrict Baghpat has six blocks namely Baghpat, Baraut, Binouli, Chhaparauli,Khekra and Pilana. Two blocks namely Baghpat and Pilana were selected byusing simple random method of sampling. The location of blocks is showing infigures. The list of villages procured from community development blocks headquarters and only ten village were selected from each block using simple randommethod were selected for the study. The lists of villagers were obtained fromvillage development officer (VDO) for the selection of respondents. Simplerandom methods were used for this purpose. All the head of the families treatedas respondents. Respondents participate in UPDASP called adopters and thosewere not participated in UPDASP called non adopters. For selection of adoptersand non adopters, the list of each village containing the name of villagers dividein to two parts that is adopters and non adopters. Five adopters and five nonadopters, total ten responded were selected from each selected village. Thustotal hundred adopters and hundred non-adopters were selected randomly forfurther study. The block-wise selection of villages, adopters and non adoptersare indicated in the table.

Follwing table shows the name of villages in block Baghpat and numberof adopters and nonadopters selected from the each villages.

Table No. : 01Showing number of villages, adopters, non adopters

in Baghpat block.S.N. Name of villages No. of

Adopters No. of Non-

adopers Total

1 Chopara-Maheshpur 05 05 10 2 Pabla-Begamabad 05 05 10 3 Nethala 05 05 10 4 Sarurpur-Kala 05 05 10 5 Ladhawari 05 05 10 6 Baghpat 05 05 10 7 Kherki 05 05 10 8 Meetali 05 05 10 9 Gauripur-Jawahar

Nagar 05 05 10

10 Faizpur-Ninana 05 05 10 Total 50 50 100


Follwing table shows the name of villages in block Pilana and number ofadopters and nonadopters selected for the each villages

Table No : 2Showing number and village, No. of adopters, Non-adoptersin Pilana block.

S.N. Name of villages No. of Adopters

No. of Non-adopters

Total

1 Dhikauli 05 05 10 2 Chamarawal 05 05 10 3 Saidpur 05 05 10 4 Puthar 05 05 10 5 Daula 05 05 10 6 Baleni 05 05 10 7 Khindora 05 05 10 8 Dolcha 05 05 10 9 Pilana 05 05 10 10 Mukari 05 05 10 Total 50 50 100 Thus total of twenty villages, two hundred respondents were selected

for study. Following table shows the summariese date.Table No : 3

Showing summarise data of selected blocks.

S.N. Name of Blocks

No. of villages

No. of adopters

No. of Non- adopters

Total

1 Baghpat 10 50 50 100 2 Pilana 10 50 50 100 Total 20 100 100 200

Result and Discussion- The age has been found to be an important factoreffecting adoption of innovations in many studies. Age was measured as thenumber of years completed by the respondents at the time of data collection.The age distribution of adopters and non adopters are shown in the table.

Table No : 4Showing age of respondents

S.N. Age interval (in years)

Adopters Percentage Non adopters

percentage

1 18 – 28 12 12 24 24 2 28 – 38 40 40 20 20 3 38 – 48 38 38 26 26 4 48 – 58 6 6 22 22 5 58 and above 4 4 8 8

Total 100 100 100 100

Above table shows that 12 percent adopters and 24 percent non adoptershave age of 18 – 28 years. 40 percent adopters and 20 percent non adopters


in the age of 28 – 38 years. 38 percent adopter and 26 percent non adoptershave in the age of 38 – 48 years. And 6 percent adopter and 22 percent nonadopters have the age interval of 48 – 58 years. Only 4 percent adopters and8 percent non adopters have the age of 58 years or more. Thus It may beconcluded that majority of the respondents belong to adopters categories havingthe age interval of 28 – 38 years and 38 – 48 years. In order to find out if therewas any significant difference between adopter and non adopters regardingtheir age, the following null hypothesis was to be tested.Null Hypothesis (Ho)- There was no significant difference between the ageof adopters and non adopters.

Table No : 5Showing the total score, Mean score, standard deviation and variance of

respondents age regarding their age.

S.N. Particulars Adopters Non adopters 1 Total score 3898 40.70 2 Mean score 38.98 40.70 3 Standard deviation 9.01 9.21 4 Variance 81.29 84.90

Observated ‘t’ value – 1.50Tabulated ‘t’ value – 1.75From the above calculation the calculated value of ‘t’ is 1.50 which was

less than table value of ‘t’ 1.75 at 5% level of significance. Therefore the nullhypothesis was accepted. Hence it was concluded that there was no significantdifference regarding the age of two groups .Conclusion- Majority of respondents were belonging to the age of youth. 12percent adopters and 24 percent nonadopters were the age of 18 to 28 years.40% adopters and 20% non-adopters, whereas 38% adopters and 26% non-adopters were related to the age of 28 to 38 yrs and 38 to 48 yrs respectively.Only 10 percent adopters and 30% non-adopters were belonging to the age ofmore than 48 years. The study was also revealed that there were no significantdifference between adopters and non-adopters regarding their age. Hence,conclusion had been drawn from the study that age is no hindering factor inthe adoption of any technology for development of people in rural area.======================References-1. Ahamad, A. and S. Isvilonanda (2003), "Rural Poverty and Agricultural

Diversification in Thailan", paper presented at the second annual conferenceof Swedish School of Advance Asia and Pacific Studies (SSAAP) Lund Sweden,October 24-26.

2. Aksoy, M.A. (2005), "The evolution of Agricultural Trade Flows", in M.A.Aksoy and J.C. Beghin (Eds.) (2005), Global Agricultural Trade and Developingcountries, The World bank, Washigton, DC U.S.A.


3. Anna, V. (1990) socioeconomic basis of women entrepreneurship SEDME 17(1), 17-47.

4. Baltes PB, Lundberg U. (1997) Emergence of a powerful connection betweensensory and cognitive function across adult life span; A new window to thestudy of cognitive aging. Psycology and aging 12(1), 12 - 22.

5. Botwinick J. (1967). Cognitive process in maturity and old age. Newyork;Springer.

6. Botwinick (1977). Intellectual abilities. In Barren J E, Schaie K W, Hand book ofthe psychology of aging. Newyork.

7. Czajas, Sharit J. (1993). Age difference in the performance of computer basedwork. Psychology of aging, 8, 59-67.

8. Chitamber, J. B. (1990). Introductory Rural Sociology. Wiley Eastern Ltd., NewDelhi.

9. Gangwar, B., S. K. Duhoon, D. K. Pandey (2006), "Diversification of Maize -Based Cropping Stystem". Indian Farming, I. C.A.R., Vol. 56, No. 6, pp. 20-24,September.

10. Ghurye, G.S. (1957). Caste and class in India, Popular Book Depot, Bombay.11. Gilroy F, Desaie H. (1986). Computer anixity; Sex, race and age. International

Journal of man machine Studies, 35, 711 -719.12. Girard C (1993). Age gender and suicide; A cross national analysis. American

Sociological review, 58(4),553 - 574.13. Michael G Morris; Vishwanath Venktesh, Personal Psychology; Age difference

in technology adoption decision: Implication for a changing workforce. Summer2000; 53,2; ABI/IHFORM Global page 375.Minton H L, Schneider FW.(1980). IL. Wave land.

14. Nowok, P. J. (1982), "Adoption and diffusion of soil and water conservationpractices" in B.C. English, J. A. Maetzole,, B. R. Holding, and E.O. Heady (Eds.)(1982), Future Agricultural Technology and Resource conservation, Iowa StateUniversity Press, Ames, Iowa, U.S.A., pp. 214 - 237.

15. NPC (2004), " Vision 2020, Natural planning Commission, Govt. of India,Academic foundation, New Delhi.

16. Pala, Mustafa, Ghoffari, A., and Ketata, Habib (2004) "Taking Research tofarmer's field in Iran" ICARDA, Caravan, Review of Agriculture in the dry area,Issue No. 320/21, June/December.

17. Paliwal C.B., I.A.S. Project coordinator UPDASP (2000), ''Project Summery''Rohitashva Printers Aishbag Road Lucknow.

18. Rai, Mangala (2006), "Evolution of Indian National Agricultural ResearchSystem". Hand book of Agriculture Indian Council of Agriculture Research,New Delhi pp. 1-16. Fifth edition.

19. Ramesh Chand (1996), "Diversification through High Value Crops in WesternHimalayan Region Evidence from Himanchal Pradesh, . Saini, Amrik S. andRajveer Singh (1985) "Impact of diversification on Income, Employment andCredit Need of Small Farmers in Panjab", Indian Journal of AgriculturalEconomics, Vol. 40, No. 3, July-September, pp. 310-316.

20. Ram, M. (1980) High yielding varieties of crops. Oxford, IBH, New Delhi, p. 3.21. Rao, C. S. and Raheza, P. C. (1965). Evaluation of extension methods for

change in attitude towards improved family practices. Indian Journal ofAgronomy, Vol. 3, p. 198.


22. Rhodes S. (1983). Age related difference in work attitude and behaviour; Areview and conceptual analysis psychological Bulletine, 93(2),328-367.

23. Roy, H. N. (1967). Diffusion of information and farmers response to an improvedfarm practices. Research Foundation Bulletin, B.A.C. Sabour, Vol. 7&9, pp. 116-118.

24. Saini, Amrik S. and Rajveer (1985). "Impact of diversification on Income,Employment and Credit Need of Small Farmers in Panjab", Indian Journal ofAgricultural Economics, Vol. 40, No. 3, July-September, pp. 310-316.

25. Schaie K W. Willis S L (1986).Can decline in adult intellectual funtioning bereversed, Developmental Psychology, 22, 223 - 232.



[email protected]





(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)


ISSN 0975-4083


Effectiveness of Nutr i tion Education and OsteoporosisRisk factors in Premenopausal Women

* Daisy Abraham** Nanda Gurwara

==========================================================Abstract- A study was done to examine the effectiveness of nutritioneducation on dairy products and vegetables frequency consumption inpremenopausal women. A teaching module on the importance of calciumintake and sources was imparted to 100 premenopausal women. Thefrequency consumption of dairy products, fruits and vegetables werecollected and analysed before and after the administration of teachingmodule. After the teaching module, a statistically significant (P<0.05)increase in consumption for milk, dairy products , fruits and vegetableswas found. The findings of the study conclude that teaching module canbe an effective strategy to motivate premenopausal women toward dietarybehavior modification to maximize bone peak bone mass and in turnreduce the risk of osteoporosis.Key Words- Dairy products, premenopausal women.==========================================================

===========================* Research Scholar** Professor, Department of Home Science,Government Naveen Kanya

Mahavidayalaya, Raipur (C.G.)

Introduction- Osteoporosis is the most common metabolic bone disorderaffecting millions worldwide, especially elderly. WHO defines it as bone mineraldensity that is 2.5 standard deviations or more below the mean peak bonemass. Currently it is estimated that over 200 million people worldwide sufferfrom this silent disease(1). Randell A et al state that osteoporosis is a globalpublic health problem which affects 55% of American aged 50 and above. Ofthese 80% are women. It is estimated that 1 in 3 women and 1 in 12 men overage 50 worldwide have osteoporosis. It is responsible for millions of fracturesannually mostly involving the lumbar vertebra, hip and wrist. In India, expertgroup peg the number of osteoporosis patients at approximately 26 million(2003 figures) with the numbers projected to increase to 36 million by 2013(2).Although the symptoms rarely appear before the age of thirty, the diseaseprocess begins much earlier .Two major stages of life are critical in thedevelopment of osteoporosis. The first is bone growth stage that occurs belowthe age of 30 (3,4). While the second stage is bone losing stage where bone


strength and density start to decline in later adulthood . Accordingly, reducingthe risk of osteoporosis in later life requires the attainment of the highest bonedensity during the first three decades of life(5).Factors that may lead to lessthan optimal bone mass density development and consequently osteoporosisinclude among others low body mass index, low levels of physical activity,poor nutrition and other factors including smoking, caffeine, intake and the useof certain medications (6) To maximize bone mass, diet should deliver anadequate supply of dietary calcium, and vitamin D besides increasing physicalactivity during the first three decades of life (7). Thus calcium and vitamin Ddeficiencies during this period of life increase the risk of osteoporosis in olderpeople (8). Available literatures were also clarified the importance of fruits andvegetables consumption in the prevention of the disease. Fruits and vegetablescontain important modifiable protective nutrients for bone health such asmagnesium, potassium, vitamin A, K, E, C and carotenoid (5).

Previous studies have reported low degree of awareness aboutosteoporosis especially among women in developed countries (9), whichhighlighted the need for educational interventions that are directed towardincreasing the population’s knowledge of osteoporosis risk factors. Theseeducational interventions have proved to be effective in changing the dietaryhabits to healthier ones as evident in a number of studies (10). Veena Shatrugna et al carried out a study among 289 women from low socioeconomic group. Of these 119 (41%) were post menopausal and 170(59%)we4re premenopausal. The findings of this study indicated that Indian womenfrom low socio economic groups consumed diets that have inadequate calcium.( 270 mg/day VS RDA of 600 mg to 1 gm) coupled with too few calories, poorquality proteins and have many vitamin and mineral deficiencies. The multipleregression analysis revealed that calcium intake was one of the importantdeterminants of BMD ( (P<0.05). This study highlights the seriousconsequences of under nutrition deficient in terms of height, weight, BMI andlow calcium intake on the bone health of poor socio economic group.Osteoporosis and bone thinning sets in by the age of 40 and above. Bonehealth is expensive to monitor, more difficult to treat and by the timeosteoporosis and fracture sets in, the condition is irreversible.(11)

Materials & Methods- The participants of the study consisted of 100premenopausal young adults between the age of 30 to 45 years. Lectureswere given once in fortnight for 30 minutes each. The participants wereinformed about their full freedom to either fill out the questionaire or not. Theparticipants were allowed to complete a guided self filling questionnaire beforethe administration of teaching module on nutrition education. The base linequestionnaire assessed the participant’s demographic charecteristics ( age,height, weight, family monthly income, number of family members) andconsumption frequency of dairy products, fruits and vegetables. Consumption


frequency of dairy products (milk, curd, cheese and maava, khoa) fruit &vegetables was determined as one or more serving per day, 3-6 servings perweek, 1-2 servings per week and once in a month or none. To examine theeffectiveness of educational intervention on dietary behavior, participants wereasked to complete the baseline questionnaire at the end of 06 months.Data Analysis- Data obtained from the questionnaire at the beginning of nutritioncourse was compared to those collected at end of 06 months. Proportion ofparticipants in each category was compared before and after the teachingmodule at P<0.05 statistically.Results- Hundred premenopausal women have participated in the study. Theaverage age was 35.7 ± 2.1 years. The average body mass index was 21.6 ±3.4 Kg/sq.m. In 32% of participants, the frequency of milk and milk productswas essentially one serving a month or none. In 23% of the participants, theintake of milk and milk products was 1-2 serving/day. After the course ofnutrition, significant percentage of participants has shifted to more frequentconsumption of milk and milk products ( 48% Vs 11 %) ( figure 1).

Figure -1 : Milk & Milk Products:

23

15

3

32

48

2219

11

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

1 2 3 4

Before

After

CONSUMPTION OF MILK & MILK PRODUCTS

PERCENTAGE

Figure 1. Milk and milk products consumption of studied population before and after educational intervention. 1= one or more serving per day, 2 = 3-6 servings per week, 3 = 1-2 servings per week, 4 = once a month or none. Statistically significant increase in participants who took more servings of milk and yogurt and significant reduction in number of participants who consumed less frequent milk and milk products were found after educational intervention.

Statistically significant increase in the participant’s consumption fruitsand vegetables was also found. Majority of the participants have shifted tomore frequent fruit and vegetable consumption group fig-2 and fig-3)Approximately 42% participants reported once or twice weekly consumptionof fruit and only 22% reported once or twice daily consumption of fruits beforethe nutrition course. These percentages have changed to 19% and 40% afterthe administration of teaching module. The number of participants who reportedthat they consume fruits once a month or none were also significantly decreased(13% Vs 3%) after the administration of teaching module on nutrition.


Figure -2 : Fruit consumption:

Figure -3 : Vegetable consumption:

22 23

42

13

3540

19

6

0

10

20

30

40

50

1 2 3 4

Before

After

40

50

6 4

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

1 2 3 4

Before

After

Consumption of fruits

Percentag

e

Consumption of vegetables

Percentag

e

Figure 2. Fruits consumption of studied population before and after educational intervention. 1= one or more serving per day, 2 = 3-6 servings per week, 3 = 1-2 servings per week, 4 = once a month or none. Statistically significant increase in number of participants consuming more fruits and significant decrease in number of participants who consumed less frequent fruits were found after educational intervention.

Figure 3. Vegetables consumption of studied population before and after educational intervention.1= one or more serving per day, 2 = 3-6 servings per week, 3 = 1-2 servings per week, 4 = once a month or none. Statistically significant increase in number of participants consuming more vegetables and significant decrease in number of participants who consumed less frequent vegetables were found after educational intervention.

For vegetable, on the other hand, a statistically significant increase inparticipants who consume once or more per day and 3-6 servings per weekwas observed after the nutrition course ( P<0.05) figure -3)Discussion- The results of this study provide evidence that administration ofteaching module on nutrition education is a practical and an effective methodto reduce osteoporosis risk factors among university female students. It seemsto work through promoting positive dietary changes that can maximize peakbone mass. After the teaching, the consumption of dairy products, fruits andvegetables were markedly increased as compared to baseline.

Calcium, the essential mineral of bone is mostly found in a one class offood, namely milk. Therefore milk and products are the major sources of dietarycalcium. Although Calcium is also available in non milk sources including ragi,horse gram, vegetables like cauliflower leaves, colocassia leaves (arvi kasaag),these things are not consumed on a daily basis . There is a closerelationship between vitamin K and osteoporosis. Vitamin K is involved in theformation of osteocalcin, and other proteins specific for boneformation (12)Vitamin C is an essential cofactor for formation of collagen, aprotein that helps in strengthening bones.. In addition, it is a powerful reducingagent, capable of scavenging reactive oxygen species which are involved inthe bone resorption.Vitamin A is needed for bone remodeling process but, highintake of this vitamin has been postulated to be associated with osteoporosis.


Minerals such as magnesium, sodium and potassium may also have a role inthe development and prevention of osteoporosis. Magnesium and potassiumhelp in maintaining bone mineral density while excess of sodium is associatedwith bone loss since sodium intake is a strong determinant of urinary excretionof calcium (13) .Thus diets rich in fruits and vegetables are also essential forbone health since they contain such bone protective nutrients . After the courseof nutrition, the majority of participants have shifted to more frequent fruitsand vegetable consumption group. This finding is in agreement with the findingof Ha and Caine-Bish. The population of premenopausal women are moresusceptible to develop unhealthy dietary behaviors such as reduction in milkand increase in soft drinks intake which can predispose them for chronicdiseases later in life . Based on the presented data, it seems that premenopausalwomen do not prefer milk or milk products since 32% take milk once a monthor none . After the course of nutrition, the majority of participants have shiftedto more frequent milk and vegetable intake. This finding indicates that nutritioneducation can make changes in the type of milk products and in the quantity ofdietary calcium consumed too, and this finding is in agreement with Friedmanand Snetselaar (14). The findings of this research indicate the followings. First,a high percentage of participants consume inadequate amounts of dietaryCalcium and other protective nutrients essential for bone health which maypredispose them for osteoporosis later in life. Such harmful dietary behaviormay be attributed to reduced knowledge about osteoporosis risk-related dietarybehaviors. Second, educational intervention is effective in reducing the riskfactors of osteoporosis among the studied population. Third, premenopausalwomen are a proper life stage for nutritional education intervention becausethey are in an age of bone mass build up.Conclusions-1. The premenopausal women responded well for educational intervention

related to decrease the risk of osteoporosis.2. The teaching module on nutrition course represents a simple and cost

effective strategy to reduce osteoporosis risk factors in early decadesof life through increases the awareness and educational knowledge ofosteoporosis risk factors and motivate participants toward healthier dietarybehavior modification.

======================References-1. Deal CL (2007) " American Medical Journal" Vol 42, no.4 page no. 102-105.2. Randell A et al, (2005) "Journal of Osteoporosis Int.", Vol 54, no.2, page no. 427

- 428.3. National Institutes of Health (NIH) (2000). Consensus development Conference

statement: osteoporosis prevention, diagnosis, and therapy, cited 20 Jan, 2011.4. Fulgoni VL 3rd, Huth PJ, DiRienzo DB, Miller GD. Determination of the Optimal


Number of Dairy Servings to Ensure a Low Prevalence of Inadequate CalciumIntake in Americans. J Am Coll Nutr. 23(6):651-9.Dec.2004.5

5. Dwyer J. Starting down the right path: nutrition connections with chronicdiseases of later life. Am J Clin Nutr. 83(2):415S-420S. Feb.2006.

6. Von Hurst PR, Wham CA. Attitudes and knowledge about osteoporosis riskprevention: a survey of New Zealand women. Public Health Nutr. 10(7):747-53.Jul. 2007.

7. Sue RW. Basic nutrition and diet therapy 11th Edition. Mosby 2001.8. Lanou AJ, Berkow SE, Barnard ND. Calcium, Dairy Products, and Bone Health

in Children and Young Adults: A Reevaluation of the Evidence. Pediatrics.115(3):736-43.Mar. 2005.

9. Maalouf G, Gannagé-Yared MH, Ezzedine J, et al., Middle East and North Africaconsensus on osteoporosis. J Musculoskelet Neuronal Interact. 7(2):131-43.Apr-Jun.2007.

10. Jamal SA, Ridout R, Chase C, Fielding L, Rubin LA, Hawker GA. Bone mineraldensity testing and osteoporosis education improve lifestyle behaviors inpremenopausal women: a prospective study. J Bone Miner Res. 14(12):2143-9.Dec.1999.

11. Veena Shatrugra et al. Women's work and bone health: A Review Osteopros Int(2005) 16: 1827-1835

12. Luo LZ, Xu L. Vitamin K and osteoporosis. Zhongguo Yi Xue Ke Xue Yuan.XueBao. 25(3):346-9.Jun.2003.

13. Ha EJ, Caine-Bish N. Effect of nutrition intervention using a general nutritioncourse for promoting fruit and vegetable consumption among college students.J Nutr Educ Behav 41(2):103-9.Mar-Apr.2009.

14. Friedman LA, Snetselaar L, Stumbo P, Van Horn L, Singh B, Barton BA. Influenceof intervention on beverage choices: trends in the dietary intervention studyin children (DISC). J Am Diet Assoc. 107(4):586-94.Apr. 2007.


Status and Scope of Some Medicinal Plants inMadhya Pradesh

* Vishnu Kant Tiwari**Arpita Awasthi

==========================================================Abstract- Medicinal Plants have always been the principal sources ofmedicine since ancient past and presently they are becoming popularthroughout the developed countries. Ayurveda and other IndianLiterature mention the use of plant is treatment of various human ailments.The medicinal plant play on important role in the lives of Tribal andRural people, particularly in Remote part of developing countries. Thepresent investigation Indicates that Madhya Pradesh is rich in floristicdiversity and among them, several plants have been claimed to possessmedicinal properties. These plant are most effective and mostly used inthe Treatment of various disease and disorder. The present revels thestatus and scope of medicinal plants in Madhya Pradesh.Key words- Status and Scope, medicinal plant, Tribal and Rural PeopleMadhya Pradesh==========================================================

===========================* Department of Botany Govt. T.R.S. (Autonomous Excellence) College Rewa

(M.P.)** Head, Department of Botany Govt. T.R.S. (Autonomous Excellence) College

Rewa (M.P.)

Introduction - Medicinal plants have always been considered as a healthysources of life for the Trible and Rural people becomes, medicinal plants havecurative properties due to the presence of various complex chemical substanceof different composition, which are found as secondary metabolites in one ormore parts of these plants. These plant metabolites, according to theircomposition, are grouped as alkaloids, glycocides, saponins, corticosteroids,essential oil etc. There are several thousand medicinal plants are very usefulin healing various diseases. There are more than 5000 medicinal plants Listedin different classical and modern texts. Around 800 medicinal plants are activein all India Trade around 1500 species are documented in Indian system ofmedicine like Ayurveda and Unani around 400 species are used by ruralcommunities in local health practices . The agromomical practice for growingfew medicinal plants have been developed and now loclized in many part of


our state medicinal plants are particularly important to the rural poor but someof the common medicinal herbs are also used by rural poor and rich people aslike amla, Neem, Palash, Bhringraj, Isobgol, Reetha, Brahmi, Babul, Bail,Dalchini, Jatropha, Jaiphal, Ratanjut, Nagkeshar etc. The world healthorgenization (WHO) estimated that nealry 80% of worlds population particularlyin Developing countries depend upon Traditional/Indigenous medicine fortheir primary health care needs. A major segment of These involve the use ofmedicinal plant and employed as a medicine in different civilization of theworld (Ved Prakash 1988) An urgent need was felt for scientific documentationof Indigenous Wedson Related to medicine virtues of Plants amongst theethnic groups.The Study Area- Madhya Pradesh is lies in the Central part of Indian continent.It forms a part of the central highland region of our country and inhabited by anumber of tribal and rural people. The present investigations have been carriedout among the remote places scattered over different district of the state. Thestudy sites were selected considering the distinct population of sites andpopulation of the flora. The physiography of the study area is very rough andhilly. The area is cylindrical in shape and the drainage pattern is of centripetaltype. Structure conformity, earth surface behaviour and geodynamic processas silting and erosion, consequently, tend to produce marked local climate ormicroclimate. Owning to its centripetal drainage pattern the area is subjectedto continuo’s erosion. The soil of the study area is mixed black, medium blackand brown sandy. It is rich in lime contents and potash but deficient in nitrogen,organic carbon and phosphorus.Methodology - During the course of present investigation following methodswere adopted:• The present investigation is based on Extensive survey and field work

of remote place scattered over different district of the state duringJanuary 2012 to December 2012.

• During the field trip Author met with the villagers of various age groupand interacted with them in details following standard etho-medicinalmanual (Jain and Goel 1995)

• The information about medicinal uses of plants was obtained from theTribal people, local inhabitants, Hakims and field workers.

• To the best of possibility after collection the specimen were identifiedwith the help of flower (Duthie, 1994, Hooker 1872-1897 and Chopra etal . 1980) The collected and identified specimens have been deposited inthe herbarium Botany Department , Govt. T.R.S. College Rewa.

• Confirmation of specimens were made with the hep of floristic literatures(Verma et al. 1985; Oommachan and Shrivastava, 1996)

Medicinal Plant used in the treatment of various disease and discorder.Ayurveda and other Indian literature mention the use of plants in Treatment


of various human ailments. our M.P. State is rich in floristic diversity andamong them, several thousand plants have been claimed to possess medicinalproperties. These plants are most effective and mostly used in the Treatmentof various disease and disorders which is mentioned in table.Status, Trade and commercial value of medicinal plants- An extensivefield study was done to gather infromation on Trade and commercial value ofthe species. It has been observed that a number of species have been sold bythe herbal traders. Out of these some species have got potential value and arecommercial Importance. Medicinal plants are mostly collected from theirnatural habitat and occasionally from house plantation. Trade Information ofthese species has been included in Table.Medicinal plant used in the Treatment of various disease and disorderwith status, trade and commercial value.

Botanical Name Local Name Family Parts Used Disease Cost (Rs/Kg.)

Acacia nilotica (L.) Del. Babool Mimosaceae Gum paste Burn 20/- Acacia catechu Willd. Khair Mimosaceae Bark Diarrhoea 150/- Achyranthes aspera L. Latjira Amaranthaceae Roasted seeds Bronchitis 15/- Acorus calamus L. Bach Araceae RhizomeJuice Cough &

Asthma 20/-

Aegle marmelos (L.) Corr. Bel Rutaceae Fruit pulp Gastric disorder 70/- Allium sativum L. Lahsun Liliaceae Fresh cloves URI 25/- Aloe vera Mill. Gheekumar Liliaceae Leaf pulp Burn &

Migraine 100/-

Amorphophallus bulbifer (Roxb.) Bl.

Suran Araceae Roasted corm Piles Digestive disorder

25/-

Andrographis paniculata Burm F.

Kalmegh Acanthaceae Plant decoction

Malaria, Jaundice

30/-

Argemone maxicana L. Ghamoya Papavaraceae Leafsap Ringworm 25/- Asparagus racemosus Satavar Liliacae Root powder Leucorrhoea

Debility 35/-

Azadirachta indica Juss. Neem Meliacae Leaf & Seed oil

Skin eruption 50/-

Bauhinia purpurea L. Kachnar Caesalpiniaceae Bark gargle Oral ulcer 40/- Bombax ceiba L. Semal Bombacaceae Bark sap Diarrhoea 30/- Butea monosperma Palas Fabaceae Bark extract Dysentery 25/- Calonyction muricatum G. Don.

Khotaliya Convolvulaceae Pedicle Seed Appetizer Purgative

30/-

Calotropis procera (L.) Br. Madar Asclepidiaceae Roasted flower

Asthma 20/-

Cassia fistula L. amaltas Caesalpiniaceae Fruit pulp Gastric disorder 20/- Cassia tora L. Chakura Caesalpiniaceae Leaf juice Ringwaorm 15/- Catharanthus roseus L.Don. Sadabahar Apocynaceae Leaf &

Flower Diabetes 15/-

Centella asiatica (L.) Urban. Brahmi Apiaceae Leaf extract Brain tonic 30/- Cilitoria ternata L. Aparajita Fabaceae Seed powder Purgative 20/- Cissus quardangularis Harjoor Viataceae Stem extract Bone fracture 35/- Convolvulus arvensis L. Shankhapuspi Convolvulaceae Plant extract Brain tonic 30/- Curcumba longa Vahl. Haldi Zingiberaceae Rhizome

powder Respiratory and Joint disorders

110/-

Cuscuta reflexa Roxb. Amarbel Convolvulaceae Plant paste Bone fracture 40/- Cynodon dactylon L. Doob Poaceae Plant extract Menstrual

trouble. 20/-

Datura metal L. Dhatura Solanaceae Leaf poultice Inflammation 30/- Eclipta prostata L. Ghamira Asteraceae Plant Juice Cut & Wounds 30/- Emblica afficinalis Gaertn. Amla Euphorbiaceae Fruit powder Gastric diorder 90/- Feronia limonica L. Kaitha Rutaceae Leaf past Boils 40/- Ficus benghalensis L. Bargad Moraceae Bark extract Malaria 20/- Ficus racemosa L. Umar Moraceae Unripe fruit diabetes 25/-


Ficus religosa L. Peepal Moraceae Bark decoction

Gonorrhoea 20/-

Gloriosa superba L. Kalihari Liliaaceae Tuber extract Child birth 35/- Jasminum humbile L. Chameli Oleaceae Leafchewing Oral ulcer 40/- Jatropha curcus L. Ratnjot Euphorbiaceae Seed Oil skin eruption 150/- Lawsonia alba Lamk. Mehandi Lythrceae Leaf poultice Feet sore 70/- Lepidium sativum L. Chansur Brassiaceae Seed Poultice Inflammation 60/- Madlnuca longifolia Roxb. Mahua Sapotaceae Roasted Asthma 40/- Mentha arvensis L. Pudina Lamiaceae Leaf Juice Gastric disorder 35/- Mimosa pudica L. Lajawanti Mimosaceae Leaf exdtract Piles 45/- Momordica charanthia L. Karela Cucurbitaceae Fruit powder Diabetes 30/- Moringa olecifera Lam. Munaga Morinaaceae Fruit pulp Appetizer 20/- Mucuna puriens Hk. Kemanch Fabaceae Seedpowder Night dreams 30/- Nigela sativa L. Karayal Rananculaceae Roasted seed Constipation 60/- Nyctanthes arbor-tristis Harsingar Nyctaginaceae Leaf

decoction Joint diseases 25/-

Occimum sanctium L. Tulsi Lamiaceae Leaf extract Cough & Fever 30/- Pandanus fascicularis Lamk. Kewara Pandanaceae Flower

powder Prickly heat 35/-

Rauwolfia serpentina L. sarpagandha Apocynaceae Root extract Blood pressure 40/- sapindus emerginata Ritha Sapindaceae Fruit pulp Hair shampoo 50/- Solanum nigrum L. Makoya solanaceae Plant sap Viral hepatitis 20/- Spilanthes calva DC. akarkara Asteraceae Plant extract Toothache 35/- Syzygium cumini (L.) Jamun Myrtaceae Seed powder Diabetes 30/- Tamarindus indica L. Imli Caesalpiniaceae Fruit pulp Laxative 35/- Terminilia chebula Retz. Harra Combertaceae Fruit powder Gastric disorder 80/- Terminilia arjuna W. & A. Arjun Combertaceae Bark

decoction Blood pressure 25/-

Terminilia bellerica Gaertn. Bahera Combertaceae Fruit powder Gastric disorder 70/- Tribulus terrestis L. Gokharu Zygophyllaceae Fruit powder Asthma

&Cough 60/-

Vereiveriza zizaniodes L. Khas Poaceae Root powder Prickly heart 20/- Summary and Conclusion- The present work carries the result of status

and scope of medicinal plants in Madhya Pradesh. It indicate the utilization ofplants for the treatment of several diseases and disorders. The Tribal andrural people of the study area are mostly depending on herbal medicine tocare various human oilments mostly medicinal plant parts are also concernedto prepare the drug. The present work included numerous valuable species ofmedicinal herb to care chronic disease.======================References-1. Chopra, R.N., Nayar, S.L. and Chopra, I.C. (1980) Glossary of Indian medicinal

plants. National Institute of science communication and information Resources(CSIR). New Delhi.

2. Duthie, J.E. (1994). Flora of Uppaer Gangetic plains and of the Adjacent Shivalikand Subhimalyan Tract. Botanical Survey of India, Culcutta, reprinted 1994.

3. Hooker J.D. (1872-1897). Flora of British India, 7 Vols. Reeve Co. Ltd. England.4. Jain, S.K. (1989). Medicinal plant . National Book Turst, New Delhi.5. Jain, S.K. and rao, R.R. (1987). a Hand Book of Field and Herbarium Methods.

today & Tomorrow, New Delhi.6. Jain S.K. and De Philipps, R.A. (1991). Medicinal Plants of India Reference

Publication, Algonac, M.I.7. Jain S.K. and Goel, A.K. (1995) Proforma in field work, pp. 142-159, In a Manual

of Ethnobotany, Jain, S.K. (Ed.) Scientific Publishers, Jodhpur.


Phytogeography Observations of Dehradun District

* Chhaya Singh** Satish Garkoti

*** H. C. Pande==========================================================Abstract- The paper deals with phytogeographical observations ofDehradun district where 10 different regions of India and its adjoiningareas were compared with the Dehradun district and it was found thatKumaon region shared maximum number of species with the study area isbeing shared by while Andaman & Nicobar Island showed minimumnumber of species. Phytogeographical study provides the information ofgeographical distribution and affinities of the flora with different area.It helps to reveal the floristic similarities between the areas involved, toidentify the centers of endemism and to re-assess the previousclassifications.==========================================================

===========================* Department of Life Sciences, Shri Guru Ram Rai Institute of Technology and

Sciences, Patel Nagar, Dehradun, Uttrakhand** Ministry of Environment and Forest, CGO Complex, New Delhi*** Botanical Survey of India, 192 Kaulagarh Road, Dehradun, Uttrakhand

Introduction- Phytogeographically the Himalaya have been variously dividedby different biogeographers Hooker, 1904; Clarke, 1898; Chatterjee 1940; Rao,1974; Rau ,1978; Mani, 1978; Rodgers and Panwar, 1988. Most of them havedivided Himalaya into Western Himalaya & Eastern Himalaya. The WesternHimalaya consist of 2 separate phytogeographic regions i.e. (i) KumaunHimalaya- Garhwal Himalaya sector (ii) North –west Himalaya whichcomprises of the Himachal Pradesh and J & K state. The Kumaun and Garhwalsectors constitute a unique habitat and have contributed to the great biologicaldiversity. The place of origin is affected by both latitudinal and attitudinally.Dehradun district part of Garhwal Himalaya is the region which housesnumerous Pteridophytic species. The phytogeographical affinities of theHimalayan flora have been discussed by several workers Meher-Homji, 1973;Gupta, 1964; Hara 1966; Meusel, 1971; Rau, 1974 and Rao, 1994. Thephytogeographical study provides the information of geographical distributionand affinities of the flora with different area. It helps to reveal the floristicsimilarities between the areas involved, to identify the centers of endemism


and to re-assess the previous classifications but the phytogeographical studyof fern and fern-allies still is not undertaken.Phyogeographical analysis- Being situated in the Himalayan region,Dehradun district shares a large number of species from surrounding areas.The account of 147 species of fern and fern-allies based on the collectionhoused in herbarium of Botanical Survey of India, Dehradun (BSD), ForestResearch Institute, Dehradun (DD), Central National Herbarium, Howarh(CAL) and earlier records mainly from Clarke,1880; Beddome, 1883, 1892;Dhir and Sood, 1981; Khullar, 1994, 2000; Khullar et.al.1982, 1987, 2005 andDixit, 1992; Martin 1909,Mehra 1939, Pande and Pande, 2002-2003;Stewart,1942; Singh 1993, 2000.The comparative study of fern and fern-allies of thestudy area with that of 10 different region of India and its adjoining areas islisted in Table-1

Species Phytogeographical regions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FERN-ALLIES Sellaginella adunca A.Br. ex Heiron

+ + + - - - - - - -

Selaginaella chrysocaules ( Hook. et. Grev.) Spring

+ + + + + - + - - +

Selaginella involens (Sw.) Spring - + + - + - + + - + Selaginella pallidissima Spring + + + - - - - - - + Selaginella subdiaphana (Wall. ex. Hook.et Grev.) Spring

+ + + + + - + - - +

Selaginella vaginata Spring - + + + + - + + - + Equisetum diffusum D.Don + - + + + - + - - + Equisteum ramosissimumDesf. + - + - + - - + - + Equisteum ramosissimum ssp. Debile (Roxb. ex Vauch.) Hauke.

+ - - + + - + - - -

FERNS Botrychium multifidum Gmelin) Rupr.

- + + - - - - - - +

Botrychium ternatum (Thunb.) Sw.

+ + + - + - - - - +

Botrychium lunaria (L.) Sw. - + + + - - - - - + Botrypus lanuginosus (Wall .ex Hook. et Grev.) Holub.

+ + + - + + + + - +

Ophioglossum petiolatum Hook. - + - - + - - - - - Ophioglossum reticulatum L. + + + + + + - - + + Osmunda claytonia L. - + + + + - - - - + Osmunda japonicaThunb. - + + + + + + - - + Osmunda regalis L. - + - - - - - - - - Loxogrammae involuta (D.Don) C.Presl.

+ + + + + - + - - +

Arthromeris wallichiana (Spreng.) Ching

+ + + - + + + - - +

Colysis elliptica (Thunb.) Ching + - - - - - - - - - Drynaria mollis Bedd. + + + - + - - - - + Drynaria propniqua (Wall. ex Mett.) Smith

- + + - + + - - - +


Drynaria propniqua (Wall. ex Mett.) Smith

- + + - + + - - - +

L. loriformis (Wall. ex. Mett.) Ching

+ - - - + + - - - +

L.nudus (Hook.) Ching + + + + + + + - - - L. oligolepidus (Baker) Ching + - + + + - + - - - L.pseudonudusChing - + - - - - - - - + L.scolopendrium(Ching) Mehra&Bir

- + - - - - - - - -

Microsorum membranecum (D.Don) Ching

+ + + + + + + + - +

Pichisermollia ebenipes (Hook.) Pic-Ser.

+ + + - + + - - - +

P. malacodon (Hook.) Pic.Ser. + + + - + - - - - + Selliguea oxyloba (Wall. et Kuntze) Pic-Ser.

+ + + - + + + - - +

P. stewartii (Bedd.) + + - - + - - - - + P. quasidivaritcata(Hayata) Pic-Ser.

- + - - - - - - - -

Polypodiumdiastrum argutum (Wall. ex. Hook.) Ching

- - - - + - - - - -

Polypodiodes amonea (Wall. ex Mett.) Ching

+ + + + + + + - - +

P. lachnopus (Wall. ex. Hook.) Ching

+ + + + + + + - - +

P. microrhizoma (C.B.Clarke ex Baker) Ching

+ + + + + + + - - +

Pyrrosia costata (Wall. ex C.Presl) Tagawa et K.Iwat.

+ + + + + + + - - +

P. flocculosa (D.Don) Ching - + + + + + + - - + P. lanceolata (L.) Farwell + + + - + + + - - + P. porosa (C. Presl.) Hovek - + + + + - - + - + Lygodium flexosum (L.) Sw. + + + + + + + + - + Lygodium japonicum (Thunb.) Sw.

+ + + + + + + - - +

Aleuritopteris leptolepis Fraser-Jenk.

- - - - - - - - - -

A. ancepsBlanf. + + + + + + - - - + A. bicolor (Roxb.) Fraser.-Jenk. + + + + + + - - - + A. formosona (Hayata) Tagwa - + + - - + - - - - A. dubia (Hope) Ching + + + + + + - - - + A. grisea (Blanf.) Panigrahi + + + + + + - - - + A. rufa (D.Don) Ching + + + + + + - - - + C. subvillosa (Hook.) Ching + + + + + + - - - + P.nitidula (Wall . ex Hook.) Baker

+ - - + + + - - - +

Onychium cryptogrammoides H. Christ

+ + + + + + - - - +

O. japonicum (Thunb.) Kunze. - + - - - - - - - - O. siliculosum (Desv.) C. Chr + + + + + + + + - + Hypolepis polypodioides (Bl.) Hook

+ - - - + + + - - -

Pteridium revolutum (Bl.) Nakai. + - + + + + + + - - Pteris biaurita L. + + + + + + + + + +


P. cretica L. + + + + + + + + - + P. dactylina Hook. - + + + + - - - - + P. multifidaPoiret. - + + - - - - - - - P. excelsa Gaud. + + + + + + - - - + P. aspericaulis Wall. ex J. Agardh - + + + + + - + - + P. stenophyllaWall.ex Hook. + + + + + + - - - + P. vittata L. + + + + + + + + + + Adiantum capillus-veneris L. + + + + + + + + - + A.edgeworthii Hook. + + + + + + - - - + A.incisum Forssk. + + + + + + + + - + A. lunulatum Burm. + + + + + + + + - + A.venustum D.Don + + + + + + - - - + Annogramma reichsteinii Fraser.-Jenk.

+ - + - - - - - - +

Coniogramme affinis Wall. exHeiron.

- + + + + + - - - -

C. pubescens Heiron. - + + + + + - + + + C. serrulata (Bl.) Fee. - - + + + + + + + + C. fraxinea (D.Don) Fee ex Diels + + + + + - + - - + C.intermedia Heiron + + + + + - - - - + Gymnopteris vestita (Wall. ex Moore) Underw.

+ + + + - - - - - -

Vittaria flexuosa Fee + + + - + + + - - + Ceratopteris thalictroides + + + - + + - - - - Marsilea minuta L. + + - + + + - - + - Crepidomanes insigne - + + - - - - - - - Dennstaedtia scabra Wall. ex T.Moore

+ + + - + + + - - +

Microlepia hirta(Kaulf) C. Presl - - - - - - - - + - Asplenium adiantum-nigrum L. + + - - - - - - - - A.ceterach L. - + - - - - - - - - A.dalhousiae Hook. + + + + + + - - - + A. ensiforme Wall. ex Hook.et Grev.

+ + + + + + + - - +

A. indicum Sledge + - + - + - + - - + A.lacinatum D.Don - - + + - + + - - + A. nesii H.Christ. + + + + - - - - - + A. tenuifolium D.Don + + - - - - - + - - A. trichomanes L. subsp. quadrivalens D.E. Meyer

+ - - + + - - - - -

A. unilateral Lamk. + + + - + + + - - + A. yunnanense Franch. - + + + - - - - - + Matteuccia orientalis (Hook.) Tev - + + - + + - - - + Woodsia elongata Hook. + + + - + - - - - + Athyrium aniospterum H.Christ. + + + - + + - - - + A. atkinsoni iBedd. - + + + + + + - - + A.attenuatum (Wall. ex C.B.Clarke) Tagawa

+ - + + - + - - - +

A.falcatum Bedd. + + + - + - + - - + A.fimbriatum T. Moore. + + + + + - - - - + A.foliolosum (Wall.) T. Moore ex Sim.

- + + + + - + - - +


A.mackinnoniorum (Hope) C. Chr.

+ + + + + - + - - +

A. micropterum Fraser-Jenk. - + + - + - - - - + A.pectinatum (Wall.ex Mett.) T. Moore.

+ + + + + - - - - +

A.rupicola (Edegw. ex Hope) C.Chr

+ + + + + - - - - +

A.schimperi Moug. ex fee’ + + + + + + - - - + A. setiferum C.Chr - + + - + - - - - + A. strigillosum (T. Moore ex Lowe) T. Moore ex Salom

+ + + + + + - - - +

Cystopteris dickieanaSim - + + + - + - - - + C.fragilis (L.) Bernh. + + + - + + + - - + Deparia allantodioides (Bedd.) M.Kato

- + + + + + - - - +

D.boryana (Willd.) M. Kato - + + + + + + - - + D.japonica (Thunb.exMurr.) M. Kato

- + + + - + - - - +

D. petersenii (Kunze) M. Kato - + + + - + - + - + Diplazium esculentum (Retz.) Sw. + + + + + + + + - + D.longifolium T.Moore - - + + + + - + - + D.maximum (D.Don) C.Chr - + + + + + + - - + D.spectabile (Wall.exMett) Ching + + + + + + + - - + Amilopteris prolifera (Retz.) Copel.

+ + + + + + + - - +

Christella appendiculata (C.Presl) Holtt.

+ + - - - - - - - -

C. arida (D.Don) Holtt. + + - + + + - - - + C.dentata (Forssk.) Brown. + + + + + + + + + + C.papilio (Hope) Holtt. + + + + + + - - + + Cyclogramma auriculata (J.Smith) Ching.

+ + - + + - + - - +

Glaphyropteridopsis erubescens (Wall.ex Hook.) Ching

+ + + + + + + - - +

Pronephrium nudatum (Roxb.) Holtt.

+ + + + + + + - - +

P.penangianum (Hook.) Haltt. + + + + - + - - - + Pseudocyclosorus canus (Baker) Holtt.

- + + + + + + - - +

P.tylodes (Kunze) Ching + + + + + + + + - + Pseudophegopteris levingei (C.B.Clarke) Ching.

+ - + + - + - - - +

P. pyrrhorachis (Kunze) Ching subsp. pyrrhorhacis.

+ - - - - - - + - -

P. pyrrhorhacis ssp. Distans Fraser.Jenk

- - + + + + - - - +

Stenogramma mollissima (Kunze) Fraser.Jenk

- + - - - - - + - -

Hypodematium crenatum (Forssk) Kuhn ssp. Crenatum

+ + + + + + - - - +

Peranema cyatheoides D.Don - + + - + + + - - + Cyrtomium caryotideum (Wall.ex Hook.et Greville) C.Presl.

+ + + + + + + - - +


Dryopteris barbigera (T. Moore ex Hook.) O.Kuntze

- + + + - + - - - +

D. blanfordii (Hope) C.Chr - + + - + + - - - + D. caroli-hopei Fraser.-Jenk - + + - + + - - - + D. chrysocoma (H.Christ) C.Chr + + + + + + - - - + D.cochleata (Ham.ex D.Don) C.Chr

+ + + + + + + + - +

D. juxtaposita H.Christ - + + + + + - + - + D. lepidopoda Hayata - + + + + + + - - + D. nigropaleacea (Fraser.-Jenk) Fraser.-Jenk

+ + + + - + + - - +

D. ramosa (Hope) C.Chr - + + + + + - - - + D. redactopinnata + + + - + + - - - + D. sparsa (Ham. ex D.Don) Kuntze

+ + + - + + - - - +

D.stewartii Fraser.Jenk + + + + - + - - - + D.subalcera H.Christ - + + - + - - - - + D. wallichiana (Spreng.) Hyland - + + - + + - - - + D. xanthomelas (H.Christ) C.Chr - + + + + + - - - + Polystichum discretum (D.Don) Smith

- + + + + + + - - +

P. lentum (D.Don) Moore + + + + + + + - - + P. longipaleatum H.Christ - + + - + - - - - + P. luctuosum (Kuntze) T. Moore - + - + - + - - - + P. mehrae Fraser.-Jenk. et Khullar - + + + - + - - - + P. neolobatum Nakai. - + + - + - - - - + P.nepalense (Spreng.) C.Chr - + + - + - - - - + P.obliquum (D.Don)T. Moore + + + + + + - - - + P. piceo-paleaceum Tagawa - + + + + + + + - + P.squarrosum (D.Don) Fee + + + + + + - + - + P.stimulans (Kunze ex Mett.) Bedd.

+ + + + + - - - - +

P.thomsonii (Hook f.) Bedd. - + + + + + - - - + P.yunnanense H. Christ - + - - - - - - - - Tectaria coadunata (Smith) C.Chr + + + + + + - + - + Nephrolepis auriculata (L.) Trimen

+ + + + + + + + - +

Oleandra wallichii (Hook.) C.Presl.

+ + + - + + + - - +

Araiostegia beddomei (Hope) Ching

- + + - + + - - - +

A.hookeri (T.Moore ex Bedd.) Ching

- + + - + - - - - +

A.pseudocystopteris (Kunze) Copel.

+ + + + + + - - - +

Leucostegia truncata D. Don + + + - + + - - - + Blechnum orientale L. - + + - - - - - - - Woodwardia biserrata C.Presl. + + + + + + - - - + Azolla pinnata L. - - + - - - - - -


The total number of common species of Kumaon region with Dehradundistrict is 142. It is due to altitudinal variation of the district, climatic condition,topography etc resembles to that of the region whereas that of Andaman andNicobar islands shares 9 species with that to the district as the region mainlysupports tropical type of climate, surrounded by shallow waters and maximumaltitude of the region varies up to 500m.

Thus from the above observation it can be concluded that the total numberof species common with the study area is being shared by Kumaon region i.e.80.6% while the minimum sharing is with Andaman & Nicobar island .i.e.5.10%Acknowledgements- The authors are thankful to Dr. Paramjit Singh, Director,Botanical Survey of India, Kolkata, and Prof. P. C. Pande, Botany Department,Kumaon University, D. B. S. Campus, Nainital for encouragement.======================References-1. Beddome, R. H. (1863-64) The Ferns of Southern India and Ceylon, 1-38, t.1-110,

1863; 39: 88, t.111-271(1864).Second ed. 1873.1-88, t.1-271.Gantz BrothersMadras.Reprint-Today & Tomorrow’s Printers Publishers, New Delhi, 1970.


2. Beddome, R. H. (1892) A Handbook to the Ferns of British India, Ceylon and MalayaPeninsula. Thacker Spink & Co., Calcutta

3. Bir, S.S., Satija, C.K., Vasudeva, S.M. and Goyal, P. (1983) The Pteridophytic flora ofmGarhwal Himalaya.Jugal Kishore & Co. Dehra Dun.

4. Clarke, C. B. (1880) A review of the ferns of Northen India.Trans. Linn. Soc. LondonII Bot., 1: 425-611.

5. Chatterjee, A. and Pakrashi, S.C (1991) The Treatise on Indian Medicinal PlantsVol 1-4 Publication and information Directorate, CSIR, New Delhi

6. Chandra, S. (2000) The Ferns of Ind ia (Enumeration, Synonyms &Distribution).International Book Distributors.Dehardun

7. Dhir, K.K. (1980) Ferns of North-Western Himalayas. BibliothecaPteridologicaJ.Cramer, Vaduz (Germani) 1: 1-158

8. Dhir, K.K. and Sood, A. (1981) Fern- Flora of Mussoorie Hills.BibliothecaPteridologicaJ.Cramer, Vaduz (Germany) 2: 1-99.

9. Dixit, R.D. (1984) A Census Indian Pteridophytic Flora of India IV.Bull. Bot. Surv.India, Howrah.

10. Dixit, R. D. and Kumar, R. (2002) Pteridophytes of Uttaranchal (A Checklist).BishenSingh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra Dun (India).

11. Gupta, R.K. (1964)The bio-climatic types of the Western Himalaya and their analogoustypes towards the mountain chain of the Alps and Pyrenes,. Indian For.90:557-577.

12. Hara, H.(ed).(1966) The flora of Eastern Himalaya, University of Tokyo, Japan.13. Hooker, J.D. (1904) A sketch of the flora of British India, London.Pp.5514. Khullar, S. P., Sharma, S. S. and Chaudhary, V. (1987) The Ferns of Garhwal- A

checklist In: Western HimalayaVol I (eds.) Y.P.S. Pangety, S.C.Joshi.GyanodoyaPrakashanNainital. Pp. 347-388.

15. Khullar, S.P., Sharma, S. S. and Paramjit, S. (1982) Observation on the Ferns ofChakrata Hills, U.P (North West Himalayas) Proc. Indian Sci. Congr.,69(III): 67.

16. Mani, M.S. (1968), (1973), (1982) General Entomology. Oxford & IBH PublishingCompany, New Delhi, Bombay, Calcutta (India).

17. Martin, J. (1909) List of Ferns in and around MussoorieJ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., 19:179-183.

18. Mehra, P.N. (1939) Ferns of Mussoorie. Punjab Univ. Publ., Lahore (India) Pp. 1-29.19. Meher-Homji, V.M. (1973) Phytogeography of Indian Sub-continent. In: Mishra,K.C.

(ed) Progress of Plant Ecology in India, Pp-9-33.20. Pande, H.C. and Pande, P.C. (2003) An Illustrated fern flora of the Kumaon Himalaya

Vol.I, Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra Dun (India).21. PichiSermolli, R. E. G. (1977) TentamenPteridophytorum genera in

taxonomicumordinemredigendiWebbia, 31(2): 313-512.22. Rau, M. A. (1961) Flowering Plants and Ferns of north Garhwal U.P., India.Bull. Bot.

Surv. India.3&4: 215-251.23. Rau, M. A. (1974) Vegetation and Phytogeography of Himalaya. In:Mani,M.S.

(ed.)Ecology &Biogeography in India.Pp-247-280 Junk. The Hague24. Rodgers, W.A and H.S. Panwar. (1988) Planning Wildlife Protected areas Network in

India.Vol.1-2.Wildlife Institute of India, Dehradun.25. Singh, J.S and S.P. Singh (1987) Vegetation of the Himalaya.Bot.Review 53:80-9226. Stewart, R. R. (1942) The ferns of Mussoorie and Dehra Dun (India) 150th Anniv. Vol.

Roy. Bot. Gadn. Calcutta, 2: 159-170.

Documents

research journal of social and life science volume-14-1